31B-252 (10) Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
J. Conductors for 13.8KV and 480V systems shall have the phases identified by brown,
orange and yellow tape. Conductors for 2.4KV and 208V systems shall have the phases
identified by black, blue and red tape 411%
3.08 TESTING
AIR
A. Balancing Loads:
1. Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load is distributed Aft,
equally between each line and neutral to within ten percent. Branch circuits shall
be balanced on their own panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main '"
distribution panel. .,
B. Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section
7.13. '""
C. Perform continuity testing of the grounding and bonding system in accordance with IEEE Aft,
142.
D. When improper grounding is found on receptacles, check receptacles in entire project and ..
correct. Perform retest.
3.09 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including, but not limited to the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safmg at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway AR.
walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, .�
machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors,
Inc. or Architect- Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the
required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
dok
C. Seal Compound: At "poke- through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. .■
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes. onk
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress
and friction fit fire sating and use attachment clips where necessary. 1*,
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with .,
sealing compound.
END OF SECTION 16000
16000 -30
Oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
40 , must be in first -class operating order and in perfect condition as to finish, etc. Check for
proper operation and appearance, alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses,
louvers, lamps and other light controlling or modifying appurtenances.
3.05 OUTLET AND JUNCTION 4010. A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18" above finished
floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except at locations where wall
mounted equipment precludes this mounting height. At such locations, receptacle height
Auk shall be as directed by the Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor,
unless aligned above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall
Aok
check with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences.
lk B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet locations, shall be of the
threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw -on cover and gasket.
C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therein
without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor
insulation.
D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges are 1/4" back of
fmished surface.
E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall be provided to
support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture.
oft F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used shall be provided with
A
covers.
oft 3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or
,__ not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the
Electrical Contractor and be included in his bid.
dok
3.07 NAMEPLATE AND LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Installation of nameplates and labels identifying devices shall be provided after
completion of painting.
,_ B. Nameplates and labels shall be installed parallel to equipment lines.
C. Nameplates shall be provided for each electrical distribution and control equipment
enclosure with corrosive - resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive unless otherwise
noted. Nameplates for each control panel and for major control components shall be
located outside panel with corrosive - resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
D. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations.
Secure nameplate to outside surface of door on surface mounted panelboards located in
electrical rooms and mechanical spaces.
w E. Provide embossed adhesive tape labels with 3/16 inch white letters on black background
for identification of individual control device stations. Labels shall be installed with for
permanent adhesion and sealed with clear lacquer.
dok F. Provide cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire marker for each conductor at
panelboard gutters, pull boxes, junction boxes, and each load connection. The wire
markers shall contain the following information:
dik G. Provide branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits.
H. Provide control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams.
Aft
I. Provide conduit marker for each conduit having a total length exceeding 20 feet. The
markers shall be spaced 20 feet on center. Color of markers shall be as follows:
w a. Blue marker for Low Voltage Signal and Data Systems.
b. Yellow marker for 208 Volt Systems.
oak
'"'" 16000 - 29
.w
,,.
Oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS .w
Smith College, Northampton, MA
and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems installed
under this Contract.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and '"`
equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of eft
connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved
termination where required, conforming with the Massachusetts Electrical Code.
D. A minimum #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each
length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and
other equipment components for continuity. The equipment ground conductor shall be ""
sized for the largest circuit contained in the conduit or enclosure. Positive ground 410.
connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, motor
and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each.
E. Modify existing grounding system to maintain continuity to accommodate renovations. o f
F. Extend existing grounding system using materials and methods compatible with existing
electrical installations, or as specified. ...
G. Remove paint, mill oils, and any other surface contaminants at connection points.
H. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment.
w
3.03 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS ..�
A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more
than the equivalent of three 90 bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary,
the Electrical Contractor shall provide suitable pull boxes.
B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably
protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. ••
C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to
Alb
junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on conduit
1 -1/4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall be provided at all panel connections. ..a,
D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of flexible steel conduit
Atk
to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with
cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ,wc,
ceiling mounted lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures.
3.04 LIGHTING FIXTURES Aft
A. Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics. Lighting
fixtures shall not be installed where finished coat of paint has been applied to ceiling and "'
walls until paint is thoroughly dry. 41116,
B. Lighting fixtures in equipment rooms shall not be installed until after all piping and
ductwork is in place. Lighting fixtures layout shown on the Drawings is typical layout,
but may be modified to provide adequate lighting of the equipment space according to
final construction conditions. Any relocation of fixtures due to duct or piping
interference shall be as directed by the Architect, at no expense to the Owner.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for proper coordination of all lighting ,,,
fixture locations. Provide support for all fixtures mounted on or recessed in hung ceiling.
He shall confer with Ceiling Contractor and Heating and Ventilating Contractor to co- "'`
ordinate lighting system with other trades. ma.
D. Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fixture outlet box where the
fixture does not provide a suitable cover.
E. Fixtures located on exterior of building shall be installed with cadmium- plated brass
screws and gasketed.
F. All pendant type fixtures in the same room shall be installed at a uniform height from the
floor and shall hang plumb unless otherwise specified.
G. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting equipment, they
Aik
16000 - 28
m Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
,s4 available in either a Style Y or Style Z supervision version. In the Style Y
version, the wiring will be supervised by an end of line device. In the Style Z
version, the wiring will be looped back and connected to the module to allow
continual operation of the controlled devices even if the wiring sustains a single
break. Style Y and/or Style Z addressable devices will be provided. These
ook interface modules will communicate the supervised wiring status (normal,
trouble) to the fire alarm control panel and will receive a command to transfer the
relay from the fire alarm control panel.
7. The addressable interface module shall be supervised and uniquely identified by
the control panel. Device identification shall be transmitted to the control panel
for processing according to the program instructions. Should the interface
!ak module become non operational, tampered with, or removed, a discrete trouble
signal, unique to the device, shall be transmitted to, and annunciated at, the
control panel.
w► 8. The addressable interface module shall be capable of being programmed for its
"address" location on the addressable device signaling line circuit. The interface
module shall be compatible with addressable manual stations and addressable
detectors on the same addressable circuit.
ai. J. All devices will be supervised for trouble conditions. The system control panel will be
capable of indicating the type of trouble condition (open, short, device missing/failed).
Should a device fail, it will not hinder the operation of other system devices. Should a
problem occur on a particular wire run, it will not affect other wire runs.
ink PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner
as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the
correctness of same. No allowance will be made for differences between actual
measurements and those shown on plans.
r► C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of other trades
might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified.
D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only and the runs of
feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the
plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has
been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The
entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical Code
,aik and local inspection authorities.
E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and apparatus, shall be
w made accessible.
F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise specified.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non - current carrying metallic
service equipment, distribution panels, lighting panelboards, switch and starter
enclosures, motor frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non - current
carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding
Aft
conductor in non - metallic raceways and grounded (neutral) conductor of the wiring
system shall be grounded per the Massachusetts Electrical Code. The ground connection
mw shall be made at the main service equipment.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for the grounding
Atok
_ 16000 -27
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
or control modules, which may be activated or "in alarm" simultaneously. The �.►
addressable manual station shall be Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. listed.
3. The addressable smoke sensors shall be of the photoelectric type and shall .w
communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control panel. The .w
addressable temperature sensors shall sense within a temperature range of 32 °F to
158 °F. The control panel will be capable of sensing either a set point of 135 °F,
or a rate -of -rise of 20 °F per minute for fire sensing. For utility sensing, a set
point may be chosen within the stated range and the control panel programming ..
will be capable of using that information to determine specific response such as +*+
warning of failure of local temperature controls. The sensors shall be listed to
UL Standard 268 and shall be documented as compatible with the control
equipment to which they are connected. The sensors shall be listed for both
ceiling and wall mount applications. Each sensor base shall contain an LED that
will flash each time it is scanned by the control panel. When the control panel
determines that a sensor is in the alarm or a trouble condition, the control panel
shall command the LED on that sensor's base to turn on steady indicating the
abnormal condition. Sensors which do not provide a visible indication of an —
abnormal condition at the sensor location shall not be acceptable. Each sensor
shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing
at the sensor location. Each sensor shall be scanned by the control panel for its 410"
• type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. The
control panel shall operate with the installed device but shall initiate a "Wrong
Device" trouble condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed ..
sensor type is changed. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false
alarms caused by EMI and RFI.
4. Addressable Interface Modules) shall be used for monitoring of waterflow, valve
tamper, non addressable detectors, and for control of evacuation indicating
appliances and AHU systems.
a. An addressable interface module shall be provided for interfacing
normally open direct contact devices to an addressable signaling line
circuit.
b. Addressable interface modules shall be capable of mounting in a
standard electric outlet box. Interface modules will include cover plates
to allow surface or flush mounting. interface modules will receive their
24VDC power from a separate two wire pair running from an appropriate ..
power supply.
c. There shall be two types of devices:
(1) Type 1: Monitor Module �**
(2) Type 2: Control Module .w
5. For Type 1 Interface Modules: For conventional 2 wire smoke detector and/or
contact device monitoring with Style B or Style D NFPA 72 initiating device afs
circuit wiring supervision. This type of addressable device module will provide
power to, and monitor the status of a zone consisting of conventional 2 wire
smoke detectors and/or N/O contact devices as specified elsewhere. The ••b
supervision of the initiating device circuit wiring will be Style B and/or Style D.
These interface modules will communicate the zone's status (normal, alarm,
trouble) to the control panel. �.
6. For Type 2 above: For alarm notification appliances, and other device control
with Style Y or Style Z wiring supervision. This type of addressable device will "-
provide double pole double throw relay switching that can be used to connect
through easily replaceable 2 amp fuses: a circuit of alarm notification appliances
to a power source; or activate a variety of controlled devices. The module will be s
16000 - 26
O
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
F. Supervision
1. The system shall contain Class "B" independently supervised initiation circuits so
that a fault in any one zone shall not affect any other zone. The alarm activation
of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any
other initiation circuit.
2. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete panel readout to
indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit.
G. Power Requirements
1. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire
system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a
period of sixty (60) hours with 10 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this
period.
2. The Contractor shall submit, along with Shop Drawings, complete battery
calculations of the modified system circuits.
J
H. Peripheral Devices
di* 1. Alarm speakers shall be operated by 24 VDC. Each speaker assembly shall
include separate wire leads for in/out wiring for each leg of the associated signal
circuit. T- tapping of signal device conductors to signal circuit conductors shall
Ask NOT be accepted. The alarm horns shall be suitable for rear mounting.
2. Visual indicating appliances shall be comprised of a Xenon flashtube and be
entirely solid state. These devices shall be UL listed and be capable of either
ceiling or wall mounting. The LEXAN lens shall be pyramidal in shape to allow
�w► better visibility. Visual units shall be of the stand alone type or be incorporated
as part of the (horn, bell) unit.
__ 3. Audio/Visual units shall provide a common enclosure for the fire alarm audible
and visual alarm devices. The housing shall be designed to accommodate
speakers. The unit shall be complete with a tamper resistant, Pyramidal shaped
lexan lens with "Fire" lettering visible from a 180° field of view. The front panel
or bezel, which is constructed of UL Listed Noryl, may be inverted so that the
lens is below the audible device. Integral Xenon strobe shall provide a minimum
light output of 7.5 candela/seconds at 24VDC at a 45 flashes per minute rate.
Xenon strobes shall provide a 4 wire connection to insure properly supervised
in/out system connection. Unit shall be complete with all mounting hardware
+w. including backbox. Audio /visual unit shall be UL Listed for its intended
4
purpose. The visual intensity shall be field adjustable via integral intensity
selector switch.
I. Addressable Device Types
1. Thermal detector heads must be UL listed. They will be a combination rate of
rise and fixed temperature (135 °F) type, automatically restorable.
2. Addressable pull stations will contain electronics that communicate the station's
status (alarm, normal) to the control panel over two wires which also provide
power to the pull station. The address will be set on each station. The stations
will be manufactured from high impact red Lexan. Lettering will be raised and
painted white. The station will mechanically latch upon operation and remain so
until manually reset by opening with a key common to all system locks. Pull
stations will be single action. The front of the station is to be hinged to a back-
plate assembly and must be opened with a key to reset the station. The key shall
'ak be common with the control panel. Stations which use alien wrenches or special
tools to reset, will not be accepted. The addressable manual station shall be
capable of field programming of its "address" location on an addressable
signaling line circuit. There shall be no limit to the number of stations, detectors,
4►
16000 -25
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS , ,,, R
Smith College, Northampton, MA
equipment for at least ten (10) years, and has a fully equipped service .�
organization within fifty (50) miles of the installation.
3. All control equipment must have transient protection devices to comply with ..r
UL864 requirements. —
D. Detector Operation
1. Smoke sensors shall be smoke density measuring devices having no self
contained alarm set point (fixed threshold). The alarm decision for each sensor
shall be determined by the control panel. The control panel shall determine the ..
condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored values.
2. The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs
cleaning. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined level, a
"DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be audibly and visibly indicated at the �.
control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base
shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a "DIRTY
SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second Amk
predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition
shall be indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. To prevent false 411/4
alarms, these "DIRTY" conditions shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke ,—
obscuration necessary for system activation.
E. Alarm Sequence
1. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual .w
station or automatic detection device is to be as follows:
a. All audible alarm notification appliances shall sound a uniform code 3
temporal pattern fire alarm signal until silenced by the alarm silence 4 111"
switch at the control panel or the remote annunciator.
b. All visible alarm notification appliances (Xenon Strobes) shall display a
uniform code 3 temporal pattern until extinguished by the Alarm Silence 4444
Switch.
c. A supervised signal to notify the 24 hour manned monitoring station is to '""
be activated.
d. Duct type smoke detectors shall transmit an alarm signal and shall shut
down their associated air handling unit. *"R
e. An alarm is to be displayed on the panel display. The alarm LED shall -
flash on the control panel and the remote annunciator until the alarm has
been acknowledged at the control panel or the remote annunciator. Once
acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm ..1.
received from another zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm
LED on the control panel and the panel display shall show the new alarm ..
information. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel
and the remote annunciator until acknowledged.
f. All doors normally held open by door control devices shall be released.
See Hardware Schedules and Specifications for quantities and locations. a.
g. The fire alarm signal shall be transmitted to the 24 hour manned
monitoring station via the existing radio master box. „R
2. A manual evacuation switch shall be provided to operate the systems alarm
notification appliances. Other control circuits shall not be activated. However, a
true alarm shall be processed as described previously.
3. Activation of an auxiliary bypass switch shall override the automatic functions
either selectively or throughout the system.
4. Alarm and trouble conditions shall be immediately displayed on the control panel ..w
front alphanumeric display. If more alarms or troubles are in the system, the
operator may scroll to display new alarms. '
Ask
16000 - 24 '''
AIR
..R
w%
w Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
,,., 864 requirements.
a. Isolated Loop Circuit Protector (ILCP): Furnish and install an isolated
loop circuit protection device on all fire alarm circuits which extend
beyond the building by either aerial, underground or other methods
(walways, bridges or other above ground connectors).
b. The ILCP shall be located as close as practical to the point at which the
circuits leave or enter the building. The grounding conductor shall be a
No. 12 AWG wire having a maximum length of 28 feet and connected to
a unified ground per the Massachusetts Electric Code.
5. Circuiting Guidelines. Each initiating device and indicating circuit shall be
electronically supervised and individually addressable. All wiring shall match
existing conventions as follows:
a. Individual Zone Addressable Modules shall be used to monitor status
conditions from any related systems or conventional devices.
b. Zone Addressable control Modules or relays shall provide auxiliary
control functions.
c. Addressable loop wiring shall support all devices shown and allow for a
minimum of 25% spare capacity, and be wired in a Class A, Style 6
fashion.
d. As a minimum, power supplies, amplifiers and visual notification
appliance circuits shall operate all devices shown plus 25% spare
capacity. Speaker and Strobe Circuits shall be wired in a Class B, Style
Y fashion.
6. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, initiation circuits shall be
individually configurable on -site to provide either alarm/trouble operation, alarm
' only, trouble only, current limited alarm, no alarm, normally closed device
monitoring, a non latching circuit or a alarm verification circuit. Notification
appliance circuits shall be individually configurable on -site to provide, upon
activation, a fast march time, slow march time, temporal code, PNIS code or a
master code until deactivated or reset upon any output circuit.
7. All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard product of a single
manufacturer and shall display the manufacturer's name on each component.
444 B. Scope and Related Documents
1. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of
4 all labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations in connection
with the additions and modifications the Fire Alarm System as shown on the
Drawings and as herein specified.
2. The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections ofNFPA 72,
Local Code Requirements and Massachusetts Electrical Code with particular
attention to Article 760.
3. The fire alarm equipment shall be of the same manufacturer as the building's
existing fire alarm system.
C. Quality Assurance
__ 1. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a
SINGLE fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the "U.L." label. All
+4. control equipment is to be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control
unit. Partial listing is not acceptable. The existing fire alarm control panel is a
Notifier addressable control panel.
2. The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification is
to be provided by a manufacturer, independent dealer, or distributors who have
oft
been engaged in production and installation of this type (software driven) of
16000 - 23
apev
A.
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
between ties to 1', and provide circuit and conductor identification at least once „®
in each enclosure.
7. Provide ample service loops at each termination so that plates, panels, and
equipment can be unmounted for service and inspection.
Q. Acceptance Testing
1. Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner
during a period designated by the Owner. The period of time required for
acceptance testing is two (2) working days. Contractor shall furnish a minimum
of one (1) technician for the acceptance testing period. This area shall be ..,
completed with all furnishings ready for occupancy. .w
2. Make additional mechanical and electrical adjustments within the scope of the
work and which are deemed necessary by the Architect or Owner as a result of oak
the acceptance tests. .�.
R. System Documentation:
1. Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance manuals, neatly
bound as outlined in this Specification.
2. Manual to include:
a. system block diagram with all input/output terminations and patch points .0
identified.
b. A listing of the As -built cabling and components installed.
c. A record of the test results.
d. Formalized As -built Drawings indicating the physical cable plant,
component and node locations.
e. A topology diagram depicting the network configuration for Owner's ,—
reference when additions, changes, or modifications are made to the
original design.
S. Removal of Existing Communication lines.
1. The contractor shall remove telecommunication outlets from existing locations in
area under demolition. 40
2. The contractor shall remove the entire home run from outlet location to the head
end equipment where existing tele /data jacks are to be removed.
•
2.13 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. General Requirements:
1. The system modifications and installation shall conform to the following 40 .
standards:
a. All equipment shall be UL listed for it's intended purpose, including UL 4111s,
864 (UOJZ, UOXX, UOQY), 1480 and 1971. .w.
b. Latest editions of NFPA standards 70, 72, 90A, 92A, and 101. 4..
c. Current State Building Code.
d. The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). ,.k
e. All requirements of all local authorities having jurisdiction. __
2. The system is supported by standby batteries. In the event of a loss of primary
power, batteries shall support each system for 24 hours of full supervisory 40.
operation followed by 15 minutes of alarm. Batteries to be sized for 25% spare
00
capacity of existing and added devices.
3. All equipment shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be .�.
designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials and accessories
covered by these requirements shall be provided by a single manufacturer, or if
provided by different manufacturers recognized as compatible by both 00
manufacturers.
4. All control equipment must have transient protection devices to comply with UL ..e
16000 - 22
w,.
oft Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
oft
oft 1. Labeling shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA -606 -A standards.
2. Label each cable with permanent self - adhesive label with minimum, 1/8 in. high
oft characters, in the following locations:
oft a. Inside receptacle box at the work area.
b. Behind the communication closet patch panel or punch block.
3. Use labels on face of data patch panels. Provide facility assignment records in a
oft protective cover at each telecommunications closet location that is specific to the
facilities terminated therein.
of 4. Use color -coded labels for each termination field that conforms to
ANSI/TIA/EIA -606 -A standard color codes for termination blocks.
oft
5. Labels shall be machine - printed. Hand - lettered labels shall not be acceptable.
oft 6. Label cables, outlets, patch panels, and punch blocks with room number in which
outlet is located, followed by a single letter suffix to indicate particular outlet
oft
within room, i.e., S2107A, S2107B. Indicate riser cables by an R then pair or
oft cable number.
N. Field Quality Control
oft
1. Employ a Job Superintendent or Project Manager during the course of the
oft installation to provide co- ordination of the work of the Division and of other
trades and to provide technical information when requested by other trades. This
AP. person shall be responsible for all quality control during installation, equipment
i, set -up and testing.
O. General Co- ordination (Date and Telephone Wiring)
o 1. Entire system shall conform completely with pertinent codes, laws, ordinances,
oft regulations, standards, criteria, or other requirements, including, but not limited
to, structural support, fire rating and health/safety requirements regarding all
items. Such conformity shall have precedence over this Specification.
,f, 2. Secure equipment firmly in place, including boxes, conduit, and cables. Provide
fastenings and supports adequate to support loads.
o 3. Install work neatly, with boxes, equipment, etc., plumb and square. Adjust
oft layout as necessary to preserve symmetry and aesthetics. Install equipment to
provide maximum safety to future operators.
a►. 4. Clearly, logically, and permanently mark connectors, jacks, cables, and cable
terminations.
P. Wiring
+oft, 1. Provide wire, conduits, and raceways according to standard broadcast practices.
Do not exceed 30% fill in conduit.
oft
2. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damage to cables and equipment.
3. Wiring shall not rest on ceiling material nor touch any heat sources. Conduits
exposed to physical abuse shall be run in RSC, 3/4" minimum.
oft
4. Install all data wire and cable. Ensure proper..
oft a. Pulling tensions.
b. Quantities.
oft
c. Types.
oft d. Lengths.
e. Routing.
oft
f. Wire group separation.
g. Identification.
h. radius
'"` 5. Splicing of cables is not permitted between terminations at specified equipment.
oft 6. Form, in a neat and orderly manner, all conductors in enclosures and boxes,
wireways and wiring troughs, providing circuit and conductor identification. Tie
as required using Velcro wraps of appropriate size and type. Limit spacing
oft
oft 16000 - 21
As
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Aftw
(1) Data Outlet - 8 -pin modular, category 6, unkeyed, black, pinned Aft
to either T568 (A or B) standards.
(2) Voice Outlet - 8 -pin modular, category 3, unkeyed, ivory, pinned "*
to either T568 (A or B) standards. Aft
3. Data Jack Modules
a. Eight position modules shall be used in all work areas and modular patch Aft
panels and shall meet the TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2 -1 Category 6 standard.
Aft
Modules shall be tested and approved for Category 6 ETL component
compliance. The module termination to 4 pair 24 — 22 AWG 100 ohm
solid unshielded twisted pair cable shall be accomplished by use of a
oft
forward motion termination cap and shall not require the use of a
punchdown tool. All modules shall be 100% tested for NEXT
performance. The termination cap shall be color coded for T568A and
AIR
T568B wiring schemes.
J. Installation of Data and Telephone Cabling .w0.
1. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions to comply with governing regulations and industry standards oft
applicable to the work and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. Aft
a. Contractor shall rigidly adhere to manufacturer's published specifications
for pulling tension, minimum bend radii, and sidewall pressure when oft
installing all cables. Aft
2. Arrange and mount all equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer and Owner. #111k
3. Installation shall conform to the following basic guidelines: .,
a. Use of approved wire, cable, and wiring devices.
b. Neat and uncluttered wire termination.
4. Provide fire stopping for electrical penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, ,
and other partitions of building construction.
5. Where existing cables (outlets) are being relocated to an adjacent wall, Aft
Contractor shall cut off connector and pull cable to new outlet box location. Pull Aft
and label as specified.
K. Testing of Data Cables Aft
1. Every cabling link in the installation shall be tested in accordance with the field
test specifications defined in ANSI /TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2 -1 "Transmission
Performance Specifications for 4 -pair 10052 Category 6 Cabling ". Aft.
2. The installed twisted -pair horizontal links shall be tested from the IDF in the o ,,
telecommunications room to the telecommunication wall outlet in the work area
against the "Permanent Link" performance limits specification as defined in the Aft
ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2 -1 standard.
3. Any failing link must be diagnosed and corrected. The corrective action shall be oft
followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link meets the performance .wry
requirements. ...
L. Grounding
1. All equipment racks, housings, and raceways shall be grounded. oft
2. Data system shall contain a single point ground. All cabinets, racks, etc. shall be ..
connected to a single point ground which, in turn, will be connected to the
grounding systems conductors in that area.
3. Grounding shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA- 607(A) - Commercial Building
Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, 2008
Massachusetts Electrical Code ®, ANSI/NECA/BICSI -568 and manufacturer's ..R,
grounding requirements as minimum. ..
M. Labeling
oft
16000 - 20
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
support load.
7. A supporting assembly, which is intended to be mounted on an outlet box, will
be designed to accommodate mounting features on four -inch boxes, three inch
plaster rings, and fixture studs.
8. Each surface mounted fluorescent individual or continuous row of fixtures shall
be attached to a seismic resistant ceiling support system. Fixture support devices
shall be locking type scissor clamp, or a full loop band, which will securely
oak
attach to the ceiling support.
_.► 9. Fixtures attached to the underside of a structural slab shall be properly anchored
to the slab at each corner of the fixture.
10. Each wall mounted emergency light unit shall be secured in a manner to hold the
unit in place during a seismic disturbance.
11. Suspension systems for lighting fixtures that are free to swing a minimum of 45°
from the vertical in all directions are acceptable if a passing shaking table test
++414 approved by the using agency is conducted and will withstand without failure a
force of not less than four times its own weight.
Amk 2.12 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
A. The building's internal telephone /data system service is existing, and will undergo minor
modifications to accommodate the new telephone & data location layout as shown on the
Drawings and directed by the Owner.
B. Existing head end equipment, including fiber optic data and telephone equipment
__ mounted on existing backboard in basement, shall be sealed off with plastic covering
44, during construction to avoid dust intrusion as much as practicable. Equipment shall be
dismounted from wall during construction and reinstalled into new data closet where
`"" shown on the drawings. New closet location does not require significant rewiring of
411% equipment, but contractor will route and secure existing and new conductors for a neat
and workman like finish appearance.
Atk C. New tele /data outlet locations, where shown on Drawings, shall consist of standard size
4111 outlet box, and cover plates (smooth phenolic ivory), with 3 ports; (1) for data, (1) for
telephone, and (1) for future expansion.
er►, D. The work in this Section shall . be performed by a Contractor who has been pre - qualified
by the College.
E. Work of this Section shall include the installation, termination, and testing of all data and
4 telephone wiring from the outlets indicated on the Contract Drawings to the Basement
Data/Telephone Room as indicated on the Drawings.
F. Each Telephone/Data outlet drop shall consist of one (1) data and one (1) voice drop, run
from each outlet location to the Head end equipment located in the Telephone/Data
Closet.
G. All data runs must be installed without cross - connects between wall jack and patch panel
terminations in Telephone Room.
H. Voice runs may be cross connected on 110 blocks.
I. Data cabling shall be Category 6, unshielded twisted pair, (UTP), with a blue sheath as
described in ANSI/TIA/EIA -606 -A
1. Solid copper, 24 AWG, 100 ohm balanced twisted -pair (UTP) Category 6 cables
with four individually twisted- pairs, which meet or exceed the mechanical and
dok transmission performance specifications in ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2 -1 up to 250
MHz.
404 2. Wall Plates and Connectors
+414 a. Single -gang faceplate with two openings containing the following
devices:
16000 - 19
oak
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH ..
between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam
all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
m. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist ..
seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide
all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel
assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two
through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly
shall have anchorage pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state ..tk
of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic
Ai
brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason `
Industries, Inc.
n. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not
from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud R.
anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge Allto
ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report
number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable
loads. Drill -in stud wedge anchors shall be type SAS as manufactured ..,,,
by Mason Industries or equal.
o. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or "'
equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors
shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety
shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge
anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O ,.e
Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill -in female
wedge anchors shall be type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries
or equal.
p. Housekeeping pad anchors shall consist of a ductile iron casting that is
tapered and hexagonal, smaller at its base than at its top. The upper
portion shall have holes for rebar to pass through. The anchor shall be ,,
continuously threaded from top to bottom for the attachment of
soleplates. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be attached to the structural Aft
slab using a stud wedge anchor. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be type ,
HPA and stud wedge anchor shall be type SAS both as manufactured by
Mason Industries or equal. ,w.
K. Lighting Fixtures: ....
1. Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the Standard for Safety UL -57.
2. Provide a lateral bracing system. ..
3. Fixture supports will employ materials, which are suitable for the purpose. ..
4. Loop and hook or swivel hanger assemblies for pendant fixtures shall be filled
with a restraining device to hold the stem in the support position during .►
earthquake motions.
5. Pendant supported fluorescent fixtures shall also be provided with a flexible '`
hanger device at the attachment to the fixture channel to preclude breaking of the ...
support. The motion of swivels or hinged joints shall not cause sharp bends in
conductors or damage to insulation. '
6. Each recessed fluorescent individual or continuous row of fixtures shall be .N,
supported by a seismic resistant suspended ceiling support system, and shall be
fastened thereto at each corner of the fixture; or shall be provided with fixture
support wired attached to the building structural members using two wires for ...,
individual fixtures and one wire per unit of continuous row fixtures. These
support wires (min. No. 12 ga wire) will be capable of supporting four times the
Awk
16000 - 18 '
ANIK
oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
dek
h. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections
connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element.
Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum
— natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst
pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum
.► operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either the
arw building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with
three (3)- leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1/8 in.
Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests
Ark performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be
Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
w . Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as described
in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops
ARK to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing
shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed
after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum
n clearance of 1.2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and
between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of
, contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all
41k, seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR -MT as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
oft j. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 -1/4 in.
thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general
characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced
oik neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup 41111k have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain
stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers nor the
, neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and
,_ hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger
rod to swing through a 30° arc from side to side before contacting the rod
bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger
aft Drawing showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
aok k. Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be pre- compressed
46, and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop
to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation.
aft The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the
+w► spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its
full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale.
Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree
capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
aft 1. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables
Ask sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and
arranged to provide all - directional restraint. Cable end connections shall
w, be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two
(2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not
be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an
Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
California verifying the maximum certified Load ratings. Cable
lwa
16000 - 17
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS —
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Auk
during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall
oh.
be compounded to bridge - bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have
an Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of ."
California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load
ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc. *�*
c. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by
assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel ,.
sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the
neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over
the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers
the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act .•►
as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel
isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the
ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be
Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
d. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The
bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal
to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured
by Mason Industries, Inc. Ask
e. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any . .
housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 in. neoprene
acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All '
mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the as.
equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed
height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum
additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals ,,,,,
shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and
solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by ""`
Mason Industries, Inc. 41111.
f. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in
Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to
prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall
40
serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after
adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum
clearance of 1/2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and ..
between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring
action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since
housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an internal ..
isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces.
Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre- approval "R" Number from .s
OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified
horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
g. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel .M.
housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be
adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 1/4 in. travel in all
directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings
shall have an Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the
State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and
vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
oak
16000 - 16'
oft
oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
oulk
, anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to
accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and
4n► embedment.
oft
b. Supplementary Support Steel: Contractor shall supply supplementary
support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof
oft mounted equipment, as required or specified.
c. Attachments: Contractor shall supply restraint attachments plates cast
aok
into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc.
oft in accordance with the requirements of the vibration vendor's
oft calculations.
12. Seismic Force Levels:
a. The following force levels will be used on this project
.w► (1) Minimum "G" Forces Equal To or Exceeding Building Codes
listed in Paragraph 2.11.L.1.
oft
.'`
Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For
Code for all pipes, Duct & for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety
Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either
oft
Equipment Equipment Rigidity or
Flexibility Mounted
oft
Zone Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
AMA
w
UBC
BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 1.07 0.15 0.6 0.2
oft
SBCCI
ook
13. Product Intent:
a. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section
Ar, shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products
are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are
acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the Specifications
and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and
certification sheets shall be in accordance with Paragraph 2.11.J.
b. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance
of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical
permanent deformation greater than 1/8 in. and/or horizontal permanent
o, deformation greater than 1/4 ornik 14. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints:
a. Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square
__ waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim.
1, Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type
Super "W" as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
" b. Bridge - bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static
oft deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount
shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and
Ask opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the
oft central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting
oft
""ft 16000 - 15
4w
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
condition is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacture's submittals
Ark
must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and
support points. alt.
d. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include totk
number, size and locations for each piece of equipment.
8. Seismic Certification and Analysis:
a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of
equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered
professional engineer with at least five (5) years of seismic design
experience, licensed in the state of the job location.
b. All restraining devices shall have a pre- approval number from California
OSHPD or some other recognized government agency showing
maximum restraint ratings. Pre - approvals based on independent testing
are preferred pre - approvals based on calculations. Where pre- approved
devices are not available, submittals based on independent testing are ,..
preferred. Calculations (including the combing of tensile and shear
loading) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a ,.
registered professional engineer with at least five (5) years of seismic .t .
design experience and licensed in the state of the job location. Testing
Auk
and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as one
test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode.
c. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads and
Auk
capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure.
Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment
and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to
accept, without failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting through '",
the equipment center of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed
forces at ground level.
9. Code and Standards Requirement:
a. Typical Applicable Codes and Standards — most recent or enforced code:
ook
(1) Massachusetts State Building Code, CMR 780 Eighth Edition.
(2) Massachusetts Board of Fire Prevention Regulations, CMR 527. t
10. Manufacturer's Responsibility:
a. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall
have the following responsibilities: �►
(1) Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and
locations.
(2) Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or
specified.
(3) Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of un- s
insolated equipment.
(4) Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field
supervision to insure proper installation and performance. -.
11. Related Work: ..
a. Housekeeping Pads:
(1) Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment ,►
to the structure details and design shall be prepared by the al
restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings.
(2) Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor Al*
and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt
diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow
development of full drill -in wedge anchor ratings. If cast -in '"
ANN,
16000 - 14 '"
401, Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4 , H. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Vibration isolation for equipment.
asok 2. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
3. Seismic restraints for non - isolated equipment.
4. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
5. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
All electrical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of services
aot
through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is typical.
(Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification.)
1. Battery Packs
2. Bus Ducts
3. Light Fixtures
4. Cable Trays
da
5. Conduit
*i* 6. Electrical Panels
ob. J. Definitions
1. Life Safety Systems:
a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinlder piping, fire
pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply
piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke exhaust systems.
b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply
including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths
to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems.
c. All medical and life support systems.
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air
doh handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc.
, e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule.
2. Positive Attachment: A positive attachment is defined as a cast -in- anchor, a
drill -in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a
,,ft beam, or a welded "C" type beam clamps for support rods of electrical conduit,
bus duct, or cable trays, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project
'o" as seismic anchor points.
,, 3. Transverse Bracing: Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the
centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit.
40, 4. Longitudinal Bracing: Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the
�► centerline of the pipe.
5. Manufacturer's Data:
Auk a. The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall
provide submittals for products as follows:
dmk
6. Descriptive Data:
d a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints
detailing compliance with the Specification.
b. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing
.wr► vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered
mo, descriptive Drawings.
7. Shop Drawings:
dui a. Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions,
structural member sizes and support point locations.
b. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment.
c. Where walls, floors, slabs, or supplementary steelwork are used for
seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for
ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved before the
'�" 16000 - 13
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
A. Furnish and install distribution/power panelboards where shown on the Plans.
Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal- magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of
frame and trip ratings as required. ,■.
B. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs shall have current ratings as required. Such -
ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any
connector or bus bar not to exceed 50oC above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be ..
conducted in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of —
conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests.
C. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected *�*
connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large .r*.
permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform
position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a .% .
position between "ON" and "OFF ". Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that .w
no additional connectors will be required to add breakers.
D. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a minimum 22,000 amps AIC full short
circuit rating. Series rating shall not be acceptable.
E. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel
to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in ..
accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler lock
on door of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three -point latch and vault
lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be removable.
F. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed.
Main lugs shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be
hinged to be fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains 4.1,,,
shall be barriered.
G. Phase, neutral and ground bussing shall be copper. ".
H. Panelboard circuit directories shall be typed identifying rooms and loads being served. . 04
I. Panelboard trim shall be door -in -door.
J. Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. Panelboard shall be
Square D I -LINE
2.11 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL A
A. It is the intent of the seismic portion of this Specification to keep all electrical building ,014
system components in place during a seismic event.
B. All electrical equipment and conduit, as noted on the equipment schedule or in the �.
Specification, shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with flexible connections to
prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building
structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution
so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. ,
C. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be
certified by the manufacturer. A
D. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, component ..
manufactures and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between
the manufactures or construction standards, the most stringent shall apply.
E. The Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic consideration
and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent, national, state or local
construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian
Building Codes, or other requirements). .ft,
F. Any variance or non - compliance with these Specification requirements shall be corrected
by the Contractor in an approved manner. ••�
G. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as detailed in
Paragraph 2.11.0.
16000 - 12 ....
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.08 LIGHTING FIXTURES
woh
A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All lighting
fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures to be complete in all
respects with all required glassware and lamps. All lamps to be new. Furnish and install
all required hardware to fit in all type ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and
diffusers are installed. Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be
replaced.
B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state low harmonic electronic type, approvable for use
on their system by the local electrical utility company. Fixture/lamp combinations for
which electronic ballasts are not available shall be high power factor, energy efficient
magnetic type, complete with automatic reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM
Oft certified.
C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and size; T8 lamps
shall be 3500 K.
aw, D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure.
E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the fixture schedule and by corresponding letter on
Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue numbers are listed to show type and
standard of quality. Complete schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and
approved by the Architect.
ow 2.09 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS
A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting panelboards as indicated on the panelboard
schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-
,, magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the
schedule.
41114 Circuit breakers shall be quick -make, quick - break, thermal- magnetic, trip indicating, and
have common trip on all multi -pole breakers. Red trip indication shall be clearly shown
by the breaker handle taking position between "ON" and "OFF" when the breaker is
wow tripped. Connections to the bus shall be bolt -on. Furnish circuit breakers UL listed as
Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits
C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed phase" or
"phase sequence" type. All current - carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated.
All bus bars shall be copper. Main ratings shall be as shown on the panelboard schedule.
woow
D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as
__ suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both
ate, breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified.
E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be
onow used in sequence down the left -hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence
down the right -hand side.
F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the
inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high by 3" long
or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the room and load
fed by each circuit.
poopp G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or
greater than the rating shown on the panelboard schedule on the plans. Panelboards shall
have a minimum of 22,000 amp AIC full rating. Series rating shall not be acceptable.
H. Panelboard trim shall be door -in -door.
I. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL label.
Panelboards shall be Square D, Type NQOD or equivalent equipment by Cutler- Hammer,
welp General Electric, or Siemens.
'" 2.10 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
'' " 16000 -•11
wish
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 or 600 volts AC or DC as indicated
on the drawings.
5. Fuses shall match source breaker rating unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
6. Switches shall have rejection clips and shall be designed to accommodate NEMA
FU 1, Class RK5 fuses.
7. Switches shall have a UL listed short circuit current rating for 200,000 rms ,
symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class R or Class J fuses
(30 -600 ampere switches employing appropriate fuse rejection schemes).
8. Switches shall be Square D Heavy Duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R
enclosures, or equivalent equipment by Cutler - Hammer, General Electric, or
Siemens. Aph
C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or double pole .�
toggle switches as specified, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.
D. 3 Phase motor starters shall be across - the -line magnetic type rated in accordance with ..w
NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be mounted in general
purpose enclosures unless located in wet locations or as otherwise indicated on the plans.
1. Across -the -line magnetic starters shall be general- purpose Class A magnetic ..
solid -state controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. Starters shall be
equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be at*
replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel.
2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front without
removing the starter from the panel.
3. ' Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit
module. Thermal units shall be of one -piece construction and interchangeable.
The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. 00.
4. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand - Off - Auto" selector switch,
equal to Square D, Class 8536, Form C, three -pole, three -phase of NEMA size
applicable, with the three - position H -O A switch in cover of general purpose
enclosure. ,.,
5. All three phase magnetic starters shall have the following features:
6. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each starter, fused, with
120 volt control voltage at 60 Hertz. ,,,
7. 2 each normally open and normally closed contacts in addition to seal -in contact.
8. Oil tight cover mounted, heavy duty pilot devices with Form Z, rated A150 pilot
device contacts. ...
9. LED indicating lights.
10. Unguarded pushbuttons.
11. Starters for two speed motors shall be for single winding or two winding as ,,,
required for the service.
E. Provide combine motor controllers with disconnect in common enclosure, using fusible oak
switch conforming to enclosed knife safety switch with externally operable handle. The
safety switch shall have rejection type fuse clips designed to accommodate Class RK5
fuses. Obtain IEC Class 2 coordinated component protection. *.,,
F. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole magnetic contactor without
overload protection, with "Hand- Off - Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose
enclosure, Square D, Class 8502 or equivalent equipment by Cutler- Hammer, General 44,
Electric or Siemens.
G. Fractional horsepower manual controllers shall be AC general - purpose, Class A, ..
manually operated, full - voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, 4101,
with thermal overload unit, and toggle operator. ..e
w
16000 - 10 ..
4111%
41w
ar► Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
,w base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat. No. 20350, or equal.
E. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat.
No. 12212, or equal.
F. Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No.
Alomk
12232, or equal.
G. Light Switches, 4 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No.
12242, or equal.
Ami
H. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red handle, Leviton Cat.
as No. 1221 PLR, or equal.
�r► I. Double pole switch - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired, Leviton Cat. No. 12222,
or equal.
Aft J. Key operated switches shall be of the same grade and rating as specified for toggle
switches.
K. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown, with matching
cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows:
1. Type "50" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 279.
2. Type "30" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat. No. 278.
L. Carbon Monoxide detectors shall be Macurco CM -15A SPDT alarm relay for F/A system
interconnection and visual and audiable alarm.
sok
M. Wall type single pole Occupancy sensors to be Sensor Switch WSD -PDT -V with passive
infrared detection and Microphonic detection or approved equal. Wall type shall be
Sensor Switch WSD- PDT -SA -V where semi - automatic is specified.
'" N. Ceiling type, single control, single pole, line voltage Occupancy Sensors to be Sensor
Switch extended range CMR- PDT -10 with passive infrared detection and Microphonic
detection or approved equal.
O. Ceiling type, multiple location, low voltage Occupancy Sensors to be Sensor Switch
extended range CM- PDT -10 with passive infrared detection and Microphonic detection
or approv equal. Power pack to be ensor Switch PP -20 or approved equal.
P. Wall plates ed shall be Pow smooth Type 302 S satin finish i stainless steel with matching screws.
Q. Receptacle devices installed and existing at the building shall be identified as to it panel
and circuit number. The electrical contactor shall install 3/8" labeled tape on the cover
plate of each receptacle outlet identifying it's origin. Tape shall be equal to BrotherUSA
(Ptouch) Extra Strength Laminated tape. The color shall be clear, or white, with black
lettering.
2.07 MOTOR STARTERS AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A. Furnish and install motor starting, protecting, and controlling devices for motors where
shown on the Drawings.
B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as indicated on plans and
specifications.
dook 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position
with the door open. All current - carrying parts shall be copper and shall be plated
ink
to resist corrosion and promote cool operation.
+a► 2. Switches shall be quick -make and quick - break such that, during normal operation
of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall not be capable of being
restrained by the operating handle after the closing or opening action of the
imbh contacts has started. The handle and mechanism shall be an integral part of the
box, not the cover, with positive pad - locking provisions in the "OFF" position.
ink
3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures except for
switches exposed to weather and in wet location which shall be NEMA 3R or
specified on the plans. Enclosures shall have gray enamel, electro- deposited on
cleaned phosphatized steel, except as specified in Paragraph 6.
imtk
16000 - 9
doilk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ,,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Apok
access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and finished in grey
baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion.
wok
2.03 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and shall be of
types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans. Aluminum conductors shall
not be used.
Ask
B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller, Type THHN, solid.
C. Conductors #4 AWG through #8 AWG, Type THHN, stranded. �*
D. Conductors #3 AWG and larger, Type XHHW, stranded. .,*
E. Metal sheathed Type MC cable shall be steel sheathed interlocking armor equal to AFC
"MC Tuff'. Type MC cable shall be permitted in hollow stud wall construction and
above hung ceilings after first device in circuit or junction box above the hung ceiling .".
directly above the first device. Wiring from first device or junction box above the hung
ceiling directly above the first device to the source panel shall be in conduit. Afe*
F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those specification sections.
2.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES .�
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel unless otherwise
noted or required by the Massachusetts Electrical Code, and shall be as required for their 40"
use. ..►
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations shall be of the
cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw -on cover and oak
gasket.
C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate:
1. Structural conditions.
2. Size and number of raceways and conductors or cables entering. .w
3. Device of fixture for which required.
4. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring installed. 0"
5. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be used.
D. Pull and junction boxes, whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge.
E. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard. NEMA -1 enclosures with cover plates and
screws, bonderized paint finished.
F. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as required by the
Massachusetts Electrical Code. os*
G. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical Company, ,,,,
General Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal.
2.05 NAMEPLATES Aft
A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels and safety
Aft
switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved plastic, or equal, screw
attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering for approval. Aft
B. Each receptacle and outlet device shall be labeled to identity source panel and circuit ..�
number. Identification label shall be provided on both the device and the cover plate.
2.06 WIRING DEVICES —
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or
more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a gang plate. All unused
boxes to be furnished with blank plates
B. Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side and back wired. To
be Leviton Cat. No. 5352I, or equal.
C. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No. 6898HG, or equal. ..
D. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL Listed, with Lexan
alto
AIM
16000 -8
„ Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-
ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
B. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new
walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for conduit
and equipment where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The
Electrical Contractor shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
ai► D. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
E. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
oft
to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Electrical
►* Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
hook
ab.. 1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all raceway runs
concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or pits, exterior exposed above
grade, in spaces subject to moisture, and for conduit sweeps below grade or under concrete
slab on grade. Conduit shall comply with ANSI C80.1 and the latest applicable Federal
Specifications. Fittings and Conduit Bodies shall be steel and comply with NEMA FB 1.
B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or partitions, run
ds exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or above furred spaces unless otherwise
ork specified above. Electrical metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable
requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association, ANSI C80.3, and
w applicable Federal Specifications. Couplings, connectors, and fittings for electrical
A metallic tubing shall be of steel construction, set screw type. Die cast fittings shall not be
permitted.
C. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, light fixtures and
other removable equipment to facilitate removal and connections. Length of flexible
steel conduit shall not exceed six feet for light fixture connections. For other equipment
connections, length of flexible steel conduit shall not exceed 18 inches.
D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit shall interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket
aft
for connections to motors or other vibrating equipment in damp or wet locations and
Aft outdoor applications. Length of liquidtight flexible steel conduit shall not exceed 18
inches.
E. Cable tray shall be 12” wide galvanized steel with 3 inch depth and 6" rung spacing.
Furnish manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, blind ends,
ws barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps as required for a complete system.
F. Wiremold 500 & 700 series surface raceway shall be allowed for use in dormitory rooms
_ of levels 1, 2, & 3 where the installation of wiring is impractical by other methods. Other
exceptions are noted on the plans.
2.02 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in accordance with
isok
applicable rules of the Massachusetts Electrical Code. To be of code gauge steel and
supported as required by Code. Wireways shall be furnished and installed complete with
the necessary complement of fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be
Aft
of the "lay -in" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel
Ask
16000 - 7
d
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
removed by the individual Contractor.
1.16 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all areas except _ It
storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the .w
building. ,
1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply
qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that
Owner's representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance .�
procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual ", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name ..�
of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents w+
with tab sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and easily
read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard
binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The manual shall also include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
equipment.
3. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control
of each item of equipment. ,,,
4. Panel schedules.
5. List of recommended spare parts.
6. Factory and field test reports
7. Copies of all service contracts.
8. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the —
local representative for each item of equipment.
1.18 GUARANTEE ..0
A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all
parts for a period of one (1) year after date of final acceptance, and shall agree to
promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during
this period.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects
in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by '"''
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall
be considered as being defective.
1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes required for the installation of electrical .R
apparatus in the building, shall be performed by the General Contractor. All work and ,or4,
materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and
patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) �w
is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location for openings, etc. .w.
shall be checked by the Electrical Contractor, and error due to failure to co- ordinate work
16000 -6 ..
Aft
Al Ilk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
4.14 Smith College, Northampton, MA
Telecommunication systems, and shall provide a list of completed projects of comparable
size and complexity to this project, with contact names and telephone numbers. Personnel
must have experience using Cat 6 certification equipment.
D. The successful bidder shall submit in writing a list of at least one qualified technician
assigned to this project, including relevant manufacturers training programs completed,
and years of related experience of each.
1111A
1.10 PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS
dok A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work.
He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges
incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility
Aft regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of
the work.
hok
B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
o
1.11 TEMPORARY HOOK -UPS
Anik
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook -ups required for the use of
411*, water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in
Division 1.
1.12 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power as specified in
Division 1.
1.13 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,
„h. plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are
intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any
applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract
requirements.
B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in
__ the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, rsa, shall be considered as called for or
reasonably implied in both.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
ark D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
„ fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical Contractor shall carefully
investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange
w► such work accordingly, furnishing such accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions, at no additional cost.
Ask
* 1.14 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and fixtures to
osi
the building site when required, so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid
delaying his work and that of other trades.
dok
1.15 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
dok volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his
machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be
16000 - 5
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ..
Smith College, Northampton, MA
I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings ,.k
and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his
work since the Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may or s
make in regard thereto. .,
J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and Specifications before
ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to ..
the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE AR
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will
be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that
substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in
product specifications and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
oak
B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in AR.
accordance with the General Requirements. —
1.07 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted other -wise, all materials used shall be U.S. .sk
made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to
function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the ._
same brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials
Ask
and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard
requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. Auk
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall submit to the 411/*
Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, .
giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with -
the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making ,■,
any and all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical Contractor
from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract
Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall
remain with the Contractor. 40.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop As
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will be required to remove such materials and
substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect. AR .
E. Test results of all the telecommunication systems shall be provided in accordance with
Part 3 Execution of this specification.
1.09 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM INSTALLLER QUALIFICATIONS ,
A. The successful bidder shall be thoroughly familiar with the cabling methods set forth in
the latest release of the BICSI TDMM's (Building Industry Consulting Services oak
International Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manuals) and unless otherwise
specified, shall supervise the installation in accordance with the recommendations and
practices outlined in the latest release of the BICSI Telecommunications Cabling
Installation Manual.
B. Structured cabling contractor shall hold ADC Installer, or equal Certification status and
therefore be able to provide an Extended Product Warranty program for the copper and Ash
fiber cabling system. .o,
C. The successful bidder shall have at least two (2) years experience installing and servicing
16000 - 4
fah
Ash Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
46%. A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code CMR 780, Eighth Edition, including the 2011
lek Massachusetts Electrical Code, the Massachusetts Board of Fire Prevention Regulations
Code — CMR 527, and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto.
4"
Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or
411Ie regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are in excess of
applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the
Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
4.4
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
0.14
1.05 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
Ask regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise
care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of
his work.
dok 13. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the
Electrical Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be
Ask removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction
work begins.
4ope,
C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
41" building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute
arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it
Amt, is agreed between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and extent
of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and
binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall cooperate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order
to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his
materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such
information. The Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them
4111Ik in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical Contractor to give proper
information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such
failure.
41114 E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
446,
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets,
dook • etc. The Electrical Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
4.44
measurements.
40111k F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor installing such items.
ork G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or
injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be
capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be
protected by suitable means.
Ai*
H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
mok under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
411106
16000 - 3
AI Pk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS 40b.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Division 16: Electrical ,*„
SECTION 16000: ELECTRICAL
Aft
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS "-
A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all
Sections within DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a
part of this Section of the Specifications.
B. This Contractor must be familiar with all other Divisions and Sections of the
zah
Specifications which affect the work of this Section.
C. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work *R
under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. ..►
D. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the e
Contract.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK ..
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work specified herein and /or 00.
indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: ,,a
1. Feeders.
2. Lighting and Power Panelboards
3. Light Fixtures. ,,,.,
4. Wiring devices and plates.
5. Branch Circuit Wiring and Raceway. .w..
6. Fire Alarm System. ,,,,
7. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or Owner
including final connections to equipment. Aft
8. Telecommunications Wiring
9. Seismic.
10. Inspections. *af
11. Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
B. Work not included:
1. Peripherals connected to the data cabling infrastructure (servers, workstations,
printers, etc.) is not included in this contract.
2. All voice equipment connected to telephone cabling infrastructure (phones, faxes, .�
PBX, etc.) is not included in this contract.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed and tested as specified in the
latest editions of applicable publications, standards, rulings and determinations of:
1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
2. MEC - Massachusetts Electric Code.
3. NFPA 70 —National Fire Protection Association.
4. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1, B.2, B.3, Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard.
5. ANSI/TIA/EIA -607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications.
6. ANSI/ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association. a.
1.04 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS ...
16000 - 2 '"
wow
oak
oulk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
awk
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Division 16: Electrical
SECTION 16000: ELECTRICAL
k
PART 1 - GENERAL 2
N► 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 2
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 2
1.03 REFERENCES 2
1.04 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 2
Alk 1.05 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4
ail► 1.07 PRODUCTS 4
1.08 SUBMITTALS 4
1.09 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM INSTALLLER QUALIFICATIONS 4
1.10 PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS 5
1.11 TEMPORARY HOOK -UPS 5
1.12 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER 5
X11► 1.13 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 5
1.14 PRODUCT HANDLING 5
-. 1.15 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5
1.16 WORK CONCEALED 6
1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 6
1.18 GUARANTEE 6
41k 1.19 CUTTING AND PATCHING 6
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS 7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 7
2.01 RACEWAYS 7
2.02 WIREWAYS 7
4111. 2.03 CONDUCTORS 8
2.04 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 8
2.05 NAMEPLATES 8
2.06 WIRING DEVICES 8
411► 2.07 MOTOR STARTERS AND ENCLOSED SWITCHES 9
2.08 LIGHTING FIXTURES 11
2.09 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS 11
2.10 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 11
#!s 2.11 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 12
2.12 TELECOMMUNICATIONS 19
2.13 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 22
__ PART 3 - EXECUTION 27
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 27
3.02 GROUNDING 27
3.03 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 28
4/111► 3.04 LIGHTING FIXTURES 28
3.05 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES 29
al1A 3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 29
3.07 NAMEPLATE AND LABEL INSTALLATION 29
3.08 TESTING 30
3.09 FIRE SAFING 30
!11
+ll116,
4A1111.
Ally
16000 - 1
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA 0
E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the Architectural section of "'
these Specifications has been accomplished. —
Ark
3.11 SPARE PARTS
A. Filters: Each air handling unit shall be provided with three (3) extra sets of filters for each w
unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after substantial completion is issued ,,,,
and the two (2) remaining sets shall be delivered to the Owner.
B. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan belt of each fan installed.
D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the Owner designated
location to which the spare parts have been delivered. Delivery of parts shall be confirmed
by the Owner's representative, who shall countersign the Certificate.
3.12 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including, but not limited to the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. ,mi
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. Aft
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway
walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen,
machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms. Ask
B. Sating Insulation ink
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors,
ANA
Inc. or Architect- Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the
required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings. api
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors. .".
C. Seal Compound: At "poke- through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. Asi
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes.
E. Application ""`
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress
and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with
sealing compound.
END OF SECTION 15600
,.0
Altb
AMR
AllAk
15600 -5 9
Aux
kook
sok
sok
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
sok Smith College, Northampton, MA
smik
with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all hangers and sleeves and have an 18 gauge
sok sheet metal saddle equal to three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in
diameter shall be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the thickness
kook
of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket.
soo D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre -cut insulation. The
ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the throat of the fitting and the edge
adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one
piece PVC fitting cover shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe
w, covering.
3.08 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
.. A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or not,
kook and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be famished by the HVAC
, Contractor and be included in his bid.
ksk 3.09 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN -UP
__ A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of the building, and it
shall be established that all controls are calibrated accurately and performing satisfactorily
w and that all units are heating and ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for
kow vibration and excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.
sok
B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked and thoroughly
cleaned including coils, plenums, under equipment and any and all other areas around or in
sok equipment provided under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be
sok replaced with new filters during final clean-up.
C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be checked for painting
s"* damage, and any factory finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the
__ adjacent areas.
D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be replaced with new
material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
"" A. Alt i in valves controls and equipment project shall be identified as specified
P P g, � ment on the .p P J 1� i
herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from the floor or usual point of
vision.
B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow.
The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be at least 6" long. The letters and flow
kook
arrows shall be made by precut stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap -on,
pre- printed plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that markers
,w are not over 50 feet on center.
,,*„ C. Each valve, except runout valves, but including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass
disc 1 -1/2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a number, and a valve list shall be provided
under glass in the Boiler Room showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve
kook and any pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the discs to
the valves with brass "S" hooks or chains.
sok
D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be identified by
engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or instrument. The engraved
nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid ", or approved equal plastic which will be black
sok
and show white letters when engraved. Letters shall be 1/2" high.
sok
sok
15600-5 8
sok
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed w `
either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A .►
of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping.
D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. A ,,
E. After system has been determined to be leak -free, the Engineer shall be notified and the test
Aft
shall be repeated in his or his representative's presence.
F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they shall be removed ,.
during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not apply to control valves.
G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic or other temporary
means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the valve, fitting, joint, or section that is -
leaking and reinstalling new material with joints as specified herein before.
Aft
3.05 CLEANING AND FLUSHING —
A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned before placing in OP„
operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound, mill scale, oil, and any and all other
material foreign to the water being circulated. Clean all strainers.
B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and other foreign •
matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system. Pipe stored on the project shall
have the open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before
erection, each piece of pipe, fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. A.,
C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add trisodium
ink
phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the proportion of one pound per fifty
gallons of water in the system. After the system is filled with this solution, the system shall ..
be brought up to temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then
be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be given notice of
this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be present to observe the cleaning "`
operation, and, if he deems it necessary, the cleaning operation shall be repeated.
D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall be tested by litmus
paper or other dependable method and shall be left on the slightly alkaline side (ph = 7.5 plus
or minus). If the system is found to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of A
trisodium phosphate shall be repeated.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at any time "stop- �.
leak" compounds to the system.
3.06 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems, and prior a"`
to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and appurtenances applicable to the above systems
shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated
on the Drawings, or as directed.
B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly by the Owner. ,,sh
3.07 INSULATION osh
A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation contractor ..R
regularly engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running through radiator
covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so that they are not visible from the —
floor. Remove all stickers from covering.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and sealed
AMIt
15600 -5 7
Amk
w
Ask
awe,
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Aft
Smith College, Northampton, MA
diw
checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co- ordinate work with other
d'"` Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor, who shall make the corrections
as his own expense.
B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the floors and walls are
built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where sleeves
isk and inserts were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do
all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after installation of
'' piping or equipment shall be performed by the General Contractor.
w, C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be done in a location
approved by the Engineer.
D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain as finished or be painted later. Should use of such an area be necessary, the HVAC
Contractor shall cover the working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
auk 3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION
Alak A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and shall be firmly
supported throughout. Provision for expansion and contraction shall be made with offsets or
expansion loops. All pipe shall be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and
burrs removed.
B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch connections or
reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of tappings. Reductions in the run of
pipe shall be made with eccentric or concentric reducers as required for draining and venting.
C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in furred spaces, shafts,
chases, or above hung ceilings.
D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe shafts, above hung
ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to maintain maximum headroom and clearances
for access to other equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures,
oft other piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades.
,n,, E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit future replacement,
removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connections where required to isolate
mok
movement of ui ment from piping system or of piping system from equipment, �l P Pp g Y P�P� g Y �l P t, shall be as
specified.
F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow out piping with
compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale and flush and drain until all traces
of dirt, scale and other foreign matter have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional
i nk requirements.
G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system.
3.04 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise, shall be hydraulically
.► tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor shall provide all equipment required to
make the tests specified herein. Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate
the construction.
ink
B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water and bring the
section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation
mok is installed and any insulation installed prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in
the tests shall have been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester.
C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not
less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum
pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a
mok
w
15600 -56
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA .a,,
E. Wheel: Wheel shall be steel, non - overloading, centrifugal backward inclined, airfoil type.
Blades shall be continuously welded to the backplate and deep spun inlet shroud. All oak
sizes shall be keyed and securely attached to the fan shaft. Wheel shall overlap an
aso
aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency.
Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204 -96, Balancing Quality Am.
and Vibration Levels for Fans. ,,,.
F. Motor: Motor shall be heavy duty, premium efficiency type with permanently lubricated
sealed ball bearings and furnished for the specified voltage, phase and enclosure.
G. Blower Shaft: Blower shaft shall be AISI C -1045 hot rolled and accurately turned, „■,
ground and polished. Shaft shall be sized for critical speed of at least 125% of maximum
RPM.
H. Bearings: Bearings shall be designed and tested specifically for use in air handling
applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreaseable ball or roller type in a cast
iron pillow block housing and selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000
hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. A`
L Belts and Drives: Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non - static type. Drives shall be
precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor
shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150% of the installed motor horsepower. The variable
pitch motor drive must be factory set to the specified fan RPM. All drives shall utilize a ,
minimum of two belts. Provide each fan with a belt guard. Fabricate guard to comply
with OSHA and SMACNA requirements. Secure to fan or fan supports without short- '"'"`
circuiting vibration isolators. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, „,W
lubrication and use of tachometer while guard is in place.
J. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as required by the drawings, schedules or "`
application: Aft,.
1. Non -fused disconnect switch.
Aft
2. Scroll access doors with quick - opening latches and gaskets.
3. Companion flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as fan ..
housing.
4. Scroll drain connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.
5. Inlet screens: Grid screen of same material as housing on all open inlets. __
6. Seismic restrained spring vibration isolators. ,,,,,
7. Weather cover: Enameled steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing for all
units mounted outdoors. 40*
K. Fan shall be Cook model CA -SWSI or equal by Greenheck or Twin City. A
PART 3 - INSTALLATION AIM
3.01 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM
A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating, testing, or otherwise
4110
without filters in place.
B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air handling units and
plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units
are turned on, and clean filters shall be installed.
3.02 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING
A. Drilling of all holes 4" diameter and smaller required for the installation of heating and
isk
ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. Cutting and
patching shall be performed by the General Contractor in accordance with the General AM
Conditions. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to ..
keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc. shall be
AIM
15600 -5 5
AIM
a
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Aok
c. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper tubing should
40 ` not require soldering.
,rook D. System Requirements
1. Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in accordance with the
_ manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. All relevant information shall
414,, be included relating to the following:
a. tube handling
aikk
b. tube measuring
40111, c. tube cutting
ask d. tube bending
e. tube repairing
f. tube connections
g. tube solvent sensitivity
h. tube UV light sensitivity
tube capacity and pressure drop
,,■, j. tube loop layout patterns
k. tube fastening procedures
116' 1. manifold assembly instructions
m. manifold location
n. fitting assembly instructions
o. insulation practices
aft p. installation method by construction type
m q. control applications
r. system start-up procedures
2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing system shall be in
„ft accordance with manufacturer recommended procedures for the products utilized.
3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing system shall be
supplied by one company, including: PEX tubing, fittings, manifolds, and other
recommended and required hardware to assure a compatible and a complete
radiant tubing system.
auk
2.26 UTILITY FANS
A. Description: The fan shall be a single width, single inlet backward inclined airfoil, belt -
driven centrifugal blower.
B. Certifications: Fan shall be manufacturer at an ISO 9001 certified facility. Fan shall be
oft listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL /cUL 705) for U.s. and Canada. Fan shall bear
the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance.
a" C. Construction: The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion
resistant fasteners. The scroll wrapper and scroll side panels shall be a minimum of 12
gauge steel. The entire fan housing shall have continuously welded seams for leakproof
ifek operation and shall have a minimum of 1 %2 outlet discharge flange. A performance cut -
aft off shall be furnished to prevent recirculation of air in the fan housing. Bearing support
shall be minimum 10 gauge welded steel. Lifting eyes shall be provided for ease of
installation. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate. Nameplate shall indicate
oak design CFM, static pressure and maximum fan RPM. Unit shall be shipped in ISTA
,�► certified transit tested packaging.
D. Coating: Steel fan components shall be Lorenized with an electrostatically applied, baked
__ polyester powder coating. Each component shall be subject to a five stage
oft environmentally friendly wash system, followed by a minimum 2 mil thick baked powder
finish. Paint must exceed 1,000 hour salt spray under ASTM B117 test method
wr►
a
15600 -54
.wk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
dik
m. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not more than
five (5) feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as follows:
1. Nominal tubing size.
2. Type of plastic tubing material.
3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9. 0///h
4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the pressure /Mk
rating is valid.
5. ASTM designation, ASTM F876.
6. Manufacturer's name and production code. *_
Additional Marking
wIk
1. Date of manufacturing.
2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726. -
3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of measuring
Oak
the tubing.
2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist of individual "
loop control and adaptation utilizing modular Polyacrylamide thermoplastic
components ready for assembly. The manifold should also include the following
features: �
a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple manifold
configurations and allows for future expansion.
Ank
b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module shall have an
automatic integrated air vent.
c. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return manifold shall have
w
a thermometer integrated to indicate supply and return water
temperatures. Temperature readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set we
up of a radiant heating system. ,,,"
d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have incremental
adjustment and flow rate indication. Temperature and flow readouts will Ank
assist in the diagnostics and set up of a radiant heating system. as.
e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing valve and
a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the radiant heating system"
allowing different loop lengths and tube sizes to be connected to the
same manifold. Each valve shall be able to fully close to allow complete
loop isolation. .wk
f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be red to
indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop module shall be blue ,lk
to indicate cooler return water.
g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall have a means Ark
of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the system. ,.
h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets /outlets shall be 1 -1/4" NPT
female, to fit maximum size plumbing and greater system adaptability.
3. Fittings
a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting of nut, .r.
ferrule and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or copper tubing to
manifold.
b. Fitting Types: Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8 ", 1/2 ", 5/8" 3/4" ..k
Manifold to 1/2" copper tubing
Hose Bib
Manifold Cap
,k
15600 -5 3
Aft
...
ink
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries, Inc., all PEX
tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American Society of Testing and
410+ materials, Standard Specification F876 entitled, "Cross linked
Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing ", and German Standard DIN 4726 for
' "Oxygen Permeation" as related to the following paragraphs:
e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and essentially
uniform in color, opacity, density, and other properties. The inside and
outside surfaces shall be matte or glossy in appearance. the tubing walls
shall be free of cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other
defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect the wall
ink
integrity.
ink f. Dimensions and Tolerances
Nominal Average Outside Minimum
Tubing Size Diameter Wall
Thickness
,.w 3/8" 0.500" 0.070"
1/2" 0.625" 0.070"
5/8" 0.750" 0.083"
auk 3/4" 0.875" 0.097"
g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall have a
Anik
density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m
,�► h. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic tubing shall
be as given.
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Minimum Burst
Ask Size Pressure
Pressure
psi @ 180 ° F psi @ 180 ° F
ink 3/8" 275 235
ink 1/2" 215 185
5/8" 210 180
ink
3/4" 210 180
A i. Environmental Stress Cracking: "There shall be no loss of pressure in
the tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9" (paragraph of ASTM
ink
F876).
Auk j. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with 7.9,
(paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking for PEX tubing
material shall be within the range of 65% to 89% inclusive."
ink k. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance with 7.10
(paragraph of ASTM F876), the time t (t = time to failure of boiled
sample) shall be at least 50% of the time, t (t = time to failure of
unboiled sample).
ink 1. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending of the tube
shall not be more than six (6) times the outside diameter for up to a 90
ink
degree bend. For 180 degree bends, the minimum bend radius shall be as
follows:
3/8" tubing 3.0" radius
1/2" tubing 3.75" radius
11114 5/8" tubing 4.5" radius
oak 3/4" tubing 5.75" radius
15600 -52
APR
.w�
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA ....
c. Duct supported by hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than 406,
12 in. in length from the structure to the structural connection of the duct _++
work.
R. Suspended Equipment:
1. VAV boxes and fan powered equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. and rigidly
connected to the supply side of the duct system and supported with a minimum if
4 hanger rods.
S. Schedules:
Vibration Isolation and / or
Seismic Restraint
Equipment Schedule Specification Static
Deflection
Air Handling/Energy Recovery Units 1, 4, 19 Internal
Isolation —
Fan Coil Units 10, 12, 19 .75 in.
In -Line Fans 10, 12, 19 1 in. Alb
Unit Heaters 10, 12, 19 .75 in. ,.R
Cabinet Heaters 4 & 18
Pumps — Base Mounted 1, 4, 18, 23
Pumps — In -Line 23 -.
2.25 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A. Scope of Work
1. This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant tubing system ,.
consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation protection, distribution
manifolds and associated fittings. .R
B. References in
1. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F876, entitled
"Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing ".
2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification F877 entitled, w
" Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold Water Distribution .A.
Systems ".
3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in warm water '""
floor heating systems ". ,,,,
C. Materials
1. Tube _
a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in accordance with
ASTM F876.
b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be manufactured using the do,
"electron beam method of crosslinking, performed at ambient Ask
temperature and pressure.
c. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous working
pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi @ 180 F working ""'
temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working temperature.
..1
15600 -5
Aelk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Aik
1. All discharge runs for a distance of 50' from the connected equipment shall be
''"'k isolated from the building structure by means of Specification 10 hangers or
oft Specification 5 floor isolators. Spring deflection shall be a minimum 0.75 in.
2. All duct runs having air velocity of 1000 fpm or more shall be isolated from the
building structure by Specification 11 hangers or 5 floor supports. Spring
deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75 in.
O. Seismic Restraint of Ductwork:
1. Seismically restrain all duct work with Specification 12 or 13 restraints as listed
oft below:
a. Restrain rectangular ducts with cross sectional area of 6 sq. ft. or larger.
b. Restrain round ducts with diameters of 28 in. or
larger.
c. Restrain flat oval ducts the same way as rectangular ducts of the same
nominal size.
2. Transverse restraints shall occur at 30' intervals or at both ends of the duct run if
aft less than the specified interval. Transverse restraints shall be installed at each
duct turn and at each end of a duct run.
'"' 3. Longitudinal restraints shall occur at 60' intervals with at least one restraint per
duct run. Transverse restraints for one duct section connected perpendicular to it
if the restraints are installed within 4' of the intersection of the ducts and if the
restraints are sized for the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA
duct construction standards.
4. The ductwork must be reinforced at the restraint locations. Reinforcement shall
consist of an additional angle on top of the ductwork that is attached to the
support hanger rods. Ductwork is to be attached to both upper angle and lower
trapeze.
5. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the combined
weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than or equal to the maximum
,, weight and dimensions of the duct for which bracing details are selected.
6. Walls, including gypsum board non bearing partitions, which have ducts running
through them may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide channel framing
oft around ducts and solid blocking between the duct and frame.
P. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the
schedules in paragraph S of this Specification.
dok Q. Seismic Restraint Exclusions:
1. Piping:
a. All piping less than 2 -1/2 in. in diameter except those listed below.
b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D.
c. All piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 1 -1/4 in. I.D.
d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from hanger rods where
the point of attachment is less than the 12 in. in length from the structure
to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze.
e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in diameter
'' and smaller.
Aft 2. Ductwork:
a. Rectangular, square or oval ducts less than 6 sq. ft. in cross sectional
dook
area.
Auk b. Round duct less than 28 in. in diameter.
4104
4k
15600 -5 0
dok
Aik
ask
Aok
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA Oft
basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers
shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3 in., 1 -1/2 in. *'
deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2 -1/2 in. deflection
thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as
practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification
23 flexible piping connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not
suitable for the service.
2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or
supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors,
and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a
Ilta
minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional
deflection is required to limit load changes to -±- 25% of the initial load.
Submittals must include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated ,uk
expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final changes and
seismic loads. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has
been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed ,.
design.
M. Seismic Restraint of Piping: ''
1. Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12 ,-
cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated
.wR
piping.
a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air aft
piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger. .�
b. Piping located in Mechanical Rooms, mechanical equipment (fan)
rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that is 1 -1/4 in. I.D. and ..►
larger. ,.,
c. All other piping 2 -1/2 in. diameter and larger.
2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, .pp,
except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. Al*
3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except
where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads. .ws&
4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as Aft
transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or
oik
greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or
contraction.
5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20 ft. maximum
and longitudinal restraints at 40 ft. maximum spacing.
6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal Jo"
restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the —
restraint is installed within allowable limits at longer distances.
7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before '""
applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports.
8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines.
9. Cast -iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band
shield and clamp assembly in Zones 2B, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections Ask
3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced —
spacings of 1/2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3.
N. Vibration Isolation of Ductwork: -
Aisk
..R
15600 -4 9
..A
O
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
' Smith College, Northampton, MA
�s►
work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible
'o` Contractor's expense.
,, 7. Bring to the architects /engineers attention any discrepancies between the
Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific
doilk equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by
,_ discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense.
8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations which are deemed defective in
aft
workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense.
Ash 9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead
support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of
dok
record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from:
Ask a. Flanges of structural beams.
b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction.
c. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill -in concrete anchors.
Aft 10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short
Alsk circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit.
11. Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non - isolated systems.
'"" Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly
ft attached systems only.
12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods
Aook
must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification
14 braces.
w.. 13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support
rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with
Specification 14 braces.
alk 14. Drill -in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification
type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted
equipment.
Aft 15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as
required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project.
16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24
w in. or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities.
17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation
manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals.
oft 18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive
displacement which results from high air throughst in relation to the equipment
weight. Horizontal throughst restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see
amk selection guide).
noi,, 19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible.
L. Vibration Isolation of Piping:
"' 1. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near
the mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11.
Specification 11 hangers must also be used in all transverse braced isolated
locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs
in all other locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as
Aft described in Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as
described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion tanks are
4* considered part of the piping run. The first three (3) isolators from the isolated
equipment will have the same static deflection as specified for the mountings
Auk
under the connected equipment. If piping is connected to equipment located in
yew
15600 -4 8
,
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA ..�
prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the
isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be
balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All - directional anchors ,—
shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel 0
tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thickness of 60 durometer
neoprene. The height if the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to
allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin 0"
shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe .,�.
movement. Guides shall be capable of i- 1 -5/8 in. motion, or to meet
0"
location requirements. Pipe guides shall be Type VSG as manufactured
by Mason Industries, Inc.
26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. ,0"
thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be
tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner
sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to
make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in
place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member.
Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of the wall. Where
temperatures exceed 240 dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used
in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Aft
Mason Industries, Inc. .►
27. The horizontal throughst restraint shall consist of a spring element in
series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with
the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The
spring element shall be designed so it can be preset for throughst at the a "
factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1/4 in.
movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with one
(1) rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the JIM
duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be
attached at the centerline of throughst and symmetrical on either side of '"
the unit. Horizontal throughst restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
K. Execution - General: s
1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict .w.
accordance with the manufacturers written instruction and all certified submittal ..
data.
2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any
change of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or
misalignment.
3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made 00"
that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. .�.
4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which
makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. w
"Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. 0"
5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. —
6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment
or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be
brought to the architects /engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective 010
15600 -4 7
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
oft
Smith College, Northampton, MA
AIR
anchorage pre - approval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California
attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.
mik Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM
"" in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings
shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout.
Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall
have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain
shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or
similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4
in. to 1 -1/2 in. may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere
and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250
4104 psi up to 190° F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at
250° F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190° F and 135
psi at 250° F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a
minimum of 3/1. All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5
minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the
above Specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion
joints.
Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of
the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in
Ank unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the
installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods, as
control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used,
they must have 1/2 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in
area to take the throughst at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area.
Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off
valves.
Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants
,.k showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10
DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this
+a► or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall
be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Expansion
Atik
joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and Control
Aft Rods CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon
steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall
__ have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated:
do FlangedMale Nipples
3 x 14 10x26 1/2x9 1 -1 /2x 13
4x15 12x283/4x10 2x14
5x19 14x301x11 2- 1/2x18
6x20 16x321/4x12
Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut -off valves
horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible.
Hoses shall be Type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
Aik
24. All- directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel
tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene.
Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material arranged to
dok
15600 -4 6
look
1
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA 40,
by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the load deflection
in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage pre - approval
"R "Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the .w
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall
be series Z -1011 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not *+
from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud
anchor shall also have a safety shoulder which fully supports the wedge
ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report —
number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its ....
allowable loads. Drill -in stud edge anchors shall be Type SAS as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. '""'
19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or
equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors
9.
shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety ..
shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge .w
anchors shall have an evaluation report number from I.C.B.O.
Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill -in female
wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, **►
Inc.
20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete
pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case ^"*
pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction and discharge of
elbows. bases shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of
the base but not less than 6in. The base depth need not exceed 12 in.
unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or Aft
rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of
1/2 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer `"
1-1/2 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates
to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being
poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting
locations to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed
bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable.
oft
Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
21. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation Aft
curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section ,_
containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper
floating section. The upper frame must provide continuous support for
the equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist wind and —
seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be a
minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest .ft
on 1/4 in. thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and ,_
the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing
shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed
over the lower curbs waterproofmg and joined at the corners by EPDM
bellows. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable
waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 in. of
insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically contain the
rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, .w
and the lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have
ifek
15600 -4 5 ,,,,
rokk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
a
be steel assemblies that swivel to fmal installation angle and utilize two
"""' (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. Cables must not
Auk be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an
Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
aft
California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable
assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH
dwr, between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam
all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
dik 13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist
, seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide
all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel
a assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and utilize two
through bolts to provide proper attachment. Seismic solid brace
assembly shall have anchorage pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD
'""'' in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings.
Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
14. Steel angles, sized to pre -vent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or
+► equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each
416. restraint location when required. Welding of support rods is not
acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre - approval
"R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Rod clamp
assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They
shall be special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in
place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have
an Anchorage Pre - approval "R "Number from OSHPD in the State of
'' California. Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as manufactured by
4111, Mason Industries, Inc.
16. All- directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel
members restrained by a one -piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge
bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4
Ank in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap
of 1/8 in. shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions
4.4 before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber
416, end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of internal clearances.
Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits exist before
systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Pre - approval
410, "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be
Type Z -1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel
members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to
Agek
bridge bearing Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable
and a minimum of 3/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000
, psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured with air gap between hard and
resilient material of nor less than 1/8 in. nor more than 1/4 in. Snubbers
is '" shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic
snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal or greater than the load
assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied
15600 -44
Isk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
,–
State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and
vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by .w.
Mason Industries, Inc. 40,
8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections
connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. """
Air spring configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum
natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst
pressure that is a minimum of three times the published maximum
operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to either
the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with .�.
three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1 /8in.
Submittals shall include natural frequency, load, and damping tests ..�
performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be „,
Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc. """R
9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have a MT air spring as described
in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops
to prevent air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing w
shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed Ask
after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum
clearance of 1.2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and
between the housing and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of AI*
contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all .ft
seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR -MT as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc. -
10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 -1/4 in. „„*
thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general
characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced '"®
neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall dik
have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain
stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers or the
neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and .a.
hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger
Ank
rod to swing through a 30° arc from side to side before contacting the rod
bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a
hanger Drawing showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N
as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
11. Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be pre- compressed
and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop „,
to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation.
The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the
spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its ••�►
full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. ..w.
Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree
capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc. ,uk
12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables
sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and """
arranged to provide all- directional restraint. Cable end connections shall ,,.,
Ask
15600 -4 3 —
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Auk
Smith College, Northampton, MA
imk
central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting
during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall
ink be compounded to bridge - bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have
an Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
"' California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load
ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
mei
3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by
assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel
,m, sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the
neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over
the bushing to cushion the back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers
the inside neoprene element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act
as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel
isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the
ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be
Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The
bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal
to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured
ink
by Mason Industries, Inc.
5. Spring isolators shall be free standing, laterally stable without any
housing, and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 in. neoprene
acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All
_ mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the
mok equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the compressed
height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum
additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals
shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and
solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
. 6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in
Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to
prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall
__ serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after
41114 adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum
clearance of 1/2 in. shall be maintained around restraining bolts and
Ask between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring
Aikk action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation.
Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an
internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic
forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre- approval "R" Number from
OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified
horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel
housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall
be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 1/4 in. travel in all
directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings
shall have an Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the
15600 -42
welt
.w�
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2. Supplementary Support Steel:
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all *w*
equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted —
equipment, as required or specified.
3. Attachments:
a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into w
housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double -sided beam clamps,
etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration 44
vendor's calculations. •�•
H. Seismic Force Levels
1. The following force levels will be used on this project.
Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E.
Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For
Code for all pipes, Duct & for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety 4/4
Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either
Equipment Equipment Rigidity or
Flexibility Mounted
Zone Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
UBC * * * * * * *
BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2
SBCCI
Product Intent:
1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section
shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products ,0*
are the basis of these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are A ,,
acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the Specifications
and have the approval of the specifying engineer. Submittals and
certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section D. ..
2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance
of any attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical
permanent deformation greater than 1/8 in. and/or horizontal permanent
deformation greater than 1/4 in.
J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints:
1. Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square
waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. 04*
Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type
Super "W" as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
2. Bridge - bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static �►
deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount
shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and
opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the
15600 -41
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
401,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
A
government agency showing maximum restraint ratings.
4164 Pre - approvals based on independent testing are
preferred to approvals based on calculations. Where pre-
approved devices are not available, submittals based on
independent testing are preferred. Calculations
±mo►, (including the combining of tensile and shear loadings)
to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by
a registered professional engineer with at least five years
of seismic design experience and licensed in the state of
the job location. Testing and calculations must include
both shear and tensile loads as well as one test or
04. analysis at 45° to the weakest mode.
(3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static
seismic loads, and capacity of materials utilized for
connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must
detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment,
and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices shall
"''' be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed
in Section H acting through the equipment center of
gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at
ground level.
E. Code and Standards Requirements:
1. Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced code:
Ink
a. Massachusetts State Building Code.
Ann b. BOCA National Mechanical Code.
c. NFPA 90A.
F. Manufacturer's Responsibility:
1. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall
have the following responsibilities:
a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and
locations.
4111o. b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or
specified.
c. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of un-
isolated equipment.
„ d. Provide installation instructions, drawings, and trained field
supervision to insure proper installation and performance.
G. Related Work:
,, 1. Housekeeping Pads:
a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment
dook
to the structure details and design shall be prepares by the
aID restraint vendor if not already indicated on the Drawings.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor
sat
and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt
.�► diameters all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow
4* , development of full drill -in wedge anchor ratings. If cast -in
anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to
accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and
4 embedment.
Aok
15600 -4 0
.w,
Ask
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA '"
Aak
2. Positive Attachment:
stAk
a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast -in anchor, a drill -in
wedge anchor, a double -sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular
to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single 4.
sided "C" type beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping,
Ask
ductwork, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this
project as seismic anchor points. '"r'"
3. Transverse Bracing:
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the
centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit. ww.
4. Longitudinal Bracing: ws.
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of
the pipe, duct, or conduit.
D. Manufacturer's Data: *sk
1. The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall
provide submittals for products as follows:
a. Descriptive Data: w
(1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and .�
specific restraints detailing compliance with the
Specification.
(2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted ,,
equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic
restraints by referencing numbered descriptive '""'
Drawings. AA
b. Shop Drawings:
(1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including
dimensions, structural member sizes and support point .s®
locations.
Ais
(2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling
hung equipment. ..
(3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work ww
are used for seismic restraint locations, details of
acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit and '"
pipe must be included and approved before the condition Ask
is accepted for installation. Restraint manufacturer's
submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic '"''
loads at all attachment and support points. _
(4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors;
include number, size, and locations for each piece of w`
equipment. ...
c. Seismic Certification and Analysis: ...
(1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all
connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations
must be stamped by a registered professional engineer Auk
with at least five years of seismic design experience,
licensed in the state of the job location. Ars
(2) All restraining devices shall have a pre- approval number — .
from California OSHPD or some other recognized
15600 -3 9 As
A. .
Au ft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most
stringent shall apply.
auk 5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic
consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent,
national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24,
Anth California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements).
6. The Contractor shall correct any variance or non - compliance with these
Specification requirements in an approved manner.
oak 7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as
, detailed in Section H.
B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
4114. 1. Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and
ink equipment.
2. Equipment isolation bases.
3. Flexible piping connections.
al►, 4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
5. Seismic restraints for non - isolated
Ask
equipment.
aR 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
Anok
7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping
pads.
8. All mechanical systems: Equipment buried underground is excluded but
entry of services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment
referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this
Specification).
484 AC Units Condensing Units
Air Distrib. Boxes Ductwork
Air Handling Units Unit Heaters
w Air Separators Fans (all types)
Boilers Heat Exchangers
Cabinet Heaters Piping
Chillers Pumps (all types)
Compressors Rooftop Units
Comp. Room Units Tanks (all types)
Condensers
C. Definitions:
1. Life Safety Systems
- a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler
piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels,
service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke
systems.
4ok b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power
supply including all generators, transfer switches, transformers,
and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or emergency lighting
41111 systems.
c. All medical and life support systems.
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence
including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc.
e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment
schedule.
15600 -3 8
Orik
w,
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2. Foot mount with provision for anchoring to support.
3. Fabricate attachment of saddle supports to pressure vessel with reinforcement ao.
strong enough to resist heat - exchanger movement during a seismic event
when heat - exchanger saddles are anchored to building structure.
2.23 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
A. Configuration: Duplex floor - mounting pumps with receiver and float switches; rated to
dolk
pump minimum 210 deg F steam condensate.
1. Manufacturers: —
a. Domestic Pump; Div. of ITT Industries. .tik
b. Skidmore Div.; Vent -Rite Valve Corp.
c. Federal Pump Corp.
2. Receiver: Floor- mounting, close - grained cast iron; externally adjustable float
switches; with water -level gage, steam condensate thermometer, discharge -
pressure gage for each pump, bronze gate valves between receiver and pumps, '"''
flanges for pump mounting, and lifting eyebolts. Alb
3. Inlet Strainer: Cast iron with self - cleaning bronze screen, dirt pocket, and
cleanout plug on receiver inlet. .w.
4. Pumps: Centrifugal, close coupled, vertical design, permanently aligned, and w�
bronze fitted; with replaceable bronze case rings, stainless -steel shafts, and
mechanical seals; mounted on receiver flanges; rated to operate with a minimum
of 2 feet of NPSH.
5. Control Panel: NEMA 250, Type 2 enclosure with hinged door and grounding
Aft
lug, mounted on pump; factory wired for single external electrical connection;
and with the following components within cabinet: 400
a. Motor controller for each pump. o ,,
b. Electrical pump alternator to operate pumps in lead -lag sequence and
allow both pumps to operate on receiver high level. eft
c. Manual lead -lag control to override electrical pump alternator to
manually select the lead pump.
d. Momentary contact "TEST" push button on cover for each pump. ""`
e. Numbered terminal strip.
f. Disconnect switch.
g. Fused transformer for control circuit. ..a►
h. Auxiliary contacts and float switches for high condensate level alarm. ..�
alek
2.24 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Intent: '""
1. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment „
schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with
flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically Aft
transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected ,..
in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform
deflections. Ills.
2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall
be certified by the manufacturer.
.w8,
3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical
building system components in place during a seismic event. —
4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes, ..
component manufacturer's, and building construction standards. Whenever a
.A
15600 -3 7 ilk
ink
Asok
auk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with
Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials.
18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide soldering materials as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.
19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials as
dook determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with
SFA -5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal
dook
materials.
oik 20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full -faced for cast -iron flanges; raised-
face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.
21. Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed.
2.20 STRAINERS
A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be installed on the inlet
side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller
shall have screwed ends; 2 -1/2" and larger shall have flanged ends.
B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 prig. shall be 250 lb. class. Strainers for
other systems shall be 1251b. class. Strainers shall be Illinois, Barnes and Jones, Armstrong,
4101, or equal, and shall be so installed as to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1/2"
and larger shall be provided with hose end globe valve on blow -off.
2.21 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec. installed above plastered
ceilings, in walls and all other non - accessible s
g , spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings
shall be Karp Type DSC -214 PL (12" x 12 "); access panels in walls shall be Karp type
DSC -211 "Universal" (12" x 12 ").
s • 2.22 SHELL -AND -TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. API Heat Transfer Inc.
' 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
41111 3. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett.
4. Taco, Inc.
Ask
B. Configuration: U -tube with removable bundle.
C. Shell Materials: Steel.
D. Head:
1. Materials: Cast iron.
- 2. Flanged and bolted to shell.
ook
E. Tube:
1. Seamless copper tubes.
2. Tube diameter is determined by manufacturer based on service.
F. Tubesheet Materials: Steel tubesheets.
G. Baffles: Steel.
H. Piping Connections:
1. Shell: Flanged (larger sizes) /threaded (smaller sizes) inlet and outlet fluid
connections, threaded drain, and vent connections.
2. Head: Flanged inlet and outlet fluid connections for larger sizes, threaded for
imok smaller.
Support Saddles:
1. Fabricated of material similar to shell.
15600 -3 6
asok
AMR
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA 4
a. All sizes:: 1 '/2 in. thickness
2.19 PIPE AND FITTINGS ,
A. General
1. Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to establish quality. a t ,
Latest editions of their publications at time of bidding shall be in force.
2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into each and every
length of pipe.
3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread conforming to
ANSI B2.1 -1968.
4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME
B31.1, or ASME B31.9, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping *!*
work.
B. Application
1. Hot Water, Chilled Water, Dual- Temperature Heating/Cooling Water, Steam, Steam
Condensate Return and Pumped Steam Condensate Return: Black steel pipe,
Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded, 2 -1/2" and larger welded, or Type "L"
copper for hot water. a '"
C. Materials
1. Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, A106 or Al20; except comply with ASTM A53 or
A106 where close coiling or bending is required.
2. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B 16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated.
Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for. Schedule 80. auk
3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV.
4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the **
following material group, end connection and facing except as otherwise indicated,
Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for Schedule 80.
a. Material Group: Group 1.1
b. End Connections: Buttwelding
c. Facings: Raised -face
5. Wrought -Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short- "-
radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe.
6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714.
7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, Bonney 4.
"Weldolets" or "Threadolets ", or equal.
8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not
use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1 -1/2" *"
and where pipe size is less than 1 -1/2 ", and do not thread nipples full length (no Ark
close-nipples).
9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard -drawn temper
for water piping; soft temper for oil piping. ,..R
10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306.
11. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280.
12. Wrought- Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
13. Cast - Copper Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B 16.23.
14. Wrought - Copper Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29.
15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43.
16. Cast -Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15. ag.
17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as
15600 -3 5 Ask
M
Alb
w
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water, dual- temperature
heating/cooling water, condensate drains, make -up water and chilled water piping. It
aft shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to maintain the
integrity of the vapor barrier.
` 5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water, dual temperature
heating/cooling water and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe hangers shall be
Amk
furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied continuous along the pipe passing
inside the hanger.
6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as manufactured by
Gustin- Bacon, Manville, or other approved equal.
7. All heating hot water, dual- temperature heating/cooling water, chilled water and
make up water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation,
wk or approved equal. The insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to
exceed .25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F.
' ' Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below. The insulation shall be
applied over clean dry pipe with all joints firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps
atn and the butt strips shall be smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85 -20 adhesive.
8. Insulation of all steam, condensate retum and pumped steam condensate return
Ask piping shall be fiberglass with jacketed cover, thickness to be as listed below.
G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Minimum Pipe Insulation Required:
mok 1. Heating Hot Water:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1 -1/2 in. thickness
b. Mains 1 in. and less: 1 -1/2 in. thickness
c. Mains 1 -1/4 in. to 2 in.: 2 in. thickness
• ,,, d. Mains 2 1/2' and larder: 2 in. thickness
2. Dual Temperature Heating/Cooling Water and Chilled Water:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1 -1/2 in. thickness
b. Mains 1 in. and less: 1 -1/2 in. thickness
,w c. Mains 1 -1/4 in. to 2 in.: 2 in, thickness
d. Mains 2 1/2" and larder: 2 in. thickness
3. Dual Temperature Heating/Cooling Water and Chilled Water in the Attic:
�i. a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 3 in. thickness
b. Mains 1 in. and less: 3 in. thickness
Asok c. Mains 1 -1/4 in. to 2 in.: 3 in. thickness
,po,, 4. Equipment:
a Air separators: 3/4 in. amaflex.
Amk b. Expansion tanks: 3/4 in. armaflex.
c. Steam -to -Water Heat Exchangers: 3" fiberglass with PVC jacket..
d. Chilled water pump housings: 2" fiberglass.
e. Steam flash tanks: 3" fiberglass with PVC jacket.
elk 5. Low Pressure Steam and Condensate Return (15 psig and below):
a. Run outs up to 2 in.: 1 1/2 in. thickness
Ami
b. Mains 1 ' /2" or less: 1 1/2 in. thickness
c. Mains 2 in. to 6 in.: 3 in. thickness
4111i 6. Medium and High Pressure Steam and Condensate Return (16 psig to 125 psig):
a. Mains 1 'A" or less: 2 '/2 in. thickness
b. Mains 1 1/2 in. to 3 in.: 3 in. thickness
41i 7. Drains and vents from hot water, chilled water, steam and condensate return
systems:
15600 -3 4
44111
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA 1114 ""'
ask
not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the elbow on the
connecting horizontal run. 1114
F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all piping; hangers to ,,,6 .
be installed outside pipe insulation.
G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT -121C plastic coated riser clamp; to
be installed immediately below a coupling. ..
2.17 UNIT HEATERS
A. Unit heaters shall be of the vertical and horizontal blow - through propeller fan type with hot Am^
water heating coil. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. 41116
B. Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge furniture steel. It shall be phosphatized and
completely dip painted with a heavy duty baked enamel.
C. Coil shall be constructed on a single serpentine copper tube. Aluminum fins shall be ice
mechanically attached to the coil by expansion. All connections and U -bends shall be
Alk
electrically induction- brazed to the tube. The coil shall be tested for 100 psi.
D. Fan shall be selected for quiet operation and shall be factory balanced.
E. Motor shall have electrical characteristics as shown on Drawings. Motor shall be equipped
with permanent lubricated bearings.
F. Horizontal units shall be equipped with horizontal and vertical adjustable discharge louvers. AIR
G. Unit heaters shall be Vulcan, Modine, Trane, AAF, or equal, as shown on Drawings. A.►
2.18 INSULATION 1414
A. All new air supply and outdoor air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for concealed ducts ..
shall be 1 -1/2 in. thick, 1 pound density glass fiber (flexible) duct insulation with factory
applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with A-
Benjamin Foster No. 85 -20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with 0 ". .
staples and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed duct
insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper wire where ducts _ '
exceed 24 in. in width. ..
B. All concealed air ducts from the outdoor air intakes to the air handling units shall be insulated
in the same manner as for the ductwork for concealed supply ducts.
C. All exposed supply and exhaust ducts in the attic shall be insulated with 3 in. thick, 6 pound
density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to .k
ducts with double prong stick clips. Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and
angles shall be reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard of Benjamin 4114
Foster No. 30 -36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy finish coat of
Benjamin Foster No. 30 -35 Sealfas, all applied according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Pipe Insulation: New piping in all locations shall be insulated. ..
1. All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire retardant and shall
have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25, smoke developed rating not exceeding
50, all complying with NFPA 225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying ..
and sealing jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke ratings. ..®
2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the top of the pipe and
circumferential joints shall be kept to a minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be
concealed by neatly folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and ,
flanges shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining insula-
tion. 1114
3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been tested by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
15600 -3 3 ,,,,
Autot
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
k
Smith College, Northampton, MA
uk 2.15 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
aft A. Expansion tank fitting shall be Taco "Taco -Trol" No.438.
B. Tank drainer shall have drain body with air vent tube, Taco No. 440, with hose end drain
valve. Pipe with auxiliary drain to within 6 ft. 0 in. of finish floor.
C. Air removal fitting shall be in -line type, welded steel, with internal circuiting causing
entrained air to be separated from the water. To be Spiro Vent "Air Separator ", line size,
with drain valve and strainer. No substitutions will be allowed.
__ D. Expansion tank shall be size as noted on Drawings, all steel, A.S.M.E. construction
E. Equivalent products for items A through C as manufactured by Bell & Gossett, Amtrol, or
equal will be approved.
- F. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high points, where
aft shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall be full line size, but in no case
shall they be less than 2 in. steel pipe. Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain
tubing shall be extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are
,n, readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return side of each loop of
radiation before piping drops down to return main. These vents to be key or screw type equal
to Dole or Taco.
G. Automatic Make -Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water system shall be
Bell & Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell & Gossett No. B -3 Reducing Valve set for
approximately 60 inlet and 21 psig outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow preventer
dok PP Y psig Pg � adjustable. P
piped to drain in inlet to automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe valve and one
check valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this Section of the
Alok
Specifications.
4114 H. Furnish and install all temperature - pressure relief valves for all hot water heater systems.
All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by WATTS.
I. Pump Suction Diffusers
1. Furnish and install at each pump a suction diffuser of the size and type required.
Suction diffusers shall be Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, or approved equal.
2. Units shall consist of angle type body with inlet valves combination
dith
diffuser- strainer -orifice cylinder with 3/16 in. diameter openings for pump protec-
tion. A permanent magnet shall be located within the flow stream and shall be
removable for cleaning. The orifice cylinder shall be equipped with a disposable
fine mesh strainer which shall be removed after system start-up. The orifice cylinder
shall be designed to withstand a pressure differential equal to pump shut -off head
and shall have a free area equal to five times the cross section area of the pump
suction opening. Valve length shall be no less than 2 -1/2 times the pump connection
diameter. The units shall be provided with adjustable support foot to carry the
weight of the suction piping.
''""' 2.16 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, Fee &
Mason, or equal.
B. For all pipe 2-1/2" and larger - Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals.
C. For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for tubing 1 -1/4" or less, 10'
intervals for piping at 1 -1/2" and larger.
D. All hangers directly in contact with non - ferrous pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or
plastic 41%, E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1' of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs of pipe
aw
15600-3 2
ANA
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
semi -steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon resilient face, bronze top and bottom
bushings, complete with lever. Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves
which are labeled "Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be ..
furnished with drain kit.
J. Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or Smolensky equal to Ark
Muessco 105 -DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 ,,,
psig ASME rated
2.11 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to Taylor
30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading mercury, 9" scale length, 2°F
subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response but in no .s.
case less than 3 -1/2" nor less than one -third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each
thermometer shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of
matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers —
shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal ,
operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water heating system: 25 -240 ° F
2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES .rk,
A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to Ashcroft ._
"Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be installed with a pulsation
diA
damper (Ashcroft #1106B) and a brass lever handle gauge cock (Ashcroft #1095).
B. Model number, size and range to be as follows: w►
1. Ashcroft - #1018, 3 -1/2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range such that normal ,w
operating pressure is approximately at mid - scale.
Ank
2.13 UNIONS
A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of the system in which -
they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron ,.,p
with brass ground joint equal to Dart Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and
brass piping, they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint. Altk
B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 1501b. raised face. Flanged joints shall ,.►
be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed inside the bolt circle with graphite
applied to both faces.
C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non - ferrous piping to prevent Ark
galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the requirements for tensile strength of
pipe fittings in accordance with Federal Specification WW -U -531 and shall be suitable for
temperatures and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed, or
soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall be separated so that the
electrical current is below 1 percent of the galvanic current which would exist with metal to
metal contact. ..
2.14 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever exposed pipes pass .r
through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are to be two pipe sizes larger than line i*
size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve ,,
without gouging.
orit
15600 -31
AO*
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Amok Smith College, Northampton, MA
Alk
D. Motors: All motors shall have integral thermal overload protection and start at 78 percent of
'"n" rated voltage. Motors operate satisfactorily at 90 percent of rated voltage on all speed
4 116, settings and at 10 percent over voltage without undue magnetic noise. Temperature rise by
winding resistance method does not exceed 50 C. (PSC motors) on high speed. All motors
factory run tested assembled in unit prior to shipping. All motors shall be complete with
+ft motor cords which are quickly detachable at junction box by locking prong connector.
E. Filters: Filters shall be removable from cabinet without removing front panel; filters shall be
1" throw away type. Two extra sets of filters shall be provided for each unit.
w F. Electrical Performance: All cataloged model wires in accordance with National Electric
.w, Code and UL listed.
G. Fan coil unit shall be Trane, Intemational. or McQuay. No substitutions will be allowed.
,, 2.10 VALVES
A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special valves and shall be
41w Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson manufacture based on the following Stockham
valves. All ball valves shall be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and
Anderson. No substitutions will be allowed.
B. All water valves installed in all copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder end pattern, PPe P P g g � atte
P
bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200 pounds non -shock water pressure.
In general, all line service valves are to be gate valves, manual vents are to be globe type.
C. Solder end valves are as follows:
1. Gate Valves - Stockham Figure B -109.
40111 2. Globe Valves - Stockham B -14T.
3. Check Valves - Stockham B -309.
4. Drain Valves - Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap and chain.
5. Ball Valves - Watts Series B- 6001- SS -XH.
D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows:
1. Gate: 2 -1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B -120; 3 in. and larger - Stockham
Figure G -620 or G -623.
2. Globe: 2 -1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B -120 or 752; 3 in. and larger -
"' Stockham Figure G-609 or G -613.
_ _ 3. Check: 2 -1/2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B -319; 3 in. and larger - Stockham
Figure G -931.
4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600- SS -SH.
E. All shut -off valves 2 -1/2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series 0-4000, cast iron body, 316,
steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted
with lever operator for two position operation.
F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following valves when used
,, as balance valves.
G. Balance and/or shut -off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series STAF, neoprene
_w seat, semi -steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 psig
Ask working pressure, 125 pound ANSI flanges, Figure 101F or 118F, G6 -HI2. Provide open
position stop on all valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more
above the floor.
alk H. Balance and/or shut -off valves 2 -1/2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson Series STAF,
�w lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi -steel body with stainless steel or bronze top
and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops
imok for all valves.
, I. For 2 in. and smaller - Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson Figure STAD or STA -D,
dook
a
15600 -3 0
4
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA 401.
breaking piping connections. The pump shall use a mechanical rotating type carbon seal and
shall face against a ceramic seat.
C. Motor shall be drip proof, 1,750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. The w
horsepower of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure non - overloading of the motor
throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be
premium efficiency. ...
D. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.08 CIRCULATING PUMPS (Base Mounted Type) w
A . The pumps shall be of the centrifugal base mounted type, especially designed and
offik
constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be
cast iron, bronze fitted.
B. Pump shall be of the vertically split case, end suction design, making possible complete
servicing without breaking piping or motor connections. Motor to pump connection shall be
of the flexible coupler as manufactured by Blackmere Model 442 or Gould 3196 Series. No
substitutions will be allowed. The pump shall be equipped with grease lubricated bronze Alak
sleeve bearings for smooth and quiet operation.
C. Motor shall be drip proof, 1,750 rpm and shall be especially selected for quiet operation. All `ni
pump motors shall be premium efficiency. The electrical characteristics of the motor shall be
as shown on the Drawings. The horsepower of the motor shall be of such a size as to insure
non - overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without the use of motor service ."
factor.
D. Base shall be of a size suitable for the pump, motor, and shaft, and shall be constructed of
cast iron or welded steel. A concrete base 6" higher than the surrounding floor shall be
provided. Construct base and install as shown by the detail on the Drawings.
E. After completion of the system and before start-up of the pump, the pump shall be lubricated .11k
in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. A metal instruction plate shall be
attached to the pump in a location where it is clearly visible. These instructions shall indicate .a.
the recommended lubricant, the points of lubrication, and the recommended frequency of
lubrication.
F. The HVAC Contractor shall check, test, and start each base mounted pump and shall align
the pump with a dial indicator within 0.002 ". Discharge and suction readings shall be
recorded and forwarded for record purposes.
G. Pumps shall be Gould Model 3196MT. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.09 FAN COIL UNITS
A. General: Unit shall include chassis, coil, fan board, fan wheel(s), housing(s), motor, and
insulation. Chassis shall be galvanized steel wrap - around structural frame with all edges
flanged Insulation shall be faced, heavy density glass fiber. Fan coil units shall be equal to
Trane Company.
B. Water Coils: Water coils shall be 5/8 in. O.D. seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to
corrugated aluminum fins with continuous fin collars and sleeved coil end supports.
Maximum working pressure 300 psig, factory burst test 450 psig (air), and leak test 300 psig
(air under water). Maximum entering water temperature 275 degrees F. Supply and return
connections on side of units as designated on the Contract Drawings. ink
C. Fans: Fan wheels centrifugal, forward- curved, double width of non - corrosive, molded,
fiberglass- reinforced thermo-plastic material on all units. Fan houses of formed sheet metal.
All units shall be complete with three speed fan switch tappings for multi -speed control from
a central processor. 4111,
ww
15600 -2 9
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Ask
Smith College, Northampton, MA
defects in workmanship and material for a period of 12 months from date of
alw acceptance in writing by the Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary
service, adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period.
2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and implement all latest
revisions of software offered by the Contractor that applies to this Project.
2.06 PANEL RADIATORS
A. General: Provide steel panel radiator elements of lengths, locations, capacities and style
as indicated in the drawings and schedules. The wall hung heating panel radiation shall
..s be of one -piece all- welded steel construction, consisting of flattened water tubes welded
to headers at each end. The radiator shall include an integral heavy gauge (0.09"
minimum) all - welded perforated top grille (for curved radiators the grille is omitted). RF
w models to have steel corrugated fins welded to the rear side of the water tubes to increase
the convective output of the unit. There shall be no less than 32 fins per foot. Fins shall
start within 1" of the headers, and shall be spot - welded three times per tube.
aft B. The headers shall include all necessary inlet, outlet and vent connections as required.
Standard connection sizes are 'A" NPT tapered thread for supply and return piping, and
ook
1/8" for the vent connection. Internal baffling is provided where required for proper
Auk water flow.
C. The radiant heating panels shall be available in lengths from 2' -0" to 29' -6" in two inch
oft
even increments without the need for splicing. The panel radiation shall be capable of
w► being mounted to typical stud wall construction without additional blocking or strapping.
Appropriate wall mounting brackets or optional pedestals shall be provided with the
radiation as required.
D. Pressure ratings for the radiation, as indicated in the HVAC schedules, shall be as
__ follows:
1. STANDARD: Working pressure-56 PSI maximum, Test Pressure -74 PSI
maximum
wu 2. MEDIUM: Working pressure -85 PSI maximum, Test Pressure -110 PSI
maximum
'' 3. HIGH: Working pressure -128 PSI maximum, Test Pressure 184 PSI maximum
wr E. Panel radiation expansion shall not exceed 1/64" per foot of radiation at 215 °F. The
installer shall provide adequate expansion compensation for each radiator.
F. The panel radiation shall be cleaned and phosphatized in preparation for the powder coat
__ fmish. The radiation is then finish painted with a gloss powder coat fmish, for a total
,,, paint thickness of 2 -3 mils (0.002" - 0.003 "). The color shall be selected from Runtal's
standard color table.
G. The radiator manufacturer shall provide a sample of the radiator with grille for evaluation
__ by the Architect/Engineer.
H. Ribbed pipe cover trims, finished to match the radiators shall be provided with the
radiation as required to suit construction.
I. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flat tube panel radiation
as manufactured by Runtal North America, Inc. Radson shall be considered an approved
equal.
2.07 CIRCULATING PUMPS (In Line Type)
A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in -line coupled type, especially designed and
constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown on the Drawings. Pumps shall be
Ask cast iron, bronze fitted.
B. Pumps shall be of the vertically split case type making possible complete servicing without
imok
15600 -2 8
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1. Space Temperature AI
2. Hot Water Valve Command DO
3. Fan S/S DO
8. STEAM CONDENSATE PUMP CP -1 CONTROL
a. Unit pumps shall cycle via factory packaged controls (float actuated) to
return condensate from receiver back to the building condensate return
system. If the lead pump fails, the lag pump shall immediately start, and
alarm to the FMS. The lead/lag control is by factory packaged controls.
b. BAS shall monitor pump status via current transformers and alarm for
pump failure.
c. Sump level will be monitored by DDC system for high level alarm. ,.►
d. Points list:
1. Lead Pump Status DI
AMIN
2. Lag Pump Status DI
3. High Condensate Level Alarm DI
9. PROTECTIVE COVERS:
1. Furnish and install concealed sensors located in the following areas:
a. Toilets, Halls, Corridors, Lobbies, Entries. -
Adjustment and Calibration: "
1. On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely calibrate, test, and
adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls, thermostats, valves, damper motors, and
relays provided under his contract and be present for functional tests on systems. ANfra
The Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run, and
adjusted.
2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the entire control and
management system must be complete, controls calibrated. The controlled devices
will be physically inspected and checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in
fact, under proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of operation.
3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps:
a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and Shop Drawings.
b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and accuracy,
simultaneously with mechanical system balancing. ,w►
c. Review of system with Engineer.
d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and acceptance.
e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have been in full ,.w
operation, review problems with Owner, recheck all adjustments, and —
recalibrate as required.
4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional manual covering
the function and operation of all control and management system components on the
job, which shall include a trouble- shooting and operating procedure. This manual
shall be furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the total _
integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be provided for instruction ,,.®
purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall furnish schematic systems control dia-
grams to be delivered to the Owner on AutoCAD disks.
5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered complete nor
acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of Operation have been attained, all
temperatures are maintained within specified limits of all operating conditions, and
all systems damper leakage of controlled within specified limits.
J. Service and Guarantee: „ft.
1. The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be guaranteed free from
15600 -2 7
AMR
Ami
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4. EXHAUST FAN EF -1 CONTROL
Aft a. Toilet exhaust fan EF -1 shall be controlled by a time schedule from the
BAS. When the fan is commanded to start the exhaust damper shall
energize. Once the damper is proven open via end switch the fan shall
wk be allowed to start. An amperage switch installed on the exhaust fan
Aw, motor shall indicate fan status. If the DDC controller is calling for the
fan to be on and the amp switch is off, a fan failure alarm shall be sent to
the BAS.
w b. Typical Points List:
aft 1 . EF -1 S/S DO
2. EF -1 Status DI
3. Exhaust Damper Command DO
4. Exhaust Damper Position DI
5. EXHAUST FAN EF -2 CONTROL
a. Mechanical Room exhaust fan EF -2 shall be controlled by a space
__ temperature sensor. When the respective space temperature rises above
setpoint (80 degrees F, adjustable) the exhaust fan shall be commanded
+�► to start. Once commanded to start the exhaust damper and intake damper
*_ shall be energized open. Once both dampers are proven open via end
switches the exhaust fan shall be allowed to start. An amperage switch
installed on the exhaust fan motor shall indicate fan status. If the DDC
auk controller is calling for the fan to be on and the amp switch is off, a fan
failure alarm shall be sent to the BAS.
b. Typical Points List:
1. EF -2 S/S DO
,, 2. EF -2 Status DI
3. Exhaust Damper Command DO
Aak
4. Exhaust Damper Position DI
5. Outdoor Air Intake Damper Command DO
6. Outdoor Air Intake Damper Position DI
Auk
7. Space Temperature AI
aft 6. TYPICAL PANEL RADIATOR (PR) CONTROL
a. The space DDC temperature sensor shall cycle the 2- position hot water
control valve to maintain space temperature setpoint (70 degrees F,
ink adjustable).
in,,, b. Space temperature shall be capable of being set -back during the
unoccupied period.
c. Typical Points List:
1. Space Temperature AI
s�► 2. Hot Water Valve Command DO
7. TYPICAL HOT WATER UNIT HEATER (UH) CONTROL
An► a. The space DDC temperature sensor shall cycle the 2- position hot water
control valve to maintain space temperature setpoint (70 degrees F,
adjustable).
b. A strap -on aquastat shall prevent the fan from operating if there is no hot
water available.
b. Space temperature shall be capable of being set -back during the
unoccupied period.
c. Typical Points List:
Aoki
15600 -2 6
..w
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA "`
b. During the unoccupied mode, enable freeze protection
pump whenever the outdoor air temperature is below 40
degrees F (adjustable).
c. Freeze protection pump status: BAS shall monitor freeze
protection pump status via differential pressure switch. *"`
If the pump fails, generate a critical alarm at the BAS
and fully open the water coil 2 -way control valve.
2. Temperature low limit switch at entering side of supply fan de- .R
energizes unit supply and exhaust fans, closes outside air and ..
exhaust dampers, deenergized the enthalpy wheel drive motor
iNtk
opens 100% the water control valve to coil when air temperature
falls below 38 degrees F (adjustable). A critical alarm shall be 41111k
indicated at the BAS. .,
BAS shall monitor the intake damper open and closed positions through
damper end switches. In the event the damper closes in a non -alarm 41
condition, stop supply fan, close outdoor air damper and initiate an alarm __
at the BAS.
j. Filter bank differential pressure:
1. The AHU is equipped with three filter banks: 30% supply pre-
filters, 90% supply bag final - filters and 30% exhaust pre- filters.
,wu
A pressure differential indicating sensor across the filter banks
shall indicate an alarm at the BAS for high or low pressure Auk
conditions. Provide independent transmitters for each individual
irk
filter bank.
k. Cooling Coil Condensate Control: BAS shall provide an overflow sensor '•°
in the cooling coil drain pan and alarm at the BAS if approaching an
alarm condition. During alarm condition the supply fan and exhaust fan
shall be disabled. Aft
1. Points List: A.*
1. Supply Fan S/S DO
2. Supply Fan Status DI
3. Exhaust Fan S/S DO ..
4. Exhaust Fan Status DI w
5. Outside Air Damper Command DO
6. Outside Air Damper Position DI
7. Exhaust Damper Command DO
8. Exhaust Damper Position DI
9. Enthalpy Wheel Drive Motor S/S DO _
10. Enthalpy Wheel Drive Motor Status DI 4114.
11. Discharge Air Temperature Al
12. Outside Air Temperature (common) AI
13. Outdoor Air Relative Humidity (common) AI
14. Hot Water Valve Command AO
15. Freeze Protection Pump S/S DO
16. Freeze Protection Pump Status DI *�►
17. Low Temperature Thermostat Shutdown DI ,.a
18. Fire Alarm Shutdown (as required) DI (as
required)
19. Filter Differential Pressure (3) DI (2) ifs&
20. Cooling Condensate High Level Alarm DI
15600 -2 5 �,
am
lath
Aiok
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
c. Occupied Mode:
'_ 1. During the occupied mode of operation the unit's supply fan,
exhaust fan and enthalpy wheel drive motor shall run to provide
conditioned air to the occupied zone.
"uk 2. Discharge air temperature control shall come under control of the
awk BAS.
d. Unoccupied Mode:
1. The Unoccupied Mode shall commence at the pre - programmed
+!* unoccupied start time. During the unoccupied mode, the unit's
w� supply fan, return fan and enthalpy wheel drive motor shall de-
energize and the outdoor air and exhaust air dampers shall close.
e. Unit operation:
1 . The BAS shall index the unit between modes of operation
talk
(occupied/unoccupied) by a time schedule.
As, 2. Unit start/stop shall also be manually selectable through the
_ 41111. BAS.
3. Once the unit is indexed into the occupied mode of operation the
supply fan and exhaust fan shall be enabled and the enthalpy
oisk wheel drive motor shall energize. Air handling unit an outside
air damper interlocked with the supply fan and an exhaust
damper interlocked with the exhaust fan. Before either fan is
° l* allowed to start both damper shall be fully open as proven by
Ask
end switches. Whenever the fans stop all dampers shall close.
4. If a fan failure occurs at the supply fan, exhaust fan or enthalpy
"` wheel drive motor, as detected by a current switches at each
motor, the fans are stopped, outside air and exhaust air dampers
shall close, and as alarm is generated at the BAS. This interlock
gook
is disabled for 30 seconds (adjustable) after the unit is initially
dok commanded to start. Fans are locked out until manually reset
through the BAS.
f. System volume control:
1. System operates at a constant speed/constant volume.
2. Fan speed for the AHU supply fan shall track the speed of
exhaust fan EF -1W. Minimum and maximum VFD speed
settings for the exhaust fan and AHU shall be determined in the
doh field by the BAS Contractor and balancing Contractor.
g. AHU discharge air temperature is controlled through the BAS with
osik temperature sensors.
h. Dual- temperature heating/cooling coil temperature control:
1. The air handling unit has a dual - temperature heating/cooling
"` water coil with a dedicated freeze pump. Coil discharge air
temperature controller, with averaging type sensor, modulates
the fail -open 2 -way modulating control valve to maintain
ANk
discharge air temperature setpoint (70 degrees F summer,
adjustable /65 degrees F winter, adjustable).
2. Hot water coil freeze protection pump control:
a. During the occupied mode, enable freeze protection
pump whenever the outdoor air temperature is below 45
As,,, degree F (adjustable).
Atok
ink
15600 -24
4ANA
w
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA '"""
1. Outdoor Air Temperature AI
2. Outdoor Air Relative Humidity Al Auk
3. "Cooling" Mode Command DO
4. "Heating" Mode Command DO
5. Motorized Valve MV -1 Command DO 40.
6. Motorized Valve MV -1 PositionDI
7. Motorized Valve MV -2 Command DO
8. Motorized Valve MV -2 PositionDI Alb
9. Motorized Valve MV -3 Command DO ,.e
10. Motorized Valve MV -3 PositionDI
11. Motorized Valve MV -4 Command DO
12. Motorized Valve MV -4 PositionDI
13. Motorized Valve MV -5 Command AO ,ft
14. Motorized Valve MV -5 PositionAI
15. Motorized Valve MV -6 Command AO
16. Motorized Valve MV -6 PositionAl
17. Primary CHWS Temperature AI
18. Primary CHWR Temperature AI
19. HCWS Temperature AI ,.k
20. HCWR Temperature AI
21. HWS Temperature AI
22. HWR Temperature AI 44
23. Pump HCWP -1 S/S DO
24. Pump HCWP -1 Status DI
25. Pump HCWP -1 VFD Command AO �!
26. Pump HCWP -1 VFD Fault DI
27. Pump HCWP -2 S/S DO
28. Pump HCWP -2 Status DI
29. Pump HCWP -2 VFD Command AO
30. Pump HCWP -2 VFD Fault DI
31. HCWS &R System Diff. Pressure AI
32. Pump HWP -1 S/S DO ...
33. Pump HWP -1 Status DI
34. Pump HWP -1 VFD Command AO
35. Pump HWP -1 VFD Fault DI
36. Pump HWP -2 S/S DO
37. Pump HWP -2 Status DI
38. Pump HWP -2 VFD Command AO 416
39. Pump HWP -2 VFD Fault DI ,-
40. HWS &R System Diff. Pressure Al
41. HX -1 1/3 Steam Valve Command AO AR.
42. HX -1 2/3 Steam Valve Command AO ..w.
3. TYPICAL ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR (ERV) CONTROL
a. Energy recovery ventilator is a modular air handling unit with an
enthalpy heat recovery wheel. The system is designed as _
heating/cooling, single duct, constant air volume, constant discharge air . _
temperature system utilizing 100% outside air. The air handling unit
includes a supply fan, exhaust fan and enthalpy wheel motor /drive
assembly.
b. The unit shall operate either in the Occupied Mode or Unoccupied Mode.
15600 -2 3 -
aw
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Ank
Smith College, Northampton, MA
mak
differential pressure of 12 psig (adjustable) at the end of
art the longest run. Differential pressure setting and sensor
location shall be coordinated in the field with the
Balancing Contractor and BAS Contractor. HWS &R
supply and return water temperature as well as pump
ask status (via differential pressure switches on each pump)
shall be monitored at the BAS. Upon a failure of the
lead pump the BAS shall start the standby pump, stop
Aik the lead pump and alarm at the BAS. The standby pump
shall come under control of the DDC controller
Anok
differential pressure sequence. The HWS &R pumps
shall operate on a run/standby arrangement and shall be
duty- cycled based on equal run time.
c. The BAS shall reset the hot water supply temperature
`" inversely proportional to the outdoor air temperature as
follows:
1. Outdoor air temperature 20 degrees F
(adjustable): HWS temperature 180 degrees F
(adjustable)
2. Outdoor air temperature 60 degrees F
(adjustable): HWS temperature 120 degrees F
mik (adjustable)
ow* d. The heat exchanger has 1/3 -2/3 steam valve control.
The steam heat exchanger 1/3 and 2/3 steam control
valves shall be modulated as follows to maintain the
required hot water supply temperature to the system:
1. The 1/3 control valve shall modulate open as
required to maintain hot water supply
A temperature. When the 1/3 valve reaches full
w. open position, and there is a call for additional
heating capacity, the 2/3 valve shall modulate
open and the 1/3 valve shall close fully. The 2/3
valve shall modulate as required. If additional
Ask
heating capacity is required, the 1/3 valve shall
again modulate open with the 2/3 valve
remaining fully open.
ak
2. As the demand for heating capacity decreases,
Auk the valves shall modulate and be staged in
reverse sequence.
e. During the "Heating" mode the HCWS system supply
411, water temperature shall be reset, via motorized valve
dok MV -5, inversely proportional to the outdoor air
temperature as follows:
1. Outdoor air temperature 20 degrees F
(adjustable): HWS temperature 150 degrees F
Ask (adjustable)
2. Outdoor air temperature 60 degrees F
(adjustable): HWS temperature 120 degrees F
(adjustable)
f. Points list:
a
s
15600 -2 2
omi
4111.
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA ..11..
Alk
2. M -2: Closed
3. M -3: Open
4. M-4: Open
5. M -5: Modulate to reset HCWS
6. M -6: Closed A``
c. BAS shall monitor motorized valve positions and alarm ..
if valves are not in the proper position.
d. Heat exchanger HX -1 and hot water pumps HWP -1 & .,
HWP -2 shall be enabled.
4. Chilled Water System CHWS &R Control:
a. When the building is indexed to the "Cooling" mode and
the isolation valves described above will index to the 1 ' a
appropriate positions, allowing primary central plant
chilled water to flow through the building.
b. Motorized valve MV -6 shall modulate as required to
maintain primary chilled water return temperature of 55 ati
degrees F (adjustable) returning back to the central plant
c. Primary chilled water supply and return water
temperature shall be monitored by the BAS.
5. Dual - Temperature HCWS &R System (HCWP -1 & HCWP -2)
Ask
Control:
a. The HCWS &R system shall be enabled from the BAS ..*
and run continuously. The lead hot water pump shall
energize and come under control of its VFD. (VFD by
this Contractor.) 40,
b. The HCWS &R system differential pressure shall be .e►
monitored at the end of the longest run. The DDC
controller shall modulate the pump VFD to maintain a Ak "`
differential pressure of 12 psig (adjustable) at the end of ,."
the longest run. Differential pressure setting and sensor
location shall be coordinated in the field with the
Balancing Contractor and BAS Contractor. HCWS &R ..k
supply and return water temperature as well as pump ,..
status (via differential pressure switches on each pump)
shall be monitored at the BAS. Upon a failure of the
lead pump the BAS shall start the standby pump, stop
the lead pump and alarm at the BAS. The standby pump
shall come under control of the DDC controller
differential pressure sequence. The HCWS &R pumps 1.R
shall operate on a run/standby arrangement and shall be
duty - cycled based on equal run time. Ask
6. Heating HWS &R System (HX -1, HWP -1 & HWP -2) Control: Aft
a. Whenever the building system is switched to the
AR
"Heating" mode the lead HWP shall be enabled. Once
enabled, if the outdoor air temperature falls below 65 4*
degrees F (adjustable) the lead pump shall energize and
come under control of its VFD.
b. The HWS &R system differential pressure shall be
monitored at the end of the longest run. The DDC w,
controller shall modulate the pump VFD to maintain a
..w
15600 -2 ,,,�
AIR
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
oft
2. Fan Low Speed S/S DO
o` 3. Fan High Speed S/S DO
oft 4. Fan Status DI
5. Water Valve Command AO
'' 6. Push -button Override DI
oft 7. Cooling Condensate High Level Alarm DI
2. DUAL TEMPERATURE HEATING /COOLING WATER SYSTEM
oft
(CHWS &R, HCWS &R & HWS &R) CONTROL
f► a. Dual temperature heating/cooling water system change -over:
oft
1. The system shall be automatically switched between "Heating
Mode" and "Cooling Mode" from the BAS. The system shall
allow a deadband between change -over from one mode to
oft
another of a minimum of 15 degrees F (adjustable) outdoor air
temperature. Maximum deadband between change -over shall be
_ _ 30 degrees F (adjustable). Once a mode has been selected the
„, system shall operate in that mode for a minimum time period of
four hours (adjustable) before switching over to the other mode.
oft 2. Heating to Cooling:
oft a. All HVAC equipment shall be changed to "Cooling"
mode of operation.
b. Motorized isolation valves shall be indexed to the
o► following positions:
oft
1. M -1: Open
2. M -2: Open
3. M -3: Closed
oft
4. M -4: Closed
MA 5. M -5: Disabled
oft 6. M -6: Modulate to maintain CHWR at 55 degrees
oft
F
c. BAS shall monitor motorized valve positions and alarm
if valves are not in the proper position.
o► d. Heat exchanger HX -1 and hot water pumps HWP -1 &
HWP -2 shall be disabled.
e. A temperature sensor located in the main HCWR line
shall indicate return water temperature at the BAS. If
AINA
the HCWR temperature is above 90 degrees F
o (adjustable) a heat dissipation sequence shall index the
oft energy recovery units to the occupied mode of operation
and open the control valves to dissipate the heat.
alk f. When the HCWR temperature is under 90 degrees F
o (adjustable) the heat dissipation loop shall be de-
energized and the ERV's shall return to their previous
oft
mode of operation.
oft 3. Cooling to Heating:
a. All HVAC equipment shall be changed to "Heating"
mode of operation.
oft b. Motorized isolation valves shall be indexed to the
oft following positions:
1. M -1: Closed
oft 15600-2 0
oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA .w
through the use of a 2 -button "mouse" operator interface to monitor and control all
functions and sequences within the system. oft
H. Sequences of Operation:
Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment provided by
Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each paragraph describes a specific
control sequence for a component of the equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each specific
control sequence will require appropriate I/O points, which are listed at the end of each
sequence in parenthesis. All sequences and systems shall have full graphic capabilities at the ...
operator workstation.
Common requirements:
a. All setpoints shall be program adjustable at the operator workstation.
b. All high and low limits shall be alarmed. ofoo
c. All hydronic proof of operation shall be via differential pressure sensors.
d. All fan proof of operation shall be via current sensors. w '
e. All unit smoke detection and emergency shutdown shall be done by �*
hardwire interlock and shall not rely on control system programming. .RR
f. All dampers shall have open and close status indication through end
switches or integral actuator features.
g. All dampers shall have an independent control point. Multiple dampers of oolk
different applications (i.e. outdoor air, exhaust air, relief) controlled from a
single point are not acceptable.
h. All air handling systems with ducted outdoor air shall be provided with
freeze protection.
1. TYPICAL FAN COIL UNIT (FCU) CONTROL '`
a. Heating Mode: On a call for heating the BAS shall energize the fancoil w
unit supply fan on low speed and modulate the 2 -way modulating control
valve to maintain space temperature setpoint (70 degrees F, adjustable).
If the coil valve is full open and there is a continued demand for heat the IR
BAS shall toggle the fan speed to the high position. Reverse sequence .■►
shall occur as space temperature rises above setpoint.
b. Cooling Mode: On a call for cooling the BAS shall energize the fancoil
unit supply fan on low speed and modulate the 2 -way modulating control
valve to maintain space temperature setpoint (72 degrees F, adjustable).
If the coil valve is full open and there is a continued demand for cooling
the BAS shall toggle the fan speed to the high position. Reverse oak
sequence shall occur as space temperature falls below setpoint.
osok
c. Fan status shall be monitored by the BAS via amp switch. An alarm
shall be sent to the BAS under a fan failure condition. .0
d. Space temperature shall be capable of being set -back during the
unoccupied period.
e. Each zone temperature sensor shall be equipped with a push -button _
override switch. In the event a zone is overridden the respective FCU
shall be switched to the occupied mode of operation for a pre-
programmed amount of time (2 hours, adjustable). "
e. Cooling Coil Condensate Control: BAS shall provide an overflow sensor or ,,
in the cooling coil drain pan and alarm at the BAS if approaching an
Rk
alarm condition. During alarm condition the supply fan shall be '
disabled. —
f. Typical Points List: .�.
1. Space Temperature AI
oak
15600 -19
Aft
410116
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, Model A70HA-
ink 1C.
k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way valves shall be
Spartan two position valves. All three -way valves shall be Barber Colman
auk with Belimo Actuators, Model AF24 -S.
1. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge and jam seals
and internal linkage. Damper operators shall be provided for all dampers
Aft
equal to Belimo AF24 -S with AV10 -18 or 2G -JSA shaft extensions where
Alk required.
w 5. Local Site Communication Network
a. The modules shall communicate within their respective network with a
token passing technique. This network shall be consistent with the IEEE
41% RS -485 standard, including a minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained
at a minimum of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring
required for the local site network.
F. Software
1. The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the
"'` functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for
dook flexibility in expansion or revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum,
include:
a. Complete database entry
Aft b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the sequence of
operation indicated
c. Graphics of each system as shown on the I/O Summary Tables
d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and non - critical alarms
e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated
G. Systems Software
doh 1. The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different colors, the following
system information:
General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local
landmarks.
aft Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a
range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their
Aft
respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as zones' comfort
+a condition change. Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone.
Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided.
dekk
Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components
serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. It shall
also provide a current status of all UO points being controlled and applicable to each
piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering units at
i n k appropriate locations on the graphic representation.
atik 2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software modules. Each
module shall have an associated priority level and shall execute as determined by the
program controller as defined in the real time operating system.
_w► 3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in a functional
mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming alarms shall be displayed while
oink
the operator is in a word processing, spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The
system must automatically switch from a non - energy management mode, respond to
an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the previous functional mode.
Aft
4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all control functions
dik
15600 -18
Alb
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA 00,
range of application.
5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of + 0.75 °F _
over the range of their application. .�
b. Pressure Instruments
1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors shall have a "`
4-20 MA output proportional signal with provisions for field check-
ing.
Sensors shall withstand up to 150% of rated pressure, without
damaging the device. Accuracy shall be within +2 of full scale.
Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR- 272- 2 -XX -B-
1 -2 -2.
2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a repetitive
accuracy of + 2% of range and withstand up to 150% of rated ..�
pressure. Sensors shall be diaphragm or bourdon tube design.
Switch operation shall be adjustable over the operating pressure
range. The switch shall have an application rated Form C, __
snap - acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy, silver alloy, or _
gold plating. Switches shall be manufactured by Johnson Controls,
Model P- 74FA -5 -C. -°
c. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy of + 1% of _
their operating range. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the
operating flow range. Switches shall have snap - acting Form C contacts
rated for the specific electrical application. ..►
d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an accuracy of
+0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to full lead power factor.
Input ranges for kW and kWh transducers shall be selectable without .l*
requiring the changing of current or potential transformers, and shall have Alt
dry contact pulse accumulation.
e. Voltage -to- Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status of boiler or ,.►
chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized and connected so as not to AR .
impede the function of the monitored contacts. Switch shall have self-
wiping, snap - acting Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris ..�
Industries, Inc. Hawkeye 735. 40,
f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of over a range of
20% to 95% RH, Visala Mod. HMW -40U.
g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch
shall have self - wiping, snap - acting Form C contacts rated for the applica- .lb
tion. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable.
h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the ""
loading application, with self - wiping, snap - acting Form C contacts,
enclosed in dustproof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts
with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be ft
equipped with coil transient suppression devices.
Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10
billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15 V root mean square, or
greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations
or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20 °F- 140 °F. ..�
Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for
the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less.
Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays. ,—
.a.
15600 -17
.mw
Aft
4,14
41Ik
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
4164
Smith College, Northampton, MA
units, exhaust fans, unit ventilators, etc.
look b, Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet through the Tnet
Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall provide one RS485 port for a
Cmnet connection and one RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition,
a direct connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of a
laptop computer.
c. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each T-Line
411
controller shall store a default algorithm which maintains the space
look temperature until communication with the TNI is restored.
d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands
via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The database and all application
programs for each T-Line shall be stored in read/writable non-volatile
memory within the TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery
backup of at least five years.
e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform full DDC/PID
410+ control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide normal binary type output.
f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone temperature
4.4
sensors, such as: temperature sensor only, temperature sensor with built-in
411Ik local override switch, with setpoint adjustment switch.
g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow transducer
As*
for accurate air flow measurement in order to provide the Pressure
Independent VAV operation.
h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual status of
41111k
communication, power, and all outputs.
alk i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating at 9600 baud
dok to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically isolated.
3. Terminal Control Devices - T-Line
a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC maximum, 3 amp
Auk maximum current. Each configurable as normally open or normally closed,
and either dry contact or bussed.
b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with 0-100K Ohm
input impedance.
c. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one thermistor input,
dik
one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch and an
dok • occupancy LED indicator.
4. Instrumentation and Control
a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have accuracy
ors* ratings as indicated and/or required for the application and shall permit
ish accuracy rating of within 1% of the temperature range of their intended use.
1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the averaging type
dik
and have an accuracy of +1°F. Kele Precon Model ST-FZ.
2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range of -52°F to
152°F and an accuracy of within +1°F in this temperature range.
4.4
Kele Precon Model ST-0.
3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of + 0.25°F in
the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA-10K-2-RSO-RLC Type
3 with network connector, warm/cool adjustment, override switch
411111 and LED Occupied/Unoccupied indicator.
doth 4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of +0.25°F in their
15600-16
Ai*
Ask
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal
strips to field mounted devices.
4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units being controlled by ...
the ATC Contractor.
5. Wiring of all electro - mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature
control panels. .w
6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC subcontractor from
sources provided by the Electrical Contractor specifically for that purpose.
7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. All power
wiring will be installed and terminated by the Electrical Contractor. Power wiring w
shall be defined as follows:
a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 120 volt
(except for power to the temperature control panels). A ft
b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric motors.
c. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control panels where
required.
d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects for each air
compressor.
e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors. w►
f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and from compressor
ow
motor starters to compressor motor.
0"
E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system _
performance.
1. Global Network Controller - LANgate —
a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor -based communications device
which acts as a gateway between the System Control Module Network
(CMnet) and the Global Network (Lgnet).
b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer -to- peer" networks which allow
all control modules to communicate with equal authority.
c. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any combination
of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit controllers, and/or Control
Modules.
oow
d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global information from the
various Cmnets which may be installed throughout a building. 0"
e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5 Mbps), or ,liN,
Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of which may be imple-
mented over fiber optic, twisted pair, or coaxial cable.
f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers. AR*
g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects require more
than 100 controllers.
h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each supporting up ..
to 100 controllers (total capacity exceeds 500,000 points per Lgnet).
i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be connected to
Central Site Workstations, portable computers, or modems. Allth
j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users, whether they
are communicating through the same LANgate or different ones.
2. Terminal Control Modules - T- Line
a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the Direct Digital ,,,
Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air handling units, fan coil
15600 -15 —
4w►
4114
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
ask
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Armi
d. Uniform Building Code
e. Uniform Mechanical Code
ANA f. Uniform Plumbing Code
g. UL916
Ark h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive shall apply.
row Nothing in these plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work
not conforming to applicable codes.
C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance
1. Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings shall be submitted
and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including
manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation
instructions. Shop Drawings shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic
diagrams, tag number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any other
details required to demonstrate that the system will function properly. Drawings
shall show proposed layout and installation of all equipment and the relationship to
4111% other parts of the work.
2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College before any
ork
equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must be submitted in time for
review so that all installations can be completed per the project's completion
schedule.
3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and updated or
corrected to provide "as- built" Drawings to show exact installation. The system will
, not be considered complete until the "as- built" Drawings have received their final
approval. The Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of "as- built" Drawings, and one
(1) CADD disk of these Drawings.
isat 4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide I/O Summary forms that
include:
a. Description of all points.
w. b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to the equipment
for each function.
oork
c. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece of equipment.
rek d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case of failure
5. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software program proposed to be
used on the project as part of the submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the
♦ submittal process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of the pro -
__ ject, shall be accurately reflected in the "as- built" graphic software flow diagrams
herein required by this specification.
ao 6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all software application
osik programs to ensure they are free from design errors and that they accurately
accomplish the application sequence of operations. The simulation must show each
output value and how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock
may run at normal time increments, increased increments (fast motion) or decreased
increments (slow motion).
mok
D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by the ATC
Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows:
1. All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature control system
components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and high and low limit protective
err devices.
ter, 2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system components,
such as solenoid air valve.
w
1 5600 -14
Am
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS �*
Smith College, Northampton, MA
profession of temperature control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment �.
shall be fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all respects,
including room thermostats, immersion thermostats, switches, relays, valves,
cabinets and other accessory equipment, and a complete system of control wiring for **
integration into existing remaining reused controls where specified, all connected
and properly integrated to the control system.
5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize electric /electronic '"'
power using Belimo Controls for the control dampers and valves. „
6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature
control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Contractor and shall '—
conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - Electrical ."
Work. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes.
7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid "`
nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape. A
B. Scope of Work
1. All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee Technology, Inc. of Al
Ludlow, MA. or Automated Building Systems of Natick, MA. It is the ar
responsibility of this Contractor to co- ordinate all HVAC work with the Temperature .®
Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid.
2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware, wiring, pneumatic """
tubing, computing equipment and software as defined in this specification. ,,ft
3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured and available and not custom designed especially for this project. All .wt
systems and components, except site specific software, shall have previously been
thoroughly tested and proven in actual use prior to installation on this project.
4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion of application '
software, system peripherals, and field hardware. ,sk
5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to acceptance of the
project, shall perform all operating functions as detailed in this Specification.
6. Provide the following system hardware: olitk
a. Central Site(s) and Control Modules
AAA
b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the functions
listed in I/O Summary Tables. A►
c. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers required to perform ,*
the functions listed in UO Summary Tables.
d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing.
e. All modems and accessories. ,,,
f. All variable frequency drives (VFD's).
7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The database required Aft
for implementation of these specification shall be provided by the Contractor, .uk
including: point descriptor, alarm limits, calibration variables, graphics, reports and
point summaries.
8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of the points and —
perform all the function as listed in I/O Summary Tables attached to the end of this ARA
specification.
9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and its installation
shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities: ,,,,
a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
b. National Electric Code (NEC)
c. National Fire Code
wk.
15600 -13 —
Aft
Aft.
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
made of solid steel with tachometer openings. Inlet vanes shall be furnished where so called
Atok for on the schedule.
Asok D. Coil sections shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with removable panels and shall be
arranged for the removal of the coil from either end of the unit. Combination hot
water /chiller coils shall consist of 5/8 in. o.d. copper tubing on 1 -1/2 centers arranged in a
staggered pattern with respect to circulation of air flow. They shall be bonded to the tubes by
w hydraulic expansion of tubes and the coils tested with 300 lbs. pneumatic pressure under
water.
E. The heating coil shall be of the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper tubes type,
aft assembled in a zinc coated steel frame. The coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper
drainage. the coil shall be tested at 250 psig air pressure under water. Coils shall be of the
'""'' steam distributing, "non- freeze" type.
__ F. All units furnished with chilled water coils shall have stainless steel drain pans pitched for
even flow of condensate with side drain connections on both sides of unit. Provide copper
tube "P" trap with cleanout in condensate drain piping, "P" traps shall be equal to unit
atik pressure.
G. Provide, where noted on schedules, internal face and bypass dampers with full size coils.
liPok
H. High capacity mixing section shall be furnished with properly located access doors equipped
oft with handles. Internal slides shall be provided for filter racks. Filters shall be removable
from either end of Section.
Aok
I. Bag filter and pre -filter sections shall be provided with all units. Each unit shall be furnished
with three (3) sets of pre and final filters.
,■ J. Airflow Measuring Outside Air Dampers: Provide factory- mounted damper in the
outdoor air opening to measure airflow. Construct with galvanized steel damper blades,
housed in a galvanized steel frame and mechanically fastened to a rotating axle rod.
Auk Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at 1 -inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4 -inch wg.
The airflow measurement station shall measure up to 100 percent of total outside air
w and/or return air. The airflow monitoring device shall adjust for temperature variations.
AIR The airflow monitoring output shall be a 2 -10 vdc signal proportional to velocity. The
accuracy of the airflow measurement station shall be + / -5 percent.
K. All sections with access doors shall have factory wired convenience receptacles and factory
wired marine type light fixtures with guard and switch.
2.05 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. General Requirements
s k 1. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Yankee
technology, Inc. or Automated Building Systems.
2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing Automated Logic
(ALC) WebCTRL BAS operating platform. All system points will be networked
using Lan Gate Routers (LGR) tied into the Campus Ethernet, sharing all new and
existing points in real time date. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop
site specific operating parameters, building name, general area maps, floor plans,
mechanical system graphics, and thermal graphs, all to be displayed graphically at
the central site (CS) via the existing software programs.
3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be manufactured by Automated
Logic, or equal, with peripheral electric /electronic devices manufactured by Barber
Colman.
4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by Automated Logic,
i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The system shall be a properly
integrated system installed by competent mechanics regularly employed in the
4
w
15600 -12
A
A
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
registers shall have sponge rubber gaskets at perimeter of frame. Volume dampers shall
be alien key operated. All units shall be installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest
wall.
B. Colors and finishes of registers, grilles & and diffusers shall be as selected by the A
Architect from the manufacturer's standard finishes, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Diffusers schedule is based on Titus. Price, Tutle & Bailey and Nailor are approved
equals.
D. Schedule:
1. Ceiling Diffuser (CD): Titus model TDC -AA, square louver face ceiling supply
diffuser with removable core, lay -in border, flush face, aluminum construction,
4-way throw unless otherwise noted/indicated on the drawings. Provide with
factory round damper and opposed blade damper.
2. Return and Exhaust Registers (CRR & CER): Titus model 350FL, aluminum ..
louver type ceiling exhaust/return register, 35 degree louvers, 3 /4" blade spacing,
Akt
border as required.
3. Supply Registers (TSR): Titus model 272FS, aluminum wall supply register,
double deflection with adjustable vertical front blades spaced 3 /4 ", flanged border A�
and opposed blade damper.
4. Linear Slot Diffuser Type A (LD -A): Titus model ML -39, modulinear slot
diffuser, aluminum construction, two (2) 1" slots, 2 -way discharge with 180 „
degree gradual discharge adjustment, 48" length unless noted otherwise on the
drawings. Provide each unit with MPI insulated plenum with round or oval inlet
equal to duct size.
5. Bottom Return and Exhaust Registers (BRR & BER) - Titus Model 1700, removable
core register with opposed blade damper. "
2.04 AIR HANDLING UNIT (AHU)
A. Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, central station draw - through units of the
types, sizes, and capacities as scheduled on the Drawings. All units shall be A_
factory- assembled and tested and shall be as manufactured by the Trane Company, York
International or McQuay. No substitutions will be allowed.
B. Units shall consist of modular fan and coil sections, filter section, internal face and bypass
sections where called for, adjustable motor bases for high efficiency, totally enclosed NEMA
frame motors, and OSHA approved belt guards. Casing shall be of complete frame with
removable panels, modular, flush mounted into the unit framework with properly located Aft
access panels. Casing shall be double wall insulated with a 1 in. minimum thickness ,,la
fiberglass insulation with a density of not less than 1 -1/2 lbs. accordance with NFPA Bulletin
No. 90A. Insulation shall be secured to casing with waterproof adhesive and permanent
fasteners. All cabinet surfaces shall be galvanized
C. Fans shall be centrifugal type, double inlet, double width. They shall be of the forward
curved, low speed type on all sizes. Fan housing shall be equipped with adjustable cut -off
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested at rated speed after being ...
installed in factory assembled units. Bearings shall be self - aligning, grease lubricated ball
Aft
bearings sized to provide minimum average bearing life of 200,000 hours. Lubrication
fittings shall be extended to the exterior cabinet. Fan shafts shall be solid, cold finish steel, "*
turned, grout ground, and polished to insure trouble -free operation and tolerances within the
recommendations of bearing manufacturers. Fan motors shall be mounted to an adjustable
pivot base in optional positions external to the unit. Fan V -belt drive shall be of the variable
pitch type. Fan belt guard shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer, easily removable, and A.
Ads
15600 -11 ,,,,
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
ook
adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each branch and at each diffuser or
grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult with the College's Balancing Contractor for the
proper placement of volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the
butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be equipped with
Duro -Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers shall be provided with damper
Ark bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a 2" x 3" x 1/8" plate held to duct with sheet metal
screws. Maximum width of single blades shall be 14 ". Splitter dampers shall not be used.
aft O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke dampers with a UL
ook label for not less than 1 -1/2 hour fire protection rating in accordance with UL -555 continuing
inspection service. Blades and frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an
interlocking design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall be
equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351, 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be installed according to
latest edition of NFPA -90A, mounted with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" returning angles on both
sides of partition, wall, or floor, and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire
o rating was obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide anchorage
oft to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free area.
P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers shall be made with
Arik flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex S -LP -10 for exhaust/return, M -KA
for supply, or equal. Joints shall be sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps.
Connection to rigid ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps.
Q. Install duct -type smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Contractor.
Aft R. Flexible Air Duct:
.n► 1. Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, and shall be
equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct.
2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum and formed into
Asok
a multiple corrugated construction, then encased with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density
fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an
low inside bending radius of not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest
,, NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181. Duct shall
have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft. S.A. positive pressure, ,5 inch
Aik W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500
_ F.P.M.E.
S. Flexible Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air handling unit and fan, 30
ounce double neoprene coated woven glass fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long
securely held to retaining clamps.
aw
2.02 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS
4 A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above Specifications. Any
Aft
variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items for which approval is requested shall
be specifically marked on the Drawings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing
(minor variations are assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8
Ank in. =1 ft. 0 in. scale.
B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the ductwork has
`` been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal Contractor shall assume the
Asok responsibility for and bear the cost of any alterations required after approval because of
.�n inaccurate Shop Drawings or lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet
metal erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings.
do. 2.03 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS
A. Registers, grilles and diffusers shall be sizes as shown on the drawings. Wall mounted
4
15600 -10
fi-
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA ""
D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or dimensions shall be made by
the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining approval from the Engineer, except that duct
shall be offset as required to clear structural members and to co- ordinate with other trades ,,,
and any duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.
E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings shall be at least one
and one -half times the width of the duct. Where building conditions do not allow for this
radius or where square turns are shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to
Aero -Dyne or Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and "Sonotru"
acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control Products Co. shall be used in
any air ducts where acoustical insulation is included. .k
F. Duct sections 1'-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with flat drive cleats 2-
1/8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with duct and side cleats bent over to
make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the
HVAC Contractor's option.
G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1/2" standing bar slips made of metal the
same as or heavier than duct sheets. Joints in ducts with either dimension over 30" shall have AR
1" standing bar slips on those sides over 30 ". Where sides are over 42 ", the standing bar slips
will be reinforced with 1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2" x 1/8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners not over
60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in width shall be jointed with Alk
1 -1/2" x 1/8" angle irons riveted to ductwork on all sides with 1/8" rivets at not more than
Ask
4 -1/2" on centers, sections bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned
over angles into joint at least 1/4 ".
H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to ductwork to secure ..,
seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less than two per side of 12" or more, except
where specified otherwise. Button punching shall not be used except for pre- erection Aft
attachment of fittings.
Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each manual damper,
reheat coil, steam injection humidifier at each fire damper, and at every duct mounted control
device. Doors shall be equal to Buensod - Stacey Type S -2 of rigid construction with cast
type rotary latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access door,
two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated ducts shall be furnished with
extended frames to serve as a stop for insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated
ductwork. All doors shall be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where
Ask
limited by duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper fusible
links or other devices. ..b
J. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round bar type fastened to ,
1 -1/4" x 1 -1/4" x 1/8" angles under the ducts. Ducts less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung
with black 1" x 1/16" strap iron bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct
with sheet metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more so that
they are not greater than 6" centers.
K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8' -0" centers or closer where required so that the Ask
ductwork can support the weight of a man at any point.
L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size shown on the
Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside dimensions or cross sectional area
shown on the Drawings.
M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be based
on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum static pressure with maximum leakage of
5% of total fan capacity; 1/2 of 1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be
sealed with U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal. —
N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown, to control and
Alb
15600 -9 ,,,,
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
44), Smith College, Northampton, MA
A. This Contractor shall prepare a complete set of mylar background Drawings at minimum 1/4
in. equals 1 ft. 0 in. showing architectural and structural features and other information as
needed for coordination layout. Background Drawings shall be prepared under this Section.
B. Circulate mylars among trades as necessary to show all information outlined below. Each
Aok trade shall sign and date each coordination Drawing. Co- ordinate all conflicts between trades
mik prior to submitting drawing to the Architect.
C. The information to be contained on the Drawings shall include, but not be limited to the
following:
doh 1. Insert and sleeve locations if required by the Architect.
2. Structural, partition/room layout, ceiling grid, and other information needed for co-
ink
ordination including bottom of steel elevations.
3. All fire walls and smoke partitions.
4. Equipment layouts and egress routes for equipment removal.
5. Sheet metal work layout including bottom of duct elevations.
6. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, and Fire Protection pipe
routing including center line of pipe elevations.
7. Valves including valve tag numbers.
oft 8. Access panels.
9. Electrical light fixtures, cable trays, panelboards, etc.
Each trade shall show his work on the background Drawings with appropriate elevations and
grid dimensions. Drawing shall indicate horizontal and vertical dimensions to avoid
dok interference with structural framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
D. Fabrication shall not begin until the final mylar transparencies of all co- ordination drawings
have been reviewed and approved by the Architect. Review of coordination Drawings shall
not diminish the responsibility under this Contract for final co- ordination of installation and
aft
maintenance clearances of all systems and equipment with the architectural, structural,
mechanical, electrical, and other work.
E. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of
operating equipment devices. If equipment is disapproved, drawings shall be revised to show
acceptable equipment and be resubmitted.
F. The approval of equipment does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of Shop
%. Drawing errors in details, sizes, quantities, wiring diagram, arrangement, and dimensions
which deviate from the Specifications, Contract Drawings, and/or job conditions as they exist.
Aft
Unless the Contractor specifically requests in writing, changes, substitutions, or deletions of
specific Contract Document requirements with respect to any submissions, approval of the
Shop Drawing by the Architect does not constitute acceptance. Approval of shop drawings
ark
containing errors does not relieve the Contractor from making corrections at his expense.
Aft
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 SHEET METAL WORK
A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any ductwork. Above
hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be coordinated with work of other trades to
avoid conflicts with structure, piping, conduit and light fixtures.
B. All sheet metal ducts for supply, return, exhaust and outdoor air shall be constructed of
galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality unless noted otherwise.
C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest ASHRAE or
Ank
SMACNA requirements for metal gauges, joints, reinforcing and supports. All exposed
ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide a neat, smooth, fmished appearance.
Cadmium plated sheet metal screws shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be
free from thumping or rattling when fans are turned on or off.
15600 -8
Al Ilk
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the weather, vehicles,
dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure that all electrical or absorbent +*
equipment or material is protected from moisture during storage. ...
1.17 CLEANING Ask
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and equipment of all
foreign substances inside and out before being placed in operation. Thoroughly flush all
eft
piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux. Replace strainers and filters at completion of
cleaning.
B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign matter after being
.ok
placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected at no
additional cost to the Owner. *+
C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to insure adequate .t.
protection against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and rubbish. Upon
completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all
rubbish, debris, and excess materials left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on
floor areas caused by the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean. ""'
.w�
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for the
installation of HVAC in the building, shall be performed by the HVAC Contractor. All work _
and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and
patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports ie beams or joists) P g g g PPS (ie. j ) is
not allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings, etc. shall be
checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co- ordinate work with other ..
divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor failing to co- ordinate, who shall
make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. ,
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls
are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where
sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all A s
drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
g � P P g eq P >; Pe Y
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen. �.►
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner.
wk
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor a*►
shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1. .,
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change
order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work, fire dampers, volume 400.
dampers, control dampers and control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall
be added to these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above all
revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble.
w►
1.20 CO- ORDINATION DRAWINGS
15600 -7
+0w
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
oak
or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be
ow considered as being defective.
4" 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation for equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel
aft
to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is
properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall
oft
video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the tape with the
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
oak B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
,— Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and location of the equipment or the building, the
name of the Contractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of
oak Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and
easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard
amo
binders or an approved equivalent.
oak C. The manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
dok
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for each item of
oak equipment.
�► 3. Winter /summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
'o"' 5. Lubrication chart.
, 6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment.
o" 7. Valve chart.
oak 8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
osik
10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc.
11. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors as well as the
local representative for each item of equipment.
D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control" paragraphs of this Section for additional
sao requirements.
1.16 PROTECTION
A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of all other Sections
oak from damage by work or workmen, and shall include making good all damage thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested,
ask and accepted; protect work against the injury, or dam e• and carefully P , P � � ft, damage; Y store material and
T equipment received on site which is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with
temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or foreign
material.
ook C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing, protecting, setting
in place, and connecting -up completely any equipment supplied under each Section. Work
under each Section shall also include exercising special care in handling and protecting
'' equipment and fixtures, and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and
isk fixtures which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to protect on the
part of the HVAC Contractor.
a
15600 -6
faaa
Ask
Ask
Ask
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
sok
the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or
implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements. ...
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably ,.
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called
for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling measurements from the Ask
Drawings.
oft
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings
and accessories that may be required. The HVAC Contractor shall carefully investigate the
structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work according- ,uk
ly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to meet
such conditions, at no additional cost.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and Balancing -
Contractor to co- ordinate work of these trades and to have a full comprehension of the work
to be done as well as to determine the conditions affecting the location and placement of all oak
equipment and materials.
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and —
fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid
delaying his work and that of other trades. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment
must be co- ordinated with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas A'"
designated by the College.
B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and
materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made ..A
good without expense to the Owner. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the
proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
Ask
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
dew
Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120 volt, 60
cycle, single phase electric power from the General Contractor to drive his machines and .ek
light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed by ""''
the HVAC Contractor.
1.13 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, Ask
closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, unless specifically noted otherwise on
the Drawings. Ask
B. Piping containing water shall riot be installed concealed in walls having an exterior exposure Ask
above grade.
1.14 GUARANTEE Ask
A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all parts for a ,,,_
period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion, and shall agree to promptly repair
or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects in his
work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by replacement
wr.
15600 -5 ,,,
ww.
oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
411 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements. No substitution
will be allowed for the Trane air handling unit and condensing unit, Trane or International
fan coil units, Watts ball valves, Gould pumps, Tour and Anderson balancing valves.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a qualified
testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance with the
1111► General Requirements.
1.06 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall be new, full
weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in
that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of manufac-
" '' turer for each class or category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment
_ of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or
labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving
w all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished on the project. In
addition to the above, one (1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's
HVAC Department for review and approval.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with the
Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Engineer for review, making any and
all changes which may be required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from any
obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC
Contractor.
ate►. D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the
Specifications, the Contractor will be required to remove such materials and substitute
approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Engineer.
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work. He
shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges incidental to
the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the
observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work.
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK -UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook -ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
w 1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details, plans, elevations,
and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are intended to supplement
15600 -4
ark
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA am.
Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govem. Where the
Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract
provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise. muk
B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials' instructions
at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular mi"
schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and mok
supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project who
shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the HVAC
Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Contractors' work resulting from the ,*
execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever, and in case of dispute arising as
to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed 0101
between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent of damage shall ,.
be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall be final and binding on both
parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The HVAC Contractor shall co- operate to the fullest extent with all other trades in order to
expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials ...
as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information.
The HVAC Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., °'R
hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in place. In case of ma
failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be
required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the Drawings
is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at
the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC
Contractor shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy thereof. m
Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements.
eft
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs
shall be performed by the Contractor installing such items.
41011k
G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or injury at ' 0101
his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or ,
plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable
means. ' 0101 "
H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed under Aar
this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before ordering any materials
and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the -
Engineer before proceeding with the work. ...
J. Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the Drawings and
Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work 4010..
since the HVAC Contractor will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in ,,01,,
regard thereto.
AMIA
15600 -3
Amk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
gooik
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.12 FIRE SAFING 59
40,
Division 15: Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
SECTION 15600: HEATING VENTILATION AIR CONDITIONING
4u
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
' A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division
1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under
this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co- ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
Section. Co- operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work specified herein and/or indicated on
Ask
the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following;
1. Panel radiators and accessories.
2. Exhaust fans.
3. Fan coil units.
4. Energy recovery ventilators.
5. Unit heaters.
6. Piping systems for hot water, chilled water, dual - temperature heating/cooling water,
steam and steam condensate return systems, including pumps, valves, and spe-
ak
cialties.
7. Duct systems for supply, return, exhaust and outdoor air, including fire dampers,
balancing dampers, registers and grilles.
8. Steam -to -water heat exchangers and associated accessories.
aft
9. Steam condensate receivers and transfer pumps.
10. Insulation for piping, ductwork and equipment.
11. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature control work
shall be by Yankee Technology, Inc. or Automated Building Systems, Inc.
12. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others.
13. Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and balancing
shall be preformed by Advanced Testing and Balancing Wings Testing and
aw, Balancing, Inc and billed directly to the College.
14. Guarantee.
15. Instructions.
16. Record Drawings.
aft
17. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing heating and
ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by new construction. All piping
and equipment shall be the property of the College and shall be delivered to such
places designated by the College.
1.03 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
.ra* Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local
laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract
15600-2
4
Am
dift
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA ""°
Division 15: Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning .w
SECTION 15600: HEATING VENTILATION AIR CONDITIONING ak
PART 1- GENERAL 2
illak
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 2
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 2
oft
1.03 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 2
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3 oft
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4
1.06 PRODUCTS 4 is*
1.07 SUBMITTALS 4
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 4 oft
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK -UPS 4
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 4 /f
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING 5
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5 ,air
1.13 WORK CONCEALED 5
1.14 GUARANTEE 5 oft
1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 6
Aft
1.16 PROTECTION 6
1.17 CLEANING 7 .A►
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING 7
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS 7 ,n►
1.20 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS 7
oft
PART 2 - MATERIALS 8
2.01 SHEET METAL WORK 8 oft
2.02 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS 10
2.03 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS 10 aft
2.04 AIR HANDLING UNIT (AHU) 11
2.05 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 12 oft
2.06 PANEL RADIATORS 28
oft
2.07 CIRCULATING PUMPS (IN LINE TYPE) 28
2.08 CIRCULATING PUMPS (BASE MOUNTED TYPE) 29 oft
2.09 FAN COIL UNITS 29
2.10 VALVES 30 oft
2.11 THERMOMETERS 31
2.12 PRESSURE GAUGES 31 _
2.13 UNIONS 31
2.14 PIPE SI.FEVES 31 -.
2.15 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES 32
2.16 HANGERS 32 w
2.17 UNIT HEATERS 33
2.18 INSULATION 33 Aft
2.19 PIPE AND FITTINGS 35
2.20 STRAINERS 36 Allik
2.21 ACCESS PANELS 36 oft
2.22 SHELL- AND -TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS 36
2.23 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS 37 oft
2.24 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 37
2.25 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 51 oft
2.26 UTILITY FANS 54
PART 3 - INSTALLATION 55
3.01 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM 55 .w►
3.02 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING 55
4011o,
3.04 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS 56
3.05 CLEANING AND FLUSHING 57 aft
3.06 , WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS 57
3.07 INSULATION 57 oft
3.08 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 58
3.09 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN -UP 58 Aft,
3.10 IDENTIFICATION 58
3.11 SPARE PARTS 59 ow
oft
oft
15600 -1
Aok
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
dok 3.16 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including, but not limited to the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
mok 2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway
walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen,
machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1. Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors,
Inc. or Architect- Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the
ark required full length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings.
,uw, 2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke - through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
doo► 1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes.
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress
and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with
__ sealing compound.
3.17 WATER SERVICE
Ark A. This contractor shall furnish and install a new 2" domestic water service, including but
ark
not limited to, new water meter, pressure reducing station, and connection to existing
main water service into the building.
END OF SECTION 15400
ww
IOW
w
Alb
A
15400 -31
A.
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
an air test of not less than 50 psi. The water utilized for tests shall be obtained from
a potable source of supply.
2. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,
until satisfactory results are obtained. Jo.
3. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.10 CLEANING UP
A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving the job,
thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract, removing all plaster, stickers,
rust stains, and any foreign matter or discoloration of fixtures, leaving every part in
perfect condition and ready for use. ,,
3.11 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION .%.
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance with its
manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown on the Drawings or
not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish this shall be furnished by the
Plumbing Contractor and be included in his Bid. -
3.12 DISINFECTION
A. Flush out entire system.
B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite. Fill lines
slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce 50 parts per million of chloride as
determined by residual chlorine tests at end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants ..
while system is being chlorinated.
4.
C. After twenty -four (24) hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5 ppm are present, ..
flush out system until all traces are removed. oak
D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities. Continue
flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over next three (3) days indicate that quality of
water is not being maintained. Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected
hose.
E. Submit test results to Owner.
3.13 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish access panels for access to valves, shock arrestors, trap primers, etc. Panels shall
be installed by the General Contractor. . 01%
3.14 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Backflow preventers shall be installed as per regulation 310 CMR 22.22, with pressure ,
gauges on inlet and outlet of backflow preventer. Furnish Watts TK -9 Model A test kit
and one (1) repair kit for each type of device. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall act as
the Owner's Agent in seeking approval from the Department of Environmental ,,,,
Protection. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall submit all Plans, Specifications and
permits required for approval and pay all fees. Approvals shall be secured prior to
purchase and installation. ANN.
3.15 ISOLATION VALVES Ask
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish and install isolation valves on the entire ....
domestic water distribution system, on mains, branches, and at each fixture.
A.
15400 -30
AMIN
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
9. Anticipated system working pressure.
10. Gauge range and incrementation used.
11. Start time of test.
12. Start test pressure.
Alb 13. End time of test.
14. End test pressure.
15. Observed loss in pressure.
16. Notes on any observed leaks.
D. Test gauges:
au k 1. Tests requiring a pressure less than 1 psi shall utilize a U -tube or digital manometer.
2. Tests requiring a pressure of 1 psi to 10 psi or less shall utilize a testing gauge
having increments of 0.10 psi or less.
40 " 3. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 10 psi but less than or equal to 100 psi
4114 shall utilize a testing gauge having increments of 1 psi or less.
4. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 100 psi shall utilize a testing gauge having
m' increments of 2 psi or less.
akk E. Piping Systems
1. Test piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence
of published procedures, as follows:
2. Gravity Sanitary Waste And Vent:
a. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that
have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in
_ segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of
400, portion of piping tested.
b. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced
drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose
work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
tak
c. Roughing -in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping,
except outside leaders, on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in
piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-
foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion
"* of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. Multiple
rough -in tests for segments of the piping system are allowable.
d. Finished Underground Plumbing Test Procedure: After all underground
plumbing piping has been set and traps filled with water, test connections
and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug all pipe opening above
slab and the below ground building drains where they leave building.
Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1 -inch wg. Use U-
,* tube or manometer inserted in trap to measure this pressure. Air pressure
must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period
Aik of inspection. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of
ank inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion
thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
f. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
F. Water Systems:
1. Upon completion of a section of or the entire water supply system, the system, or
portion completed, shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure not less
than the working pressure of the system; or, for piping systems other than plastic, by
4
15400 -29
..w
Oak
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be performed by the
Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at
such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.
B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed by the General ..
Contractor.
C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be performed by the ss.
General Contractor. A ,
3.07 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor regularly engaged in
that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be applied before "'"`
masonry proceeds.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly together and
sealed."
..4
3.08 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All water piping Ass
passing through masonry walls shall be provided with standard weight steel pipe, or s
Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing
through same. Center pipe in sleeve.
B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un- insulated pipes pass through ,p.
walls.
3.09 TESTING sok
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall notify the Engineer three working days prior to day tests are
to be made. Test all piping and make it gas and water tight, in accordance with the authority
having jurisdiction and ordinances, and in the presence and to the satisfaction of the
applicable Inspector along with the Engineer and his representative.
B. No piping shall be buried, concealed or insulated before tested and approved. Partial tests
shall be made as required, by the progress of the work, and the Plumbing Contractor shall
accommodate the testing operations to the progress of the project. Furnish all equipment,
labor, services and apparatus; also pay for all costs for pertinent tests. All approvals shall be
rendered in writing and submitted to the Engineer. Remedy all defective work and replace
all defective materials, equipment or fixtures with new ones of the specified grade. No ...
caulking, peening, or wicking of screwed joints or holes will be acceptable. This Contractor
shall make and remove all temporary piping and line connections required for the tests and s""
shall dispose of test water and all wastes after tests in a satisfactory and non - damaging ss
manner.
C. Provide written reports to engineer of each individual test procedure performed. Reports
shall include the following minimum information: Ask
1. Project location information.
2. Contractor's name.
3. Name of person test performed by.
4. Name and company of person who observed test with contractor.
5. Piping system.
6. Section of system tested. ,.
7. Date of test.
8. Method of test. ""'
15400 -28
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.
41111 1. For external diameters less than 6 ", provide full -band pipe markers, extending
360° around pipe at each location, fastened as follows:
a. Snap -on application of pre - tensioned, semi -rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre - printed nomenclature which best
describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect in cases of
variance with name as shown or specified.
3. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows:
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch in mains.
014 c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or
floors /ceilings, or enter non - accessible enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view
of concealed piping.
e. Spaced intermittently at maximum spacing of 20' along each piping run,
0011' except reduce spacing to 20' in congested areas of piping and equipment.
__ C. Provide manufacturer's standard brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with
piping system abbreviation in approximately 'A" high letters and sequenced valve
numbers approximately %2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all
valves and control devices.
1. Provide 1 'A" round by 19 gage tags with lettering as selected by Architect.
' 2. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded
type), or solid brass S -hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to
valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.
3. Submit valve schedule for g Y i in system, typewritten and reproduced on 8
P�P�
'' /2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system
abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations
for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut -
r. off and similar special uses, by special "flags ", in margin of schedule. In addition
to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in
Auk
Division 1.
*► 4. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for
removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or
imk
extruded aluminum, with SSB -grade sheet glass.
"'` 5. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in Mechanical Room where
indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect.
3.05 VALVES
A. All piping systems shall be provided with valves so located that they can be operated,
replaced, repaired and offer complete control to each group of fixtures, appliance,
equipment, and each hot and cold water branch.
B. Each fixture, appliance or piece of equipment shall have a separate shut -off valve,
furnished and installed, of approved type, for service to be connected to.
C. Locate valves on supply and return, at each piece of equipment or fixture and on main
ilk branches.
D. Drain valves on systems containing water shall be installed at the base of each riser (after
the shut -off valve), on downfed fixtures and at equipment, also at such other locations as
required to allow for complete drainage of the system.
E. Valves shall be located as shown on the drawings or as here -in- before specified.
15400 -27
dal
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA 4 *+
grade of 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and less and 1/8" per foot for piping larger .�
than 3 ". Horizontal waste lines receiving the discharge from two or more
fixtures shall be provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is 40"
noted.
2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with
reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of ""
45° wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8, or 1/16 bends, or by a ,,,
combination of those or equivalent fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and
1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from '
horizontal to vertical. ,
3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals or on the inlet
side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permitted. .—
B. Joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight
runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have American National
taper pipe threads conforming to National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with
graphite or inert filler and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetra-
fluorethylene tape applied to the male threads.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE
A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses excavated for ,.
pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and grade, with a firm bearing ..
throughout each length and with the bell ends uphill.
B. Pipe Joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in accordance with'
the directions of the manufacturer. ••.
C. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated
diek
with unbroken continuity of invert.
3.03 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be cut
accurately to measurements established at the building by the Plumbing Contractor and
shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to
weaken structural portions of the building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel
with the lines of the building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines Al*
may be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as may be
ik
required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves and fittings shall be ..
kept a sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1 /2" "_
between finished covering on the different services. .�
B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion
and contraction of pipe.
3.04 BASIC IDENTIFICATION
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of ""
one of the following:
Allen Systems, Inc. •
Brady (W. H.) Co.; Sigmark Div. ..
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
Emed Co., Inc.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard pre - printed, semi -rigid, snap -on, color -coded pipe oft
15400 -26 "e'
Ank
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads.
Ilk 4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as
transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or
A ft greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or
contraction.
5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20 -ft: maximum
ook and longitudinal restraints at 40 -ft. maximum spacing.
41u,, 6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal
restraint for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the
40%.
restraint is installed within allowable limits at longer distances.
dsok 7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before
applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports.
8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines.
o► 9. Cast -iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band
shield and clamp assembly in Zones 2B, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections
3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced
Ank spacing of 1/2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3.
N. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically restrained as per the
mok
schedules in paragraph S of this Specification.
+t► O. Seismic Restraint Exclusions:
+�w 1. Piping:
a. All piping less than 2 -1/2 in. in diameter except those listed below.
b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D.
c. All piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less than 1 -1/4 in.
oft
I.D.
d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from hanger rods where
the point of attachment is less than the 12 in. in length from the structure
to the structural connection of the clevis or trapeze.
off, e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in diameter
and smaller.
of t P. Suspended Equipment:
,.,, 1. Suspended equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. and supported with a minimum
of 4 hanger rods.
Q. Schedules:
wu, Vibration Isolation and / or
Seismic Restraint
elk
Equipment Schedule Specification Static
sok Deflection
Pumps — Base Mounted 1, 4, 18, 23
Pumps — In -Line 23
PART 3 - EXECUTION
illk
3.01 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING
A. Installation:
1. Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil and waste pipes shall have a minimum
w
15400 -25
Aft
fift
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA`
16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24
in. or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities.
17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation
manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals.
18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive .�.
displacement, which results from high air thrust in relation to the equipment
weight. Horizontal thrust restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see selection •"°
guide).
19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible.
L. Vibration Isolation of Piping:
1. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near
the mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11. Specification
11 hangers must also be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace
hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other
locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in
Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in
Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion tanks are considered part of the
piping run.
The first three- (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static 404.
deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. If
piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceilings a"
under occupied spaces the first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for w„
pipe sizes up to and including 3 in., 1 -1/2 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and
including 6 in., and 2 -1/2 in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall be located as oft
close to the overhead structure as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical aft
equipment install Specification 23 flexible piping connection or Specification 24
stainless steel hoses is 23 is not suitable for the service.
2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or .a+
supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors,
and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a
minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional ••+
deflection is required to limit load changes to ± 25% of the initial load.
Submittals must include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated
expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final changes and ...
seismic loads. Submittal data shall include certification that the riser system has wik
been examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in the proposed
design.
M. Seismic Restraint of Piping: A ,
1. Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12
cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated
piping. ,
a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air
piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger. .,
b. Piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment (fan) rooms, and ,,
refrigeration equipment rooms that are 1 -1/4 in. I.D. and larger.
c. All other piping 2 -1/2 in. diameter and larger.
2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, w,
except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads.
3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except
15400 -24
Alb
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached
at the centerline of thrust and symmetrical on either side of the unit. Horizontal
thrust restraints shall be Type WBI /WBD as manufactured by Mason Industries,
-. Inc.
K. Execution - General:
ok
1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's written instruction and all certified submittal
data.
2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any
change of position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or
misalignment.
3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made
aft that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified.
4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which
makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified.
"Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls.
5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building.
6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment
or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be
brought to the architects /engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work
necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's
expense.
7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the
Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific
equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by
discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense.
8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations, which are deemed defective in
w workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense.
9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead
411k support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of
record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from:
a. Flanges of structural beams.
b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction.
Ask
c. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill -in concrete anchors.
10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short
circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit.
Ask
11. Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non - isolated systems.
imk Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly
Alk
attached systems only.
12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods
must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification
14 braces.
13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support
rods must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with
Specification 14 braces.
14. Drill -in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification
type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted
equipment.
15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as
required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project.
15400 -23
Aft
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing *•
minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound
pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product
by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the ink
equipment side of the shut off valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX .r.
SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel
fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male
nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated: Aft
FlangedMale Nipples
3x14 10x261/2x9 1- 1/2x13 ,,,.
4x15 12x283/4x10 2x14
5x19 14x301x11 2- 1/2x18
6x20 16x321/4x12 ,,..
Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut -off valves horizontally '"""'
and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS
as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
24. All- directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing
separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint .wk
shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either
direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi
and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All-
directional anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries,
Inc. 40,
25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing w•
separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height
of the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe
expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow dew
for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of ± 1 -5/8 in. motion, ..�
or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall be Type VSG as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. ""
26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. thick .�►
neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the
pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Auk
Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or 41114.
ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction
of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face of A""
the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 dig. F., 101b. density fiberglass may be
used in lieu of the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
27. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a
neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as
specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it """"
can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a
maximum of 1/4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished
with one (1) rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the 4104
15400 -22
dok
Ask
ook
Awk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
dook base depth need not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base
manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete
Ai Pk
reinforcing consisting of 1/2 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running
both ways in a layer 1 -1/2 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with
steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is
being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations
Auk to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a
4111,, concrete rather than a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o
K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
21. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curbs. The
41116' lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and
removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame
must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to
took resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber
bushings shall be a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Steel springs shall be laterally
""` stable and rest on 1/4 in. thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be
plated and the springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs
waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing
nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM
bellows. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof
covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs
ink
shall be built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly
40, fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to the roof
structure. Curb shall have anchorage pre- approval "R" from OSHPD in the State
Atik
of California attesting to the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load
d. ratings. Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the
dik
covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used
_► within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is
not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a
ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or
*w► steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may be
single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1 -1/2 in. may have threaded bolted flange
assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall
ink be rated at 250 psi up to 190° F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190
psi at 250° F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190° F and 135 psi
at 250° F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1.
All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at
4.16, twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be
substituted for equal ended expansion joints.
Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the
expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored
piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the
As, pressure requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in
seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have 1/2 in. thick Neoprene
leuk
washer bushings large enough in area to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on
Auk the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the
4,1* shut off valves.
15400 -21
amk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
when required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies
shall have an Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
Jib
California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be
special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts
passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Pre -
approval "R "Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross brace .w
shall be Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
16. All- directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members
restrained by a one -piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene.
Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Rated loadings
shall not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1/8 in. shall be incorporated in .ft
the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and
resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of
internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits
exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Pre - ,,,,,,
approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z- """'`
1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members
amik
restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing
Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4
in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be
manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than ""
1/8 in. nor more than 1/4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set
clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be
Alw
equal or greater than the load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by
the snubber multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the
load deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage pre -
approval "R "Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubbers shall be series oro.
Z -1011 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from _`
undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also .ph,
have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud
anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation Ask
Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill -in stud edge anchors shall be w*
Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
Ask
19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment
can be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be ._
manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully
support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an
evaluation report number from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its "'
allowable loads. Drill -in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as Aft
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring
forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be „„
large enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. Bases shall be a
minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 in. The
15400 -20
Ask
Ank
ilk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as described in
aft
Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent
air spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as
blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment.
Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1.2 in. shall
_► be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air
411k spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation.
Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR -
^ MT as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
ark 10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 -1/4 in. thick
neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in
- Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom.
oft The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting
through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as
clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring.
Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit
'" the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc from side to side before contacting the
rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger
Drawing showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured
'' by Mason Industries, Inc.
11. Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be precompressed and locked
at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or
'' equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed
wh with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and
the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by
means of a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the
30 degree capability. Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
Oak
12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to
resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to
sok provide all- directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies
that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide
proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp
edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number
from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified load
ratings. Cable assemblies shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt,
aft SCBH between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam
all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic
loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional
restraint. Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel
to the final installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper
, attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage preapproval "R"
Number from OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified
om '" load ratings. Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured
ww by Mason Industries, Inc.
14. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment
rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location
dok
15400 -19
Al elk
Alb
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. ,.,•
3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by
assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. ''"
The outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge Alt
panel holes as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the
back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the
inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does ,.
not interfere with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be
applied to the ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall '"
be Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. �..
4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall
surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact.
Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. aft
5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing
and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 in. neoprene acoustical friction Ilh
pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling •n►
bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no
Ask
less than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall
have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height ..k
and solid spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.""
6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in .I lb,
Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent
spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking
during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and
operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2 in. shall be maintained
around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to
interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal
operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an
internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Alatt
Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the
state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load
ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to 0
provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable
vertically and allow a maximum of 1/4 in. travel in all directions before Aft
contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage
Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the
•
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be at.
SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Aft
8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected
by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring
configuration shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency Auk
of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of
d
three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems
shall be connected to either the building control air or a supplementary air supply
and equipped with three (3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or ..
minus 1/8 in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests
performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT
Alkik
15400 -18
Ask
..e
aok
ask
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
,, 2. Supplementary Support Steel:
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment,
dith
piping,
ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or
oft specified.
3. Attachments:
a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping
pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with
the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations.
H. Seismic Force Levels
oft 1. The following force levels will be used on this project.
Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E.
Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For
Code for all pipes, Duct & for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety
Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either
Equipment Equipment Rigidity or
++k Flexibility Mounted
ink
Zone Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
dalk
UBC
BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2
Aolk
SBCCI
mok
wmik I. Product Intent:
1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the
product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of
these Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided
Ank their systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the
specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance
with Section D.
2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any
attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation
greater than 1/8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1/4 in.
J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints:
1. Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle
modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution
ws, plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured
41k. by Mason Industries, Inc.
2. Bridge - bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of
0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile
iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements.
The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from
contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene
materials shall be compounded to bridge- bearing Specifications. Mountings shall
have an Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.
dok
15400 -17
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
stamped by a registered professional engineer with at least five
years of seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the
job location. "-
(2) All restraining devices shall have a pre - approval number from w�
California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency
showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre - approvals based on
independent testing are preferred to pre - approvals based on ./►
calculations. Where pre- approved devices are not available,
submittals based on independent testing are preferred.
Calculations (including the combining of tensile and shear isk .
loadings) to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped .wF
by a registered professional engineer with at least five years of
seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the job
location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and
tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 45° to the weakest
mode.
(3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads
and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment
and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt '""
diameter, embedment and/or welded length. All seismic restraint Ask
devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces
detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center of A t
gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground
level.
E. Code and Standards Requirements: '*`
1. Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced code:
a. Massachusetts State Building Code.
b. BOCA National Mechanical Code.
c. NFPA 90A. oak
F. Manufacturer's Responsibility:
1. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the
following responsibilities: AI*
a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or
specified. Afat
c. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of unisolated
equipment.
d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision .+s►
to insure proper installation and performance. w
G. Related Work:
1. Housekeeping Pads:
a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the
structure details and design shall be prepares by the restraint vendor if
not already indicated on the Drawings. 'f
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized
to provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around
the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill -in wedge
anchor ratings. If cast -in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads
shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage
and embedment. 'w'
15400 -16
tat
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
• Tanks (All types)
att C. Definitions:
1. Life Safety Systems
011" a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire
pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply
piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems.
4011, b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply
ws including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths
to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems.
s c. All medical and life support systems
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air
handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc.
att
e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule.
2. Positive Attachment:
41114, a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast -in anchor, a drill -in wedge
anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a
welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam
auk clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other
equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points.
iatt 3. Transverse Bracing:
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the
pipe, duct or conduit.
'* 4. Longitudinal Bracing:
„ a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe,
duct or conduit.
at D. Manufacturer's Data:
The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide
submittals for products as follows:
tot a. Descriptive Data:
(1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific
restraints detailing compliance with the Specification.
" (2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment,
showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing
numbered descriptive Drawings.
Oft
b. Shop Drawings:
w► (1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including
dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations.
(2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung
equipment.
(3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used
for seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment
s► methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and
approved before the condition is accepted for installation.
Restraint manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static
loads and seismic loads at all attachment and support points.
(4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include
number, size and locations for each piece of equipment.
c. Seismic Certification and Analysis:
(1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all
connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be
15400 -15
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
D. Control Panel shall be a NEMA 1 indoor duplex control panel with three float switches
and a high water alarm.
2.20 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL.
A. Intent:
1. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the equipment *�
schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators and with Amo
flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically
transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected
in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform
deflections. All fire protection vibration and seismic control shall meet NFPA
requirements. ...
2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer and shall
oak
be certified by the manufacturer.
3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical —.
building system components in place during a seismic event.
4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes,
component manufacturer's and building construction standards. Whenever a "''
conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most
stringent shall apply.
5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic
consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent,
national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24,
California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements). '""``
6. Any variance or non - compliance with these Specification requirements shall be sk
corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner.
7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as ofik
detailed in Section H. .w.
B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment. 0".
2. Equipment isolation bases. -
3. Flexible piping connections.
rat
4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
5. Seismic restraints for non - isolated equipment. Ask
6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
8. All mechanical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of
services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is
typical. (Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification).
• Air Separators .�
• Battery Racks r
• Compressors
• Comp. Room Units Auk
• Conduit
• Electrical Panels
Auk
• Piping
• Pumps (All types)
Alb
15400 -14 .,�
Ank
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Ank
2.16 WATER METER
Aok
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install (1) one turbine water meter with remote
+'�► meter readouts, Neptune, Model TM — 2" where shown on the drawings. Meter to be
complete with dry contacts for interlock with energy management system.
Ask
B. Meters to read in cubic feet and shall be Neptune, Hersey Products, Inc., Badger Meter
'u► Company, Trident Meter or equal and are to be approved by the local water department.
Amik
2.17 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
ink A. Furnish and install the following backflow preventers, as manufactured by Watts
,_ Regulator where required.
B. This Subcontractor shall provide a spare parts repair kit for each 909 reduced pressure
backflow preventer, to consist of a repair kit for the first check, second check, and relief
valve.
C. All backflow preventers shall be approved by the Massachusetts State Plumbing
Examiners and shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
OR recommendations and instructions, and in accordance with Regulation 310CMR 22.22.
D. Units shall be Watts Regulator Co., Febco, Division of CMB, Ind., Hersey Products, Inc.,
or equal.
aft E. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall file and prepare all applications for backflow preventer
approval with the Department of Environmental Protection, and pay all fees and charges.
"''" F. All certificates of approval and test results shall be sent to the Architect.
Ask
2.18 RECIRCULATING PUMP
'' A. Hot water recirculating pump shall be all bronze construction, in -line type, maximum working
oak temperature of 225 deg. F, maximum working pressure of 125 psi, Bell and Gossett, or Taco
series, or equal. The pump size shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Re- circulating pump shall be as follows:
1. CP -1: For 120° shall be Bell & Gossett Series PR (bronze body) to deliver 5 gpm at
10 ft. head with 1,725 rpm, 1/6 hp, 120 volt, single phase motor.
2. Pump shall be controlled by an immersion aquastat installed in 1 '/4 "oversize tee,
oft aquastat provided by the Plumbing Subcontractor, wired by the Electrical Subcon-
tractor.
C. Circulating pumps shall be ITT Bell & Gossett Co., Taco, Inc., Grundfos, Inc., or approved
equal.
2.19 DUPLEX SEWAGE EJECTOR
A. The duplex ejector system shall be model 1102/LE41 M as manufactured by Liberty Pumps,
Bergen, N.Y. or equal. The system shall be factory pre- assembled with pumps, discharge
pipe nipples, and floats pre - mounted in the basin. Floats shall be tethered to a removable
standpipe /access cover assembly.
B. The basin shall be constructed of heavy duty rotationally molded polyethylene. Dimensions
shall be 30" diameter x 36" deep and shall have a total capacity of 110 U.S. gallons. The
w inlet hub shall be 4" and preassembled to basin. The basin shall have "torque- stops" to locate
and retain the pump in its proper position.
C. The cover shall be "heavy duty" 1/4" steel plate, enamel- coated on both sides. The cover
osok
shall be 34" in diameter, and have 2" discharge and 4" vent flange. The cover shall be
fitted with two 16" diameter pump openings, and one 10" diameter inspection cover with
integral stand pipe for float tethering. All cover hardware shall be stainless steel.
15400 -13
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
SC -Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on Drawings, or as required. No *"
substitutions will be allowed.
2.11 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings, or cleanouts A ,,
in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or ceilings, shall be furnished by
the Plumbing Contractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access de►
panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC -214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls,
shall be Karp type DSC -214M "Universal" (12" x 12 "); for drywall ceilings, shall be
Karp Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW /CAD (12" x 12" min.) with .._
screw driver type lock.
B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division, Birmingham
Ornamental Iron, or equal. "
2.12 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIMMINGS
A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing fixtures to ,..
establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the
faucets, or concealed type of lock shield, loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be
furnished and installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and
equipment shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the wall.
Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass with polished, bright
surfaces.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for proper —
installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary, shall be built into place as the Aft
building progresses. This Contractor shall be held responsible for the stability and proper
support of all plumbing fixtures.
oft
C. Refer to plumbing fixture schedule on Drawings for fixture type, make, and model
numbers. A.
2.13 TRAP PRIMER .w11
A. Furnish and install automatic trap primer as manufactured by Precision Plumbing ..R
Products Prime Rate Model P1 -500, with vacuum breaker and adjustment screw. Provide .�.
trap primer distribution unit when serving more than on drain.
B. Install trap primers to serve all floor drains and indirect waste in boiler room, mechanical .t
rooms or where indicated.
2.14 VACUUM BREAKERS 41 k
A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers as manufactured by Watts or approved equal. —
B. Type "A" - pressure type to be Watts Model 800 QT with test cocks and ball valves.
C. Type "B" - atmospheric type, Model 288A chrome plated, when supply is not under 41110,
constant pressure.
2.15 DEMOLITION .ft
A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re -used shall be removed .�►
by this Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. The Plumbing
Contractor shall be responsible for delivering and/or properly disposing of all obsolete 4141
equipment to such places as designated by the Owner. , .,
15400 -12
Aft
AIR
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
oft B. Traps shall be service weight cast -iron where buried in floors or serving floor drains.
Where traps are not connected directly under the drain they serve in the floor, they shall
be fitted with top cleanouts and extensions to the floor with access covers and plates.
C. Furnish and install traps as required for all items of equipment furnished under other
Sections of these Specifications, and/or the Owner.
2.06 CLEANOUTS
A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they shall be Zurn
Aix ZN- 1405 -2, nickel - bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn ZN- 1405 -7 nickel - bronze
recessed for resilient floors; Zum ZN- 1405 -7 for ceramic tile floors; ZN- 1405 -14 for
carpeted floors; or equal by J. R. Smith or Wade.
ww B. Wall cleanouts shall be brass, recessed head plugs with Zurn ZN- 1440 -1 access frame
and cover.
Atik C. Cleanouts shall be Zurn Industries, Inc., Wade Division, Josam Mfg. Co., Jay R. Smith
Co., or equal.
osok 2.07 INSULATION
, A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation with self -
sealing lap, 1" thick for hot water, and return hot water 1 /2" thick for cold water. Insula-
r tion shall be one piece snap -on type. All exposed piping within 10' -0" of finished floor
,1111,, shall be insulated as noted above and shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover.
B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings with joints
oni taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all overlapping surfaces to
As,, form a vapor barrier.
C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
'°` recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be remade.
Alli D. Install a twelve (12 ") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger; insulation shall run
continuous through the hanger. Jacket shall match adjacent insulation jacket.
Ask E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be insulated with
e Truebro "Handi Lav- Guard ", Model 102 w /105 offset or equal, molded insulation kit.
2.08 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss, equal to Trerice
80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type, 4 ' /2" diameter, 2 °F subdivisions.
aft
Stem length shall be sufficient to assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less
than 3'/2" nor less than one -third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer
shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket of matching
opt
length, and with lagging extensions when installed in insulated pipe. Thermometers shall
be adjustable angle type, positioned as required to be easily seen and read from normal
operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1. Hot water: 30 degrees F —180 degrees F.
2. Cold water: 0 degrees F- 100 degrees F.
Pk
C. Provide at inlet and outlet of existing mixing valve.
2.09 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. 4 ' /2" dial, double spring with soft copper tubing loop and petcock. Operating range shall
be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co., or approved equal.
B. Provide at water entrance, on both sides of pressure reducing valve.
15400 -11
A
w
w
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
G. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A —
H. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB -418 or IB -440.
I. Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S. Gauge Co.'s Figure
P500, 2" diameter, 0 lb. to 100 lbs.
J. Pressure Reducing Valves
1. Pressure reducing valves (PRV) shall be as manufactured by Watts Regulator Co.,
Model U5B -GG with thermal bypass. No substitutions shall be allowed.
2.03. HANGERS ,,.,
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter & Paterson, or Fee &
Mason. Alio
B. For cast iron and galvanized steel piping - Grinnell Company's Figure No. 260, one to
each length of cast iron pipe, at 12 ft. intervals for threaded piping; for copper tubing -
Grinnell Co.'s figure CT -65 at 8 ft. intervals for tubing up to 2"; 10 ft. intervals for tubing 411k
2 ' /2" and above. —
C. For hot, hot water circulating, and cold water piping - Grinnell Company's figure No.
CT -99 heavily copper plated at 6 ft. intervals for copper tubing 1 1 /4" or less, 10 ft.
intervals for piping 1 ' /2" and larger. Provision shall be made to allow for expansion and .mt,
contraction of all piping.
D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1 ft. of each horizontal elbow. Vertical runs
of pipe not over 5 ft. in length shall be supported on hangers placed not over 12" from the ..4
elbow on the connecting horizontal run.
E. All vertical i in shall be supported at each story height, with a support at the base of
P P g PIS rY f�� PPo
vertical cast iron pipe. —.
F. Perforated strap iron hanger or Milford type copper plated steel hangers are not
acceptable.
G. Where piping is supported from ceiling beams, support parallel pipes from different +•k
beams.
H. Support pipes sufficiently clear of all part of structure to allow for full thickness of .ri,
insulation.
L Hangers to be adequate size to include insulation. Furnish and install galvanized steel
insulation protection shields outside of insulation on pipe sizes 2" and larger to prevent
crushing or indenting of insulation of hangers.
J. Provide plastic coated steel hangers to support vent piping at 6 ft. intervals. ..s
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS ..
A. Nipples: Nipples shall conform to WW -N -351 and shall be the same material as the __
piping in which installed.
B. Unions: Unions shall be brass or bronze, 125 lb., either threaded or with solder joint
ends, conforming to WW -U -516 for use in copper tubing.
C. Insulating bushings and Unions: hard rubber threaded bushing inserted between two
dissimilar metals.
D. Flanges on copper tube or pipe: cast bronze, 150 lb., solder joint connection. 4 , 4
E. Floor and ceiling escutcheon plates: Floor and ceiling escutcheon plates shall be split
hinged, locked type. Plates shall be of pressed steel with a heavy coating of copper, Am.
nickel and chromium. ,,.,,
2.05 TRAPS
A. Traps at fixtures shall be listed in the Fixture Schedule. Exposed traps shall be chrome
plated.
15400 -10 404.
Alb
AIR
w
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4 ' piping 2" and below shall be assembled with screwed malleable iron fittings; 2'/2" and
414, above shall be welded. Provide necessary ball type gas shut -off valves or square head
cocks on piping 2" and smaller and drips as required. Piping 2" and larger shall have plug
404 valves. All high pressure gas piping shall be Schedule 40, all welded with flanged plug
valves. All gas valves shall be rated for 125 psi working pressure.
1. All gas piping, including gas valve and final connections to kitchen shall be the
responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor.
2. All welding shall be done in accordance with the welding procedures of the
National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or any other approved procedure,
conforming to the requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. No welder
shall be employed on the work who has not been fully qualified under the above
specified procedure and so certified as a member of the local chapter of the
National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau or similar locally recognized testing
4404 authority.
2.02 VALVES
A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by Watts Series
B6001 with stainless steel balls. No substitutions will be allowed. Valves shall be
Aft
provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi
+w► wog, positive 100% shut -off. All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized
a�► to match pipe insulation thickness.
B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 'A" or 3 /4" solder by 3 /4" hose end with attached cap
__ and chain.
Oak
C. Provide gas cocks for sizes 1" and smaller, and provide gas rated ball valves on gas piping
1 1/2" and larger with tee handles.
D. Gate Valves:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall be Class 125
iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet conforming to 200 psi wog non-
" shock cast iron, flanged ends, with Teflon packing, two -piece packing gland
assembly, Hammond Figure 1R1138, Stockman, or equal.
2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be Class 125. Body
and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, solid disc, copper
silicone alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon packing, and malleable
handwheel, solder end, Stockham Figure B -104, Hammond 1RI138, or equal.
3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American Valve, or
equal.
E. Balancing Valves:
1. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit setter, with
r"„ calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and connections for differential
pressure meter.
2. Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson.
F. Check Valves
1. Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Drawings.
Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body and caps shall be ASTM
B62 cast bronze composition, swing type disc, Stockham Figure B -309.
2. Check valves 2 'h" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted with body and
Ilk
cap conforming to ASTM Al26, Class B cast iron, flanged, swing type disc,
Stockham Figure G -931.
3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, or
equal.
w
15400 -9
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
drawings on backgrounds provided by the HVAC contractor.
B. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall
prepare composite sketches, at a suitable scale, not less than 1/4"=1', clearly showing how
his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades.
C. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas
by this Subcontractor without first co- ordinating the installation of same with other trades ,I„
and the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated
piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and
mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural
finishes by the other trades.
D. This Subcontractor shall co- ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung
ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be r
brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before piping and/or equipment of
other trades is installed.
E. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use
common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways,
piping, ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions "'
of equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or ..o.
equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and
positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the '""
Architect. ark
F. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the
clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the
Architectural, or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof ...,
plans, and details.
ark
G. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural
design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs Aft
incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the
Owner.`
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS ark
A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2 '/z" and larger, shall be cast iron "no
hub ", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast iron clamps as manufactured by ..
"Clamp -All ". No substitutions will be allowed. All soil, waste, and vent below slab shall ..w
be service weight, cast iron pipe with oakum and lead, sealed gas and watertight. In lieu of ..o
lead and oakum joint piping, below slab may be service weight with push -on rubber rings.
B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper pipe with ark
solder fittings.
C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2" and smaller
shall be type "M" copper. '"""`
D. All hot, cold and recirculating hot water piping within the building shall be hard copper 4111%
Type "L" seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat fittings. All solders used shall be
lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite -100 ", or equal, complying with the latest issue of 4101*
ANSI A -5.8 publications. All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome
plated. All below slab trap primer peed piping shall be type "K" soft rolled with silver
Ark
solder joint.
E. All gas piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with malleable pattern fittings, ar,
installed in strict compliance with the Massachusetts Fuel Gas Code and NFPA 54. All
ask
15400 -8 .�.
Alb
Auk
Amw
o
o
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
dik
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1.18 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper
Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified
dok personnel to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's
representative is properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Amik Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual ", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name
Alnk
of the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of
Contents with tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and
easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard
binders or an approved equivalent.
Amk C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start -up, operation, and shutdown.
auk 3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of
Aft equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control
of each item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
A 7. List of recommended spare parts.
• 1k 8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps, etc.
1 0. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as
4 the local representative for each item of equipment.
""" 1.19 GUARANTEE
Auk A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all
parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to
ook
promptly repair or replace any items of his work which are found to be defective during
oft this period.
w
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by defects
in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused by
replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall
oh
be considered as being defective.
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the contract Drawings whether by Change
Order or by filed conditions. Principal dimensions of concealed work and for piping
installation. Valve numbers shall be added as soon as established.
1.21 COORDINATION OF TRADES
oft
A. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall give full cooperation to the Subcontractors of other
trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be
installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. The Plumbing
Subcontractor shall cooperate with the other sub trades in preparing a complete set of co-
al, ordination drawings. The plumbing subcontractor shall prepare all plumbing coordination
15400 -7
I
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
A. Before submitting a bid, visit the site, examine its condition, and become acquainted with A
the obstacles and advantages for performing the work. Study the drawings and .,
specifications explanatory of the work to be performed and compare them with the
information gathered by the examination of the site.
B. No claim for extra compensation will be recognized if difficulties are encountered which
an examination of the site conditions and contract documents prior to executing the
contract would have revealed.
C. The plumbing contractor shall attend a pre construction meeting to review project A•
schedule, coordination, and procedures. The pre construction meeting shall be set up by A•
the General Contractor.
1.15 TESTS
API
A. Furnish all labor, material, instruments, supplies and services, and bear all costs for the
accomplishment of the tests specified in Part 3.0. Correct all defects appearing under ''"
test, and repeat the tests until no defects are disclosed. Leave the equipment clean and
ready for use.
B. Perform all tests, other than specified herein, which may be required by legal authorities
or by agencies to whose requirements this work is to conform. ,
1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller, required for
the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be performed by the Plumbing
Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time "`
to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports
(ie. beams or joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location
for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error due to failure to '""
co- ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing ,,•
Contractor failing to co- ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General Contractor. ft
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new _
walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes
where sleeves were not installed or where incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor A"•
shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers. Aft
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the Owner. Ask
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is
to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Plumbing "`
Contractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved 0w0
manner.
1.17 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage
41166
rooms and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an exterior "*
exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the Drawings. When pipes are ,
indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible
for ensuring that wall and pipe insulation is properly installed to protect them from mok
freezing.
15400 -6 ,A•
Atte
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook -ups required for the use of
water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in
Aft Section 01500.
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior details,
plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents are
intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any
applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a
pp p part of the Contract
requirements.
B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably implied, in the
Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called for or
+ reasonably implied in both.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing Contractor shall carefully
investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as
may be required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials
and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and
to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. All delivery and storage must be
coordinated with the Smith College Facilities Management Department. The Plumbing
Contractor shall take delivery of all pre - purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and
shall be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these materials
from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after delivery shall be the
responsibility of this Contractor.
B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work
and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be
made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible
for the proper protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
0111 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his
Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain 120
volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his
machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be
removed by the Plumbing Contractor.
!► 1.13 PROTECTION
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from
injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur shall be made good without
expense to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper
protection of all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1.14 EXAMINATION OF SITE
15400 -5
w
w
4
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
protected by suitable means.
H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials installed
under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
L The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and Specifications
before ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be
called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will ®.
be determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except
that substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in Alto
the product specification, and as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by a
qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in ''*
accordance with the General Requirements. —
1.06 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. o,*,
made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to
function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the Admp
same brand of manufacturer for each class of material or equipment.
B. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters
Laboratories standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements
and be so labeled.
1.07 SUBMITTALS '""`
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor shall submit to the
Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data sheets, or Shop Drawings,
giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all materials to be furnished. '"``
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for compliance with os*
the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making
any and all changes which may be required. '""
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Plumbing Contractor ,,,,
from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract
Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall
remain with the Plumbing Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which Shop
Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the o'
Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will be required to remove such materials and w„
substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS ..e
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his work.
He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges .w
incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility **
regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of .�
the work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his work. .w
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK -UPS
15400 -4
ANIk
..w
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1.03 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
Aok
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
mok Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and
local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the
Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern.
oti Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations,
the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
Amok instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a
regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise
care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of
his work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the Project
dok
who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the
Plumbing Contractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be
removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction
work begins.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done to the
building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting from
the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute
arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it
is agreed between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and extent
of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision shall be final and
binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co- ordinate to the fullest extent with all other trades in
order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to
oft his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring
such information. The Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them
in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing Contractor to give proper
information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such
failure.
onk E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the
Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work.
Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets,
etc. The Plumbing Contractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the
accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
Ilk F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable
runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items.
G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work and
materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or
injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be
capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be
15400 -3
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS �*
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Division 15: Plumbing
SECTION 15400: PLUMBING
PART 1- GENERAL /a
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and applicable parts of •
Division 1, as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work
under this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. .�
C. Co- ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this ..�
Section. Co- operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract. if"
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably
incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work specified herein and/or
ABb
indicated on the Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. New sanitary, waste and vent systems piping inside the building and connecting
to existing. Furnish piping, traps, flanges, seals, cleanouts, fixtures, drains, and „
supports.
2. Modifications to existing and hot and cold water distribution systems and new
hot water return distribution systems. Furnish piping, fittings, insulation, sup-
ports, valves, and recirculation pump.
3. Provide and install new water meter and pressure reducing station at domestic """'
water service entrance. ,,,,
4. Provide back water preventers (point -of -use types) where shown on Drawings,
specified, or required.
5. Gas piping system connecting each and every fixture, device, and item of Aft
equipment requiring gas within the building. The system shall be installed with
all incidentals necessary for a complete operational system and shall include all "
piping, valves, stops, drips, meters, pressure reducing valves, vents to .,.
atmosphere, gauges, structural supports (hangers), and such other standard speci-
fied accessories as are necessary for a complete approved system
6: Plumbing fixtures and supports. ..
7. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems, fixtures, and
equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new construction. All piping,'
fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and brass piping, fittings and valves, flush
valves) to be removed is the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such
places designated by the Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material
after the Owner's review shall be by this Contractor.
8. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing. w.
9. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others requiring
water, drain, and waste connections. sok
10. Furnish access panels.
11. Guarantee and instructions.
B. Refer to appropriate Division - 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in
conjunction with plumbing piping; not work of this Section.
15400 -2 Ask
tIllk
Ilk
416
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS •
ilk
Smith College, Northampton, MA
el Division 15: Plumbing
eh SECTION 15400: PLUMBING
4111 PART I - GENERAL 2
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 2
411k 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 2
1.03 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3
010X, 1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE . 4
4101k 1.06 PRODUCTS 4
1.07 SUBMITTALS 4
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 4
ilk
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 4
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 5
41111k
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 5
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5
4111,
1.13 PROTECTION 5
1.14 EXAMINATION OF SITE 5
11111k
1.15 TESTS 6
1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING 6
Mk
1.17 WORK CONCEALED 6
1.18 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 7
411kr. 1.19 GUARANTEE 7
1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS '7
410k 1.21 COORDINATION OF TRADES 7
4111k
PART 2- PRODUCTS 8
4111k 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS 8
2.02 VALVES 9
kik 2.03 HANGERS 10
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS 10
2.05 TRAPS 10
411Ik
2.06 CLEANOUTS 11
2.07 INSULATION 11
41A
2.08 THERMOMETERS 11
2.09 PRESSURE GAUGES 11
4111
2.10 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS 12
2.11 ACCESS PANELS 12
Mk
2.12 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIMMINGS 12
Mk 2.13 TRAP PRIMER 12
2.14 VACUUM BREAKERS 12
2.15 DEMOLITION 12
1011
2.16 WATER METER 13
2.17 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 13
illik '
2.18 RECIRCULATING PUMP 13
2.19 DUPLEX SEWAGE EJECTOR 13
Illik
2.20 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 14
Ilk
PART 3 - EXECUTION 25
Ilk 3.01 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING 25
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE 26
IIIIk 3.03 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS 26
3.04 BASIC IDENTIFICATION 26
Pk 3.05 VALVES 27
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING 28
3.07 INSULATION 28
1111
3.08 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS 28
Ilk 3.09 TESTING 28
3.10 CLEANING UP 30
3.11 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 30
Pk
3.12 DISINFECTION 30
3.13 ACCESS PANELS 30
111
3.14 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 30
3.15 ISOLATION VALVES 30
lk
3.16 FIRE SAFING 31
3.17 WA IER SERVICE 31
Ilk
Ilk
15400-1
lk
1
1
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA oft
A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves identifying their purpose
and function. Provide lettering size and style selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's
suggested styles.
B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning. Adjust controls and Ank.
apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers and gauges for accuracy over the entire
range. Remove and replace items found defective.
C. Provide all test and test certificates required by the Northampton Fire Department. ditk
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or patching of all openings and holes 4" diameter or 4" square or smaller, '"_
required for the installation of fire protection in the building, shall be performed by the Fire
Protection Subcontractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at
such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for openings shall be
checked by the Fire Protection Subcontractor and error, due to failure to co- ordinate work ,,,,
with other Divisions, shall be the responsibility of the Fire Protection Subcontractor failing
to co- ordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense. oh.
B. All holes larger than 4 " diameter, or 4 "square, shall be provided by the General Contractor. ..Nk
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new walls
are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where
sleeves were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The Fire Protection Subcontractor .w
shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the ..
General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All piping, cutting, and threading shall be done in a location approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain as finished or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Fire Protection ..k
Subcontractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner. 4
END OF SECTION 15300
ink
efik
Oka
..w
15300 -29
.ft,
4100.
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
4111 Smith College, Northampton, MA
dik
E. Application
1. Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no voids. Compress
404
and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing insulation with sealing
compound.
Auk
oft 3.03 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
4k.
B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
Ask reductions in pipe sizes.
46 C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on
flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings.
mak D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 and
larger connections.
dek
E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 arid NFPA 14. Hanger
and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall
dek be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions
for rigid systems.
41111k F. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff
4e4 valve. Test connections may also serve as draM pipes.
G. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide
Aft gauge with a connection not less than 1/4" and having a soft metal seated globe valve
arranged for draining pipe between gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and
where they will not be subject to freezing.
doik H. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join
osh pipe, fittings, and valves as follows.
1. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt
Ask
tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use
suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate
dik torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.
J. Mechanical Grooved Joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with
dik the couplings.
K. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends.
3.04 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with
41111,
the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having
jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install supervised open gate valves so located to control all sources of water
supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve,
provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system con-
" trolled by each valve.
C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper direction of flow
including the bypass check valve and retard chamber draM line connection. Install valve
411111 trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for
proper operation.
3.05 FINAL CLOSEOUT
oft
41114
15300-28
dik
Ilk
AMOR
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is ..
installed within allowable limits at longer distances.
7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze members before Ai `"
applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis supports.
8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines.
9. Cast -iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined with a four band
shield and clamp assembly in Zones 2B, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections
3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced
spacings of 1/2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
we.
3.01 CLEANING AND TESTING
A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead -in connections "-
and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been
completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to
remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13. Continue
flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. __
B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of two (2) hours,
g.
at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum Ag
static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure ,
hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe
hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi,
for period of two (2) hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry-valve clappers ,.,b
open during test, to prevent damage.
C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with am
ANSUNFPA standards for "little or no leakage ", and retest as specified to demonstrate.
compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop -leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair
methods.
3.02 FIRE SAFING
asok
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work
including, but not limited to the following:
1. Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
411b.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Fire safmg at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls, stairway walls,
mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms,
outdoor storage rooms, and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation ,,,,
1. Fire safmg insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc.
or Architect- Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum thickness by the required full
length and width, or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke- through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal compound as '"
manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over Thermafiber fire safing. ..
D. Preparation
1. At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes and perimeters. ..e
15300 -27
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
f Smith College, Northampton, MA
weight. Horizontal throughst restraint shall be Specification type 28 (see selection
guide).
19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible.
L. Vibration Isolation of Piping:
1. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the main lines near the
mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification 11. Specification 11
aw. hangers must also be used in all transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger
rods with SRC clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other locations
' ' throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification 10.
oak Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification 6. Heat
exchangers and expansion tanks are considered part of the piping run. The first
three (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static deflection as
auk specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. If piping is connected
to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces
the first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and
including 3 in., 1 -1/2 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 6 in., and 2 -1/2
in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure
as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification
Ask 23 flexible piping connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is not
suitable for the service.
2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10 hangers or
ow supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors,
40 ,, and guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum
of 0.75 in. except in those expansion locations where additional deflection is
required to limit load changes to ± 25% of the initial load. Submittals must include
riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at
each support point, initial and final changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall
include certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive stresses
11► and that none will exist in the proposed design.
M. Seismic Restraint of Piping:
Auk
1. Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use Specification 12 cables
if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints may be used on unisolated piping.
a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and compressed air piping
that is 1 in. I.D. or larger.
b. Piping located in Mechanical Rooms, mechanical equipment (fan) rooms,
and refrigeration equipment rooms that is 1-1/4 in. I.D. and larger.
c. All other piping 2-1/2 in. diameter and larger.
Aft 2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes,
except where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads.
3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all pipe sizes, except
m "'' where lesser spacing is required to limit anchorage loads.
4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors may be used as
transverse and longitudinal restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or
ofk greater than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by expansion or
Ash contraction.
5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20 ft. maximum and
" longitudinal restraints at 40 ft. maximum spacing.
6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a longitudinal restraint
mow►,
15300 -26
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict , ..
accordance with the manufacturers written instruction and all certified submittal
oft
data
2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not cause any change of ••t
position of equipment, piping or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment.
3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made ink
that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. ..,
4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit which makes ..�
rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building"
includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. Aft
5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. „
6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or
piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to oft
the architects /engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated ,,,`
by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense.
7. Bring to the architects /engineers attention any discrepancies between the "°`
Specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific ,,raP
• equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by
discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense. ''
8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations which are deemed defective in Aft
workmanship and materials at the Contractor's expense.
9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support w
of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for ,•
approval. Generally bracing may occur from:
a. Flanges of structural beams.
b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction. Alba
c. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill -in concrete anchors. .�
10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short
circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or conduit. —
11. Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non - isolated systems. ...
Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be used in place of cables on rigidly
attached systems only.
12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods
must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14
braces. ..4
13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located, the support rods ,,,,
must be braced when necessary to accept compressive loads with Specification 14
Aft
braces.
14. Drill -in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be Specification type .►
18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type for floor mounted equipment.
15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as ..R
required. Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project. Aft
16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe sizes exceed 24 in.
or specified movements exceed Specification 23 capabilities. Oft
17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration isolation ,..s
manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals. .w.
18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected against excessive
displacement which results from high air throughst in relation to the equipment Aft
eft
15300 -25
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
__ Smith College, Northampton, MA
oak
Alk
pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by
the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side
ook ofthe shut off valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR
or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
24. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings.
Auk
Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples.
+wk Minimum Lengths shall be as tabulated:
FlangedMale Nipples
ami
3x14 10x261/2x9 1- 1/2x13
doh 4x15 12x283/4x10 2x14
5x19 14 x30 1 x11 2- 1/2x18
6x20 16x321/4x12
Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut -off valves horizontally
and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as
took
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
Aft 25. All- directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of steel tubing
separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thick 60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint
shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either
direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and
the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All- directional
anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
out 26. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing
separated by a minimum 1/2 in. thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height if
the guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe
expansion or contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for
selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of ± 1 -5/8 in. motion, or to
meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall be Type VSG as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
27. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum 3/4 in. thick
neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the
disk
pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete
A r. ► may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if
4110. the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the
building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1 in. past either face ofthe wall.
41 ". Where temperatures exceed 240 dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used in
lieu ofthe sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries,
Inc.
Agik 28. The horizontal throughst restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a
neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5 with the same deflection as
specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it
can be preset for throughst at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a
maximum of 1/4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished
with one (1) rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the
fin'' duct work or the equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at
_w the centerline of throughst and symmetrical on either side of the unit. Horizontal
throughst restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD as manufactured by Mason Industries,
Inc.
__ K. Execution - General:
Alk
15300 -24
ww►
ediak
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of
1/2 in. bars welded in place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer 1 -1/2 in.
above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor
bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets ..
shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the
base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not r.e
acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Auk
Inc. ..w
22. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curbs. The
lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and
removable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame „-,
must provide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to
resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings
shall be a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest ..
on 1/4 in. thick neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs
provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs waterproofing shall consist of a
continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs
waterproofing and joined at the comers by EPDM bellows. All spring locations
shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have Aft
provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically contain
the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the
lower Z section anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage pre - "'"
approval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to the maximum 40,
certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb shall be Type RSC as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
23. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the _
covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within
the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not
acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring .A►
between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel ,..
flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may be single
sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1 -1/2 in. may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one .o
sphere and cable retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up ...
to 190° F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 250° F. 16 in. and
larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190° F and 135 psi at 250° F. Safety factors to w,
burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must have permanent Art
markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric
reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion
joints.
Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion
joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping
locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure Auk
requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work.
If control rods are used, they must have 1/2 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings
large enough in area to take the throughst at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. �*+
Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves.
Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent consultants showing
minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound
15300 -23
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
"m'` Smith College, Northampton, MA
Alk
oak Industries, Inc.
15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be
special purpose performed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing
over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an Anchorage Pre - approval
,ws "R "Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross brace shall be
Type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
16. All- directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members
restrained by a one -piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene.
Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall
Alok not exceed 1000 psi. A minimum air gap of 1/8 in. shall be incorporated in the
snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and
resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be removable t allow inspection of
internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits
exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage Pre - approval
"R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum
4.4 certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z -1225 as
aok manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members
411% restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials compounded to bridge bearing
Specifications. Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4 in.
thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be manufactured
'""" with air gap between hard and resilient material of nor less than 1/8 in. nor more
„,k than 1/4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of
the seismic snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal or greater than the load
assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber multiplied by the
.ems applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the load deflection in the x, y and z
planes. Snubbers shall have an anchorage pre- approval "R "Number from OSHPD
ook
in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical
oft load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z -1011 as manufactured by Mason Industries,
Inc.
18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from
undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also
have a safety shoulder which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud
Ank
anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation
Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill -in stud edge anchors shall be Type
SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can
aft be slid into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured
,w from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge
ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number
from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill -in
Abk female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as manufactured by Mason Industries,
Inc.
20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring
dik forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large
w enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows. bases shall be a minimum of
1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6in. The base depth need
w not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for
15300 -22
.w.
Ao NIX
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA ....
oak
fk
spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking w
during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and
operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1.2 in. shall be maintained
around restraining bolts and between the housing and the air spring action. Limit Alb
stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to _
resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR -MT as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 -1/4 in. thick
neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in
Specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The
neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the
steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers
or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger """
box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through
a 30° arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the
spring. Submittals shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 30° capability. Ak
Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
11. Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be pre - compressed and locked at
the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or
equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed Alb
with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the
hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of
a scale. Submittals shall include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree 4.
capability. Hangers shall be Type PC3ON as manufactured by Mason Industries,
Inc.
12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to *'®
resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide
all- directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel
to final installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable
engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges. Cable
assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the
State of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies -
shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger ,.ft
rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam all as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to resist seismic loads w
with a minimum safety factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint.
Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final 411'
installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment. ....
Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage pre - approval "R" Number from
OSHPD in the state of California verifying the maximum certified load ratings. ,..o
Solid seismic brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
14. Steel angles, sized to pre -vent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods
utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when .n.
required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall „Ik
have an Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason Aux
..A
15300 -21
Alb
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
as required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel
horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene element and the inner steel
sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere
with panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the
ends of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as
amk
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
mook 4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The bushing shall
surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact.
Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
°_ 5. Spring isolators shall be free standing, laterally stable without any housing, and
complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad
between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that
must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8
aft if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum
additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall
w, include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring
- height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in
' Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent
spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking
during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and
aft operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2 in. shall be maintained
around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to
interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during 40, operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an
internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces.
Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the
oft
state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load
ratings. Mountings shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or steel housing to
Ank
provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically
and allow a maximum if 1/4 in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient
snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre - approval "R" Number
from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal
m and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason
4114 Industries, Inc.
8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel sections connected by
a a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced neoprene element. Air spring configuration
shall be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air
Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum of three times the
published maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall be connected to
dita either the building control air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three
(3) leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1 /8in. Submittals shall
include natural frequency, load, and damping tests performed by an independent lab
aft or acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc..
9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have a MT air spring as described in
Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent air
imok
Aok
15300 -20
4
.wm
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
pads, concrete inserts, double -sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with 00
the requirements of the vibration vendor's calculations.
Anw
H. Seismic Force Levels
1. The following force levels will be used on this project. ..�
Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E.
oak
Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" « Force "G" Force For
Code for all pipes, Duct & for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety
Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either 40,
Equipment Equipment Rigidity or
Flexibility Mounted
Zone Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Ask
UBC * * * * * *
BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2 ,ft.
SBCCI
Product Intent:
1. All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this section shall be the
product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industry's products are the basis of these
Specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their
systems strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the
specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with .-
Section D.
2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the discontinuance of any
attachment point between equipment or structure, vertical permanent deformation ,.
greater than 1/8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1/4 in. .n.
J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints:
1. Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in. square waffle
modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution .0*
plates shall be used as required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc. wM►
2, Bridge - bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2 Ank
in. and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron
Aft
casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The
elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from __
contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene
materials shall be compounded to bridge- bearing Specifications. Mountings shall ft
have an Anchorage Pre- approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.
Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. '
3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting structure by assemblies ,-
consisting of a neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer
sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes Aft
,ws
15300 -19
Aft
Al ft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
dik
asw showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre - approvals based on
41mh independent testing are preferred to approvals based on
calculations. Where pre - approved devices are not available,
submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations
(including the combining of tensile and shear loadings) to support
osk
seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a registered
oft professional engineer with at least five years of seismic 4111k experience and licensed in the state of the job location. Testing and
calculations must include both shear and tensile loads as well as
oft one test or analysis at 45° to the weakest mode.
A ,, (3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads,
and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment and
oft structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter,
embedment, and/or welded length. All seismic restraint devices
shall be designed to accept, without failure, the forces detailed in
Section H acting through the equipment center of gravity.
Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground level.
E. Code and Standards Requirements:
1. Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced code:
Akk a. Massachusetts State Building Code.
b. BOCA National Mechanical Code.
aft
c. NFPA 90A.
4.+ F. Manufacturer's Responsibility :
1. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the
dik
following responsibilities:
ook a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as scheduled or specified.
dook
c. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of un- isolated
equipment.
d. Provide installation instructions, drawings, and trained field supervision to
insure proper installation and performance.
G. Related Work:
o ,,, 1. Housekeeping Pads:
a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the
structure details and design shall be prepares by the restraint vendor if not
- already indicated on the Drawings.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint vendor and sized to
dub provide a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around the
dosk outermost anchor bolt to allow development of full drill -in wedge anchor
ratings. If cast -in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be
sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and
embedment.
2. Supplementary Support Steel:
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all equipment,
piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or
specified.
3. Attachments:
a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping
dok
15300 -18
Aft
Oak
Kraus Fitch Arch itects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply
including all generators, transfer switches, transformers, and all flowpaths .�
to fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems.
c. All medical and life support systems.
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence including air „®
handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc.
e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment schedule. a..
2. Positive Attachment: Aft
a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast -in anchor, a drill -in wedge
anchor, a double -sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a Ask
welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type beam
clamps for support rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other
equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points. """
3. Transverse Bracing: ,,,
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the
pipe, duct, or conduit.
4. Longitudinal Bracing:
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe,
duct, or conduit.
D. Manufacturer's Data:
1. The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints shall provide
submittals for products as follows:
a. Descriptive Data: Oft
(1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific
ask
restraints detailing compliance with the Specification.
(2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, "*k
showing vibration isolators and seismic restraints by referencing ,
numbered descriptive Drawings.
b. Shop Drawings: Aft
(1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including 004
dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations.
(2) Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung
equipment.
(3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for
seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable attachment oak
methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be included and approved ,ft
before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint
manufacturer's submittals must include spacing, static loads and ARK
seismic loads at all attachment and support points. ..�.
(4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include
number, size, and locations for each piece of equipment.
c. Seismic Certification and Analysis:
(1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections —
of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a
registered professional engineer with at least five years of seismic
design experience, licensed in the state of the job location.
Aft
(2) All restraining devices shall have a pre- approval number from
California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency aft
isk
15300 -17
T
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
atik Smith College, Northampton, MA
mik
oft 13. New air compressor shall be equal to General Model No. OL42575AC - two stage
with starter.
alarm valve, solenoid valve and air maintenance device, accelerator, compressor and
Aft trim.
14. Alarm Test Modules: Furnish and install AGF Manufacturing, Inc.'s UL listed and
FM approved "Test and Drain" for the alarm test loops, where indicated on the
drawings, complete with combination sight glass /orifice.
15. Standpipe valve cabinet shall be recessed type. Valve cabinet shall be equal to
Potter Roemer Model 1810/1812 with 2 ' /z" fire department valve and type "B"
__ door.
2.07 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, in masonry walls, plastered walls,
plastered or gypsum wallboard ceilings, shall be furnished by the Fire Protection
Subcontractor and installed by tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plaster
'""'' shall be Karp type DSC -214 PL (12" by 12 "). For dry wall ceilings, shall be Karp Sesame
Aikk Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW /CAD (12 " by 12" minimum.)
2.08 SEISMIC CONTROL
,00„ A. Intent:
1. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all mechanical building
"" system components in place during a seismic event.
2. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic codes,
component manufacturer's, and building construction standards. Whenever a
' conflict occurs between the manufacturers or construction standards, the most
swft, stringent shall apply.
3. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic
dok
consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more stringent,
national, state or local construction requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California
OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other requirements).
4. The Contractor shall correct any variance or non - compliance with these
Specification requirements in an approved manner.
5. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels as
Aft
detailed in Section H.
B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
4410, 1. Flexible piping connections.
2. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
3. Seismic restraints for non - isolated equipment.
4. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision.
5. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
- 6. All mechanical systems: Equipment buried underground is excluded but entry of
services through the foundation wall is included. Equipment referred to below is
typical.
C. Definitions:
aiw 1. Life Safety Systems
oak a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler piping, fire
pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels, service water supply
auk piping, water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems.
15300 -16
AIR
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
aft
Walworth: 8713 -F ...
C. Check Valves
1. 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted, renewable composition
disc and bronze seat ring, bolted cover, flanged ends. +�
Fairbanks: 0711
Jenkins: 729
Stockham: G -940 Aft
Walworth: 8883 -LT
D. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves
in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be A
accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. oft Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with
stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable.
2.06 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
A. Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. wok
Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections. All alarm „
valves shall be Reliable, no substitutions will be allowed – all sprinkler heads shall be Viking
or Reliable. AIR
1. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Reliable Sprinkler Corp., Model "M" standard .►
upright sprinkler head, rough brass, or equal. Temperature rating 165oF or as re-
quired by the insurance underwriter. Boiler Room and heads adjacent to unit heaters w
to have 212 °F rating. Oft
2. Semi recessed pendent sprinkler heads shall be equal to Reliable Model "M ",
Olt
chrome plated with Type F escutcheon.
3. Concealed heads shall be Reliable Model "Optima ", or equal.
4. Side wall heads shall be Reliable Model H -1, or E -1. —
5. Tamper switches shall be equal to Potter Electrical Signal Company, Model OSYS-
B, small case, and shall be installed on all control valves for the sprinkler system. dook
6. Automatic ball drips, as manufactured by Potter- Roemer shall be Fig. 5982, size
3/4 ", of straight design in case brass. Install in horizontal position only.
7. Swing Check valve shall be equal to Reliable, Model "80" with tapping for
automatic ball drip, size as required. ,,,
8. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12 -head cabinet equal to Reliable, Model
A -1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have an assortment of heads as used on the job and
also an approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm check valve
area. Provide one cabinet at each alarm valve riser.
9. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection specialties of the
following Grinnell Fire Protection Systems, Co., Inc., Viking Corporation, or equal. ..y
10. Valves with Built -in Tamper Switches: Furnish and install, and each flow control
Aft
station, Milwaukee Valve Co.'s Model BB- VSCSO2 grooved ends, 175 psi., slow
closing "Butterball" butterfly valves, complete with built -in tamper switch for 2 -1/2" ..
pipe size; Model BB -SCSO2 for threaded pipe 2" and smaller. Valves shall be FM
approved and UL listed.
11. Main water flow initiating device shall be equal to Potter Model PS 10 -2A attached
to alarm check valve in non - interruptible position. ..
12. Water flow switches shall be equal to Potter VSF -D with two sets of SPDT contacts
and time delay. Amik
Aft
Aft
15300 -15
dik
ink
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
mik
Smith College, Northampton, MA
ask Corner & Lada Co., Inc.
Elcen Metal Products Co.
Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.
ITT Grinnell Corp..
E. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel for proper piping
w support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated on MSS SP -69.
w, Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional concentrated
loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in
"" direction of . i in
P P� g
mws. F. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure; comply with MSS SP -69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
Ami
to be supported together on trapeze hangers where possible. Install supports piping PP g P type Po PP orts with
__ maximum spacings complying with MSS SP -69. Where piping of various sizes is to be
supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to
support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
Ash G. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit
!+k freedom of movement between pipe anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.
L Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe
__ deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are not exceeded.
da, J. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.
Aft 2.05 VALVES
*,,, A. Provide factory- fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated.
Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as
oft determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end connections
which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type
is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
sk 2. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter -turn.
B. Gate Valves
1. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL- listed, 175 psi, bronze body, solid wedge,
outside screw and yoke, rising stem.
�► Crane: 459
Fairbanks: 0222
Hammond: IB681
Jenkins: 275U
Stockham: B -133
4 Walworth: 904
2. Flanged End, 2-1/2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted,
solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem.
Crane: 467
Fairbanks: 0412
Hammond: IR1154
Jenkins: 825 -A
mok Stockham: G -634
Akk
dok
15300 -14
siek
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
lead, on both sides. 0"
M. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside
diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of
escutcheon to completely cover pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with
nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
1. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide chrome plated sheet steel escutcheons,
solid or split hinged.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of one of the
following:
Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
Producers Specialty & Mfg. Co.
Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
3. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions,
and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building.
Secure escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with
adjoining surface.
2.04 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS
A. Provide facto fabricated piping hangers and su supports complying with MSS SP-58,
rY P P� g PP , of one
of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance .ws
with MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by
Afilb
one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit
pipe size. ••R
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1, for piping larger than 4 ".
late
2. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4" and less.
3. Two -Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. Aftk
B. Provide factory- fabricated hanger -rod attachments complying with MSS SP -58, of one of the
following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and
building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product A" '
information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of ,0"
hanger -rod attachments to suit hanger rods.
1. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
2. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. w
3. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.
4. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
C. Provide factory- fabricated building attachments complying with MSS SP -58, of one of the ,.*
following types listed, selected by Installer to suit building substrate conditions, in
accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's published product information. Select size '
of building attachments to suit hanger rods.
1. Top Beam C- Clamps: MSS Type 19.
2. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.
3. C- Clamps: MSS Type 23. ..k
4. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27. .�
5. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.
D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports of one of the
following:
B -Line Systems Inc.
Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. A*
15300 -13
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
oft Smith College, Northampton, MA
Alek
D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to
drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls
dou
and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or,
4010. if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space
or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls,
overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent- enclosure elements of
moo. building. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by
Ask locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings; do
not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.
E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults, Elevator
Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless
Amok
unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. Any
piping intended to be run through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to
Ank installation.
F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
's'' Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint
Aft compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe /fitting manufacturer, on
male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform
compression of gaskets.
aft
H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for making grooves in
pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends. Assemble joints in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
Ask
I. Install ductile cast -iron water mains and appurtenances in accordance with AWWA C600.
Aft J. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and prepare for
application of specified coatings (if any).
K. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test each natural
4ir, section of each piping system independently, but do not use piping system valves to isolate
sections where test pressures exceed valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and
Ank
pressurize for indicated pressure and time.
sw, L. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
1. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.
2. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.
a111 3. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below
grade, or in exterior walls, caulked between sleeve and pipe.
4. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes through walls, floors,
`®'' ceilings and roofs. Do not install sleeves through structural members of work,
except as detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install sleeves so that
piping will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance for thermal expan-
sion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve
ow equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 1/4" above
level floor finish, and 3/4" above floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary
'` support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and
provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering
sleeves.
Alk 5. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following:
Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with oakum, calk with
15300 -12
Oft
Aar
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
oak
positioning lugs, secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts.
g. Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical
couplings.
Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47. ..
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
h. Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class 150 steel bolt hole
alignment.
Malleable Iron: ASTM 47.
Aft
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
i. Grooves: Conform to the following: Ask
Standard Steel: Square cut.
Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.
j. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved ...h
piping products of the following: -
ITT Grinnell Corp.
Victaulic Co.
B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all requirements of NFPA 13
and shall be as follows:
1. Piping and fittings from water entrance to inlet of backflow preventer shall be Class
52 ductile iron, cement lined with mechanical joints.
2. All concealed standpipes for stair valve cabinets and all exposed sprinkler piping,
subject to vandalism (stair halls and similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 black steel
pipe, welded, suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure. ,,
3. All concealed sprinkler piping (above acoustical ceiling tiles and plaster ceilings; in
pipe chases) and exposed sprinkle piping in Mechanical Equipment Rooms Shops,
PP ) P P PP g s P,
and Boiler Room, downstream of alarm check valves, shall be Schedule 10 seamless 40
light wall, galvanized steel pipe with rolled grooved ends, for piping 2" and larger,
complete with suitable couplings and fittings for rolled grooved end steel pipe. In`
lieu of schedule 10 steel pipe schedule 40 blaze master PVC pipe may be used where •-
allowed by code.
4. All concealed i in and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical Equipment
..�
P�P� g r
P P� P�P g
Rooms, Shops, and Boiler Room, 1 -1/2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the _*
Fire Protection Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe with screwed __
fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with grooved fittings.
5. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1-1/2" and smaller, outside of Mechanical Equipment Ank
Rooms, Shops, and Boiler Room shall be Schedule '40 galvanized steel pipe with
screwed fittings.
6. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings suitable for 175 psi.
working water pressure. A*
7. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint pressure fittings,
where noted on the drawings.
C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will ,.
achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service
without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with w '
adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance /replacement of valves and
equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping
accurately at connections, within 1/16" misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 _`
Code for Pressure Piping. Alb
AIM
15300 -11
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
iak Smith College, Northampton, MA
itiek
furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1.
4. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for
removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or
extruded aluminum, with SSB -grade sheet glass.
5. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect.
6. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system listing the valve number,
fluid controlled, and zone reference location for all valves corresponding to the tag
numbers. The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Mechanical Equip -
' ` ment Room where directed. Furnish two (2) extra copies of the chart to the
Architect. In addition to the above, furnish a color coded floor plan of the entire
Auk
building mounted at the main entrance. Floor plan shall show all items listed in the
City of Northampton Fire Department regulations.
dok 7. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with engraved white lettering for
each zone control flow switch and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located
d"o" adjacent to all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12" below finished
__ ceiling. In addition to the above a 6 "x 9" red phenolic plate with 2" high letters shall
be mounted on the door of the Mechanical Room to indicate a sprinkler alarm valve.
doh
,r, 2.03 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Interior Piping
mik
1. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with ASTM A
onk 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required.
a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40.
b. Fittings: Class 125, cast -iron threaded, ANSI B16.4, or flanged, ANSI
Alak B16.1.
c. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut - groove type
dok
for piping 2 -1/2" and larger only.
+w► 2. Electric- Resistance - Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135.
a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134" wall thickness for 6 ".
Auk
b. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll - groove or
oft mechanical locking type.
3. Grooved Piping Products (for use on pipes 2 -1/2" and larger)
o ft
a. Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47.
b. Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536.
4014 c. Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages
grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which
a"' bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure together
ioak during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit degree of contraction and
expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest published literature.
w d. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that
onk internal pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of
elastomers having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000.
'' e. Bolts and Nuts: Heat - treated carbon steel, ASTM A 183, minimum tensile
110,000 psi.
f. Branch Stub -Ins: Upper housing with full locating collar for rigid
positioning engaging machine -cut hole in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket
conforming to pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing with
15300 -10
riff
tow
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
.wt
,ft
E. All piping, cutting, and threading shall be done in a location approved by the Architect- ,
Engineer.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed concrete floor slab is to
remain as finished or be painted later. Should this area be necessary, the Fire Protection tomt
Subcontractor shall cover the entire working area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved
manner.
,.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Provide piping materials and factory- fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ris
ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper a.►
selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes
and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, which Alt
match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more than one type of __
material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
Aptt
2.02 BASIC IDENTIFICATION ri „p t ,
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one
of the following: riff
Allen Systems, Inc. ,s
Brady (W. H.) Co., Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. dot
Seton Name Plate Corp. rift
B. Provide manufacturer's standard pre - printed, semi -rigid, snap -on, color -coded pipe markers,
talt
complying with ANSI A13.1.
1. For external diameters less than 6 ", provide full -band pipe markers, extending 360o
around pipe at each location, fastened as follows:
Snap -on application of pre- tensioned, semi -rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre - printed nomenclature which best describes
piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect.
3. Locate pipe markers as follows:
a. Near each valve and control device. Apt
b. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, ,ot
except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment.
c. Branch piping need not be marked. Apt
C. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with too
piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers
approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all valves and
control devices. ..
1. Provide 1 -1/8" sq. brass tags with black lettering.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid '
brass S -hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and ,.t,
manufactured specifically for that purpose.
3. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8 -1/2" x test
11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as toot
shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if
any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut -off and similar special 4111111
uses, by special "flags ", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, ,at,
15300 -9
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
4 Smith College, Northampton, MA
w
aft trades, and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be
installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. The Fire Protection
Subcontractor shall prepare coordination drawings on background provided by the HVAC
,f, Subcontractor. Co- ordination Drawings shall be minimum of 1 /4 " =1 " -0" and shall show all
piping, heads, and equipment.
B. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect, this Subcontractor shall
prepare composite sketches at a suitable scale, not less than 1/4" = 1 ' -0 ", clearly showing
how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades.
C. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and possible problem areas by
Aft this Subcontractor without first co- ordinating the installation of same with other trades and
the Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated
oft
piping and other equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and
mounting of electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other structural
aeik finishes installed by other trades.
D. This Subcontractor shall co- ordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment in hung
ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be
__ brought to the attention of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment of
other trades is installed.
4*. E. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use
,4 common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping,
ductwork and other materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of
w equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items including piping and/or
equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. Location and
positioning shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of the Architect.
F. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does not interfere with the
clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the
Contract Architectural or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans,
and details.
G. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural
design or building structure, shall be changed as directed by the Architect, and all costs
ink
incidental to such changes shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the
4 Owner.
Ask
1.19 CUTTING & PATCHING
yew A. Cutting and patching of all openings and holes 4" diameter, or 4" square or smaller, required
for the installation of fire protection in the building, shall be performed by the Fire
ask
Protection Subcontractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a manner and at
such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for openings shall be
. checked by the Fire Protection Subcontractor and error, due to failure to coordinate work
with other divisions, shall be the responsibility of the fire Protection Subcontractor failing to
coordinate, who shall make the corrections at his own expense.
41.14 B. All holes larger than 4" diameter, or 4" square, shall be provided by the General contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required before the new wall
are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required for pipes where
,,,,, sleeves were not installed, or where incorrectly located. The Fire Protection Subcontractor
shall do all drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes after installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the
General Contractor or appropriate tradesman.
oft
15300 -8
Ark
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA ""`
Aft
having an exterior exposure above grade. ..®
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the proper Owner's
representative in all details of operation of equipment installed. Supply qualified personnel
to operate equipment for sufficient length of time to assure that Owner's representative is .►
properly qualified to take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor
shall videotape the instruction procedures and deliver two (2) copies of the tape with the
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words, "Operation and
Maintenance Manual ", the name and location of the equipment or the building, the name of
the Subcontractor, and the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with
tab sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and easily read, with __
large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be bound in hard binders or an
approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1. Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each item of equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of
each item of equipment. r"
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
Alb
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps, etc. ..�
10. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcontractors as well as the —
local representative for each item of equipment.
oft
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work in all
parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance, and shall agree to Alk
promptly repair or replace any items of his work, which are found to be defective during this Aft
period.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused by Auk
defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials or equipment caused .60
by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive maintenance shall be oak
considered as being defective. ...
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS '"
A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings whether by change
order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall be indicated of concealed work, fire ,k
protection lines, valves, and zone flow switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a
bubble drawn around the area of work effected by the change.
41114.
1.18 CO- ORDINATION OF TRADES
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co- operation to the Subcontractors of other
..R
15300 -7
AlMes
ork
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
regarding the observance of the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the
work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of his
work.
dok
1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK -UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook -ups required for the use of water or
sanitary for construction purposes and testing out apparatus as specified in Division 1.
oak
411„ 1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of interior
details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These documents
are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any
applicable work indicated or implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract
requirements.
,w B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or reasonably
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be considered as called
Atek
for or reasonably implied in both.
. C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings
Alk
and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall carefully
oft investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such
awe work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be
required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
doh
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials and
AI '" fixtures to the building site when required, to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid
delaying his work and that of other trades.
oft
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall at all times, fully protect his work and materials from
injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without
400. expense to the owner. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of his Contract
shall be provided by the Fire Protection Subcontractor.
orn, B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and obtain
,,I,, 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the General Contractor to drive his
machines and light his work. He shall provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work shall be removed
gw by the individual Subcontractor.
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping shall be installed concealed in all areas except storage rooms, closets, and
mechanical or electrical equipment rooms, except that in rooms without ceilings, horizontal
aft
runs only may be exposed.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls, ceiling, or floor spaces
15300 -6
ink
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Asik
Oak
capped or plugged at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by 411.
suitable means.
H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials
installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the Owner. w�
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and
Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before ordering any materials and
the installation of work. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect *w
before proceeding with the work.
1.07 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used shall be U.S. —.
made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and designed to
function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended, and with the same —
brand of manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials and ,
equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard requirements,
listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection Subcontractor shall submit
to the Architect and local Fire Department six (6) sets of catalogue cuts or manufacturers'
data sheets and hydraulic calculations, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of all
materials to be furnished. ""
B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire protection pipe and fittings ..
including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes
imot
of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial
relationship between piping and proximate equipment. *�►
1. Shop drawings are subject to review and will require approval by Owner's insurer's —
rating organization and the local Fire Department before submitting to the Architect
for approval. ..
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings thoroughly for compliance ..w
with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to the Architect for review, making
any and all changes, which may be required.
D. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Fire Protection,
Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance with the
Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall ook
remain with the individual Subcontractor.
E. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for which shop
drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which are not in accordance with the Aft
Specifications, the Fire Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials
and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
F. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work which indicates that work A
has been tested in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational,
complete, and has no defects.
..
1.09 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS ..4
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for his
oft
work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other fees and charges
incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He is to assume all responsibility ..w
R
15300 -5
aw
lek
ook
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
aw►
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and Plumbing Code and local
laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract
4114 Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the
Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract
provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
A,,, B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement Officials'
instructions at no additional cost to the Owner. Review proposed system with said officials
inok prior to commencing work.
isok
1.06 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at
a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise
care and supervision of his employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his
work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to the
Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive instructions exactly as if the
Fire Protection Subcontractor himself were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall
aft not be removed or replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction
„ work begins.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage done
'" _ to the building premises or adjoining property or to other Subcontractors' work resulting
4m, from the execution of his part of the work in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute
arising as to the extent or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcon-
'""'' tractor, it is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that such
doh liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose decision
shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in question.
"" D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co- operate to the fullest extent with all other trades
41100, in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all information pertaining to
his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such
information. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in
place. In case of failure on the part of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper
" information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such
failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated on the drawings
is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at
the building shall determine the actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Fire
,ink Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy
thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. In
no case shall piping be installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of cutting and
patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of pipes, conduit, and cable runs
- shall be performed by the Subcontractor installing such items. All piping shall be installed
486, concealed in finished spaces.
G. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his work
"w ' and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall make good such loss or
__ injury at his own expense. All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be
imok
15300 -4
Auk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
ow
with NFPA 13. A
B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be interpreted as
diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall produce a design based on _.
actual available water pressure and submit it to the Architect for approval before beginning ..
fabrication and installation.
C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the drawings is provided to
indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and sprinkler head location, and shall not be used ,..►
for estimating purposes. Location of piping and heads shall be co- ordinated with all other ...
trades. Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a hydraulically
designed system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13, the local Fire .w
Department, and the Smith College Insurance Underwriter. Location of sprinkler heads, in
relation to the ceilings and walls and spacing of the heads, shall not exceed that permitted by
NFPA 13 of the light hazard occupancy (ordinary hazard occupancies in Boiler Room,
Storage Room, etc.) The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working drawings and ,
hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain local Fire Department and Insurance
Underwriter approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform
water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local authority. Co- ordinate work
of this Section with all trades to avoid interference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing,
piping, electrical work, structure, etc. Final sprinlder head locations shall be subject to
kl .
Architect's approval. The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due
to hydraulic calculations or the installation of revised heads, provided the revised heads are
UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13, local Fire Department, and Insurance
Underwriter's criteria. Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13
recommendations. Final plans and calculations must be submitted to and approved by the
Northampton Fire Department.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection piping systems
products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory ._
use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
ow
B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System ", 2002.
C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide ". ow
D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels.
E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinlder piping products which have been approved and labeled by
Underwriters Laboratories.
F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing regulations
pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system with said officials prior to
commencing work.
G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's rating organization
and local Fire Department.
H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be
determined in accordance with the provisions of the General Requirements, except that ..
substitutions will only be considered for items where the words, "or equal" appear in the
product specification.
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests secured by +•�
a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will be conducted in accordance
with the General Requirements. ..a
1.05 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
15300 -3
44w
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
' Smith College, Northampton, MA
Division 15: Fire Protection
Atok SECTION 15300:- FIRE PROTECTION
drIA
PART 1- GENERAL
"n` 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable parts of Division
1, and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
U, B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work under
this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.
C. Co- ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the work of this
o a k Section. Co- operate with such trades to assure steady progress of all work under the
Contract.
'"""' 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and reasonably
incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection work for both buildings specified
"' herein and/or indicated on the drawings, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Re -use existing fire protection service piping located in the basement of Dewey Hall
— re -use backflow preventer.
' 2. Revamp the existing dry pipe automatic sprinlder system. System shall be installed
■► in all spaces including the attic, unless otherwise noted , with Fire Department con -
nection and system test and drain connections and inspectors test connections.
Furnish and install all required seismic hangers and supports required by code.
3. Dry pipe alarm check valve stations complete with, but not necessarily limited to,
line size valve, retarding chamber, electric and hydraulic alarms, full indicating,
control, drain trim, and accelerator, air compressor, etc.
"a 4. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and materials required for
„ak his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding during the entire course of the project.
5. Wet pipe standpipe system installed in stair tower. with hose connections, cabinet,
chain, and cap.
6. Submit plans and calculations to the College's Underwriter for review and approval.
7. Pressure test all piping all tests must be witnessed by the Owner and Fire
Department.
B. Refer to appropriate Division 2 Sections for trenching and backfill required in conjunction
with fire protection piping; not work of this Section.
C. Related work, to be performed under other sections of this Specification shall include the
,, following:
1. Power wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell, etc. back to the panel
shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor, co- ordinated and as directed by the Fire
Protection Subcontractor.
2. Cutting and patching.
Aft
3. Excavation and backfill.
ow 1.03 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with this information,
Auk shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configuration and orifice sizes in accordance
w
15300 -2
ellts
ARK
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
DIVISION 15: Fire Protection w►.
SECTION 15300: FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1- GENERAL 2 "*"
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 2
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 2
1.03 SYSTEM DESIGN 2
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3
1.05 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3
1.06 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 4
1.07 PRODUCTS 5 w►
1.08 SUBMITTALS 5
1.09 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 5
1.10 TEMPORARY HOOK -UPS 6
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 6
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING 6
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 6
1.14 WORK CONCEALED 6
1.15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 7 -
1.16 GUARANTEE 7
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS 7 w
1.18 CO- ORDINATION OF TRADES 7
1.19 CUTTING & PATCHING 8 iteA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 9 _:
2.01 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS 9
2.02 BASIC IDENTIFICATION 9
2.03 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS 10
2.04 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND SEALS 13 -
2.05 VALVES 14
2.06 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 15 _
2.07 ACCESS PANELS 16
2.08 SEISMIC CONTROL 16 Jos
oak
PART 3 - EXECUTION 27
3.01 CLEANING AND TESTING 27
dift
3.02 FIRE SAFING 27
3.03 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION 28
3.04 VALVE INSTALLATIONS 28
3.05 FINAL CLOSEOUT 28
oat
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING 29
•
Hale
writ
Auk
15300 -1
AMIN
Aliax
411A DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
aft
A. Perform tests in compliance with ASME A 17.1 or A18.1 and as required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Perform tests in compliance with CSA B355 and required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Aft
C. Schedule tests with agencies and Architect, Owner, and Contractor present.
ink
ook 3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
Assk
END OF SECTION 14420
w►
oft
Aft
+1w
w
4
14420 -5
411
Alb
Abb
.w.
in the event of power failure. A telephone line shall be supplied to the lift site
as specified under Division 16.
5. Arrival Gong and Digital Floor Display. .0"
L. Call Station Controls: 24 VDC control circuit with the following features. ,,.,,
1. Direction Control: Illuminated and tactile constant pressure buttons with
illuminated "in -use" indicator.
2. Safety indicator lamp.
3. Keyless operation.
4. Call Station Mounting:
a. Lower: ,w
1) Wall mounted recessed.
b. Upper:
1) Wall mounted recessed. "
M. Safety Devices and Features: A ,
1. Grounded electrical system with upper, lower, and final limit switches.
2. At all landings a solenoid activated interlock shall electrically monitor that the "I'
door is in the closed position and the lock is engaged before lift can move ww
from landing. n�
3. Electrical disconnect shall shut off power to the lift.
N. Finishes ..R
1. Aluminum Extrusions: Champagne anodized finish. dok
2. Ferrous Components: Electrostatically applied baked powder finish, fine
textured.
a. Color: Satin Grey, RAL 7030. Aft
PART 3 EXECUTION s.
3.01 EXAMINATION Ark
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. .w.
B. Verify shaft and machine space are of correct size and within tolerances.
C. Verify required landings and openings are of correct size and within tolerances.
D. Verify electrical rough -in is at correct location. —
E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. i°"'
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving �w
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Ao.
3.03 INSTALLATION ...
A. Install lifts in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements including ASME
A 17.1, ASME A 18.1 and the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install lifts in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements including CSA
B355, and manufacturer's instructions. ,■„
C. Install system components and connect to building utilities.
."a
D. Accommodate equipment in space indicated.
E. Startup equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. -.
F. Adjust for smooth operation. ._
..R
14420 -4
ook
1. Mid -Size: 39 inches (992 mm) by 60 inches (1522 mm).
D. Platform Configuration:
s_. 1. On/Off Same Side Entry/Exit: One front opening only.
E. Landing Openings:
1. Lower Landing: Door.
2. Upper Landing: Door.
F. Door Construction:
1. Fire Rated Doors: 1 -1/2 hour B label rating. Pre -hung, constructed of 16
gauge (1.5 mm) steel, with a vision panel, delayed action door closer, pull
handle and integrated interlock. Doors mount flush to the inside wall of the
shaftway.
2. Door Width:
dsk a. Lower Landing:
1) 35 -5/8 inches (905 mm).
b. Upper landing:
d 1) 35 -5/8 inches (905 mm).
__ G. Power Door Operator: Automatically opens the door /gate when platform arrives at a
landing. Will also open at landing by pressing call button or by gently pulling door.
1. ADA Compliant and obstruction sensitive.
2. Low voltage, 24 VDC with all wiring concealed.
3. Provide power operators at the following locations:
dook
a. Lower Landing: Door.
b. Upper landing: Door or Gate.
A ,,, H. Lift Components:
1. Machine Tower: Custom aluminum extrusion.
o f t 2. Base Frame: Structural steel tubing.
Ash 3. Platform Side Wall Panels: 16 gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized steel sheet. Custom
aluminum extrusion tubing frame.
Base Mounting and Access to Lift at Lower Landing:
e 1. Pit Mount: Lift to be mounted in pit with dimensions to meet manufacturers
requirements for the platform size specified. Pit construction shall be in
accordance to Section 03300.
''k J. Hydraulic Drive:
1. Drive Type: Chain hydraulic.
2. Emergency Operation: Manual device to lower platform and auxiliary battery
power to raise or lower platform.
Alok 3. Safety Devices:
a. Slack chain safety device.
w b. Shoring device.
oak 4. Travel Speed: 17 fpm (5.2 m/minute).
aft 5. Motor: 3.0 hp (2.2 kW); 24 volts DC.
6. Power Supply:
a. 120 VAC single phase; 60 Hz on a dedicated 15 amp circuit.
,, b. Powered by continuously charged battery system.
K. Platform Controls: 24 VDC control circuit with the following features.
1. Direction Control: Illuminated tactile and constant pressure buttons with dual
platform courtesy lights and safety light.
2. Illuminated and audible emergency stop switch shuts off power to lift and
oh
activates audio alarm equipped with battery backup.
�► 3. Keyless operation.
aft 4. Emergency Telephone: Platform shall be equipped with ADA compliant
autodialer telephone with a stainless steel faceplate. Telephone shall operate
14420 -3
dik
Auk
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 10 years experience in
manufacturing of vertical platform lifts, with evidence of experience with similar ""'
installations of type specified. ..w
B. Installer Qualifications: Licensed to install equipment of this scope, with evidence of
experience with specified equipment. Installer shall maintain an adequate stock of
replacement parts, have qualified people available to ensure fulfillment of
maintenance and callback service without unreasonable loss of time in reaching,
project site.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ,.
A. Provide platform lifts in compliance with:
1. ASME A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts.
2. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
3. ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment.
4. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. Ask
B. Provide platform lifts in compliance with:
1. CSA B355 - Lifts for Persons with Physical Disabilities. -
2. CSA B44.1 /ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment.
3. CSA - National Electric Code.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store components off the ground in a dry covered area, protected from adverse .w.
weather conditions.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS **�
A. Do not use wheelchair lift for hoisting materials or personnel during construction ,o,
period.
1.10 WARRANTY —
A. Warranty: Provide a two year limited warranty for wheelchair lift materials and
workmanship. ""
B. Extended Warranty: Provide an extended 5 -YEAR manufacturer's warranty covering
the wheelchair lift materials and workmanship for the following additional extended
period beyond the initial two year warranty. Preventive Maintenance Agreement
required. ,.ft
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Ask
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Garaventa Lift, which is located at: 7505 134 A St. ;
Surrey, BC; Canada V3W 7B3; Toll Free Tel: 800 - 663 -6556; Tel: 604 -594 -0422; ..e
Email: request info (bramsayggaraventalift.com); Web: www.garaventalift.com .�.
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of
Section 01600.
2.02 SHAFTWAY VERTICAL WHEELCHAIR LIFT
A. Capacity: 750 lbs (340 kg) rated capacity.
B. Mast Height:
1. Model GVL SW -144; 147 inches (3734 mm) maximum lifting height.
C. Nominal Clear Platform Dimensions:
14420 -2
Division 14 Conveying systems
e► SECTION 14420: WHEELCHAIR LIFT
PART 1 GENERAL
44114 1.0 SECTION INCLUDES
_ A. One Wheelchair Lift.
B. Landing doors with frames, hardware, and electro- mechanical interlock.
C. Machines, controllers, and fitments.
1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry: construction of hoistway enclosure.
Aft
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
aft
A. Section 03000: Concrete.
B. Section 04100: Masonry.
C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: construction of hoistway enclosure and blocking
for lift attachment.
a D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board shaftway.
,__ E. Division 16 - Electrical: Dedicated telephone service and wiring connections.
F. Division 16 - Electrical: Lighting and wiring connections at top of shaft.
akk
G. Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical power service and wiring connections.
dok
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
B. ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment.
C. ASME A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts.
D. CSA B44 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
atik E. CSA B355 - Lifts for Persons with Physical Disabilities.
Aiwk F. ICC /ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
G. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
asx
H. CSA - National Electric Code.
orik
1.05 SUBMITTALS
+► A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
„ C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including preparation, storage and
handling requirements.
''' " D. Include complete description of performance and operating characteristics.
,, E. Show maximum and average power demands.
F. Shop Drawings:
G. Show typical details of assembly, erection and anchorage.
ew► H. Include wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal systems.
I. Show complete layout and location of equipment, including required clearances and
coordination with shaftway.
J. Selection Samples: For each finished product specified, provide two complete sets of
color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
14420 -1
Ank
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
,sw
7. TILT CONTROL WAND: Tubular shaped 7/16" diameter extruded clear plastic, ribbed •�
for positive grip and detachable without tools. Located on either side of individual blind .�
unit as per architect's request.
8. MOUNTING HARDWARE: Manufacturer's standard .030" steel box brackets with
baked -on polyester finish to match headrail with additional support brackets for blinds
over 84" wide.
C. FINISHES
1. SLAT finish to be determined (selection from the following): 002 Alabaster, 018 Satin
Silver, 064 Bronze, 110 Gloss White, 125 Bright White, 174 Eggshell, 186 Beige, 190
Aft
Bright Aluminum, 206 Fawn, 269 Chenille, 270 Linen, 350 Vanilla, 413 Hunter Green,
748 Shadow Gray, 830 Almond, 885 Flex White, 973 Antique White, 974 Pearl. A
2. SLAT SUPPORT braided ladders shall be color coordinated with slat.
D. WARRANTY: Lifetime Limited Warranty. Specific product warranties available from .nk
manufacturer or its authorized agent.
2.01 BULLETIN BOARDS
A. Forbo bulletin Board, painted wood frame (size as per drawings) Ask
2.03 RECYCLING BINS
A. Approx. 15 x 16 x 24" tall, plastic to fit within the cabinets under Section 06400.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION — WINDOW BLINDS
A. Install equipment to manufacturer's instructions and matching approved sample installation. .w.
B. Coordinate installation with other trades to ensure proper blocking, stability, and layout.
C. Demonstrate operation of blinds to be smooth and faultless.
3.02 CLEANING
A. After installation, clean all products as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 12200
eilte
Arix
Aft
O.
..p
12200 -2
40%
oft Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4111111k
sok SECTION 12200 Miscellaneous Furnishings
Oft
PART 1 GENERAL
411%
1.01 WORK INCLUDES
011111■ A. Remove existing window blinds, and furnish and install new aluminum blinds in all offices
(except 104, 105)
B. New Bulletin Boards at Mail Room
4ok C. Recycling Bins at Mail Room
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry.
B. Section 06400: Architectural Woodwork
Astk
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Product shall be delivered to site in manufacturer's original packaging.
B. Product shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes and operating
mechanisms.
Aub.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HORIZONTAL ALUMINUM BLINDS
dmi A. PRODUCT: Hunter Douglas "H200 2" Aluminum Blind"
B. MATERIALS:
4s"
1. SLATS: 2" wide x .008" thick, heat-treated and spring tempered (except 5000 series
alloy on metallized finishes) aluminum alloy 6011 with eased corners and manufacturing
burrs removed. Product to have a minimum of 95% pre-consumer recycled content.
Furnish not less than nominal 7.2 slats per foot to ensure tight closure and light control.
ook Finish with manufacturer's standard baked-on finish in colors selected by architect from
manufacturer's available contract colors utilizing Dust ShieldTM fmish to inhibit dust
build-up for easier maintenance.
2. SLAT SUPPORT: Braided ladders of 100% polyester yarn color compatible with slats
and spacing of ladder no more than 42mm.
3. HEADRAIL: U-shaped profile with rolled edges, measuring 1 1/2" x 2 1/4" x .024"
constructed of corrosion resistant steel. Internally fit with components required for
dook specified performance and designed for smooth, quiet, trouble-free operation. Headrail
finish to be standard baked-on polyester and to match slats. Ends fitted with zinc coated
at.
steel end lock with adjustable tab for centering blinds.
4" 4. BOTTOM RAIL: .019" steel, with corrosion-resistant finish formed with double-lock
seam into closed oval shape for optimum beam and torsional strength. Ends fitted with
color-coordinated engineered polymer caps. Color-coordinated engineered polymer tape
buttons secure the ladder and cord. Bottom Rail finish to be standard baked-on polyester
4.4 color coordinated to slats.
5. LIFTING MECHANISM: Crashproof steel cordlocks with corrosion-resistant finish and
steel locking dogs, polyester cord which meet or exceed commercial specifications No/
41" 1029-86 lift cords, and Cord Stop/Single Pull Cord. Located on either side of individual
blind unit as per architect's request.
.4ek
6. TILTING MECHANISM: Die-cast helical worm and gear type filter gear mechanism in
mph polymer housing with clutch action to protect ladder tapes from over rotation of the solid
steel, corrosion resistant tilt rod.
oitk
44ok
41" 12200-1
401,
410k
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ..,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Arik
D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
F. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
G. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices.
2.05 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ANSUASTM B456, satin finish. .w
B. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish. aft
PART 3 EXECUTION ..d
3.01 EXAMINATION ,..
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on the
Aft
Drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
C. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures that affect installation of accessories.
3.02 PREPARATION ..k
A. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. ..
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
Aft
3.03 INSTALLATION oak
A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. .w.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
3.04 SCHEDULE: for the following rooms, each to have:
A. Each new single handicapped toilet to receive:
1 mirror
1 toilet paper dispenser, No controlled delivery.
1 paper towel dispenser
1 waste receptacle``
1 soap dispenser ..r
1 sanitary napkin disposal
2 grab bars
B. Each existing renovated single toilet to receive: 410,
1 mirror
1 toilet paper dispenser
1 paper towel dispenser
1 waste receptacle
1 soap dispenser
1 sanitary napkin disposal
C. Each Custodian closet to receive: ..!
1 mop strip aft
D. All kitchenettes with sinks to receive:
1 paper towel dispenser per sink, surface mounted.
1 soap dispenser
END OF SECTION 10800
Aft
10800 -3
AMIRt
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces.
D. Main protective covers on all units until installation is complete. Remove covers at final clean-
up of installation.
,w► 1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty mirrors for 15 years against silver spoilage.
B. Warranty accessories to be free from defects in workmanship and material for one year, under
nok provisions of Section 01700.
ion
_ PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
*�'► B. Bradley Corp.
C. American Dispenser.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 PRODUCTS:
A. Install new toilet accessories in all toilet rooms (except the existing Frist Floor Accessible toilet
room).
,n► B. All bathroom accessories to be mounted to meet ADA regulations
C. Mop and Broom Holder: Bobrick #B -224, surface- mounted utility shelf with mop/broom
Aki
holders and rag hooks, stainless steel with satin fmish. Mounting brackets, welded to shelf.
ink Quantity: one per mop sink.
D. Paper Towel Dispenser: Bobrick #B -262 Surface- mounted paper towel dispenser, type 304
ink
stainless steel with all welded construction; exposed surfaces shall have satin finish. Door shall
be secured to cabinet with a full- length stainless steel piano hinge and equipped with a tumble
4k. lock keyed like other Bobrick accessories.
E. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Bobrick #B -274 (surface), heavy duty cast - aluminum with satin finish,
double roll, controlled delivery.
F. Soap Dispenser: Gojo Gemini #9504, Twin Pack. Holds two 500 ml bag -in -box refills. Portion
controlled. Ada compliant.
G. Waste Receptacle: Rubbermaid #3540, Slim Jim (20 gallon).
H. Mirror: Bobrick #B -165 Series 1824 (18" x 24 "), No. 1 quality, '/4" select float glass, guaranteed
for 15 years against silver spoilage, type 430 stainless steel frame, with bright polish finish.
nok
I. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Rubbermaid (surface mounted), white plastic with self - closing cover.
''° All disposal units to be mounted on side wall — avoid back wall installations.
„ J. Grabbars (In accessible toilets only): No. 550 series, stainless steel, 1'/4 ", peened fmish, 42"
long.
nik
_ 2.03 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.
B. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
ink C. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof.
D. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
ink
component and substrate.
mok
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.
no'` B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
"w` 10800 -2
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ..
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 10800 Toilet Accessories ....
PART 1 GENERAL .�
1.02 WORK INCLUDES
A. Toilet accessories. .,
B. Attachment hardware.
Ask
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry.
,
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Mass. Rules and Regulations of the Architectural Access Board, 521 CMR. u.c
B. Rules and Regulations of the Americans for Disabilities Act (ADA). ,,,,,k
C. ANSI/ASTM Al23 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled,
Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips. As"
D. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold - Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. ..N.
E. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. —
F. ANSI/ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and
Nickel Plus Chromium.
G. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
1.04 SUBMITTALS "`"'
A. Submit product data and manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section -
01300.
B. Provide product data describing size, fmish, details of function, attachment methods.
C. Provide maintenance and operating instruction for each type of equipment and lock.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Model numbers are for washroom accessories manufactured by Bobrick Aix
Washroom Equipment, Inc. and are listed as a standard of quality. Equivalent products of other ,,,
manufacturers may be acceptable, if, in the judgment of the architect, they meet the intent of the
specification in terms of design, function, materials, and quality of workmanship. Other
manufacturers may be proposed for consideration by adhering to procedures set forth in Contract Al*
Documents.
B. Accessories shall be products of a single manufacturer. Keyed (tumbler lock) accessories shall 40,
be keyed alike with the exception of coin receiving boxed on vending equipment. ..
1.06 KEYING ,..
A. Supply 3 keys for each accessory to Owner. .M .
B. Master key all accessories. „".
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS '""''
A. Conform to Mass. Architectural Access code, 521 CMR, and ADA. .,
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and to ••
receive anchor attachments.
Agik
1.09 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging.
B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage, or wetting.
10800 -1
#►
oft
w Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
oft SECTION 10520 Fire Extinguishers & Cabinets
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 NOT INCLUDED
dik A. Extinguishers to be provide by Owner
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry — installation of Owner supplied extinguishers
isk
END OF SECTION 10520
aft
Auk
onk
d"" 10520 -1
Ilket
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ,.,,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 10400 Identifying Devices
PART 1— GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. New ADA signage throughout (one per office / room). aft
B. Regulatory Signs as required
Aok
C. Signage in Mail Room (paper, plastic, trash, mailbox labels, outgoing mail, incoming mail
�a g (Pa P �P � g g g )
3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section
B. Section 08700 - Hardware: hardware finish.
4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating list of signs, dimensions, and attachment details.
C. Submit product data indicating lettering options, component dimensions, and color finish
selections.
D. Submit two samples illustrating pattern, color, finish and edging.
5 REFERENCE
A. Rules and regulations of Architectural Access Board, CMR 521. ..
.w
PART 2 PRODUCTS Aok,
2.01 IDENTIFYING PLATES
A. Engraved name plates shall be 4" x 13" satin matte finish acrylic plate, with square corners,
manufacturer's standard color, to be selected by Architect. Letters shall be raised 1/32 in., upper
case, simple serif type, Times New Roman (1" size, placement Bottom Left) and shall be .ik
accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. 6" x 6 " Pictograms shall be provides on handicap accessible
toilet doors in addition to name plates. ..�
B. Name plates shall be, provided for the following: Offices, Classrooms, Men, Women, in ,,,�
amounts required for actual rooms, actual wordage to be selected by Owner.
C. One wall- mounted exterior sign with pictogram indicating location of accessible entrance. Ark
oft
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Install identifying devices according to manufacturer's instructions and matching approved �*
sample installation.
B. Prior to placement of signs, get approval of proposed locations from Owner /Architect. ...
C. All signs to be mounted in accordance with Architect Access Board requirements. A!*
END OF SECTION 10400
AIL
10400 -1 A`"
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom and shall not exceed
1/4".
ook
4. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and left free of imperfections.
aink 5. Authorized factory installers to be utilized.
END OF SECTION 10160
dok
Aft
Aft
41w►
10160 -3
Oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4. Finish of doors, panels, and pilasters shall be similar and equal to Santana Products, Inc.
"Plastic -Glaze 280" color of doors, panels and pilasters to be selected from the standard
Poly -Mar Mill, Poly - Marble HD ®, or Poly- Granite HD® color range.
5. Aluminum edging strips to be fastened to the bottom edge of all doors and panels using ,1ft
vandal proof stainless steel fasteners. .�
E. Technical Data
1. Santana Solid Plastic Products to be independently certified in writing by the
manufacturer indicating compliance to appropriate building codes governing the project „,*
as it applies to the use of "plastic in a commercial building."
F. Manufacturer to supply a written warranty covering all plastic components and plastic hardware .w.
against breakage, corrosion and delamination for a period of 15 years.
2.02 HARDWARE
A. Door hardware shall be as follows: —
1. Hinges shall be integral hinge system. Pilaster to be machined to accept door and hinge .�
mechanism. Hinge mechanism consists of a 2 piece 1/2" diameter nylon pin with "Cam
Action" and a 3/16" stainless steel pin inserted into lower portion of pilaster and door. A
one -piece 1/2" diameter, 4" long nylon pin to be inserted into the top portion of the
pilaster and door. Door closures to be factory set to accommodate all conditions and
allow for a positive opening and closing action free of impediment.
2. Each handicapped door to include: (1) door pull (1) wall stop. 3. Door strike and keeper AIM
shall be fabricated from heavy aluminum extrusion (6463 -T5 Alloy) with bright- dipped
anodized finish with wrap around flange surface mounted and thru- bolted to pilaster with
star -head security pin, stainless steel barrel bolts. Size of strike shall be 6" in length. ..s
4. Door latch housing shall be fabricated from heavy aluminum extrusion (6463 -T5 Alloy) .R►
with bright dipped anodized finish, surface mounted and thru- bolted to door with star -
head security pin, stainless steel barrel bolts. Slide bolt and button shall be heavy __
aluminum with "Tuff -Coat Black" anodized fmish.,
B. Solid plastic pilaster shoes shall be anchored to finished floor with plastic anchors and #14 x 1-
1/2" star -head security pin, stainless steel screws.
C. Full length continuous plastic wall brackets weighing not less than .822 lbs. per linear foot. ,.,.
Brackets shall be used for all panels to pilaster, pilasters to wall and panel to wall connections.
Wall brackets shall be thru- bolted to panels and pilasters with star -head security pin, stainless
steel barrel bolts. Attachment of brackets to adjacent wall construction shall be accomplished •
#14 x 1 -1/2" star -head security pin, stainless steel screws anchored directly behind the vertical
edge of panels and pilasters at 13" intervals along the full length of bracket and at each 13"
interval alternately spaced between anchor connections. ink
D. Head rail shall be heavy aluminum extrusion (6463 -T5 Alloy) with bright - dipped anodized //*
fmish in anti -grip configuration weighting not less than 1.188 lbs. per linear foot as
manufactured by Santana Products Inc. Head rail shall be fastened to tops of pilasters and head 4 * .
rail brackets by thru - bolting with star -head security pin, stainless steel barrel bolts (no cadmium .k .
plated bolts allowed).
E. Head rail brackets shall be 18 gauge stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECTUTION .�
3.01 INSTALLATION: ..
A. Erection of partitions, etc., shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's standard
recommendations and the following:
1. All parts shall be erected in a substantial manner, straight, level, and plumb. '"
2. No evidence of drilling, cutting, or patching shall be visible in the finished work.
10160 -2 ..
wow
T
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
"' Division 10: Specialties
SECTION 10160 Plastic Partitions
Oft
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDES
e�w A. Requirements of the general conditions and special conditions apply to the work in this section.
B. Provide all labor, materials, etc. necessary for the completion of the work of this section as
specified or shown on the drawings.
C. Work of this section consists of, but is not limited to the following:
1. Toilet compartments
Oft
2. Hardware, etc. for 1110. 3. Shop drawings
D. D. Work not included in this section.
E. 1. Toilet room accessories in Section 10B or by others.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, including details and a sample of each item of hardware for architect's
approval.
B. Provide drawings showing location for adequate steel reinforcements or wood blocking in walls
to be provided by others for proper securement of the finished work.
C. Furnish color samples for use of the architect.
D. Furnish documentation on hardware, head rail, and continuous wall bracket to meet specification
as outlined.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Toilet compartment shall be floor - mounted, overhead - braced, with non - corrosive doors, panels
and pilasters similar and equal to Poly -Mar HD ®, Poly - Marble HD ®, or Poly - Granite HD®
.�, compartments as manufactured by Santana Products Inc., Scranton, PA, or an approved equal by
specifier or design professional prior to bid date with hardware as specified herein.
B. Panels, doors and pilasters shall be fabricated from High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
containing minimum of 10% recycled material manufactured under high pressure forming a
single component section which is waterproof, non - absorbent and has a self - lubricating surface
that resists marking with pens, pencils or other writing utensils. All panels, doors and pilasters to
4011111' arrive at job -site with special protective plastic covering.
C. Characteristics
1. Dual component compression molded High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) of solid Poly-
"" Mar HD ®, Poly- Marble HD ®, or Poly- Granite HD® virgin resin materials in colors that
Aft extend throughout the surface; the panels, doors, and pilasters shall have combined
�► recycled and/or virgin material (HDPE) as the core material.
2. Doors, panels and pilasters shall be a minimum of 1" thick and all edges machined to a
ook radius of .250" and all exposed surfaces to be free of saw marks.
D. Fabrication
1. Dividing panels shall be 55" high and mounted at 14" above fmished floor.
2. Doors shall be 55" and mounted at 14" above fmished floor.
3. Pilasters shall be 82" high, mounted within a one -piece plastic shoe with star -head
security pin, stainless steel barrel bolts.
,1w
10160 -1
ilk
ROOMS FLOOR BASE WALLS CEILING NOTES
NO NAME MAT'L FINISH - MATL MAIL FINISH WAINSCOT P MAT'L FINISH APPROX.
CHAIR RAIL. HEIGHT
NOTE, REMOVE WAINSCOT AND VWC - REPLACE
205 NEW OFFICE NEW CPT N/A NEW WD NEW +EX PL RIGHT NEW PL PT 8-0" WITH VWC
206 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY_ EX WD EX PL VWC -1 EX PL PT 9'- 10 -1/2"
207 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD _ SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL VWC -1 EX PL PT 8- 10-1/2"
NOTE, REMOVE VWC AND WAINSCOT AT EXISTING
208 NEW MTG. ROOM /FLEX SPACE NEW CPT N/A NEW WD NEW +EX PL RIGHT NEW PL PT 8- 10 -1/2" WALLS, PT FINISH ALL WALLS
209 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL VWC -1 EX PL PT 9'- 10 -1/2"
-
210 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL VWC -1 EX PL PT 9'- 10 -1/2" .
211 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL _ VWC -1 EX PL PT 9'- 10.1/2"
212 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL VWC -1 _ EX PL _ PT 9'- 10-1/2"
213 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD _ EX PL VWC -1 EX PL PT 9'- 10 -1/2"
214 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL VWC -1 EX PL PT 8- 10.1/2"
215 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL VWC -1 EX PL PT 8- 10 -1/2"
REMOVE ALL FINISHES FOR INSULATION
300A ATTIC VARIES WORK - NO NEW FINISHES
_ 300C CORRIDOR NEW CPT N/A NEW WD. EX PL VWC -2 NEW PL PT 7 -9" RAISE CEILING ,
300-ST2 STAIR NEW CPT N/A EX WD EX PL PT NEW PL PT VARIES NEW HIGH CEILING AREA
_300 -ST3 FIRE STAIR EX PL PT VARIES
NEW
WOOD
NEW CHAIR REMOVE WAINSCOT, INSTALL NEW CHAIR
_ 300 -T BATHROOM VINYL N/A NEW VINYL NEW +EX PL PT RAIL NEW PL PT 7' -9" RAIL
301 FACULTY OFFICE NEW CPT N/A _ EX WD - EX PL VWC -1 NEW PL PT VARIES
-
302 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL VWC -1 NEW PL PT VARIES
_ 303 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD , EX PL VWC -1 1 NEW PL PT VARIES PAINT CLOSET FLOOR
_ 304 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL VWC -1 NEW PL PT VARIES PAINT CLOSET FLOOR
305 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL VWC -1 NEW PL PT VARIES PAINT CLOSET FLOOR
306 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL VWC -1 NEW PL PT VARIES PAINT CLOSET FLOOR
,, a i) 1 0oo ► 1 1 x,01 0 000)10
I b alaa 10 a a a a a a a I l a 100 a $ aaaaaaa fall...101P.
ROOMS FLOOR BASE WALLS CEILING NOTES
WAINSCOT! APPROX.
NO. NAME MAT'L FINISH MATL MATL FINISH MATL FINISH
CHAIR RAIL HEIGHT
105 CONFERENCE ROOM NEW CPT N/A EX WD EX PL VWC-3 WOOD LAT N/A 9'-9-1/2"
106 SECRETARY EX WD SAND+POLY EX WD EX PL VWC-1 EX PL PT 10
OFFICE EX WD SAND+POLY EX WD EX+PL PT EX PL PT 10'-3-1/2"
REMOVE VWC AT EXISTING WALLS, PT
107 FINISH ALL WALLS
NEW AND NEW+EX PL NEW+EX PT
PL
200-C1 CORRIDOR NEW CPT N/A EX. WD. PT 9'-10-1/2"
PT FINISH AT OUTSIDE WALL AND WALL
NEW EX BETWEEN STAIR AND OFFICE, VWC-2 AT
PT CORRIDOR WALL AND WALL UNDER STAIR.
PL
NEW AND NOTE, REPLACE BASE IN AREA OF DOOR
200-C2 HALL NEW CPT N/A EX. WD. EX PL RIGHT 9 REPLACEMENTS.
EX PL PT REPLACE BASE (TO ACCOMMODATE DOOR
200-C3 HALL NEW CPT N/A NEW WD EX PL VWC-2 9-10" FRAME REPLACEMENTS)
CUSTODIAL/STORAGE
EX WD EX WD EX PL PT
200-J CLOSET PT EX PL PT 9%10"
NEW REFINISH UNDERSIDE OF ATTIC STAIR IF
200-J2 NEW CUSTODIAL CLOSET VINYL N/A NEW VINYL NEW+EX PL PT NEW PL PT VARIES REQUIRED
NOTE, REMOVE VWC AT EXISTING WALLS, PT
200-L NEW LOUNGE NEW CPT N/A NEW WD NEW+EX PL RIGHT NEW PL PT 9-10-1/2" FINISH ALL WALLS
MAIN STAIR (CURVED)
200-ST1 NEW CPT N/A EX WD EX PL PT EX PL PT 9%10-1/2"
STAIR PT FINISH AT OUTSIDE WALL AND WALL
NOTE, BETWEEN STAIR AND OFFICE, VWC AT
200-ST2 NEW CPT N/A EX WD EX PL RIGHT NEW PL PT VARIES CORRIDOR WALL AND WALL UNDER STAIR
PAINT ALL PAINTED SURFACES. REPLACE
CONC. + SMALL AREAS OF CARPET. OTHER
200-ST3 FIRE STAIR CPT. PT EX PL PT EX PL PT VARIES SURFACES TO REMAIN AS EXISTING.
NEW WD
NEW CHAIR
200-T1 UNISEX HP TOILET VINYL N/A NEW VINYL NEW+EX PL PT RAIL LAT N/A 8'-3"
NEW WD
NEW CHAIR
200-T2 UNISEX HP TOILET VINYL , N/A NEW VINYL, NEW+EX PL PT RAIL LAT N/A 8
REMOVE VWC AND WAINSCOT AT EXISTING
201 . FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND+POLY EX WD EX PL PT EX PL PT 9 WALLS, PT FINISH ALL WALLS
REMOVE VWC AND WAINSCOT AT EXISTING
202 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND+POLY EX WD EX PL PT EX PL PT 9-10-1/2" WALLS, PT FINISH ALL WALLS
REMOVE VWC AND WAINSCOT AT EXISTING
203 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND+POLY EX WD EX PL PT EX PL PT 9 WALLS, PT FINISH ALL WALLS
203a FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND+POLY EX WD EX PL VWC-1 EX PL PT 9-10-1/2"
NEW AND NEW AND REMOVE VWC AND WAINSCOT AT EXISTING
204 FACULTY OFFICE EX WD SAND+POLY EX WD _ NEW+EX PL PT EX PL PT 9-10-1/2" WALLS, PT FINISH ALL WALLS
I Finish Schedule
The Dewey House, Smith College
Prepared by Kraus -F itch, Architects, Inc
Date: April 18, 2012
I ROOMS FLOOR BASE WALLS CEILING NOTES
NO NAME MATL FINISH MAIL MATL FINISH WAINSCOT/ MATL FINISH APPROX.
CHAIRAAIL HEIGHT
00-ST1 BASEMENT STAIR EX WD SAND +POLY_ EX PL PT EX PL VARIES NO WORK IN STAIR
00 -ST2 FIRE STAIR EX PL VARIES
001 EX PL
002 EX PL
003 EX PL
_ 004 EX PL
005 EX PL
100 -C1 CORRIDOR EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL PT EX PL PT 10'- 5 -1/2"
100-C2 CORRIDOR NEW CPT N/A EX WD PL +WC PT WOOD LAT N/A 9' -8"
100-C3 HALL NEW CPT N/A EX WD EX PL PT WOOD LAT N/A 8' -3"
100 -F FOYER EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL PT EX PL PT 10'- 2 -1/2"
100-L LIFT LOBBY NEW CPT N/A EX WD EX PL PT LAT N/A 10' -4"
100 -J1 MAIL NEW WD N/A NEW WD NEW +EX PL PT LAT N/A 10'- 3 -1/2"
100-J2 SUPPLY CLOSET VINYL N/A NEW VINYL EX PL PT LAT N/A 9' -1"
100 -P1 FRONT PORCH EX WD SAND +POLY EX PL PT EX WD , 22' -3"
_ 100 -P2 RAMP PORCH CONC. SAND +POLY EX PL PT EX WD PT
100 -ST1 MAIN STAIR (CURVED) NEW CPT N/A EX WD EX PL PT EX PL PT 21'- 6 -1/2"
FIRE STAIR CONC. + PT EX PL PT PT VAIRES PAINT ALL PAINTED SURFACES. REPLACE
CPT SMALL AREAS OF CARPET. OTHER
100-ST2 SURFACES TO REMAIN AS EXISTING.
EXTG.
TOILET VINYL N/A NEW VINYL EX PL PT CHD�R EX PL PT 10'- 3 -1/2" STRIP WALL PAPER (ABOVE CHAIR RAIL)
_ 100 -T1 RAIL _
EXTG.
TOILET (HP) NEW N/A EX WD OR EX PL.PATCH PT WD. LAT N/A 9' -1" IF NO WOOD BASE, THEN REPLACE WITH
VINYL VINYL CHAIR VINYL COVE
_ 100 -T2 _ RAIL
OFFICE EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL PT EX PL PT 10'- 3 -1/2" REMOVE VWC AT EXISTING WALLS, PT
101 FINISH ALL WALLS
102 PHILOSPHY STUDY EX WD SAND +POLY EX WD EX PL PT EX PL PT 10'- 3 -1/2"
103 COPY NEW CPT N/A EX WD NEW +EX PL PT LAT N/A 9' -1"
104 SEMINAR ROOM NEW CPT N/A EX WD EX PL PT LAT N/A 9'- 2 -1/2"
1 ,) 1,),,,,), 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
eA►
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.05 SCHEDULE
Wallcovering /Offices:
4 Option 1:
a. Manufacturer: Wolf Gordon
Tamboura
'" G 7898491= SSP321 or aka AZ51376TA
ipt Option 2:
Manufacturer: Wolf Gordon
Canvas Ltd.
Pattern: G7898474
VB 42018
auk Wallcovering /Corridors:
Option 1:
dok
Manufacturer: Versa
Ask Pattern: D08 -240
— Option 2:
Manufacturer: Wolf Gordon
Canvas Ltd.
Pattern: G7898474
VB 42018
ovik
w END OF SECTION 09950
oft
Aiok
aok
4
Aft
09950 -4
.R
Allah
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ,,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Alb
3.03 INSTALLATION 44.
G. If the application is a textured or non - matched wallcovering pattern, reverse hanging .64
of alternate panels is required to ensure color continuity from strip to strip. If the
application is a mural it is recommended that every other panel is rotated 180degrees *1*
when printing to minimize the side -to -side color shift that may occur with each
printer.
H. Determine whether the pattern match is random, straight across, or drop match. Auk
Measure the wall height, allowing for pattern match, add 4 inches, and then cut the
wallcovering. It will overlap onto the ceiling and the base approximately 2 inches.
Ale
Apply the recommended adhesive to the back using either a pasting machine or a
paint roller. Work the adhesive in, to cover the back completely, especially near the ..
edges. Fold each end toward the middle, pasted sides together, aligning the edges
carefully so they do not dry out. CAUTION: Do not crease wallcovering. Allow to
"relax" for ten minutes (booking). This will allow the adhesive to penetrate the Ask
wallcovering fabric, which is important to a successful installation.
I. With all directional patterns, it is important to line up patterns at eye level allowing
any drift in lineup to run off toward ceiling and floor. The standard allowance is one ""`
quarter of an inch up or down. If pattern is lined up at the ceiling the pattern will ,.
begin misalignment sooner and the gap will be larger. Also, most patterns will be
viewed at eye level therefore it is that area that needs to look aligned. If there are any
questions about pattern lineup, contact supplier. Be sure first drop of wallcovering is .+
square on wall by plumbing the wall and using a level.
J. Avoid burnishing the face of the material. Use a wallcovering brush or a plastic
scraper to smooth the wallcovering onto the wall. For optimal durability we Ank
recommend the use of a liquid topcoat to protect the surface of the wallcovering
pattern from stain and abrasion.
K. Do not rub. Do not allow vinyl adhesive to dry on surface as it may leave a white
residue. Wash off excess paste from face of wallcovering as you hang it with a
cellulose sponge. The cellulose sponge must be rinsed in clean water after every
use. Blot dry with a clean cloth.
L. Place the second strip to the edge of the first strip. Tape seams before overlapping ,.
and double cutting to avoid getting adhesive on the wallcovering. If paste does get on
the vinyl, clean it off immediately with clean warm water and blot dry with a clean
lint less towel. Use a soft bristle brush to wash the ceiling and the baseboard to
remove any paste residue. Do not leave any overlap on the seams since vinyl will not .Aft
adhere to itself. *Seams should be vertical, have a tight fit, and be free from air and
paste bubbles. Seams should not be located closer than 6" to corners.
M. After three panels are smoothed to wall surface and excess paste removed, examine,
the installed panels for color uniformity. Any objectionable variations in colormatch,
pattern match, etc...should be immediately communicated to the printer for w
inspection before proceeding further with installation.
N. After installation, the walls and wallcovering should be monitored for potential
moisture or vapor infiltration or accumulation. Any such infiltration/accumulation ,w
after installation must be promptly eliminated in order to reduce the risk of Aft
mold/mildew growth. ..
3.04 CLEAN UP AND COMPLETION .�
A. Upon completion of work, remove all surplus material and debris from work site. All 440
work sites must be clean and orderly upon installation crew departure.
Aft
09950 -3
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.03 TEST ACCREDITATION
fek
A. All product testing for compliance with Federal Specifications shall be performed
and evaluated by one or more of the following independent and accredited testing
companies: Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc. Underwriters Laboratories Omega
Point Laboratories, Inc.
006
2.04 ADHESIVES AND PRIMERS
A. Adhesives and Primers used must be of the type designed for vinyl wallcoverings.
B. Adhesives and Primers must contain mildew inhibitors. See manufacturer's
recommendations for commercially available products.
PART 3 EXECUTION
.w� 3.01 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide a complete copy of manufacturer's current Hanging
Instructions to the installer pertaining to the installation of the wallcovering. All
ems► installations must conform to manufacturer's current installation instructions and
product technical information.
B. All labels shall be checked for accuracy by the installer to insure that the shipment is
received as ordered.
C. If no defect is evident before installation, the material should be inspected after three
4111 (3) panels are installed. If any defect is evident at this time (or any point of the
installation) no further material should be applied and Contractor should be contacted
IMMEDIATELY.
doi
_ 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
,or„ A. All hanging surfaces must be clean, smooth, dry, undamaged, free of mold, mildew,
grease or stains, and structurally intact. All loose paint and other wall coverings must
be removed. If moisture is present, immediately identify and eliminate the source(s)
alb of the moisture and verify that all wall surfaces are completely dry before
proceeding.
410" B. Any mold or mildew MUST be removed from walls and hanging surfaces prior to
-• installation. Walls should not contain in excess of 4% residual moisture content. A
4111k moisture meter should be used to determine moisture content. Moisture infiltration
and accumulation can lead to mold or mildew growth and must be corrected PRIOR
ww► to the installation of the wallcovering. This product is intended for use in buildings
that are properly designed and maintained to avoid moisture infiltration, condensation
and or accumulation at wall cavities and wall surfaces, particularly in warm, humid
Ask climates. Old walls shall also be treated with bleach, Lysol and/or other approved,
Aork mildew – inhibiting products in order to inhibit further mildew growth.
C. Proper surface preparation is key to getting great results. To prepare the surface
properly, we recommend that you prime all surfaces with a universal, white
pigmented, mold inhibiting wallcovering primer.
D. For new drywall construction, a coat of wallcovering primer shall be applied to the
surface before application of wallcovering. Use a primer that dries to a solid color to
ark conceal drywall joints.
E. Use only a lead pencil for marking walls and back of wallcovering. Do not use
ballpoint or marking pen, they will bleed through the surface.
F. Do not install wallcovering unless a temperature above 65° degrees F is maintained in
ft both areas of installation and storage for at least 48 hours prior to installation.
09950 -2
Ask
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 09950 Wall Covering
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Strip existing paper and glue, repair plaster as needed ..
B. Install new paper in areas as indicated on the Finish Schedule (areas of existing
papers except in front rooms as noted for no new covering on schedule):
1. Offices: style A
2. Corridors: style B s�
1.02 SAMPLE
A. Contractor shall submit for the architect's approval – a sample of each texture, type
or color to be installed.
A
1.03 COMPLIANCE .�
A. Submit certification that the manufacturer's wallcovering meets the architect's
Alb
specifications. Submit documentation that the manufacturer's wallcovering meets
Federal certifications CCC -408 -D and CFFA -W -101 -D for wallcovering products. ...
AO.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Contractor will supply the manufacturer's written warranty against defects in Aft
workmanship for 5 years from date of installation. Submit manufacturers written ,l&
warranty.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Al*
A. All necessary materials for installation including wallcovering, primer and adhesives
must be delivered to the job site undamaged. All containers are to be clearly marked
with the manufacturers identification label. Store vinyl wallcovering rolls and
materials in a clean, dry area where temperature and humidity remain constant and ,ik
within the manufacturers specifications.
AAA*
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental conditions must remain constant and over 65 degrees Fahrenheit for at
least four days before and throughout the installation and 4 -7 days thereafter. Walls ""`
shall be finished to the Architect's specification and be free of surface defects and
dirt. The Contactor for the installation process must provide sufficient lighting and
access. 411/x
PART 2 PRODUCTS —
2.01 VINYL WALLCOVERINGS
A. All vinyl wallcoverings specified and installed shall meet the latest Federal
Specifications CCC -W -408 -D and CFFA -W -101 -D standards for Vinyl Coated
Fabric Wallcovering. All Type I and Type II wallcoverings specified shall contain
mold and mildew inhibitors and pass the ASTM -G21 testing for mold and mildew
resistance. The ASTM -E84 test must be passed with the wallcovering mounted to
common gypsum wallboard.
2.02 FLAME AND SMOKE CHARACTERISTICS .►
A. The manufacturer shall certify that the vinyl wallcovering supplied meets Federally .�
specified limits for flame, smoke development and flash over according to the
required ASTM -E84 and NFPA286 tests. "k
09950 -1
01
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Interior Casings, Baseboard, Shelving, Risers, Skirt Boards, Rosettes
Casings, baseboards and miscellaneous trim including windows to receive prime and finish coats
ft utilizing VOC free Benjamin Moore Eco Spec or equal in manufacturer's standard range of colors
o, for paint or Zip Guard or equal for water based stain.
Existing Trim
ON Wash, scrape and spot prime
Finish 1 coat BM "Advance" low VOC, fortified oil base)
Sheen Satin
Color: 1 color only
New Trim
"n'" Prime One coat acrylic (Benjamin Moore "Fresh Start" or equal)
014, Finish 2 coats acrylic
Sheen Satin
ook
Color 1 color only
Rossettes:
All Rossettes at first floor (6 total doors and double doors between 101 and 102)
Copper colored spray applied paint similar in color, sheen, and location to that within the
__ lounge, applied to rosettes at both corridor and room sides
' Exposed Sprinklers
alk Vacuum and wash clean of all dust
Spot prime bare metal or rusty areas (oil)
dek
Finish 1 coat acrylic ceiling paint
Sheen: flat
Color: ceiling white
dew New exposed sprinkler (limited areas at changes only)
Prime with oil
Finish: 2 coats: acrylic ceiling paint
dik
Handrails, Caps, Ballusters, Newel Posts
Existing and new
Handrails, wall caps, etc., for natural finish use Zip Guard or equal for water based stain.
Ank Stain: match existing, touch up new or worn surfaces as needed to match adjacent color.
Finish 3 coats poly
dik
Sheen Satin
END OF SECTION 09900
aft
09900 -6
rr
AMP.
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Al Ilk
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Existing Doors
Wash, scrape and spot prime
Finish 1 coat BM "Advance" low VOC, fortified oil base)
Sheen Satin
New Doors Aiw
Prime 1 acrylic .0*
Finish 2 coats BM "Advance" low VOC, fortified oil base)
Sheen Satin Aok,
Ala
Interior of New Insert Windows
Pre - finished under Window Section — touch ""
Oft
Interior Walls and Shelving
Interior walls and shelving receive prime and finish coats, utilizing VOC free Benjamin Moore
Eco Spec or equal, in manufacturer's standard color range (TBD).
Existing painted walls and shelving:
Prepare plaster for painting. Patch with blueboard and/or plaster as needed and skim coat
(see Section 09200)
Prime new areas
Finish 1 coat ac lic existin . surfaces 2 cots at re oaks and new areas 'I`
Sheen Flat (no option) oft
New blue board and skim coat walls and shelving ..
Prime One coat acrylic, new work only .o►
Finish 2 coats acrylic, new work only Alk
Sheen Flat (no option)
Interior Ceilings Apro
Interior ceilings receive prime and finish coats, one color throughout, utilizing VOC free
Benjamin Moore Eco Spec or equal, in manufacturer's standard ceiling white color.
w►
Existing plaster ceilings:
Aft
Prepare plaster for painting (make sound, scrape and sand). Patch with blueboard and/or
plaster as needed and skim coat (see Section 09200)
Prime new areas
Finish 1 coats acrylic
Sheen Flat (no option) Aft.
Alk
New blue board and skim coat ceilings
Prime One coat acrylic, new work only
Finish 1 coats acrylic AM .
Sheen Flat (no option)
Aikk
disk
09900 -5
01 Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
elk
,, A. NOTE: Not withstanding the number of coats specified in "Painting Schedule ",
apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final
paint coat, until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
3.06 CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of
tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris.
C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in
f closed metal containers and remove daily from site.
3.07 SCHEDULE - SURFACES
A. For u oses of specifying uali the following products are manufactured b
P IP q tY� g P by
w Benjamin Moore.
EXTERIOR SURFACES:
Existing Exterior Body and Trim
Existing Siding and Trim Areas to remain:
• Painting exterior: wash, scrape and paint full exterior including: existing clapboards to
remain (at fire stair and front flat boards only), existing trim soffits, doors, window trim,
etc.
Finish spot prime and 1 coat (exterior latex)
Sheen N/A
ow► Color T.B.A
Existing metal railings:
• Wash, scrape and paint (spot prime and 1 coat)
• Exterior latex
ook
Am* New Exterior Body and Trim
�ws New Siding:
• New clapboards to be factory pre - primed, end cuts and touch up at installation, 2 coats
4111111 acrylic applied in field
New Exterior Trim
• NOTE: all field cuts to be primed by carpenter prior to installation
osk • Provide oil prime and latex fmish coats on all exterior trim, fascia, window sash, etc.
Stain and seal knots as required and caulk joints to siding manufacturer /trade standard.
M► Prime pre- primed
Finish 2 coats acrylic
Sheen Satin
Color T.B.A.
INTERIOR SURFACES:
Interior Doors
oak Follow manufacturer's recommendations, utilizing VOC free Benjamin Moore Eco Spec or equal
standard range of colors for paint. Fully finish all edges. Advise contractor if clearances
insufficient prior to application of fmish.
deek
09900 -4
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Aft
Smith College, Northampton, MA
potentially affect proper application.
C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not
apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following ara
maximums:
1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. A.
2. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM
D2016.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Follow Lead paint safety practices and disposal requirements. ,,,,
B. Wash, scrape and sand all interior and exterior trim and siding.
C. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing '
surfaces or fmishing. atk
D. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. .�
E. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
F. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri- sodium oat
phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G. Architect to approve preparation is complete prior to proceeding to paint application.
H. Metal Surfaces: Surfaces that exhibit rust formation, mill scale, etc., must be kept ""
cleaned in accordance with SSPC- SP2 -63. Galvanized surfaces must be aggressively a
cleaned to remove fabriating oil.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings
from disfiguring other surfaces. —
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
3.04 APPLICATION ,.d.
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. """
C. Apply each coat to uniform finish, free from runs, sags, wrinkles, streaks, shiners and
brush marks. Apply paint to walls and ceilings with rollers. If spray application is —
used, then back -roll to provide a rolled finish.
D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise oak
approved.
E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. —
G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the
grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.
H. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
I. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish —
with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. .®
J. Stain Application: Apply stains only by brush: no spraying of stains will be
accepted. aa
K. Field Finishing of Doors: Prior to sealing and finishing, block sand with 150 grit „,*
sandpaper to remove all handling marks and raised grain. Top, bottom, opening, and
hardware recess edged must be sealed after fitting with at least two coats of varnish.
3.05 COVERAGE
09900 -3
Olk
Oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1111
B. Provide product data on all finishing products and special coatings.
C. Submit two samples 2 x 2 inches in size illustrating range of colors and textures
available for each surface-finishing product scheduled, for Architect's selection.
oft D. Submit MSDS sheets for all paint materials.
E. Provide complete color schedule for each room and paint type.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
41111 A. Deliver to site, store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled
containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
411111 C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type
of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time,
dite,
cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
oft D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a
maximum of 90 degrees F, in well-ventilated area, unless required otherwise by
oft
manufacturer's instructions.
Aft E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
oft.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
41Ik A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient
oft temperatures above 60 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after
application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is
4ft, above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures (air or surface) for Paints: 50 degrees F for
oft
exterior. Test surfaces with moisture meter before proceeding.
gift
1.08 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide a one gallon container of each color and surface texture to Owner.
oft B. Label each container with color, texture, and area where in addition to the
manufacturer's label.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
oft
A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft
oft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a
Afto, homogeneous coating.
B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of
oft streaks or sags.
oft C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other
materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the fmishes specified, of
oft
commercial quality.
oft D. Acceptable Manufacturers, Paint: All paints to be Sherwin Williams or Benjamin
Moore — no substitutions will be allowed
41111k
Aft PART 3 EXECUTION
oft 3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product
oft manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report
any condition that may
404
09900-2
oft,
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 09900 Painting Alb
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED Aft
A. Provide labor and equipment for painting and finishing of all interior and exterior ,,,p
items and surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Schedule at end of Section
for types of surfaces included.
1. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers,
emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials
whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
2. Includes field painting of exposed sprinkler pipes regardless of ceiling height. ..kc
3. Paint exposed surfaces, except as otherwise indicated, whether or not colors are
designated. If not designated, colors will be selected by Architect/Designer from ..�
standard colors available for the coatings required. —
B. WORK NOT INCLUDED:
t.
1. There is NO painting required in basement (existing and new surfaces) "'
2. Unless otherwise indicated, shop priming of ferrous metal items and fabricated w.
components are included under their respective trades. Prefinishing items, such
as metal toilet partitions, acoustic material and the like, are not included.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, painting not required on surfaces of concealed areas ota
including piping, equipment and other such items within the concealed spaces.
3. Finished metals such as anodized aluminum, stainless steel, bronze, and similar
metals will not be painted.
4. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units, or cover any equipment
identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates or code - required
labels.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01100: Alternates - exterior trim option
B. Section 05700: Miscellaneous and Ornamental Iron. ,.
C. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry.
D. Section 07900: Joint Sealers. "'
E. Section 08200: Wood Doors.
F. Section 08600: Wood Windows — pre finished under windows. ..
G. Section 09250: Gypsum Wallboard
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSUASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and
Related Products.
B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
A ilk
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and ..�
finish products with three years experience. .�.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 3 years
experience. +*M
Ara
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data, samples, and manufacturer's application instructions under
provisions of Section 01300.
09900 -1
Oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Oft
Oh B. Make written request for inspection at least ten (10) days before the completion of
carpet installation work.
mik
C. Correct all defects in materials and workmanship listed by the Architect during
inspection.
D. Approval of carpet installation will be given only after all such defects have been
corrected.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove access adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
ow B. Remove all loose threads with sharp scissors. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
C. Remove all spots or stains with remover recommended by carpet manufacturer.
Replace any carpet with spots or stains that cannot be removed to the satisfaction of the
w
Architect.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
B. Cover with protective paper until Final Acceptance.
3.08 MAINTENANCE
41111 A. Provide written maintenance program including three month supply of recommended
WA cleaning materials.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance procedures.
END OF SECTION 09680
oak
4w
aft
Aft
Aft
09680 -4
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Alb
Smith College, Northampton, MA
kok
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch ..
in 10 ft and are ready to receive work. kukt
B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and
exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. Submit results from Calcium
Chloride testing PRIOR TO INSTALLATION as per Section 01400 Quality Control. Alba
C. Verify that wall inset areas are flat, clean and dry. ,,,,
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other
defects with sub -floor filler. Auk
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. ..k
C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D. Vacuum floor surface.
Aft
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Do not commence installation until securing diagram submittal is approved.
B. Locate seams in area of least traffic. Minimize cross seams.
C. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. o kk
D. Lay out rolls of carpet for approval.
E. Unroll carpet and let air for 24 hours prior to installation. Ask
F. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. ..
G. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, .akk
true, and unfrayed.
H. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps. Ask
I. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic. Al,,,
J. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall
opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under
door centerline. —
K. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. Run carpet under all open bottom items, such
oak
as heating convectors, and shall be installed tight against walls, and cabinets.
L. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
M. Carpet shall be cemented directly to the subfloor with an all purpose adhesive. ...
Contact cement shall be used at a minimum of six inches (6 ") at the perimeter of all
area, and six inches (6 ") on both sides of all cross seams.
N. All carpet areas shall be rolled with a 75 lb. carpet roller to insure proper contact of AUK
carpet to the subfloor and to remove all bubbles and buckles.
O. Entire carpet installation shall be laid tight and flat, and present a uniform ®"
appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area. Ank
P. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length
pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. '"
Aok
3.04 VENTILATION
Ask
A. Ventilate the areas in which carpet has been installed for a minimum of 1 week or until
vapors have been reduced to a level that will not cause respiratory and/or eye irritation, *'*
whichever is longer. .kk
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Carpeting, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be inspected by the Architect
before the carpet subcontractor leaves the job site.
kok
09680 -3
kikk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for five (5) days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve
temperature stability.
B. Maintain minimum 68 degrees F ambient temperature three days prior to, during, and
24 hours after installation of materials.
C. Schedule installation to provide time for adequate ventilation of off - gassing of carpet
and glues while library is not open to the public.
sok
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide excess cutting of carpet.
1.1 WARRANTY
A. The Carpet Contractor shall warrant this work for a period of two (2) years. The
," Carpet Contractor shall make necessary replacements and/or repairs due to defective
material and/or unsatisfactory workmanship which becomes apparent within twenty-
" four (24) months after initial installation.
B. The carpet product shall be furnished with a ten (10) year warranty on the following
characteristics: tuft bind; edge ravel; delamination; run resistance; wear; stain
sok
removal; static; and colorfastness to light.
sok
"wr PART 2 PRODUCTS
w► 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Masland Contract. Sales Representative: Holly Hauser, 781 -413 -4218,
holly.hauser @maslandcontract.com
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS
"u"" Construction specifications
sok Product Velocity
Style # 7250
sok
Fiber Content XTI® nylon
sok Fiber Weight (tufted) 32 oz. /Sq. Yd. (1085 g/m
Construction Loop Pattern
Dye Method Piece Dyed
Gauge 1 /10
sok Pattern Repeat Random
Width 12' (3.66)
sok Pile Height .250 "/.125" (6.35mm / 3.18mm)
sio Total Weight 78 oz. /Sq. Yd. (2644 g/m
sok 2.03 ACCESSORIES
sok A. Sub -Floor Filler: type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet manufacturer.
koo
Adhesives shall not contain formaldehyde, equal to "Envirotec, Healthguard
sok Adhesives" manufactured by W.F.Taylor Company, Inc.
C. Edge Strips: equal to "Snap -Down Standard edge" Stock No. 33B, as manufactured
sok
by Mercer Plastics Co., Inc. Color to be selected.
sok D. Miscellaneous: Provide all other materials and accessories required for a complete
__ job.
sok
09680 -2
..R
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ,,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 09680 Carpet
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. All areas as indicated on the Finish Schedule: all areas with existing carpet to be ..
replaced with new, with the exception of office 107. Extend carpet at third floor hall
to cover all areas.
B. Include surface preparation, pad, adhesive and labor.
C. Accessories.
Ask
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS _ Ask
A. Section 01400: Quality Control.
Ask
B. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry - underlayment requirements.
C. Section 06200 Finish Carpentry – wood base �**
D. Section 09650: Resilient Flooring: —
1.03 REFERENCES Ask
A. ANSUASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a ,,,,,,
Radiant Heat Energy Source.
B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Ask
C. FS DDD -C -95 - Carpets and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic. ,.,
D. FS DDD -C -0095 - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic, Polyester,
s»
Polypropylene.
E. FS DDD -C -1559 - Carpet, Loop, Low Pile Height, High Density, Woven or Tufted Ask
with Attached Cushioning. —
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples, and manufacturer's installation ...
instructions, under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet, and edge details. Ask
C. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance ws,
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D. Submit three samples, 27 x 18 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each
carpet material specified. ,
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. r
B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning and shampooing.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in commercial carpet with five years minimum
experience. Am
B. Installer: Company approved by manufacturer with five years minimum experience.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to carpet flammability requirements of applicable codes. „
B. Conform to Rules & Regulations of Architectural Access Board, CMR 521.
Assos
Ask
Aft
09680 -1 ,,,
oft,
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
44.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4. Damp mop flooring to remove black marks and soil.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during
construction. Remove and legally dispose of protective covering at time of Substantial
lik
Completion.
010.
3.07 INITIAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
A. General: Include in Contract Sum Amount cost for initial maintenance procedures, and
execute procedures after flooring installation as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
B. Initial maintenance "Starter Kit" supplied by manufacturer. Initial maintenance to be
conducted by flooring contractor.
mok
END OF SECTION 09650
ami
asok
duip
alk
4111k
41111
4110,
411k.
4111k
41111b
411%
41114
4.114
4111k
411
09650-5
411111
ARA
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS AIR
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2. Floor Substrate: Floors shall be sound, smooth, flat, permanently dry, clean, and ,.
free of all foreign materials including, but not limited to, dust, paint, grease, oils,
solvents, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt and old adhesive
residue.
3. Concrete Floor Substrate: Concrete floor substrate shall have a minimum �.
compressive strength of 3,000 psi. Refer to Division 3 Concrete sections for
patching and repairing crack materials, and leveling compounds with portland
cement based compounds. ,w,,,
a. Reference Standard: Comply with ASTM F 710 Standard Practice for
Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring
C. Wood Subfloors: Wood floors should be double construction with a minimum total ,,.
thickness of 1 inch. Wood floors must be rigid, free from movement and have at least
18" of well - ventilated air space below. Forbo floor coverings should not be installed
over wooden subfloors built on sleepers over on or below grade concrete floors
without first making sure that adequate precautions have been taken to ensure the
structural integrity of the system, and to prevent moisture migration from the concrete
slab.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Adhesive Flooring Installation: Cut required length of sheet vinyl flooring from roll,
allowing enough material to extend up the wall 4 to 6 inches at either end. Layout and
position sheet flooring so that any seams will fall at least 6 inches from underlayment
joints or saw cuts in concrete substrate. Scribe and cut flooring material to shape of
vertical surfaces, including walls and partitions. Apply adhesive and lay sheet flooring ..•
into wet adhesive and roll with a 100 pound roller. Install sheet flooring square with
room axis.
1. Adhesive Flooring and Flash Coved Base Installation: Extend flooring up the wall
in a flash -coved method to a height of 4 inches, as indicated.
2. Adhesive Material Installation: Use trowel as recommended by flooring
manufacturer for specific adhesive. Spread at a rate of approximately 200 ft /gallon,
as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
B. Installation Techniques:
1. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installation on top
of fmished flooring, install flooring before these items are installed.
2. Scribe, cut, fit flooring to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures and
Aikk
built -in furniture, including pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, nosings, and
cabinets.
3. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
4. Adhere resilient flooring to substrate without producing open cracks, voids, raising
and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface
imperfections in completed installation.
5. Roll resilient flooring as required by resilient flooring manufacturer.
3.05 CLEANING .�
A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair �.
or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris
from project site and legally dispose of debris.
1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaning methods
recommended by floor manufacturer.
2. Sweep and vacuum floor after installation.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.
..b
09650 -4
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RESILIENT VINYL SHEET FLOORING
** A. Manufacturer: Forbo Flooring, Inc.
Ob. 1. Contact: 8 Maplewood Dr., Humboldt Industrial Park, P.O. Box 667, Hazleton, PA
18202;
'"` Telephone +800 842 7839 or +570 459 0771; Fax + 570 450 0258
401, B. Proprietary Product(s): Eternal Vinyl Sheet and Vinyl Adhesive. Wood, Stone,
Marble, or Classic style to be determined by Architect.
1. Description: Highly compressed homogeneous vinyl wear layer with a high
performance urethane top coat. A glass fiber interlayer to ensure dimensional
stability and a calendared CDF backing support the wearlayer.
2. Width: 2 Meters (79 ")
osok 3. Length: 25 Meters (82 Linear Feet)
4. Gauge: 2.0mm (0.080 ")
5. Pattern and Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard patterns
'w'' and colors.]
_. 6. Adhesive: Forbo Flooring, Inc., V 885 Adhesive
7. Heat Welding Rod: Forbo Flooring, Inc., Eternal color - matched welding rod.
Amok
C. Proprietary Product(s): Eternal Wood Decibel Vinyl Sheet and Vinyl Adhesive.
1. Description: Highly compressed homogeneous vinyl wear layer with a high
411 performance urethane top coat. A glass fiber interlayer to ensure dimensional
stability and a calendared CDF backing with an applied acoustic comfort layer
!a* support the wearlayer.
2. Width: 2 Meters (79 ")
3. Length: 20 Meters (66 Linear Feet)
''o` 4. Gauge: 3.4mm (0.134 ")
5. Backing: Acoustic foam
6. Pattern and Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard patterns
and colors.]
7. Adhesive: Forbo Flooring, Inc., V 885 Adhesive
aft 8. Heat Welding Rod: Forbo Flooring, Inc., Eternal color- matched welding rod.
alk PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical
bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for
,ink installation.
"" 3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been
previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions (i.e. moisture tests, bond test, pH test, etc.).
B. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements,
visually inspect materials prior to installation. Material with visual defects shall not be
installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim.
aft
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from
'" damage during product installation.
41,, B. Surface Preparation:
1. General: Prepare floor substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
09650 -3
gok
Oft
Weft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
accordance with ASTM method indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1 Rating per NFPA 253 (ASTM E 648) (0.45
watts /cm or greater).
b. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per NFPA 258 (ASTM E 662). .lk
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections. ..»
B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements
Alb
to avoid construction delays.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers A
with identification labels intact.
D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather
conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 41".
1. Material should be stored in areas that are fully enclosed and weathertight. The ,..
permanent HVAC should be fully operational, controlled and set at a minimum of
68° F (20° C) for at least 48 hours prior to the installation. AIM
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements /Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's Ask
recommendations, areas to receive flooring should be clean, fully enclosed and Oak
weathertight. The permanent HVAC must be fully operational, controlled and set at a
minimum of 68 F (20 C) for a minimum of seven days prior to, during, and seven
days after the installation. The flooring material should be conditioned in the same
manner for at least 48 hours prior to the installation. Areas to receive flooring shall be
adequately lighted to allow for proper inspection of the substrate, installation and
seaming of the flooring, and for final inspection.
B. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be .Q..
installed for time period before, during, and after installation as recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Temperature Conditions: 68 F (20 C) for a minimum of seven days prior to, .ft,
during, and seven days after the installation. 41111,
C. Existing Conditions: [Specify existing conditions affecting product use and installation.]
D. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements /openings by field measurements
before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field ,.
measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction
delays.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING .0%
A. Finishing Operations: Install flooring after fmishing operations, including painting and
ceiling operations, have been completed. ..�
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard at.
warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty
is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract
Documents.
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) year limited warranty commencing on Date of 40, .
Substantial Completion.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: non required
09650 -2
A.
,wr
dook Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 09650 Resilient Vinyl Sheet Flooring
PART I GENERAL
01 I" 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Section Includes: Resilient Vinyl Sheet Flooring
1. Eternal flooring, adhesive and flash coved base installation.
2. Resilient Transition Accessories.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Wood Subflooring: Refer to Division 6 Carpentry - wood underlayment.
ark
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
""" 1. ASTM F 1303 Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with
_ Backing.
Ask 2. ASTM E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor- Covering
Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
3. ASTM E 662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke
Generated by Solid Materials.
4. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with "Conditions of the Contract" and
Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
oft
B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's SPEC -DATA product
sheet, for specified products.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product
components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures.
w, D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for fmishes, colors, and textures.
,,, E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Certification of compliance: Letter of compliance signed by manufacturer
certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria,
4rw and physical requirements.
2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions.
' F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:
awk 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed
products in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and
Operation Data) Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and
precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and
performance.
2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
Ask
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who
has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.
,w. B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient linoleum sheet flooring with the
trok
following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products in
arik
410, 09650 -1
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.04 PROTECTION
A. After application, protect floor finish from damage during subsequent work. ,.
B. Do not allow foot traffic until floor is sufficiently dried and cured. *►
END OF SECTION 09550
Alfa
Ilk
air
AIL
Alb
09550 -3
lk
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.02 PRODUCTS:
A. Bona Mega.
mik
1. Ingredients: Water, polymeric resins, propylene based glycol ethers, silica
derivate, and surfactants.
2. Color: Milky white (wet).
3. Clarity: Clear when dry.
"ik 4. pH: 7.9.
5. Solids: 32.5 %.
6. Density: 8.75 lb /gallon (1.05 S.G.).
7. US Regulatory VOC: 150 g/L.
o,, 8. Gloss Level: 25 -30 for satin.
9. Odor: Non - offending.
10. Certification: Greenguard Certified for Indoor Air Quality.
11. LEED: Complies with USGBC LEED low -VOC requirements.
B. Waterborne Sanding Sealer: Bonaseal
C. Wood Floor Filler: Bona Pacific Filler as manufactured by Bona US.
db. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
C. unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect adjacent finish surface to prevent damage during sanding
B. Surface Preparation:
w 1. Sand and prepare floor using NWFA or industry accepted methods.
2. Vacuum thoroughly.
3.03 APPLICATION
,, A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the floor finish system
manufacturer.
atik B. Finish System: As scheduled or indicated on the drawings.
Aft 1. 3 -coat system.
2. For an unstained floor, apply 1 coat of sealer according to label directions,
Aft
followed by 2 coats of polyurethane.
arts‘ 3. Glossy under coat layers shall be mechanically scuffed for better adhesion.
4. Add third coat of finish in heavy - traffic areas or as scheduled.
Aft
C. Finishing:
ww 1. Apply finish going with the grain of the wood.
auk 2. Feather out each stroke to avoid applicator marks.
3. Use the recommended coverage of sq ft per gallon recommended by
manufacturer.
,► 4. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly (approximately 8 to 12 hours). High humidity
and/or low temperature conditions will extend dry time while increased
gook
ventilation and airflow will reduce dry time (recommended conditions of 65 to 80
degree F (18 degree C to 27 degree C)/ 40 to 60% relative humidity).
5. Abrade in- between all coats with a 120 - 150 grit screen or maroon pad.
6. Thoroughly vacuum and wipe with a clean, lint -free, water dampened cloth
between coats of finish.
7. Allow final coat to dry a minimum of 24 hours before use and avoid heavy traffic
for 72 hours.
mok
09550 -2
AIR
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 09550 Existing Wood Flooring — Field Finish
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Refinishing existing hardwood flooring and small areas of new floor: Locations as """"
noted on Finish Schedule, including all existing wood floor areas and Office 107 .s .
(which is currently carpeted)., excluding interior of closets (to be painted) and Room
301 (to be carpeted). .,
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry — new wood flooring areas :
1.03 SUBMITTALS —
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. ,,,.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods. -
C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color
chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size
6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Trained in application of the manufacturer's floor products.
B. Mock -Up: Provide a mock -up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and ,,.,,
application workmanship.
1. Finish areas designated by Architect. Aft
2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are Ard
approved by Architect.
3. Refinish mock -up area as required to produce acceptable work.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ...
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based —
materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS -
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's limits."
PART 2 PRODUCTS .w.
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bona US, which is located at: 2550 S. Parker Rd. Suite
600 ; Aurora, CO 80014; Toll Free Tel: 800 - 872 -5515; Tel: 303 - 371 -1411; Email:
request info (usadmin @bona.com); Web: www.bona.com
B. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with 011.4
provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. ,.
-
09550 -1 Am
,f" Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, pre-
stretched, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than
12 gauge.
D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles
indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and
penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension
''"" system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as
exposed runner.
E. Accessories
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering
wok and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by
manufacturer's printed recommendations. (Exception: HumiGuard Max Ceilings)
Oft 3.02 PREPARATION
14 A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at
borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with
ark mechanical and electrical fixtures.
B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose
installation is specified in other sections.
+R 1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in
sw advance of time needed for coordination of other work.
411* 3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced 4 -0 on center
along the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight.
C. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter
corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.
D. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas
w and vertical surfaces.
E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on
Ask flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces.
Support edges by wall moldings.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
w. A. Replace damaged and broken panels.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up
of minor finish damage.
1. Ceiling Touch -Up Paint, (Item #5760, 8oz. bottles) (Item #5761, quart size cans),
"global white" latex paint should be used to hide minor scratches and nicks in the
surface and to cover field tegularized edges that are exposed to view.
C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09500
09500 -4
MIA
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
AAR
5. Grid: Ten years from date of substantial completion. .t.
C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run
concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of ...
the Contract Documents.
1.09 MAINTENANCE A ft
A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described
below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage
ft
and identified with appropriate labels. A
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full -size units equal to 5.0 percent of Aft
amount installed.
2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed ..w
suspension component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. *"
...
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS Aft
A. Acoustical Panels Type ACT -1: Cortega Tile & Lay -In, 704 as manufactured by ,.,
Armstrong World Industries. Requests for substitutions will be considered in
accordance with provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
1. Surface Texture: Medium f
2. Composition: Mineral Fiber
3. Color: White
4. Size: 24in X 24in X 5 /8in ®f.
5. Edge Profile: Angled Tegular for interface with Prelude ML 15/16" Exposed Afft
Tee.
6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.55. ,f.
7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 33 ,,,,
8. Emissions Testing: Section 01350 Protocol, < 13.5 ppb of formaldehyde when
used under typical conditions required by ASHRAE Standard 62.1 -2004, ...
"Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality" ...
9. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL)
10. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: 0.82. A`
11. Antimicrobial Protection: None Aft
Aft
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot - dipped ...
galvanized (galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel) as per ASTM A 653. Main ,,,,,
beams and cross tees are double -web steel construction with 15/16 IN type exposed
flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, capping pre - finished '"
galvanized steel (aluminum or stainless steel) in baked polyester paint. Main beams ..
and cross tees shall have rotary stitching (exception: extruded aluminum or stainless
steel). Aft
1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 HD. .I6
2. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted ,la
otherwise.
3. Acceptable Product: Prelude ML 15/16" Exposed Tee as manufactured by
Armstrong World Industries, Inc. ..
B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table
1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. '""
Aft
Aft
09500 -3
Aft
Oh
,., Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying
product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single- Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by
a single manufacturer.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and
complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less
w b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in
aft any way.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and
_ store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage
from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and
a stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in
alt
any way.
+�. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. All ceiling products and suspension systems must be installed and maintained in
accordance with Armstrong written installation instructions for that product in effect
oft at the time of installation and best industry practice. Prior to installation, the ceiling
product must be kept clean and dry, in an environment that is between 32 °F (0 °C)
and 120 °F (49 °C) and not subject to Abnormal Conditions.
w, Abnormal conditions include exposure to chemical fumes, vibrations, moisture from
conditions such as building leaks or condensation, excessive humidity, or excessive
dirt or dust buildup.
aft B. Standard Ceilings: Do not install interior ceilings until space is enclosed and
weatherproof; wet work in place is completed and nominally dry; work above
ceilings is complete; and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity are
continuously maintained at values near those intended for final occupancy. Building
areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris.
ark 1.08 WARRANTY
allk A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing
to repair or replace acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures
aft include, but are not limited to:
1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping as a result of defects in materials or
AI
factory workmanship.
2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects
3. Acoustical Panels with BioBlock Plus or designated as inherently resistive to the
growth of micro - organisms installed with Armstrong suspension systems: Visible
sag and will resist the growth of mold/mildew and gram positive and gram
negative odor and stain causing bacteria.
Aft B. Warranty Period:
4. Acoustical panels: One (1) year from date of substantial completion.
09500 -2
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS AM.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 09500 Acoustical Ceilings
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Acoustical ceiling panels.
B. Exposed grid suspension system.
C. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings.
Alb
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board
B. Section 09120 - Suspension System Framing and Furring for Plaster and Gypsum
Board Assemblies
C. Division 15 Sections - Mechanical Work
D. Division 16 Sections - Electrical Work
1.03 REFERENCES
API
A. ASTM A 1008 for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High - Strength Low -
Alloy and High - Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. .w..
B. ASTM A 641 for Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
C. ASTM A 653 for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process.
D. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the
Reverberation Room Method. . lkk
E. ASTM C 635 for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel
Ceilings. ..r
F. ASTM C 636 for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay -in Panels.
G. ASTM E 84 for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. "'
H. ASTM E 1414 for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common
Ceiling Plenum.
Aikk
I. ASTM E 1111 for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings Systems.
J. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. _
K. ASTM E 1477 for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of —
Integrating- Sphere Reflectometers.
L. ASTM D 3273 for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings .ft
in an Environmental Chamber. ,,
M. ASTM E 119 for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Material.
N. ASHRAE Standard 62.1 -2004, "Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality" -'
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling
unit and suspension system required.
B. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long ,..
samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and
4 foot cross tees. ""
C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings. Show locations of items
which are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.
ask
D. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an
Underwriter's Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton, it"
subcontractor shall be required to send material from every production run appearing
on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the �.
architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's ..
09500 -1
Aft
lk
lk Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
5. Perform cutting, patching, repairing and pointing -up operations neatly and
thoroughly. Repair cracks and indented surfaces by moistening plaster and
filling with new material, troweled flush with adjoining surfaces.
Nak
3.03 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION — NEW FIRE RATED WALLS
A► A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 201 and GA 216 and in thicknesses and
doh layers as indicated on the drawings.
uw,
B. Erect double layer where required for fire- rating. Offset joints as required to meet
fire- rating.
aa► C. Use screws when fastening gypsum board for all applications.
D. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated.
E. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim
where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials, and cover with mud.
elk
3.03 JOINT TREATMENT
ollk A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface
„a,,, ready to receive finishes.
B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
C. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied
+n. ceramic tile and above suspended ceilings.
D. Erect pre - decorated gypsum board vertically, with exposed batten fastening system.
oak
E. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 PLASTER PATCHING
oft
A. Apply patching compounds in sufficient coats to avoid cracking and/or shrinking.
"a"" B. Match existing plaster texture.
C. Architect to inspect at completion of patching for approval, prior to painting.
3.05 ADJUSTING AND TOLERANCES
as A. Correct damage and defects which may telegraph through finish work.
B. Leave work smooth and uniform
C. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
Tolerances to be adjusted for existing deformity in building structure.
END OF SECTION 09250
aft
mik
w►
4
09250 -4
AIR
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Aft,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide as required for complete installations. 4 -
alto
PART 3 EXECUTION AM
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
Aft
instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
3.02 VENEER PLASTER INSTALLATIONS - NEW WALLS AND CEILINGS AND
AREAS OF LARGE PATCHES ..t,
A. Base (Blue Board):
tta
1. Install gypsum base in accordance with ASTM C844. Apply gypsum base with
face side out. ..
2. Butt and fit abutting edges and ends together for light contact; do not force into ,•,
place.
3. Do not locate fasteners closer than 3/8 inch from ends or edges of sheets. Set
heads slightly below surface of gypsum base, but do not break paper face. ,•
4. Drive screws with power screwdriver.
5. Position edges over support flanges.
6. To maintain true surface plane for installation on studs, arrange direction of ,,,,,
application so that leading edge of base is attached first to open edge of stud
flange. ""
B. Veneer Plaster Finishing: Reinforcing Tape: ,,•
1. Install full length over all gypsum base and cement board joints, including internal
corners. Do not overlap at intersections.
2. Butter joints with setting -type joint compound, press Sheetrock Joint Tape into ._
compound; apply skim coat of compound over tape.
C. Veneer Plaster Application
1. Apply veneer plaster in accordance with ASTM C843, except for more stringent **
requirements of manufacturer or these specifications. Apply 1 or 2 -coat system ..
of uniform thickness as indicated.
2. Mixing:
• Use mechanical mixers for mixing plaster in accordance with USG auk
recommendations.
• Clean mechanical mixers, mixing containers and tools after mixing each
batch; keep free of plaster from previous mixes.
• Thoroughly mix plaster with proper amount of water until uniform in color ..
and consistency.
• Retempering not permitted; discard plaster that has begun to stiffen. ""
3. Base Coat:
• Trowel apply base coat plaster over gypsum base to 1/16 to 3/32 inch
thickness.
• Where plaster is flush with metal frames, groove at junction to reduce "*
possibility of chipping. Cut plaster free from these metal sections before a ,,,
plaster sets.
4. Finish Coat:
• Trowel apply finish coat plaster to a maximum 1/16 inch thickness over .at,
basecoat plaster.
Alba
• Scratch fmish coat in thoroughly over dry base coat and immediately double
back to true even surface. IOW
• Finish surface to match adjacent materials
09250 -3
osh
elk Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
oft
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD
A. United States Gypsum Co.
B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:
1. Gold Bond Building Products, Inc.
okk 2. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
3. Flintkote Products, Inc.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
4Pi 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Veneer Plaster Partitions:
1. Base: Manufacturer's standard size gypsum base sheets in maximum available lengths to
011*, minimize end-to-end joints; manufacturer's standard edge profile.
a. Comply with ASTM C588.
b. Regular type except where Type X fife-resistant type is indicated or required
to meet UL assembly types.
c. Thickness: 5/8 ['A] inch, unless otherwise indicated.
oft
d. Acceptable product: IMPERIAL Gypsum Base by USG — "Blue Board".
4rni 2. Bonding agent: USG Plaster Bonder.
3. Plaster basecoat: Ready-mixed material, mill-prepared, high-strength gypsum
veneer plaster for two-coat application. Acceptable product: Equivalent to
DIAMOND Basecoat by USG.
4. Plaster finish coat: Ready-mixed material. Choose from below to best match
adjacent surfaces.
4111 a. Smooth trowel finish: Add water in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Acceptable product: Equivalent to IMPERIAL Finish by USG.
b. Float finish: Add water and aggregate in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Acceptable product: Equivalent to DIAMOND Interior Finish
011, by USG.
B. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: Type X, 5/8" thick.
0116. 2.03 PLASTER PATCHING MATERIALS
A. Plaster of Paris
oft
B. Reinforcing mesh
C. Use materials which will match adjacent finishes and texture.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
aft A. Comer Beads: Metal.
B. Edge Trim: Veneer "L" trim casing bead.
C. Joint Compound: "All Purpose Light Ready-Mix" by US Gypsum, or equal.
D. Joint Materials: ANSI/ASTM C475; GA 201 and GA 216; reinforcing tape, adhesive,
dik water, and fasteners.
E. Acoustic Insulation: FS-HH-1-521; Preformed mineral wool, friction fit type
4$4,
without integral vapor barrier membrane.
F. Acoustical Sealant: Non hardening, non-skinning for use with gypsum board.
G. Metal furring channels: ANSI/ASTM C645; GA 201 and GA 216; galvanized sheet
steel, 26 gage thick, roll formed, hat-shaped sections. (Option to wood furring.)
4.4 H. Fasteners: Screws only, Type S bugle head screw, 1" or longer, ASTM C646.
09250-2
411114
..a
sank
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS do.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Auk
SECTION 09250: GYPSUM WALL BOARD ANI) PLASTER PATCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Patching of existing walls and ceilings to remain for doors, mechanical and electrical wrok
and renovations.
B. New wall and ceiling areas
C. Entire replacement of ceiling at third floor (back wing)
D. New mechanical chases
E. Fire -rated electrical room
F. Carry allowance for plaster repair: repair cracks in plaster and prepare for paint including
non - visible areas of plaster (after wall covering is removed and prior to replacement).
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02050 Demolition ,...
B. Section 04100 - Masonry
C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and blocking, and furring strips.
D. Section 07200 - Insulation:
E. Section 09900 - Painting.
F. Section 15400 - Heating & Ventilating: chases and vents in ceilings.
G. Section 16000 – Electrical: fixtures and devices in new and existing walls and ceilings
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSUASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. """
B. ANSUASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
C. ANSUASTM C557 - Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing.
D. ANSUASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid .A
Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
E. ANSUASTM C646 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Sheet Material to
Light Gage Steel Studs.
F. ANSUASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
G. GA -201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings.
H. GA -216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,,.,.
A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with 3 years' experience. —
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ••
A. Conform to Mass. State Building Code for fire rated assemblies in conjunction with Sections
04100 and 06100.
1.06 SUBMITTALS ,,,,
A. Submit product data, samples, and manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions
of Section 01300. 01/k
B. Provide product data on gypsum board, joint tape, and accessories. ..
C. Mock -up: Install one (1) ceiling and wall patch. Accepted finish to be used as quality
standard.
09250 -1 A
oft
oft
„ Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
wA • new kick plate
• new weather stripping
• new stop
014 • Maintain historic door knocker and sign on exterior.
oft
HW Set # 5: Existing exterior side door at top of Ramp:
elk
• add paddle- operated, electric latch retraction and automatic opener at ramp door
oft • new weather stripping
HW Set # 6: First Floor Historic Front Wing Doors:
• Remove existing low hardware, deadbolts and latches and dutch styles.
• new hinges (move stops if needed)
• new mortise sets (confirm firm no need for short backsets (as styles are typically 4 -5/8" wide
and 1 -3/4" thick, confirm).
1111 • new stops
elk
HW Set # 7: Second Floor Historic Front Wing Doors:
"" • Remove existing low hardware, deadbolts and latches and dutch styles.
• new hinges (move stops if needed)
• new mortise sets (confirm no need for short backsets (as styles are typically 4 -5/8" wide
oft
and 1 -3/4" thick, confirm).
oft • new stops
HW Set # 8: First floor back wing existing seminar rooms:
• install new magnetic hold open
oft • replace door closer
0 • replace hinges
• new push and pull
HW Set # 9: Third floor stair enclosure:
• install new magnetic hold open
• replace door closer
1111 • replace hinges
w • retain existing push and pull
aft HW Set # 10: Third Floor Bathroom
ake • new lever privacy set (keep cylindrical — and bore for through bolts
oft
HW Set # 11: Exterior doors
• weather stripping
oft • new cylinders for rekeying
oft
HW Set # 12: Existing Doors to remain: First floor back wing, Office Closets and
Custodial Closets:
01 • no new hardware
'• END OF SECTION 08700
,ter,
08700 -6
ifooft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS .,..
Smith College, Northampton, MA
E. After installation, representative templates, instruction sheets and installation details ,..
shall be placed in a file folder to be turned over to the Owner when the building is
accepted. Included shall be at least five each of any special adjusting and/or installation
tools furnished with the hardware by the manufacturers. ..�
F. Coordinate with Division 16000 for electrical connections for automatic openers and
Alk
magnetic hold opens.
,M.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING .,
A. Adjust and check each operating time of hardware to ensure correct operation and
function. Units which cannot be adjusted to operate as intended for the application ""
made shall be replaced. ..a
B. Final adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior
to building acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, the installer shall return to the .�
work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and 01!
adjustment of all hardware items. Hardware shall be cleaned as necessary to restore —
correct operation, function and finish. Door control devices shall be adjusted to
compensate for fmal operation of heating and ventilating equipment. "*'"
3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. The following is a general listing of hardware requirements and is not intended for
use as a fmal hardware schedule. Any items of hardware required by established
standards or practices, or to meet state and local codes shall be furnished whether or
Aft
not specifically called out in the following listed groups
B. Hardware Schedule
HW Set # 1 -A: New doors at toilet rooms
• 3 hinges
• Lockset — privacy function ,.,
• 1 stop ..®
HW Set # 1 -A: New doors at custodial and storage closets Auk
• 3 hinges
• Lockset — storage room function
• 1 stop
HW Set # 2: New Door (firerated) ..�
• 3 hinges
• Lockset
• 1 closer ,,,,
• 1 stop
HW Set # 3: New and Replacement Doors (offices):
• Lockset — office function ,
• 3 hinges
• 1 stop
0"
HW Set # 4: Existing Exterior Front Door:
• retain existing closer
• remove existing panic device, 0 "
• new hinges (exterior pivot reinforced) isok
• new mortise lock
Ank
08700 -5
Ink
aft Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4104 • Can be used with mechanical door closers to provide electromagnetic hold open
facility.
aft Electromagnetic door holders are controlled by the fire/smoke alarm system and
hold the door open until either:
• The alarm is activated manually, or by a heat/smoke sensor
• There is a power failure
oak • The door is closed manually by pulling the door edge
J. Door stops: Rockwood baseboard stop #474, except in locations where floor mounted
stop is required (#470). Finish: US10.
K. All existing hardware scheduled for removal shall be salvaged and delivered to the
College Lock Shop
at%
do. 2.03 KEYING:
A. 39A2 keyway, with all existing cylinders changed to match Smith College's Patented
Keyway key system. All keys shall be shipped to the College Lock Shop.
01/11*
AIR 2.04 TRIM AND PLATES
A. Push plates shall be size 4" x 16", material bronze, thickness .050
B. Pull plates shall be size 4" x 16", material bronze, pull size 8".
416. C. Plates shall be cut for cylinder or thumb piece when used with deadlocks. Turn piece
0* to be attached to plate by manufacturer.
411
D. Doors equipped with deadlocks having the cylinder located on the push side of the
door shall be furnished with a combination push and pull plate with the lower edge
offset so that it may be used to pull the door.
E. Pulls shall be attached by through-bolts.
F. Acceptable manufacturers as follows:
alk 1. Rockwood
2. Burns
aft
3. Ives
G. Kickplates: 10" high x door width less 2". Bronze, thickness .050.
Aft PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders
Hardware" by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), except if otherwise specifically
indicated or to comply with requirements of governing regulations, requirements for the
handicapped, or if otherwise directed by the Architect.
aok
B. All hardware shall be installed by tradesmen skilled in the application of commercial
aok grade hardware.
C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Securely fasten all parts to be attached. Fit faces of mortised parts
snug and flush. Make sure all operating parts move freely and smoothly without
41111k binding, sticking or excessive clearance. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to
install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another
oft way, the hardware shall be remove and stored prior to the painting or finishing. Items
shall then be reinstalled only when the finishes have been completed on the surface to
which the hardware is to be applied.
D. At exterior doors and elsewhere as indicated, set thresholds in a bed of sealant as
specified in Section 07900 to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture
from every source. Do not plug drain holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant.
08700-4
411111k
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
to be clearly labeled so as to conveniently identify them and their intended location in
the building. -
B. A representative of the General Contractor shall receive the hardware when delivered
at the job site. A dry locked storage space complete with shelving, shall be set aside *"*
for the purpose of unpacking, sorting out, checking and storage.
C. Finish hardware shall be delivered to the General Contractor by the hardware
supplier. Direct factory shipments to the job site are not acceptable. The hardware "'
shall be jointly inventoried by representatives of the General Contractor and the
hardware supplier.
D. Items damaged in shipment shall be replaced promptly and with proper material
without additional cost to the General Contractor. All hardware shall be handled in a Ank
manner to minimize marring, scratching or damage.
1.010 WARRANTY """
A. The finish hardware shall carry a limited warranty against defects in workmanship ,,•„
and operation for a period of one year from date of acceptance.
B. Mortise locks shall have a one year limited warranty.
C. Door closers shall have a ten year limited warranty. ask
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. No substitutions from those listed below. Requirements for design, grade, function,
finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of fmish AO.
2.02 HARDWARE
A. All locksets, trim, devices and cylinders shall be supplied by a single manufacturer.
B. Locksets: ADA hardware, Smith standard: Corbin Russwin MRML2000 Series, (no Aikk allowed). Mortise trim MSN (full plate). Cylindrical should not be used
Ask
(except where specifically noted. Unit lock UT5200 series.
1. Finish: US 10 dull bronze fmish ..®
2. Finish at bathroom hardware: stainless steel (or brass ?), privacy set
3. Provide hold -open for lock body for the automatic door operated door (1)
C. Strike Plates: Wherever the casing is an integral part of the door frame, provide a
custom strike plate to bridge the joint in the rabbet. Hardware supplier to verify door
thickness and strike lip length in the field.
D. Exit Devices: no new exit devices. '"'
E. Cylinders: Removable core type; Corbin Russwin 3000 (no substitutions). Master
rings to be used in all locations
F. Hinges ,..`
1. Interior high frequency use: Stanley 4 -ball bearing type; Stanley -FBB 168 or
199
Alow
2. Exterior: Stanley 4 -ball bearing type, FBB223, pivot reinforced.
G. Closers: Norton 7500, parallel arm
H. Automatic Door Operator: Gyro -Tech 710 with two push buttons. Include an on/off
switch installed inside; and a hold open furnished for the lock body. The switches to
be furnished by New England Door Closer (local Gyro Tech distributor), and final opt
wiring by the electrical contractor. The hold open is by the Corbin Russwin hardware —
supplier (see above).
I. Magnetic Hold- Opens: ..
• Equal to Briton White Contract Wall Mounted Magnet
08700 -3
eiNmk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Power Operated Pedestrian Doors ANSI A156.10
Cabinet Locks ANSI A156.11
Mortise Locks & Latches ANSI A156.13
Thresholds ANSI A156.21 — 1989
B. Listed Hardware which is to be installed in or on fire labeled doors and frames, Class A
4111 or lesser, single or pairs, shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories and/or
Warnock Hersey Fire Laboratories Division. Exit devices, which are to be used as
panic hardware shall be tested and listed in Underwriters Laboratories "Accident
Equipment List - Panic Hardware". All listed hardware shall be in compliance with
Oh National Fire Protection Associates (NFPA) Standard Number 80 and be properly
stamped or labeled for easy identification.
Oft
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
T h A. Conform to Mass. Access Board Rules and Regulations, 521 CMR and Uniform
Federal Accessibility Standards.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. The finish hardware supplier shall, after award of a formal contract, submit to the
dik
Architect, four (4) complete typewritten copies of the proposed finish hardware
oft schedule for approval. This schedule shall be prepared using the "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule" as approved and recommended by the Door and
Hardware Institute (DM). After approval of the schedule the hardware supplier shall
4111k provide six (6) copies of this approved schedule to the Architect for file and
distribution purposes. Hardware will not be ordered by the hardware supplier until
an approved schedule has been received.
011k B. When submitting schedules for approval, include two manufacturer's cut sheets on
4114 each hardware item proposed. Index it with the use of numbers or letters or a
combination of both, with the hardware schedule. The index numbers/letters are to
be in the right had column on the same line as the respective manufacturer's numbers.
All manufacturers' numbers shall be indexed even when appearing more than once.
C. Include a separate keying schedule, which is the result of a key meeting, attended by
Ok
the Architect, Owner and hardware supplier.
aek D. Samples: As part of this contract, provide to the Architect one sample of each item
of finish hardware that is to be furnished for this project. These samples will be held
by the Architect until completion for the project and will then be turned over to the
Owner. They will serve as product samples for the building maintenance department.
oft E. ANSI: Upon request by the Architect, the hardware manufacturers will issue letters
of compliance that their products meet with ANSI standards and they have been
4vsk tested and are the grades required in this specification.
oft F. Templates: The hardware supplier shall provide necessary templates and/or physical
hardware to all trades requiring them in order they may cut, reinforce or otherwise
Aft
prepare their material or product to receive the hardware item. If physical hardware
4ok is required by any manufacturer, the hardware supplier shall ship to them such
hardware via prepaid freight in sufficient time to prevent any delay in the execution
of their work.
Aisik
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All items of hardware to be delivered to the job site shall be completely packaged
with all necessary screws, bolts, miscellaneous parts, instructions and where
necessary installation templates for manufacturers' suggested installation. They are
40114
08700-2
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
08700 Door Hardware Aft.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 WORK INCLUDED aft
A. The work in this section shall include the furnishing of all items of finish hardware as .�
hereinafter specified, or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those
items, which are specifically excluded from this section of the specification.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08200: Wood Doors.
B. Section 16000: Electrical – wiring of magnetic hold -opens and auto. operators —
1.04 SCHEDULE CONSIDERATIONS
A. Class A hardware is a 6 to 8 week lead time, and the factories shut down for 2 weeks ,..
around the 4th of July to re -tool. We should have an approved Hardware Schedule in .ft_
hand no later than the end of April
ari
1.05 DESCRIPTION OF WORK ,M,,
A. Finish Hardware: Hardware used in building construction but particularly that used
on or in connection with doors and frames. It also has a finished appearance as well
as functional purpose and may be considered as a part of the decorative treatment of a ,wR
room or building.
B. The following door hardware is listed elsewhere in these specifications and shall not
be a requirement of this division: "0*
1. Cabinet hardware
3. Window hardware and operators
4. Hand rail brackets
5. Shelf hardware
6. Toilet partitions
7. All rough hardware """
8. Transformers, junction boxes, wire and hook -up of electrical detectors and ,-
closers
1.06 REFERENCES ..so
A. Finish hardware in this section shall meet the following standards as established by ..R
the American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) which is sponsored by the
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. (BHMA). Product tests are to be ,_
administered by the ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc., or other official testing AR ,
laboratories, which have been designated by BHMA for the testing of ANSI
standards. The standards latest revision will be in effect. ""
Materials & Finishes BHMA 1301 —
Butts & Hinges ANSI A156.1
Locks & Lock Trim ANSI A156.2 w "
Exit Devices ANSI A156.3 •*►
Door Controls - Closers ANSI A156.4
Auxiliary Lock & Assoc. Products ANSI A156.5
Architectural Door Trim ANSI A156.6 –
Template Hinge Dimensions ANSI A156.7 aft
Door Controls - Overhead Holders ANSI A156.8
Cabinet Hardware ANSI A156.9
08700 -1
Alk
dew
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
Window Schedule
Project: Dewey House
Prepared by Kraus - Fitch, Architects, Inc.
Date / Revision: 6- Apr -12
APPROXIMATE
OPENING SIZE (existing
frame) MUNTIN GLASS
ID QTY TYPE (W X H) PATTERN TYPE COMMENTS
A 2 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6
B 7 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6
C -F 1 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6 FROSTED
GLAZING
D 2 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6
E 1 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6
F 12 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6
F -F 1 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6 FROSTED
GLAZING
G 9 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6
H 4 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6
I 0 NOT USED LETTER NOT USED.
REMOVE EXISTING PLASTIC LAMINATE COVERED SILL.
J 3 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6 REPLACE WITH SILL SIMILAR IN PROFILE TO K TYPE
WINDOWS FOR INSTALLATION OF INSERT WITHIN
FRAME.
K 11 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6
K -T 1 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6 TEMPERED
GLASS
L 1 DH FIELD MEASURE 6 over 6
M 2 DH FIELD MEASURE 4 over 4
N 8 CUSTOM FIELD MEASURE 2 over 2
O 3 DH FIELD MEASURE 2 over 2
P 1 EXISTING N/A 4 over 4 EXISTING WINDOW TO REMAIN
FROSTED REPLACE EXISTING WINDOW (INCLUDING FRAME AND
Q 1 NEW DH Z-4" x 3' -2" 2 over 2 GLAZING TRIM). NOTE: THIS WINDOW IS APPROX. 6" SHORTER
THAN THE EXISTING WINDOW TO ACCOMMODATE
R 7 FIXED FIELD MEASURE 3
S 3 NEW DH 3' -0" x 3' -10" NEW WINDOWS CUSTOMIZED TO LOOK LIKE
2 over 2 REPLACEMENT WINDOWS
Notes:
1. Replacement Windows: all windows (EXCEPT TYPE -S) to be replaced with replacement insert type frames and new sashes.
a. Remove existing sashes, "dividing stop. ", and weights.
b. Replace any damaged exterior sills matching existing profile. Replace interio sills (3 locations).
c. Insulate weight pockets
d. Determine if new inset window is better installed from interior or exterior based on existing trim and frame conditions
e. Coordinate installation of counter flashing at windows near roofs and cornices with roofing subcontractor.
f. Install and secure inserts
g. Install frame extenders
2. Frame sizes: all window sizes to be determined on site by supplier by measuring each and every existing window frame
DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ..
Smith College, Northampton, MA
(see option below) wood interior. Recessed pulls (to reduce maintenance). Ask
Include removable stop for fixed top sash option. Windows to be customized .A.
Marvin "Clad double hung tilt pac" to match appearance of insert windows.
o Sizes: per window schedule. Am.
o Exterior Color: Sierra White.
o Interior Color: Option factory pre - finished interior, Marvin standard
"White"
o Hardware: bronze ,.
B. Screens: full size. Window screens installed with SS screws.
C. Glazing at all window types (basement included):
1. Double pane with simulated divided lites and spacer bars, low e and argon filled •••
with recessed pulls (to reduce maintenance). Maximum u -value shall be 0.31. ..
2. Tempered glazing in stair area (1 total)
3. Frosted glass at bathrooms (both sashes).
Jew
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION ""'
A. Measure all existing openings.
B. Placement of order means acceptance of existing conditions.
ww
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of window unit and air and vapor
barrier seal.
B. Remove existing sashes and parting bead
C. Remove sash weights
D. Insulate weight pockets with either dense - packed cellulose or non - expanding foam
depending on constructability and depth of cavity. Note: General Contractor to
investigate possibility of insulating some head and sills (depending on
construction). Coordinate as needed for insulation by others of discovered areas.
E. Remove interior stop as required for installation of insert window from interior. '
F. Where applicable (all sills with tight relationship to roofs and cornice returns), ...,
coordinate with roofer to install flashing (wrapped over existing sill and under insert
window).
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install new insert windows and stop in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Maintain alignment with adjacent work. Secure assembly to frame openings without AR
distortion or stress.
C. Install frame expanders to return to existing exterior casings
D. Protect interior surface until application of finish is complete. ''
3.04 TOLERANCES
Alb
A. Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from true measurement.
B. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 foot straight edge.
...
3.05 CLEANING
A. Cleaning of window frames and glass by others: Remove labels and visible
markings. ,,,,,
END OF SECTION 08600 '"'"
08600 -3
A.
Aft
dlie.
erh
DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
aft
41116A 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable state building code for wind and suction loads, and energy
requirements.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. To the e:ctent possible, within the constraints of the Summer construction schedule,
Alk the following shall be provided The Contractor shall review any deviations from
dik these requirements with the Owner and Architects.
1. Provide product data, manufacturer's specification, standard details, and test
reports.
2. Submit complete shop drawings showing locations, exterior wall elevations,
typical unit elevations, and installation details for each type of unit. Include
ORR
dimensions, relation to construction of adjacent work, air and vapor barrier seal
Alk to adjacent construction, component anchorage and locations, anchor methods
and materials, and hardware installation details.
3. Submit two samples of glazed window frame, corner, mullion joint and operating
sash, operating hardware, illustrating quality of joint, color and texture of fmish.
4. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that window
units meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of insulating glass units and delamination or separation
0.6 of finish cladding from window member.
mb,
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD WINDOW UNITS
dook
A. Types:
1. Double hung replacement windows (in all but basement and new dormer
locations). Windows are to be aluminum clad wood exterior (extruded, not roll
stock) pre-primed and finished (see option below) wood interior. Recessed pulls
(to reduce maintenance). Include removable stop for fixed top sash option.
410. Windows to be Marvin "Clad Insert double hung" or equal.
o Custom peaked insert windows (double hung) in 8 locations
o Exterior Color: Sierra White.
ink o Interior Color: Option factory pre-finished interior, Marvin standard
"White"
o Frame expanders: to extend frames to existing exterior trim. Match color of
Ash window.
o Hardware: bronze.
2. Basement window replacement also to be included — clad insert FIXED window
Aft o Basement windows may be clad wood or all aluminum, mounted towards the
mik exterior of the basement openings.
o Supply and install aluminum brake metal to cover entire, exposed surfaces of
existing wood jambs and sills.
ink o Color of Aluminum (windows and brake metal): standard Marvin
"Evergreen".
o Replacement window in Toilet Room 300T to be shorter than existing
auk window to allow for sufficient flashing over roof.
3. New windows (4 total, new dormer and third floor toilet): Windows are to be
aluminum clad wood exterior (extruded, not roll stock) pre-primed and finished
08600-2
Division 8: Doors and Windows
SECTION 08600: WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. New wood double hung and awning windows, with screens.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 04100: Masonry.
B. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry: trim.
C. Section 07195 Wind block ..
D. Section 07900: Joint Sealers. Aft
E. Section 09900: Painting
1.03 MOCKUP
A. Install window unit in typical exterior wall assembly
B. Mockup to determine acceptability of installed window unit for installation methods
C. Conduct single room blower door test as per Section 07195 Wind block ,,,,
D. Approved mockup will represent minimum quality for the Work, and remain as part
of the Work.
AIL
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Owner and Supplier will inspect Windows for damage upon delivery to jobsite, and 40.
all damaged units replaced. do.
B. Any damage which occurs after initial delivery to be the responsibility of the General
Contractor.
C. Store and handle windows, panels, hardware and other equipment in compliance with 40"
manufacturer's instructions. ..
D. Protect units against damage from the elements, construction activities, and other
hazards before, during and after installation. '"
1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Conform to performance requirements of Subsection 4 of ANSI/NWMA LS.2, Class ow
A.
B. Air Leakage: ANSUASTM E283; 0.25 cu ft. /min/ft. per crack foot of perimeter when ..b
subjected to a pressure equivalent to 25 mph wind (1.56 psi).
C. Vapor Seal of Operable Sash: Installed Window Unit: To withstand without failure,
73 degrees F 40 percent relative humidity condition at design exterior ambient
conditions while maintaining interior atmospheric pressure of one inch static
pressure.
D. Water Penetration of Sash Unit: Installed Window Unit: None when subjected to.
ANSI /ASTM E331 under static pressure of 2.86 lb./sq. ft. for 15 minutes.
E. Wind and Suction Loads Acting Normal to Plane of Window Unit: In accordance
with applicable state code. ..;
F. Deflection: 1/175 of span maximum, when subjected to ANSUASTM E330, with
wind and suction loads acting normal to plane of glazed window unit, measured on
any framing member.
w
08600 -1 �,
ROOM DOOR FRAME DETAIL ARDWARE
DOOR ELEV GLASS WALL WALL SET
NO. FROM I TO EXT'G or NEW WIDTH HGT THK TYPE MAT. FIN. TYPE RATING TYPE THICK MAT FIN. HEAD JAMB SILL NO. COMMENTS
214 -A OFFICE -HALL NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A N/A EX TBD WD. PT. 3 WIDEN DOOR - CONFIRM
214 -B OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX EX
215 -A OFFICE -HALL NEW B EX 7
215 -B OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX EX
215 -C OFFICE - CLOSET (OPG. ONLY) N/A N/A N/A OPENING ONLY, NO DOOR
215 -D OFFICE - STAIR BALCONY EXTG EX EX
THIRD FLOOR
300 -A BATHROOM - CORRIDOR EXTG D STL. PT. N/A EX 10
NEW MAGNETIC HOLD -OPEN,
EXISTING TRANSOM TO
300 -B CORRIDOR - CORRIDOR EXTG F WD. PT. WIRE 9 REMAIN
300 -C CORRIDOR -FIRE STAIR EXTG D STL. PT. N/A EX
301 -A OFFICE - CORRIDOR NEW TBD TBD 1 -3/4" D WD, PT. N/A EX 3
302 -A OFFICE - CORRIDOR NEW TBD TBD 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A EX 3
303 -A OFFICE - CORRIDOR NEW TBD TBD 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A EX 3
303-B OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX
304 -A OFFICE - CORRIDOR NEW TBD ,TBD , 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A EX 3
304 -B OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX
305 -A OFFICE - CORRIDOR NEW TBD TBD 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A EX 3
305-B OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX
306 -A OFFICE - CORRIDOR NEW TBD TBD 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A _ EX 3
306 -B OFFICE- CLOSET EXTG EX
ROOM DOOR FRAME DETAIL ARDWARE
DOOR ELEV GLASS WALL - WALL SET
NO. FROM / TO EXT'G or NEW WIDTH HGT THK TYPE MAT, FIN. TYPE- RATING TYPE THICK MAT FIN. HEAD JAMB SILL NO. COMMENTS
SECOND FLOOR
Replace closer, hinges, install
EX magnetic hold open, new push
200 -x TOP OF STAIR _ EXT'G F WIRE EX 8 plage and pull
200 -A HALL -ATTIC STAIR _ EXT'G B EX EX
200 -B CORRIDOR - CUSTODIAL CLOSET NEW 2' -0" 6' -8" 1 3/4" D EX 1 -8
REWIRE EXISTING MAGNETIC
200 -C CORRIDOR -HALL EXT E EX EX HOLD -OPENS
200 -D CORRIDOR- CLOSET EXTG E EX EX
200-E CORRIDOR - CLOSET EXT'G E EX EX
200 -F CORRIDOR- CLOSET EXTG E EX EX
200 -G CORRIDOR- CLOSET EXTG E EX EX
REWIRE EXISTING MAGNETIC
200 -H HALL - CORRIDOR EXTG D EX EX HOLD -OPENS
200 -I HALL - UNISEX BATHROOM NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A N/A NEW 4 -1/2" WD. PT. 1 -A
200 -3 HALL - UNISEX BATHROOM NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A N/A EX TBD WD. PT. 1 -A
200 -K HALL -FIRE STAIR EXT'G D EX EX
DOOR, FRAME AND HARDWARE
BY LIFT MANUFACTURER,
COORDINATE WITH
200L -A LIFT LOBBY • LIFT NEW NEW ELECTRICAL
201 -A OFFICE -HALL EXT'G B EX 7
201 -B OFFICE - CLOSET _ EXTG EX EX
202 -A OFFICE -HALL EXT'G B EX 7
202-B OFFICE- CLOSET EXTG _ EX EX
203 -A OFFICE -HALL EXT'G B EX 7
203-B OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG _ EX EX
203-C OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX EX
NEW DOOR, AND HARDWARE.
NEW IN RELOC. REUSE EXISTING TRIM AND
204-A OFFICE -HALL OPG. 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" B WD. PT. N/A N/A EX TBD WD. PT. 3 ROSETTES AS POSSIBLE
204 -B OFFICE - CLOSET - REMOVED REMOVED N/A_
205 -A NEW OFFICE -HALL NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3 4" B WD. PT. N A N A EX TBD WD. PT. 3
206 -A OFFICE -HALL NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D WD. PT, N/A N/A EX TBD WD. PT. 3
206 -B OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG _ EX _ EX
207 -A OFFICE -HALL NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A N/A EX TBD WD. PT. 3 WIDEN DOOR - CONFIRM
207 -3 OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX EX
208 -A NEW MTG. ROOM -NEW LOUNGE NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A N/A NEW 4 -1/2" WD. PT. 3
209-A OFFICE -HALL NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A N/A EX TBD WD. PT. 3 WIDEN DOOR - CONFIRM
210 -A OFFICE -HALL NEW 3' -0" 6- '8 "1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A N/A EX TBD WD. PT. 3 WIDEN DOOR - CONFIRM
210 -B OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX EX
211 -A OFFICE -HALL NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A N/A EX TBD WD. PT. 3 WIDEN DOOR - CONFIRM
211 -B OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX EX
212 -A OFFICE -HALL _ NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A N/A EX TBD WD. PT. 3 WIDEN DOOR - CONFIRM
212-6 OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX EX
213 -A OFFICE -HALL _ NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D WD. PT. N/A N/A EX TBD WD. PT. 3 WIDEN DOOR - CONFIRM
213 -B OFFICE - CLOSET EXTG EX EX
'Door Schedule k
Project: Dewey House
Prepared by Kraus - Fitch, Architects, Inc.
April 18, 2012
ROOM DOOR FRAME DETAIL ARDWARE
DoWIR ELEV GLASS WALL WALL' SET
NO. FROM / TO EXT'G or NEW WIDTH MGT TMK TYPE MAT. FIN. TYPE I RATING TYPE THICK MAT FIN. HEAD JAMB SILL NO. COMMENTS
BASEMENT
00 -A BASEMENT /FIRE STAIR EXT'G EX EX _
01 -A B02 -B03 EXT'G EX EX
02 -A BASEMENT /NEW ELECT. RM. NEW 3' -0" 6 -'8" 1 -3/4" D' STL. NONE N/A 1.5 NEW 6 STL. NONE 2
03 -A B03 -B04 EXT'G EX EX
04 -A B03 -B04 EXT'G EX EX
05 -A B03 -B05 EXT'G EX EX
_ FIRST FLOOR
EXISTING TRANSOM +SIDE
LIGHTS TO REMAIN. RETAIN
X -A FRONT PORCH - FOYER EXT'G A EX 4 HISTORIC KNOCKER AND SIGN
EXISTING TRANSOM TO
X -E3 RAMP PORCH - CORRIDOR EXT'G EX 5 REMAIN, ADD AUTO OPENER
X -C FIRE STAIR - EMERGENCY EXT'G, DBLE D' EX 11 NEW WEATHERSTRIPPING ONLY
100 -A STAIR -FOYER EXT'G A EX 6
100 -B CORRIDOR - BATHROOM NEW 2' -8" 6' -8" 1 3/4" C EX 1 -A
EXISTING HOLD -OPEN TO BE
100 -C CORRIDOR - CORRIDOR EXT'G C (2) EX EX REWIRED.
100 -D BATHROOM -HALL EXT'G E EX EX
100 -E JANITOR CLOSET - BATHROOM NEW 3' -0" 6' -8" 1 3/4", E NEW 41/2 INCL. _
DOOR, FRAME AND HARDWARE
BY LIFT MANUFACTURER,
COORDINATE WITH
100L -A LIFT LOBBY - LIFT NEW NEW TBD ELECTRICAL
100L -B LIFT LOBBY -FIRE STAIR _ EXT'G D EX EX
101 -A FOYER - OFFICE EXT'G A EX 6 _
102 -A PHILOSOPHY STUDY -FOYER EXT'G A EX 6
102 -B OFFICE- PHILOSOPHY STUDY EXT'G TALL A' EX EX
RELOCATED AND
ROTATED TO SWING RELOCATE DOOR FOR
104 -A SEMINAR ROOM -HALL _ INTO ROOM E EX EX STRUCTURAL POST
104 -B FIRE STAIR - SEMINAR ROOM _ EXT'G D EX EX
EXISTING TRANSOM TO
105 -A CORRIDOR- CONFERENCE ROOM EXT'G EX EX REMAIN
105 -B CONFERENCE ROOM -HALL EXT'G E EX EX
106 -A CORRIDOR- SECRETARY NEW 3' -0" 6' -8" 1 3/4" E EX 3
106 -B SECRETARY - CLOSET EXT'G B EX EX
107 -A FOYER- OFFICE EXT'G A EX 6
107-B CORRIDOR - OFFICE _ EXT'G A EX 6
107 -C OFFICE - CLOSET EXT'G EX EX
Alb
Al NW
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Ask
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Alb
Existing Historic Doors to remain: Auk
A. General: replace hardware as specified in schedule and below. 40,,,
B. First and Second Floor front wing:
1. Confirm 1 -3/8" min. door thickness. Remove existing low hardware and patch
styles. Install new mortise sets (confirm no need for short backsets as styles seem
to be sufficient width).
2. Install new hinges 4",
3. Square up existing doors to be parallel to opening, Adjust bottom rail as needed
to clear all flooring materials.
C. Adjust 3 first floor wood thresholds to meet ADA requirements (variance application ..
in process).
Office Closets and Custodial Closets to remain.
A. No changes, paint only
3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely, as directed by the
Architect. Auk
B. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation, as directed by Architect.
C. Institute protective measures as recommended and accepted by door manufacturer to AI`
assure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 08200
AINk
.R
oak
.
etlik
AIR
Jaw
08200 -3
AMP
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.02 FLUSH FACED DOORS
411. A. Type D: PC5, Commercial grade, Particle Core, 5 ply flush doors, lifetime warranty,
paint grade by Mohawk or Marshfield
11 Ilk B. Type D (fire-rated): Commercial grade, Mineral Core, steel, lifetime warranty, paint
grade, 1.5 hour rating.
04
01 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION WORK
A. Contractor shall familiarize self with existing door and frame conditions.
B. New Doors shall be properly packaged and protected during shipment and
installation.
Ol■
C. All door frames are to be properly installed with square corners, plumb sides, level at
011 head, securely attached to rough openings in walls and to floors and of proper size
and handle as scheduled and shown on Drawings. Do not install doors in improperly
installed frames.
411i
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
mob
B. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced
AWI standard and as indicated. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated
frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80.
opk.
3.03 INSTALLATION BY LOCATION AND TYPE
New doors (in locations of modifications only):
A. New openings (except as noted)
41.
B. Wood frame, composite, painted (style as per schedule).
C. New fire door (basement electrical room): flush steel door and frame, 1.5 hour
rating, closer
Ank
D. Doors and frames at new lift to be provided by lift manufacturer.
aft
Relocated door (seminar room for structural modifications)
A. Relocate and rotate existing door, frames, and trim. Repair or replace as needed
B. Existing hardware to be retained
41111.
Replacement Doors (Second Floor Back Wine and door at Office 204):
aft A. Remove existing doors, frames, trim. Determine feasibility of widening doors
(possibly replace jack studs with narrower). Relocate opening and install new door at
Office 204, reusing existing rossettes and casings as possible.
411Ni
B. Install new wood frames, doors and trim
40, C. Doors to be solid core, flush, paint grade
Ank
Replacement Doors Third Floor Back wine):
A. Remove existing doors.
B. Modify frame for new doors (thicker)
C. Install new wood custom height doors (approximately 6'4" high)
Aik
D. Doors to be solid core, flush, paint grade
mOk
401k
411k
08200-2
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Aft
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 08200: INTERIOR DOORS Al"
PART 1 GENERAL '""
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Solid core flush and paneled interior doors, fire rated and non -fire rated.
Aft
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
B. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry.
C. Section 08700: Hardware. ...
D. Section 08800: Glazing.
E. Section 09900: Painting.
F. Section 14420: Wheelchair Lift — doors provided and installed under 14420. ""
1.03 REFERENCES /QUALITY ASSURANCE.
A. AWI - Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute, Section 1300:
"Architectural Flush Doors."
B. ANSUNWMA ISS.1: "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors."
C. ASTM E152. ..A
D. Underwriters Laboratory.
E. FS -MML 736, Lumber, Hardwood. ..
1.04 SUBMITTALS aa",
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. 410 ..
B. Indicate door elevations, fire rating (UL label), stile and rail reinforcement, internal
blocking for hardware attachment, and cutouts for glazing. 0".
C. Doors shall be prepared for mortise locksets and butts.
eft
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Protect products under provisions of Section 01600. Aot
B. Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with AWI requirements. .wk
1.06 WARRANTY Aic
A. Provide lifetime manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700, which •,,
shall also include refinishing and reinstallation, where defect was not apparent prior
to hanging.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement or refmishing of doors where ,.,w
Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty.
Alth
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PANEL DOORS
A. Simpson Solid Pine, True Style and Rail (not molded), 3/4" Double Hip- Raised
Panel, paint grade. A.
1. Type B: Simpson 84
2. Type E: Simpson 44
08200 -1
,f► Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.02 PREPERATION
A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release or C790 for latex base
sealants.
"'' E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.03 INSTALLATION
elk
A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width.
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
'""" E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when
w, sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G. Tool joints concave.
mo■ 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.
oik B. Clean adjacent solid surfaces.
C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured fmishes caused by work of this Section.
ook
ask 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Protect Sealants until cured.
3.06 SCHEDULE
Location Type
'' Window perimeter Polyurethane
dik Door Frame /Walls Polyurethane
+�► Under Thresholds Polyurethane, color: Black
Under foundation sills Acoustic sealant
w
END OF SECTION 07900
0
4/w
Alk
Aft
Alb
07900 -3
dow
Ask
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
Aft
B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation. ...
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Provide three year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight Aft
and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
Alt
PART 2 PRODUCTS ..k
2.01 SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non - staining, non - bleeding, non - sagging,
capable of continuous water immersion; color as selected by Architect.
o Elongation Capability 7.5 to 12 percent de
o Service Temperature Range -13 to 180 degrees F
o Shore A Hardness Range 25 to 50 Aft
B. Polyurethane Sealant: 3 part epoxidized polyurethane terpolymer sealant, non - staining, capable ,.
of continuous water immersion, non - sagging type, equal to "Dymeric Plus" by Tremco; color as
selected by Architect.
o Elongation Capability 20 percent ..
o Service Temperature Range -40 to 180 degrees F
o Shore A Hardness Range 25 to 35 ...
C. Silicone Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non - sagging, non - staining, fungus resistant, Aft
non - bleeding; color selected by Architect. ,,,,
o Elongation Capability 25 percent
o Service Temperature Range -65 to 180 degrees F
o Shore A Hardness Range 15 to 35 ,,,,,
D. Acoustical Sealant: highly elastic, water -based caulking for sound -rated partition and ceiling
systems and sealing exterior walls to reduce infiltration. Non - bleeding and non - staining,
pumpable and easily applied in beads. Equivalent to to SHEETROCK® acoustical sealant by At.
USG.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: ANSIIASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to
50 percent larger than joint width.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
Aft
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings
and recommended by manufacturer.
Aft
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
07900 -2
MIR
Alb
01Ik
01111 Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
011+
SECTION 07900 Sealants:
010.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDES
dok A. Existing window weight pockets, heads, and sills: Drill holes at jambs, heads, and sills and fill
with non-expanding foam.
0111k
B. New insert windows: sealed to existing window frames.
C. New windows in new rough openings: non-expanding foam at rough openings.
D. New foundation sill: 2 beads acoustic caulk either side of anchor bolts.
E. Existing and new foundation penetrations: seal all penetrations at exterior foundation walls
4111 F. New and existing mechanical penetrations: air seal all penetrations (roof, walls, foundation)
411
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03000: Concrete.
B. Section 06200: Finish carpentry.
C. Section 07200: Building insulation.
Auk
D. Section 08100: Doors and Frames.
411 E. Section 08600: Windows
F. Section 15000: Mechanical
41111
G. Section 16000: Electrical
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D1056- Flexible Cellular Materials- Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
B. ANSI/ASTM D1565- Flexible Cellular Materials- Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers
411 (Open-Cell Foam).
C. ASTM C790- Use Latex Sealing Compounds.
D. ASTM C804- Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants.
E. ASTM C834- Latex Sealing Compounds.
F. FF TT-C-00598- Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type.
41Ik
G. FS TT-S-001657- Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, solvent Release
Type.
411 H. FS TT-S-00227- Sealing Compound: Elastometric Type, Multi-Component.
I. FS-TT-S-00230- Sealing Compound: Elastometric Type, Single Compound.
J. FS-TT-S-001543- Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base.
K. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) — Sealing and Caulking Guide Specification.
dok
1.04 SUBMITALS
A. Submit product data, samples, and manufacturers installation instructions under provisions of
Section 01300.
B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
limitations, color availability.
Air C. Submit samples lx1 inches in size illustrating colors selected.
411. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
4sik A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section
with minimum three years experience.
4.4
B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three
ook years experience.
C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installations.
07900-1
4111k
oft
lk
C. Side Wall Flashings: Replace existing flashings at every obstruction to the downward
flow of water (such as masonry chimneys) and against side walls of all wood frame
assemblies. Form and install flashing to effectively control and divert water to the
exterior. Set chimney counter flashings into sawed mortar bed. Hold in place with
shims and seal with polyurethane caulking. Overlap and shingle flashings to best
shed water. Coordinate installations with all trades.
D. Cornice and Window Sill Flashings: fully wrap window sills in close proximity of
roofing (and as noted on elevations) and all Cornice returns. Turn flashings up and
under intersecting trim to create water tight installation without reliance on caulking.
Remove cut and reinstall trim as needed to accomplish this. Coordinate with window
installers. ,-
E. Exposed Sheet Metal Work: Securely anchor sheet metal work, but allow for thermal
movement. Use concealed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. Install work to be Aft
permanently weatherproof and watertight. Aft
F. Rain Drainage Installation: Install gutters with soldered joints and copper rod type
hangers @ 24 o.c. Secure hangers with (2) # 10 x 1 %" stainless steel screws. Install
gutters below plane of roof to shed snow properly, pitching to downspouts, and to
comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. ,-
1. Downspouts: Downspouts with soldered joints. Firmly secure downspouts with
corrugated anchors to building within 18 inches of each end and not more than 5 a"
feet on center in between. Maintain uniform alignment and elevation of anchors .ft .
throughout project. Provide shoe and concrete splash blocks at grade.
G. Tolerance: For exposed to view work, the following allowable installed tolerances '
are allowable variations from locations and dimensions indicated by the Contract
Document and shall not be added to allowable tolerances indicated on other work.
1. Allowable Variation from True Plumb. Level & Line: + 1/8" in 20' -0 ", except ..k
for gutters which shall be slope uniformly at 1/32 inch per foot. —
H. Repair: Repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence of repair. Remove and replace ,f
work that cannot be successfully repaired.
END OF SECTION 07620 —.
ink
Alltk
Aft
..k
07620 -4
2.02 FABRICATION
oft
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Provide work to sizes, shapes and profiles
indicated on approved shop drawings. Shop fabricate work to the greatest extent
possible. Fabricate work to be truly straight, plumb, level and square, and to provide
the best possible watertight, weather proof performance. Bend sheet metal with brake
machines intended for sheet metal work. Provide watertight expansion provisions in
running work. Comply with referenced standards.
B. Specific Fabrication Requirements: Except as indicated otherwise, provide work
complying with the following minimum requirements shown in the SMACNA
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual:
1. Step Flashing.
2. Shingle Roof Valley Flashing: Install over ice dam protection. Flashing exposure
to match existing, with center water stop.
3. Shingle Hip Roof and Ridge Flashing: to match existing profile
4. Shingle Roof Pipe Penetrations.
ook
5. Flat Seam Siding: with minimum % inch double flat stock seams. Acceptable
aw Locks and Seams.
6. Provide copper rod type hangers for gutters, & new corrugated copper hinged
spike hangers for downspouts.
C. Roof Penetration Flashing Caps: Provide custom formed, fully soldered and sealed
MIR
flashing caps to fit every roof penetration and other condition requiring flashing and
capping. Provide integral base sheet at least 12" square to flash into roof shingles.
''"` Provide copper wire insect screen where needed to prevent insect intrusion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
akk
3.01 INSTALLATION
+s► A. Pre - Installation Examination Required: the installer shall examine previous work,
related work and conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify
Contractor in writing of all deficiencies and conditions detrimental to the proper
completion of this work. Beginning work means installer accepts substrates, previous
work and conditions.
B. Installation Requirements: Strictly comply with product manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations and standard details and recommendations of SMACNA,
__ except where more restrictive requirements are specified in this section.
1. Bed work in thick coating of sealant or roofing cement for watertight
performance.
2. Do not permit roofing cement to run or drip out from under flashing under any
conditions.
3. Do not permit roofing cement to contract incompatible materials such as
membrane roofing.
4. Ensure that sealants and roof cement are compatible with related and adjacent
Aft
work.
5. Ensure that flashings are installed correctly and are watertight before covering or
ink concealing.
6. Oil- canning, buckling, tool marks, and other noticeable defects are not permitted.
7. Fold visible edges to form straight, accurately aligned teardrop hems.
8. Fabricate and install all work with uniform, watertight joints and seams.
9. Makes seams and pints as invisible and as inconspicuous as possible.
10. Isolate dissimilar materials with permanent separation approved by Architect.
_"` 11. Non - Moving Copper Joints: Fully solder joints neat and accurate
emu, 07620 -3
oft
Oh
B. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale shop drawings for fabrication, installation and ,
erection of all parts of the work. Provide large scale plans, elevations and details of
profiles, pints, seams, anchorages, connections and accessory items. ""
C. Verification Samples: Submit at least two representative samples of each material ...
that is to be used in the work, showing the full range of color and finish variations
expected.
1. Flashings: Provide samples having minimum area of 36 square inches. .wA
OIL
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and industry standards. Protect
from all possible damage. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on -site
storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METAL AND RELATED MATERIALS
A. Copper:
1. All copper will be ASTM B370 -74
2. Valleys: 24 ounce copper tapered to match existing attached with 2" cleats.
Joints will be minimum 4" overlap. Copper will extend over ridge and be
crimped over drip edge at bottom.
3. Vent stack flashings: 24 oz copper two -piece telescoping, over existing TRV to
be reused.
4. All other flashings (drip, ridge, hip, sidewall, top of cornice, and chimney caps ,.,,
and side walls, 3rd floor window sill wrap /counter flashing): 20 oz copper. Drip
edge to have large enough profile to cover two layers of sheathing (existing and
new). .M
5. Chimney flashings to be folded and/or welded to create water -type, water -
shedding detail
6. Cornice flashing (and snow slides) installed in close proximity to window sills ...
shall receive counter flashing wrapped over window sills prior to installation of ,-
new insert windows (see Sections 07600 and 08600). Cornice flashings to
extend under and up behind all intersecting trim to create fully watertight detail
without the use of sealants.
7. All gutters will be 20 oz copper fabricated to match existing. Sections will be one
piece and all joints will be soldered. Gutters to be 6" wide, half round double
bead with rod and nut hangers (at maximum 24" o.c.) with stainless steel nuts.
8. Downspouts will be 4" copper corrugated fastened with corrugated copper
hinged spike hangers. All joints to be soldered.
9. Solder: Provide ASTM B32, 50/50 tin/lead solder with rosin flux. ....
10. Fasteners for Copper: Provide copper fasteners.
B. Joint Sealers: For moving joints, multi -part polyurethane sealant for typical exterior
use.
C. Rosin Paper: Provided red rosin paper complying with Federal Spec. UU- B- 790,
Type 1, 6 pounds per 100 square feet.
D. Accessories: Provide all clips, cleats, straps, anchors and similar items necessary to
properly complete the work. Provide accessories that are compatible with sheet metal *_
materials used and which are of sufficient size and gage to perform as intended. -.
07620 -2 ,..
SECTION 07620 Flashings & Gutters
PART -1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
aok
A. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Install new copper flashings to create water tight and water shedding details
"""" without the use of sealants. Flash at the following locations: drip and rake edge,
oak ridges and hips, vent stacks, side walls, valleys,100% coverage at top of cornice
returns, window heads, chimney caps and sidewalls, 3 floor window sill wrap
and all counter flashings.
w, 2. Providing through wall flashings at masonry work.
3. Replace drainage system including all gutters and downspouts (except at fire
stair).
ask 1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the
work of the Section. Other specifications which directly relate to the work of this
in,,, section include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Section 04000 - Masonry: mortar bed for consideration of through wall flashing .
2. Section 05700- Miscellaneous; tie backs and braces needing flashing and
coordination.
3. Section 07300- Slate Roofing; ice dam protection flashing.
4. Section 07500 Metal Roofing, Eave Strip and Crickets
*o► 5. Section 07500 Membrane Roofing
Aft
6. Section 07900- Joint Sealers; sealant requirements and test for compatibility.
7. Section 08600 Windows; wrapping window sills in close proximity to roofs
_ 1.03 INTENT
A. The major intent of this work of this section is to control and divert water to the
exterior and keep the building interior dry for the life of the building.
oak
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
'ok. A. Standard: Comply with applicable provisions of the following reference standard,
except where reference standards conflict or appear to conflict with other reference
4110+ standards or requirements of the Contract Documents or requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, the most restrictive requirement is required. Where the language
in and of the reference standards is in the form of a recommendation or suggestion,
ink such recommendations or suggestions are mandatory and required under the
Contract.
1. SMACNA 1793 Architectural Sheet Metal, 6 edition.,2003
B. Coordination: Perform work of this section in coordination with other sections to
provide the highest quality of work which best fulfills the intent requirements for this
work.
41114, 1.05 SUBMITALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use
'""" limitations and recommendations for each product used.
07620 -1
rrl
T1
0
z
1 1) 1 1)))))!) 1 1 1))!), 1) 1 1) 1 1) 1) 1 1 1)
401k
otherwise shown, fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of
exposed edges.
40k 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work, and
1111 locate so as to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and
anchors as required for a tight installation.
6. Tin uncoated copper surfaces and cleats at edges of sheets to be soldered, for a
nak width of 1-1/2 inch (38 mm), using solder recommended for copper work.
C. Flat Lock Seam Roofing:
ink
1. Install copper work in accordance with CDA "Copper in Architecture
01111, Handbook."
2. Flat Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten system to substrate with concealed metal
cleats and screws at spacings required by fabricator to resist code required wind
uplift.
4111At 3. Align, level, and plumb system with structure.
4. Fasten cleats or nails using cleats mated to folded flat seams and fastener pattern
nok
to resist design loads with screws or barbed nails of sufficient length to penetrate
ink substrate.
5. Fully seat adjacent panel to on two sides to achieve continuous engagement of
seam joint.
Ink 6. Mallet or dress down engaged seams.
0116. 7. Apply flux and fully sweat seams with solder to achieve watertight installation.
8. Install expansion battens (not applicable)
D. Standing Seam Roofing:
1. Fold lower end of each pan under 3/4 inch (19 mm). Slit fold 1-inch (25-mm)
away from corner to form tab where pan turns up to make standing seam. Fold
ink
upper end of each pan over 2-nches (50 mm). Hook fold on lower end of upper
ink pan into fold on upper end of underlying pan.
0 2. Apply pans beginning at eaves. Loose lock pans to valley flashing and edge strips
41 16
at eaves and gable rakes.
3. Finish standing seams one inch (25-mm) 1 1/4-inch (38mm)] high. Bend up one
side edge 1 1/4-inch (38-mm) [2-inch (50-mm)] and other 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) [2-
1/4 (66mm)]. Make first fold 1/4-inch (6-min) wide single fold and second fold 1 /2-
inch (13-mm) wide, providing locked portion of standing seam with 5 plies in
aft thickness. Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degree angle. Terminate
standing seams at ridge and hips by turning down in tapered fold.
non. 4. Form valleys (not applicable).
41% E. Coordinate installation of panels with adjacent construction to ensure watertight
enclosure.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove protective film (if any) from exposed surfac,es of copper roofing promptly
upon installation. Strip with care to avoid damage to finishes.
Apik B. Upon completion of each area of soldering, carefully remove flux and other residue
from surfaces. Neutralize acid flux by washing with baking soda solution, and then
flushing clear water rinse. Use special care to neutralize and clean crevices.
C. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that would interfere with uniform
ink oxidation and weathering.
3.05 PROTECTION
Ank A. Provide final protection in a manner acceptable to installer that ensures that copper
roofing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
nik 07600-6
ink
41111
PART 3— EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine conditions and proceed with work when substrates are ready.
B. Confirm that substrate system is even, smooth, sound, clean, dry, and free from Ask
defects. —
C. Verify roof openings, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set,
cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive copper roofing. Substrate to be smooth and free of defects.
Drive all projecting nails or other fasteners flush with substrate. ,at
B. Ice and Water Barrier Underlayment:
1. Install ice and water barrier on clean, dry roof substrate – 100% coverage.
2. Remove dust, dirt, and loose fasteners.
3. Remove protrusions from the deck area.
4. Verify substrate has no voids, damaged, or unsupported areas.
5. Repair voids or unacceptable areas before installing membrane.
6. Prime substrates with manufacturer's approved primer if required for proper ,—
installation of membrane over substrate.
7. Install membrane in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed application
procedures, precautions, and limitations.
8. Start application at low points and lap membrane shingle fashion to prevent water
penetration.
9. Membrane Underlayment: Apply horizontally, lapping preceding layer not less
than 4- inches (100 mm). End lap membrane not less than 6- inches (150 -mm) .
10. Maximize adhesion to substrate by brooming or rolling membrane in place after
placement.
C. Paper slip sheets must be installed over the underlayment. Use adhesive for
temporary anchorage, where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under
copper roofing. Lap joints 2 inch (50 mm) minimum. "'
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply
with recommendations and instructions of manufacturer of copper being fabricated _+
and installed.
B. General:
1. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with "'"
a bituminous coating, by applying rubberized asphalt or butyl underlayment to Ask
each metal surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by
dok
manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
2. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, .a
integral flashings, and other components of copper roofing to profiles, patterns,
and drainage arrangements shown and as required for permanently leakproof
construction. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of the work, as a..
indicated. Seal joints as shown and as required for leakproof construction. Shop-
fabricate materials to greatest extent possible.
3. Sealant -Type Joints: Not applicable.
4. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and
accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and
avoidable tool marks considering temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, and sealant. Except as
07600 -5 do.
,s.
oft
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop- fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply
with details shown and with applicable requirements of the "Copper in Architecture"
handbook published by the Copper Development Association (CDA) and other
recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather - resistant
performance with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently
prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrate.
Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for forming
w material. Form exposed copper work without excessive oil - canning, buckling, and
oft
tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
1. Fabricate to allow for adjustments in field for proper anchoring and joining.
oft 2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, free from distortion and
defects.
3. Cleats: Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, interlockable
with sheet in accordance with CDA recommendations.
4. Tin edges of copper sheets and cleats at soldered joints for flat lock and soldered
system.
5. Flat Locked Panel Seams:
6. Fabricate flat seams for solid soldered [sealant in] [dry] joints.
a. Fabricate seams for panels to be installed in overlapped, interlocking shingle
manner for locked down engaged seams.
, b. Fold two adjacent edges over 180 degrees for width of 3/4 inch and other two
adjacent edges under 3/4 inch (19 mm). Refer to CDA "Copper in
Architecture Handbook ".
w c. Fabricate flat seam roofing from pans 18 inches (450 mm) by 24 inches (600
mm) in size.
Ask
7. Standing Seam Panels:
OAR a. Fabricate pans to interlock standing seam with center to center seam spacing
oak as indicated on Drawings.
b. Fabricate interlocking seams to heights and patterns indicated.
c. Form overlapping and interlocking transverse joints.
„111, B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in copper sheet with flat -lock seams. Tin edges
and cleats to be soldered, form seams, and solder.
C. Expansion Provisions: Not applicable
doh D. Sealant Joints: Not applicable
E. Separations: Provide for separation of copper from noncompatible metal or corrosive
doh
substrate by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous
coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer /fabricator.
F. Solder:
1. Solder and seal non - moving copper joints on slopes up to 3:12, except those
dek indicated or required to be expansive type joints.
,®„ 2. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Refer to
CLEANING Article in PART 3.
diek
2.04 FINISHES
aoh A. Natural weathering mill finished copper. No applied finish.
Asok
,,, 07600 -4
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide materials by one of ink
the following:
1. Revere Copper Products, Inc.
2. Hussey Copper, Ltd.
3. Luvata, Inc. —
4. PMX Industries Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS tok
A. Copper Roofing Sheets: Cold- rolled copper sheet complying with ASTM B 370
temper H00, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:
1. Copper standing seam roofing: Panels will be 24 oz cold rolled copper and brake ..
formed joints will be seamed and soldered. Length of panel – full length of
installation (ridge or hip to eave). Width of panel +/- 20" to match existing seam
spacing. Clip spacing at 24 ".
2. Flat seam copper roofs, crickets and eave strip (snow slide): Panels will be 24 oz a..
copper and will not exceed 18" X 18 ". Clips can be lighter copper with two nails
per clip. Seams will be minimum ''A " and all seams will be soldered. """'
B. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective ,.•
coatings, separators, sealants and accessory items as recommended by copper sheet
manufacturer for copper roofing work, except as otherwise indicated. ""
1. Cleats:
a. Concealed type as indicated in the "Copper in Architecture " handbook
published by the Copper Development Association Inc. (CDA) for flat lock
seam, and standing seam, spaced on 12 -inch centers. ,.
b. Fabricate cleats to allow thermal movement of copper roof panels while
preventing copper panel distortion due to wind uplift forces.
2. Trim, Closure Pieces, and Accessories:
a. Same material, thickness, and finish as adjacent copper roof panels, brake „lls,
formed to required profiles.
b. Comply with standards conforming to recognized industry standard sheet
metal practice. ,a
C. Bituminous Coating: SSPC -Paint 12, Cold - Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick
Film), nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat.
D. Ice and Water Shield: Full areas to receive metal roofing will have ice & water ...
shield protection. Ice & water protection will be W.R. Grace Ultra. ...
E. Paper Slip Sheet: Minimum 4 -1b. red rosin -sized building paper. Any flat seam or
standing seam copper areas will also have a layer of rosin paper.
F. Nails for Wood Substrates: Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109 -inch minimum not less ,,,,,
than 7/8 -inch (22 -mm) long barbed with large head.
ek
G. Screws & Bolts: Copper, bronze, brass, or passivated stainless steel (300 Series) of ''"
sufficient size and length to sustain imposed stresses . 40.
H. Cleats: 16 or 20 oz ounce cold rolled copper, as required to sustain loads 2 -inch (50
mm) wide x 3 -inch (75 -mm) long. 4.0
I. Solder: ASTM B32; Provide 50 -50 tin/lead or lead free alternative of similar or ._
greater strength solder. Killed acid flux.
J. Flux: Muriatic acid neutralized with zinc or approved brand of soldering flux.
K. Rivets:
..r�
1. Pop Rivets: 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) to 3/16 -inch (4.5 -mm) diameter, with solid brass 406,
mandrels.
2. Provide solid copper rivet (tinner' s rivets) where structural integrity of seam is `
required. .alk
07600 -3 0*,
saw
4111114
B. Performance Requirements:
1. System shall accommodate movement of components without buckling, failure
41111k of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when
subjected to seasonal temperature changes and live loads.
2. Design system capable of withstanding building code requirements for negative
014
wind pressure.
C. Interface With Adjacent Systems:
1. Integrate design and connections with adjacent construction.
2. Accommodate allowable tolerances and deflections for structural members in
auk installation.
oik
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 01 Specification Sections.
B. Product data including metal manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions,
4110.
and general recommendations for roofing applications. Include certification or other
data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
C. Samples consisting of 12-inch square specimens of specified copper roofing material.
doh
D. Certificates: Fabricator's certification that products furnished for Project meets or
exceeds specified requirements.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator's Qualifications: Company specializing in copper sheet metal roofing work
with five years experience in similar size and type of installations.
B. Installer: A firm with 5 years of successful experience with installation of copper
roofing of type and scope equivalent to Work of this Section.
C. Industry Standard: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with applicable
recommendations and details of the "Copper in Architecture" handbook published by
the Copper Development Association Inc. (CDA). Conform to dimensions and
profiles shown.
D. Wind Uplift: Provide roof assemblies meeting wind uplift ratings as required by
41110,
code.
41111k
40. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Protect finish panel faces.
06.
B. Acceptance at Site: Examine each panel and accessory as delivered and confirm that
finish is undamaged. Do not accept or install damaged panels.
C. Storage and Protection:
41111k
1. Stack pre-formed material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasions.
2. Provide ventilation.
3. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.
Abe 1.09 WARRANTY
A. Warrant installed system and components to be free from defects in material and
workmanship for period of 5 years.
4111k
B. Include coverage against leakage and damages to finishes.
aft
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
Ask offering materials that may be incorporated in the Work.
411% 07600-2
Aft
..e
SECTION 07600 Metal Roofing, Eave strip and Crickets
PART 1— GENERAL —
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Flat locked and soldered roofing: snow slide strip at eaves and in front of 410..
dormers, new roof over lift tower, and crickets. ..
2. Standing -seam copper roofing: first floor roof over secretary office.
Aft
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02072 – Demolition (of non - roofing materials) ,e.
B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry, deck repairs
C. Section 07200 – Building Insulation: Coordinate for insulation from above of roof
over secretaries office prior to reroofing. As
D. Section 07300 - Slate Roofing
E. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing ""
F. Section 07620 – Flashing and Sheet Metal
1.03 INTENT
A. The major intent of the work of this Section, in conjunction with Sections 07300, .ft
07500, and 07620 is to provide a complete, new slate and copper roofing system, to
shed water to the exterior and keep the building interior dry.
1.04 COORDINATION ar„
A. Coordinate copper roofing with ram drainage work, flashing, gutters, downspouts,
trim and construction of decks, walls, and other adjoining work to provide
permanently watertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS An`
A. Installation Requirements: Fabricator is responsible for installing system, including ..a
anchorage to substrate and necessary modifications to meet specified and drawn
requirements and maintain visual design concepts in accordance with Contract
Documents and following installation methods as stipulated in the "Copper in ""'k
Architecture" handbook published by the Copper Development Association Inc. Av .
(CDA)
1. Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to establish basic dimension of
units, sight lines, and profiles of units.
2. Make modifications only to meet field conditions and to ensure fitting of system
avot
components.
3. Obtain Architect's approval of modifications. AIM
4. Provide concealed fastening wherever possible. ,
5. Attachment considerations: Account for site peculiarities and expansion and
contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening and
fracturing connection between units and building structure or between
components themselves.
6. Obtain Architect's approval for connections to building elements at locations
other than indicated in Drawings. ..
7. Accommodate building structure deflections in system connections to structure.
07600 -1
AIL
411114
41116
1116 3. After primer dries completely, primed metal surface must again be primed with
EP-95 Adhesive
4. Then the PS Cured EPDM Coverstrip can be installed
oft
3.07 DAILY SEAL
A. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not
4111, achieved by the end of the work day, a daily seal must be performed to
temporarily close the membrane to prevent water infiltration.
B. Complete an acceptable membrane seal in accordance with the manufacturer's
requirements.
3.09 CLEAN UP
Aft
A. Perform daily clean-up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and
dot other debris from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed
of in a legally acceptable manner.
B. Prior to the manufacturer's inspection for warranty, the applicator must perform a
oft pre-inspection to review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as
well as the application of all caulking.
4111■
Olk
dibk
END OF SECTION 07500
Olek
41111
01104
4164
Oh
41164
41%
Allok
dik
4'
07500-9
,.R
3.04 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND BONDING
A. Unroll and position membrane without stretching. Allow the membrane to relax
for approximately 1/2 hour before bonding. Fold the sheet back onto itself so
half the underside of the membrane is exposed. Amw
B. Apply the Bonding Adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's published
instructions, to both the underside of the membrane and the substrate. Allow the
adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch. _.
1. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding ,_
wrinkles. Brush down the bonded half of the membrane sheet with a soft
bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact. "'
2. Fold back the unbonded half of the membrane sheet and repeat the
bonding procedure.
C. Install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges 40.
approximately 4 inches. Do not apply bonding adhesive to the splice area.
3.05 MEMBRANE SPLICING WITH SecurTAPE
A. Tape splices must be a minimum of 2 -1/2" wide using 3" wide SecurTAPE
extending 1/8" minimum to 1/2" maximum beyond the splice edge. (Factory- ,-
Applied Tape is also available.) Field splices at roof drains must be located
outside the drain sump. do.
B. Position membrane sheet to allow for required splice overlap. Mark the bottom 40.
sheets with an indelible marker approximately 1/4" to 1/2" from the top sheet
edge. The pre- marked line on the membrane edge can also be used as a guide for
positioning splice tape. ,.w
C. Fold the top sheet back and clean the dry splice area (minimum 3" wide) of both
membrane sheets by scrubbing with clean natural fiber rags saturated with Sure -
Seal Primer. When using Sure -Seal (black) PRE - KLEENED membrane, w
cleaning the splice area is not required unless contaminated with field dirt or 4110,
other residue.
D. Apply Sure -Seal HP 250 Primer or Low VOC EPDM Primer to splice area.
E. Apply SecurTAPE in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and roll ,.R
the top sheet onto the mating surface.
F. When adhereing Factory Applied Tape (FAT), pull the poly backing from FAT
beneath the top sheet and allow the top sheet to fall freely onto the exposed .
primed surface. Press top sheet on to the bottom sheet using firm even hand
Alk
pressure across the splice towards the splice edge.
G. Immediately roll the splice using positive pressure when using a 2" wide steel Alk
roller. Roll across the splice edge, not parallel to it. When FAT is used,
Carlisle's Stand -Up Seam Roller can be used to roll parallel to the splice edge.
F. At all field splice intersections, apply Lap Sealant along the edge of the
membrane splice to cover the exposed SecurTAPE 2" in each direction from the
splice intersection. Install Carlisle's Pressure - Sensitive "T" Joint Covers or a 6"
wide section (with rounded corners) of Sure -Seal Pressure - Sensitive Flashing Oak
over the field splice intersection.
3.06 FLASHING
A. For stripping in cold roll copper (red), the follow procedure must be followed: A
1. Metal surface must be roughed up with abrasive scouring pad, using acetone to Al*
remove any oils /patina
2. Metal surface must be primed with HP -250 or low VOC Primer "@
07500 -8
elk
A►
C. CD -10 Fasteners: A non - threaded, hammer driven fastener used with structural
oh
concrete roof decks rated 3,000 psi or greater.
D. HP 14 -10 Fasteners: A #14 threaded fastener with a #3 phillips drive used for
minimum 3,000 psi concrete decks..
E. HP Term Bar Nail -Ins: A 1 -1/4" long expansion anchor with a zinc plated steel
oft drive pin used for fastening the Carlisle Termination Bar or Seam Fastening
Aw Plates to concrete, brick, or block walls.
F. Seam Fastening Plate: a 2" diameter metal fastening plate used in conjunction
with RUSS or EPDM membrane for additional membrane securement.
G. Insulation Fastening Plates: a nominal 3 inch diameter plastic or metal plate
used for insulation attachment.
H. Sure -Seal Pressure- Sensitive RUSSTM (Reinforced Universal Securement
osok Strip): a 6" or 9" wide, nominal 45 -mil thick clean, cured black reinforced
EPDM membrane with 3 "or 6" wide Factory- Applied Tape (FAT) laminated
along one edge. The 6" or 9" wide Pressure - Sensitive RUSS is used horizontally
'""' or vertically at the base of walls, curbs, etc., in conjunction with 2" diameter
oft securement plates or bars below the EPDM deck membrane for additional
Ow
membrane securement.
2.06 METAL EDGING AND MEMBRANE TERMINATIONS
A. General: All metal edging s shall be tested and meet ANSI/SPRI ES -1 standards
and comply with International Building Code.
m` B. Shop Formed Drip Edge Fascia — 16 oz. cold rolled (red) copper, with
elk continuous wind cleat
Note: for red copper, max warranty 10 yrs — alt substrate and adhesive
46, means /methods required.
oft C. Termination Bar: a 1" wide and .098" thick extruded aluminum bar pre -
punched 6" on center; incorporates a sealant ledge to support Lap Sealant and
provide increased stability for membrane terminations.
dik
w.. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the manufacturer's published instructions for the installation of the
membrane roofing system including proper substrate preparation, jobsite
considerations and weather restrictions.
B. Position sheets to accommodate contours of the roof deck and shingle splices to
aft avoid bucking water.
3.02 INSULATION PLACEMENT
A. Install insulation or membrane underlayment over the substrate with boards
butted tightly together with no joints or gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Stagger joints
mik
both horizontally and vertically if multiple layers are provided.
B. Secure insulation to the substrate with the required mechanical fasteners or
411 insulation adhesive FAST in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
s
07500 -7
Aft
As.
2.04 ADHESIVES, CLEANERS AND SEALANTS ..
All products shall be furnished by Carlisle and specifically formulated for the intended
purpose.
A. 90 -8 -30A Bonding Adhesive: A high - strength, yellow colored, synthetic rubber Am.
adhesive used for bonding Sure - Seal/Sure -White EPDM membranes to various
surfaces. Available in 5 gallon pails.
B. Low VOC Bonding Adhesive: A low VOC (volatile organic compound) .k,
bonding adhesive (less than 250 grams /liter) used for bonding Sure - Seal /Sure - ,,
White EPDM membranes to various surfaces. Available in 5 gallon pails.
C. Carlisle Weathered Membrane Cleaner: A clear, solvent -based cleaner used
to loosen and remove dirt and other contaminants from the surface of exposed
EPDM membrane (for repairs, etc.) prior to applying EPDM Primer. Weathered
Membrane Cleaner can also be used when applying Splicing Cement. Available
in 1 and 5- gallon pails. ..R
D. Sure - Seal SecurTAPET A 3" wide by 100' long splice tape used for splicing
adjoining sections of EPDM membrane. ,..o
E. Sure -Seal HP -250 Primer: A solvent -based primer used to prepare the surface ink
of EPDM membrane for application of Splice Tape or Pressure - Sensitive
products. This Primer can also be used in conjunction with EP -95 Splicing
Cement in lieu of Splice Cleaner. Available in 1 gallon pails.
F. Low VOC EPDM Primer - A low VOC (volatile organic compound) primer ws
(less than 250 grams/liter) for use with SecurTape or Pressure - Sensitive products.
Available in 1 gallon pails. .R
G. Lap Sealant: A black, heavy- bodied material used to seal the exposed edges of
a membrane splice. A pre - formed Lap Sealant tool is included in each carton of
Lap Sealant. Available in tubes.
1. Sure -Seal Lap Sealant: Black sealant for use with Sure -Seal (black) ..
Roofing Systems.
H. Water Cut -Off Mastic: A one - component, low viscosity, self wetting, Butyl
blend mastic used as a sealing agent between the EPDM membrane or Aft
Elastoform Flashing and applicable substrates. Available in tubes.
I. Pourable Sealer: A black, two - component, solvent -free, polyurethane based
product used for tie -ins and as a sealant around hard -to -flash membrane 4111"
penetrating objects such as clusters of pipes and for a daily seal when the 40 .
completion of flashings and terminations cannot be completed by the end of each
work day.
J. One -Part Pourable Sealer: Available in black or white, a one - component, 41/14
moisture curing, elastomeric polyether sealant used for attaching lightning rod ,,
bases and ground cable clips to the membrane surface and as a sealant around
hard -to -flash penetrations such as clusters of pipes.
K. Universal Single -Ply Sealant A one -part polyether, non - sagging sealant
designed for sealing expansion joints, control joints and counterflashings.
Available in white only.
AIR
2.05 FASTENERS AND PLATES
To be used for mechanical attachment of insulation and to provide additional membrane
securement: Aka
A. HP- Fasteners: a threaded, #14 fastener with a #3 phillips drive used with steel ,.
and wood roof decks.
B. InsulFast Fasteners: A threaded #12 fastener with #3 phillips drive used for
insulation attachment into steel or wood decks.
07500 -6
sup
F. Provide protection, such as 3/4 inch thick plywood, for all roof areas exposed to
traffic during construction. Plywood must be smooth and free of fasteners and
splinters.
Alb G. The surface on which the insulation or roofing membrane is to be applied shall be
clean, smooth, dry, and free of projections or contaminants that would prevent
proper application of or be incompatible with the new installation, such as fins,
sharp edges, foreign materials, oil and grease.
otok
H. New roofing shall be complete and weathertight at the end of the work day.
I. Contaminants such as grease, fats and oils shall not be allowed to come in direct
41111' contact with the roofing membrane.
obi
1.15 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's 10 year Total System Warranty covering both labor and
• material with no dollar limitation. The maximum wind speed coverage shall be
100 MPH as per Massachusetts State Building Code for the Northampton area.
oh
Certification is required with bid submittal indicating the manufacturer has
reviewed and agreed to such wind coverage.
B. Pro -rated System Warranties shall not be accepted.
C. Evidence of the manufacturer's warranty reserve shall be included as part of the
mak project submittals for the specifier's approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
Ills A. All components of the specified roofing system shall be products of Carlisle
SynTec or accepted by Carlisle SynTec as compatible.
ink
B. Unless otherwise approved by the specifier and accepted by the membrane
manufacturer, all products (including insulation, fasteners, fastening plates and
edgings) must be manufactured and supplied by the roofing system
manufacturer and covered by the warranty.
2.02 MEMBRANE
Furnish Sure -Seal 60 -mil EPDM (Ethylene, Propylene, Diene Terpolymer) in the largest
sheet possible. The membrane shall conform to the minimum physical properties of
ASTM D4637. When a 10 foot wide membrane is to be used, the membrane shall be
manufactured in a single panel with no factory splices to reduce splice intersections.
aw Carlisle EPDM membranes are available with Factory- Applied Tape (FAT).
ink
2.03 INSULATION /UNDERLAYMENT
Alk
A. When applicable, insulation shall be installed in multiple layers. The first and
second layer of insulation shall be mechanically fastened or adhered to the
4111i substrate in accordance with the manufacturer's published specifications.
B. Insulation shall be Carlisle Polyiso HPH, 2.0" thick as supplied by Carlisle
SynTec.
1. Carlisle HP -H Polyiso — A foam core insulation board covered on both
sides with a medium weight fiber - reinforced felt facer meeting ASTM C
1289 -06, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 (20 psi) or Grade 3 (25 psi). The
product is available in 4' x 8' standard size with a thickness from 1 to 4
inches. 4' x 4' tapered panels are also available.
ww
disk 07500 -5
Amik
ARK
The specified roofing assembly must have been successfully tested by a qualified testing *"*
agency to resist the design uplift pressures calculated according to ASCE 7, and meeting .w
Massachusetts State Code for wind load in Northampton Area
B. The membrane must be manufactured by the material supplier. Manufacturer's
supplying membrane made by others are not acceptable. w�
C. The manufacturer must have a minimum of 20 years experience in the
manufacturing of vulcanized thermal set sheeting.
D. Unless otherwise noted in this specification, the roofing contractor must strictly Ask
comply with the manufacturer's current specifications and details.
E. The roofing system must be installed by an applicator authorized and trained by Albs
the manufacturer in compliance with shop drawings as approved by the —
manufacturer. The roofing applicator shall be thoroughly experienced and upon
request be able to provide evidence of having at least five (5) years successful .r
experience installing single -ply EPDM roofing systems and having installed at
..s
least one (1) roofing application or several similar systems of equal or greater
size within one year. 41W
F. Provide adequate number of experienced workmen regularly engaged in this type
of work who are skilled in the application techniques of the materials specified.
Provide at least one thoroughly trained and experienced superintendent on the job
at all times roofing work is in progress.
G. There shall be no deviations made from this specification or the approved shop
drawings without the prior written approval of the specifier. Any deviation from
the manufacturer's installation procedures must be supported by a written
certification on the manufacturer's letterhead and presented for the specifier's
consideration. 400,
H. Upon completion of the installation, the applicator shall arrange for an inspection
to be made by a non -sales technical representative of the membrane manufacturer
in order to determine whether or not corrective work will be required before the or&
warranty will be issued. Notify the building owner seventy -two (72) hours prior
mpg
to the manufacturer's final inspection.
..e
1.14 JOB CONDITIONS, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
Refer to Carlisle's Sure -Seal / Sure -White Roofing System specification for General Job 40,
Site Considerations. ,,,.,,
A. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be on location at all times during the
transportation, storage and application of materials.
B. When positioning membrane sheets, exercise care to locate all field splices away
from low spots and out of drain sumps. All field splices should be shingled to
prevent bucking of water. aft
C. When loading materials onto the roof, the Carlisle Authorized Roofing A
Applicator must comply with the requirements of the building owner to prevent
overloading and possible disturbance to the building structure. '" Ilk
D. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with
the manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit
the work to proceed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and
recommendations. ,,.,
E. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction
traffic. When necessary, new roof sections shall be protected and inspected upon '
completion for possible damage.
Alew
07500 -4 ...
orA
AIR
Agok
oft B. Security:
oft
Obey the owner's requirements for personnel identification, inspection and other
security measures.
w
1.10 JOB SITE PROTECTION
A. The roofing contractor shall adequately protect building, paved areas, service
!'t drives, lawn, shrubs, trees, etc. from damage while performing the required work.
Provide canvas, boards and sheet metal (properly secured) as necessary for
protection and remove protection material at completion. The contractor shall
repair or be responsible for costs to repair all property damaged during the
roofing application.
B. During the roofing contractor's performance of the work, the building owner will
!!+ continue to occupy the existing building. The contractor shall take precautions to
prevent the spread of dust and debris, particularly where such material may sift
oft
into the building. The roofing contractor shall provide labor and materials to
__ construct, maintain and remove necessary temporary enclosures to prevent dust
or debris in the construction area(s) from entering the remainder of the building.
C. Do not overload any portion of the building, either by use of or placement of
equipment, storage of debris, or storage of materials.
+�i► D. Protect against fire and flame spread. Maintain proper and adequate fire
extinguishers.
►, E. Take precautions to prevent drains from clogging during the roofing application.
Remove debris at the completion of each day's work and clean drains, if
required. At completion, test drains to ensure the system is free running and
drains are watertight. Remove strainers and plug drains in areas where work is
in progress. Install flags or other telltales on plugs. Remove plugs each night
oft
and screen drain.
AIR F. Store moisture susceptible materials above ground and protect with waterproof
coverings.
MIA
G. Remove all traces of piled bulk materials and return the job site to its original
condition upon completion of the work.
1.11 SAFETY
The roofing contractor shall be responsible for all means and methods as they relate to
safety and shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal requirements that are
safety related. Safety shall be the responsibility of the roofing contractor. All related
personnel shall be instructed daily to be mindful of the full time requirement to maintain
a safe environment for the facility's occupants including staff, visitors, customers and the
"'' occurrence of the general public on or near the site.
oft
1.12 WORKMANSHIP
A. Applicators installing new roof, flashing and related work shall be factory trained
oft and approved by the manufacturer they are representing.
B. All work shall be of highest quality and in strict accordance with the
awe manufacturer's published specifications and to the building owner's satisfaction.
oft C. There shall be a supervisor on the job site at all times while work is in progress.
''" 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Al► A. The Sure -Seal Roofing System must achieve a UL Class C.
oft
oft 07500 -3
ow
ook
Alit,
2. Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with
proper fire and safety precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before
expiration of their shelf life.
C. Insulation must be on pallets, off the ground and tightly covered with waterproof
materials. Manufacturer's wrap does not provide sufficient waterproofing.
D. Any materials which are found to be damaged shall be removed and replaced at
Apok
the applicator's expense.
1.05 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Schedule and execute work to prevent leaks and excessive traffic on completed ""t
roof sections. Care should be exercised to provide protection for the interior of
the building and to ensure water does not flow beneath any completed sections of
the membrane system.
B. Do not disrupt activities in occupied spaces. Aft
1.06 USE OF THE PREMISES
A. Before beginning work, the roofing contractor must secure approval from the
building owner's representative for the following:
1. Areas permitted for personnel parking. A-
2. Access to the site.
Olt
3. Areas permitted for storage of materials and debris.
4. Areas permitted for the location of cranes, hoists and chutes for loading
and unloading materials to and from the roof.
Aft,
B. Interior stairs or elevators may not be used for removing debris or delivering
materials, except as authorized by the building superintendent.
1044
1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS
If discrepancies are discovered between the existing conditions and those noted on the Aft
drawings, immediately notify the owner's representative by phone and solicit the
a0
manufacturer's approval prior to commencing with the work. Necessary steps shall be
taken to make the building watertight until the discrepancies are resolved.
1.08 PRE - CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ..
A. Prior to bid submittal, the roofing contractor should schedule a job site inspection AO.
to observe actual conditions and verify all dimensions on the roof. The job site
inspection may occur on the day of the pre -bid meeting or prior to such a
meeting. A.
B. Any conditions which are not shown on the shop drawings should be indicated ..R
on a copy of the shop drawing and included with bid submittal if necessary to
clarify any conditions not shown. Alm
1.09 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Building Site: ..b
1. The roofing contractor shall use reasonable care and responsibility to
protect the building and site against damages. The contractor shall be
responsible for the correction of any damage incurred as a result of the
performance of the contract.
2. The roofing contractor shall remove all debris from the job site in a ..»
timely and legally acceptable manner so as to not detract from the -
aesthetics or the functions of the building.
07500 -2 A
Auk
..
a�Aw
SECTION 07500 EPDM FULLY ADHERED ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The project consists of installing Carlisle's Sure -Seal (black) Adhered Roofing
++, System.
B. Apply the Adhered EPDM Roofing System in conjunction with Carlisle Polyiso HPH
w. roof insulation over the prepared Wood roof deck.
oft
1.02 EXTENT OF WORK
o A. Provide all labor, material, tools, equipment, and supervision necessary to complete
the installation of a Sure -Seal 60 -mil EPDM membrane (black) Fully Adhered
Roofing System including flashings and insulation as specified herein and as
indicated on the drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's most current
�w specifications and details.
B. The roofing contractor shall be fully knowledgeable of all requirements of the
01" contract documents and shall make themselves aware of all job site conditions that
will affect their work.
took
C. The roofing contractor shall confirm all given information and advise the building
owner, prior to bid, of any conflicts that will affect their cost proposal.
D. Any contractor who intends to submit a bid using a roofing system other than the
approved manufacturer must submit for pre - qualification in writing fourteen (14)
days prior to the bid date. Any contractor who fails to submit all information as
requested will be subject to rejection. Bids stating "as per plans and specs" will be
unacceptable.
AIR
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to starting work, the roofing contractor must submit the following:
014 1. Shop drawings showing layout, details of construction and identification
of materials.
2. Sample of the manufacturer's Membrane System Warranty.
3. Submit a letter of certification from the manufacturer which certifies the
roofing contractor is authorized to install the manufacturer' s roofing
system and lists foremen who have received training from the
manufacturer along with the dates training was received.
4. Certification of the manufacturer's warranty reserve.
' B. Upon completion of the installed work, submit copies of the manufacturer's final
inspection to the specifier prior to the issuance of the manufacturer's warranty.
_► 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened
containers or wrappings with the manufacturer's name, brand name and
installation instructions intact and legible. Deliver in sufficient quantity to permit
work to continue without interruption.
B. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for proper material storage.
m, 1. Store materials between 60 °F and 80 °F in dry areas protected from water
and direct sunlight. If exposed to lower temperature, restore to 60 °F
minimum temperature before using.
07500 -1
Ask
oft
.R.
3. Mix and Cull Stock: Blend and mix shingles to create a uniform appearance with '"
no noticeable unintended pattern of color variation. Cull out any poor quality
slates.
4. General Requirements: Securely anchor each slate member with at least two '`
nails. Do not drive nails tight. Do not stress slates with nails. Conceal all nails
from view and from exposure to weather, except for highest courses. Cover all
nails with plastic roof cement color matched to slate color. Avoid penetrating
sheet metal fleshing with slate attachment nails. Provide minimum 3" head lap at .w,
back wing ( >6:12 pitch) and 4" head lap at front wing ( <6:12 pitch). Provide
centered side lap. Cut slates with slate cutter to create bevel to match.
5. Changes of Plane and Penetrations: Cut and fit slate accurately and closely.
6. Starter Course: Lay starter course back side up. Provide double course of slates
at eave over a bevel cut pressure treated wood starter strip as detailed on .ru
drawings.
7. Rake Edge: Project slate 1" at gables.
8. Valleys: Provide sheet metal valley flashing in valleys before installing slate.
Form valleys, maintain coursing and alignment through valley. Exposure of Aim
valley flashing to match existing. Cut slates for smooth continuous edge with
bevel.
9. Hips: none on slate roofing sections „ft
10. Ridges with Exposed Sheet Metal Caps: For existing ridges with exposed sheet
metal caps, provide new sheet metal caps fabricate to match appearance of it
existing. Provide continuous concealed flashing under the exposed metal cap.
Lay ridge slates in full bed of concealed roof cement.
J. Final Inspection: Fully inspect completed work during a heavy rain or during heavy
artificial sprinldering. Inspect work form interior of attic and from exterior. Identify
all problems and leaks and make corrections approved by the Owner and Architect.
END OF SECTION 07300 ..►
Aft
All Ilk
ww
All
..R
07300 -4
.w► DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Roofing contractor will be responsible for all staging and any other equipment
necessary. Approved methods will be determined at a preconstruction site meeting.
B. Inspection: The installer shall examine substrates, supports, and conditions under
which this work is to be performed and notify Contractor, in writing, of conditions
w detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work means installer accepts
r substrates and conditions.
C. Remove existing roof System: carefully remove existing roof system. Do not
damage lower parts of building nor permit roof materials to fall uncontrolled to
4111 ground.
1. Salvage: Contractor may retain any rights to the salvage value of all roofing
material removed, except as noted on the drawings for turret and scuppers.
oak 2. Clean substrate: clean substrates of all existing roofing materials, projections,
nails and substances, which could damage new roof system.
`' 3. All roofing and masonry waste will be removed in a lawful manner. When
working near walkways barriers and caution tape will be used to secure areas.
aw Care will be taken to contain debris in work area.
4. Any areas where roofmg is removed will be left watertight at the end of each day.
, Any interior damage will be the responsibility of the roofing contractor.
011t, D. Deck installation: cover 100% of existing decking (rough sawn boards) with new.
E. Coordination: ensure proper sequence and interface of work. Coordinate slate roof
m oo. installation with flashing and sheet metal work to prevent leaks and to create a
ot. completely watertight assembly. Build in sheet metal work as the roofing work
progresses.
F. Ice dam protection: Prime and prepare substrates as recommended by ice dam
protection manufacturer. Install ice dam protection continuously and smoothly
.mik without wrinkles or fish mouths. Shingle layers and rolls to best shed water. Make
at least 3 inch overlaps at horizontal seams, 6 inch overlaps at vertical seams and 12
du* inch overlaps at patches. Locate ice dam protection as follows:
1. Roof Edges: At all eaves and roof edges, provide one layer of ice dam protection
for at least two complete roll widths above roof edge.
014 2. Valleys, Hips and Intersections of Roof Plane: Provide at least one full roll
dok width continuously under all metal valley flashing, completely over all hips, and
throughout each change of roof plane. Center overlaid rosin paper slip sheets ice
dam protection over line of change of plane
w► 3. Crickets: completely cover 100 percent of area with ice dam protection.
mok
G. Underlayment (roofing felts): Securely nail roofing felt underlayment horizontally
over entire area of roof. Shingle and place layers to best shed water. Take special
01 care at corners and changes of plane to ensure that work effectively sheds water.
Make at least 3 inch overlaps at horizontal seams, 6 inch overlaps at vertical seams,
and 12 inch overlaps at patches. Cut underlayment and single patches in to shed
water.
nw H. Rosin Paper Slip Sheet: separate copper flashing from underlayments with a
continuous layer of rosin paper.
I. Slate Shingle Installation (provide the highest quality installation possible):
011 1. Roof slate is NOT to be walked on under any conditions. The roof must be
properly staged with ladders, scaffolds and planks.
2. Layout: provide grid of chalk lines to ensure accurate and straight coursing.
Layout work to match coursing, pattern, and exposure of existing slate.
07300 -3
Aft
ink
Al Ilk
1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store and handle materials in a manner to prevent all damage and deterioration.
Protect materials from all possible damage. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but
minimize on -site storage.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather: Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions ensure
that the work will be performed dry and that substrates and materials will be dry.
B. Substrates: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and penetrating
tk
work is complete. ""
C. Conference: Convene a pre - installation conference to establish procedures to ,.,.
maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and
adjacent work. Coordinate the installation of flashings and sheet metal to create a 4t"
watertight building.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by contractor and roofing subcontractor
agreeing to repair or replace non - performing work for the specified period. Non - Ai*
performing work is defined to be any work which exhibits evidence of failure or
problems, such as, without limitation, water leakage into the building, loose ""'
components, missing components, cracked and damaged components, and other -.
defects and problems.
B. Warranty Period: Contractor will supply a five year (5YR) written warranty (from 40"
date of final completion) on slate and copper work, including annual maintenance to .�
replace any broken or missing slates or other defective work. ...
PART 2 PRODUCTS Aok
2.01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS SUPPLIED HEREIN
A. Sheathing: 5/8" CDX.
B. Roofing Felt: All areas other than flats will be covered with #30 felt paper in a
waterproof manner. ,,wk
C. Ice and Water Shield: All valleys, crickets, and eaves will have ice & water shield
protection. Ice & water protection will be W.R. Grace Ultra. Valleys will receive a
36" width; eaves will receive a double width, and other areas as necessary including ,.w.
copper roofs. ..
D. Rosin Paper: Any flat seam or standing seam copper areas will also have a layer of
rosin paper.
E. Slate: ,,,
1. Color: Weathering Green slate
2. Size: 10 x 18, 12" slate will be provided for miter cuts to minimize sliver pieces
3. Thickness (3/16" — %4 ") ,,.,,
4. Headlap: 3" min. at at new section (pitch >6:12); 4" min at old section (pitch
<6:12) ,.
5. Centered sidelap •�
6. Nails: 1 -1/2" copper roofers
oft
7. Slate hooks: 10 gauge stainless steel.
8. Countersunk nail holes *""k
9. Fire Rating: Class C required „
10. Asphalt cement: red slate cement.
.w.
07300 -2
A
4110. Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection
SECTION 07300 Slate Roofing:
PART I — GENERAL
Aik 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Staging
2. Completely remove all existing roofing, underlayment felts and metal flashing,
w w, including previously covered wood roofing (and any related slatting) at older
wing.
w 3. Completely re- sheath the roof on top of the existing rough sawn board sheathing
eft (both wings).
oft 4. Provide a complete, waterproof slate roofing system
5. Remove and replace of slates at existing and new dormer sidewalls
*" 6. Remove existing skylights, vent turret, etc.
1.02 RELATED WORK
o" A. Carefully examine all the Contract Documents for requirements which affect the
work of this section. Other specifications section that directly relate to the work of
the section include, but are not limited to the following:
fook
1. Section 02072 — Demolition (of non - roofing materials)
w 2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry, deck repairs
3. Section 07200 — Building Insulation
sob
4. Section 07500 - Membrane Roofing
5. Section 07600 - Metal Roofing
imok 6. Section 07620 — Flashing and Sheet Metal
1.03 INTENT
,a, A. The major intent of the work of this Section, in conjunction with Sections 07500,
07600 and 07620 is to provide a complete, new slate and copper roofing system, to
shed water to the exterior and keep the building interior dry.
doh
�w 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A firm which has at least five years experience in work of the type required
by this section and which is acceptable to the Owner.
A ,, B. In -Place Samples: Before beginning primary work of this section, provide typical in-
place samples of each item and type of work at locations acceptable to owner and
__ obtain owner's acceptance of visual qualities.
.w► 1. Size of Sample: 4' x4'
2. Intent of Sample: The intent of the in -place sample is to obtain approval of a
typical installation as early as possible so that problems, if any, can be corrected
— before the problem is repeated.
3. Sample Disposition: Acceptable in -place samples may be incorporated into the
finished work. Protect and maintain acceptable in -place samples throughout the
work of this section to serve as criteria for acceptance of the work
, 4. Reference Standards: Comply with the applicable requirements and
recommendations of the National Roofing Contractors Association Steep
Oft Roofing Manual and the SMACNA 1793 Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,
M, 6th Edition, 2003.
ink
, 07300 -1
Ask
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS AIR
Smith College, Northampton, MA
o 6" of Type C open cell foam �►
AIR
Roof / Third Floor Ceiling at newer wing:
• All ceiling areas to be removed (see Demolition Section).
• Sloped Ceiling Areas: ,."
o Spray to fill cavity with Type A closed cell.
o Do not overspray
o Spray in max. depth lifts as per manufacturers instruction to reduce trapped heat and •Nk.
prevent fire. Am,
• Flat Ceiling Areas over Corridor:
o Flash foam with 3" Type A closed cell spray foam
o Fill Attic Cavity with Type C open cell or Dense - packed cellulose (netted and braced
with furring strips)
Roof at one -story Secretary's Office: do.
• Insulation method TBD based on Contractor's preference and Constructability — Coordinate as
needed with Roofing work if insulating from above.
• Achieve R -60 assembly. ""
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of ,,,
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
C. Commencement of work outlined in this section shall be deemed as acceptance of existing work
and conditions.
Aft
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Apply only when surfaces and environmental conditions are within limits prescribed by the ../
material manufacturer.
C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions. ,.,
3.04 INSTALLATION — POUR -IN-PLACE AND SPRAY FOAMS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions including precautions regardindg heat •+
build -up of thick applications. Apply as recommended by manufacturer. Apply in recommended
lifts resulting in final thickness as indicated on drawings.
B. See Section 3.01 (above) and drawings for application in specific locations
C. Apply thermal barrier except in areas separated from the interior of the building by an approved ,IR
thermal barrier of 1/2 inch (13 mm) gypsum wallboard
3.05 PROTECTION .p .
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07200
07200 -5 .w
Aft
w Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Aft • Insulation method TBD. Goal: R -40 assembly.
• Access sill from Basement (cut at full ceiling perimeter).
• Investigate floor / wall conditions (access form exterior if possible)
• Flash foam with 2" Type A closed cell spray foam
an► • 6" of Type C open cell foam
Existing Walls - Front wing:
' • Type B: Pour in Place open cell
• Access cavity from exterior after siding is removed. Remove sheathing boards as needed (top of
wall, under each window, etc) and drill through brick nogging. Pour insulation from exterior to
Oft
fill cavities. Cavity depth varies throughout front wing.
• Attic gable end and knee walls (see below) to be accessed from interior.
elk
Back wing including side walls of existing shed and large gable dormers:
__ • Type B: Pour in Place open cell;
w o Option: Blown -in, dense packed cellulose
• Access cavity from exterior after siding is removed. Remove sheathing boards as needed (top,
mid - height, and under each window, etc.).
w, • Fish out existing fiberglass baits.
_ • Pour insulation from exterior:
Olk New Walls, Slab and Roof (lift addition):
• Meet IECC 2009 minimum requirements for new construction — prescriptive
w
• Walls (lift and side walls of new dormer): min. R -13 cavity insulation (5.5" Type C open cell or
dense - packed cellulose) plus min. R -3.8 continuous insulation (1.5" polyisocyanurate rigid
insulation
rift • Slab and slab edge: R -15 min. (2 layers EPS high density rigid insulation)
• Roof: R -60 Design goal (R -38 min by code)
o Flash foam with 3" Type A closed cell spray foam
,► o 9" Type C open cell or Dense - packed cellulose to fill cavity
w Floor under Secretary's Office (at small crawl space)
• Insulation method TBD based on Contractor's preference and Constructability.
• Insulate at Floor OR walls of foundation to achieve R -40 assembly.
w Roof / Attic Ceiling at Front (older) wing:
• Insulate from interior: R -60 assembly
o Flash foam with 3" Type A closed cell spray foam
o 9" Type C open cell or dense - packed cellulose (netted and braced with furring strips)
• Attic Floor (front wing): R -40 assembly
01111, o Remove any fiberglass batt insulation. Insulate at porch roof/attic floor to thermally
enclose attic / building:
'ok o Flash foam with 2" Type A closed cell spray foam
,w o 6" of Type C open cell foam or 8" loose Cellulose (dammed at edges to maintain depth
without spilling into adjacent areas)
• Attic gable end and knee walls / attic perimeter: R -40 assembly
o Remove insulation at second floor ceiling as needed and spray foam at attic perimeter per
plan.
o Flash foam with 2" Type A closed cell spray foam
07200 -4
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ...
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1) Application with Blazelok IB4 Intumescent Coating:
a) Up to 9 -1/4 inches (235 mm) on vertical surfaces and 11 -1/4
inches (286 mm) on the underside of the top of the space with all
foam surfaces covered with a minimum nominal thickness of 5 dry Alb
mils (0.13 mm) [9 wet mils (0.23 mm)] of Blazelok IB4.
2) Application with No -Burn Plus XD Intumescent Coating
a) Up to 9 -1/2 inches (241 mm) on vertical surfaces and 11 -1/2 4 . *
inches (292 mm) on the underside of the top of the space with all
foam surfaces covered with a minimum nominal thickness of 6 dry ^�
mils (0.15 mm) [10 wet mils (0.25 mm)] of No-Burn Plus XD.
b. Use on Attic Floors
1) Applied between and over the joists in an attic floor. *■»
a) Up to 14 inches (356 mm)
b) SEALECTION Agribalance may be left exposed without an
intumescent coating in accordance with ASTM E 970. ..R
D. Type D: polyisocyanurate rigid insulation (see membrane roofing section for roof insulation).
E. Type E: Extruded polystyrene, 1.5 lb /cubic foot density .�►
F. Optional: dense - packed and loose filled cellulose as alternative as noted below.
2.03 CELLULOSE INSULATION ink
A. Cellulose may be used as a substitute for open cell foam in the locations as indicated on
drawings and section 3.01 below.
B. Cel -Pak Class 1 Cellulose Insulation by National Fiber
1. Low settled density provides superior coverage, .wk
2. R -3.8 per inch
3. Flame retardant 4.^
4. No formaldehyde, asbestos or glass fibers •�►
5. Recycled content
C. Dense - Packed Cellulose shall be blown to minimum 3.2 pcf behind Polypropylene Fiber Mesh 000.
( "Insul -Web" or equal). Cloth shall be secured to studs and plates with staples and glue.
D. Loose — filled Cellulose shall be blown to depths listed, and dammed at edges as needed.
2.04 RIGID BOARD INSULATION
A. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS)1.5 lb /ft# density (Type IX): 2 layers, 1" staggered seams
B. Polyisocyanurate: 1"
eat
2.05 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS AIM
A. Water Based Fire Protection Products: BLAZELOK TB 200 with BLAZELOK TB 200 Primer,
Distributed by DEMILEC (USA) LLC, Manufactured by TPR2. .rR
B. Application: Install primer first, then intumescent coating. Follow manufacturer's application .w
recommendations.
PART 3 EXECUTION "'°
3.01 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION BY LOCATION
Foundation:
• Flash foam top of wall (brick area) with 3" Type A closed cell foam or equal with TB200
BlazeLok intumescent paint. ..
• See Alternates for full height installation of same. ..
• Seal all penetrations in basement exterior walls.
,.a
07200 -3
Aft
411k Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
w Smith College, Northampton, MA
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered in manufacturer's original containers clearly labelled with
gook
manufacturer's name, product identification, safety information, net weight of contents and
expiration date.
apto, B. Material shall be stored in a safe manner and where the temperatures are in the limits specified
by the material manufacturer.
C. Empty containers shall be removed from site on a daily basis.
_ D. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in
accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
Alok
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.
B. Ventilate area to receive insulation to maintain safe working conditions.
C. Protect workers as recommended by standards and manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Protect adjacent surfaces, windows, equipment and site areas from damage of overspray.
1.07 WARRANTY
#ft A. Manufacturer's Warranty: DEMILEC (USA) LLC warrants spray -in -place urethane foam
toik insulation, when installed by certified contractors using factory- trained applicators and applied
in accordance to the Product Specification, will perform as stated in the Product Technical Data
Sheet.
B. This warranty is in effect throughout the life of the building provided the original purchaser
registers with the Warranty Department of the Manufacturer within thirty days of occupancy.
C. Manufacturer's sole responsibility under this Limited Lifetime Warranty shall be to repair or
`""' replace any defective Product at the cost of the material only.
D. Manufacturer shall not be responsible for labor cost or any other costs whatsoever related to, or
in connection with the removal or installation of either the original or replacement product.
ark
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: DEMILEC (USA) LLC, which is located at: 2925 Galleria Dr, ;
Arlington, TX 76011; Toll Free Tel: 877 - DEMILEC; Tel: 817 -640 -4900; Email:
jonbeggerly @demilecusa.com; Web: www.demilecusa.com
A B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
aith
2.02 SPRAY FOAM INSULATION
tow A. Type A: Demilec HeatLok Soy 200 closed cell foam or equal (2.21b density, aged R -value of
7.4 per inch, blowing agent 245fa, GWP 1,020 per inch). BlazeLok TB200 and TB200 primer
Oft
intumescent paint in locations as indicated below and in accordance with ESR 3210.
o Option: BioBased 1701 spray foam (R -5.5, water blown) — Test installation on clean, dry,
warm substrate
B. Type B: Sealection 500 Pour in Place (PIP) open cell (.05 lb density, aged R -value 3.43 per
inch, water blown). Install in lifts as recommended by manufacturer. Install with thermal
imagery and provide illustrated report of each wall section.
C. Type C: Demilec Agribalance open cell foam (.08 lb density, aged R -value 4.45 per inch, water
blown) with intumescent paint coatints in accordance with ESR 2600.
a. Attics and Crawl Spaces:
07200 -2
sow
Ass
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ...
Smith College, Northampton, MA
.s
SECTION 07200 Building Insulation
PART 1 GENERAL •
1.01 WORK INCLUDES
A. Polyurethane foam insulation in assemblies indicated on the Drawings, to provide an air barrier
and improved thermal resistance. ..e
B. Spray -in -place semi -rigid open -cell polyurethane foam
ows
C. Spray -in -place rigid closed -cell polyurethane foam
D. Pour -in -Place open -cell polyurethane foam
E. Dense Pack and Loose filled Cellulose insulation as an Option
F. Rigid Insulation Board
o
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 01100 Alternates: basement full wall insulation
B. Section 02050 Demolition, w.
C. Section 03300 Concrete: for supply and installation of rigid insulation under concrete slab sow
D. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry for installation of exterior rigid insulation at new walls
soss
E. Section 07180 Vapor and Air Barriers
F. Section 07500 Membrane Roofing: insulation supplied and installed under roofing section. ''w
G. Section 07600 Metal roofing (for insulation of roof over Secretary's Office)
H. Section 09200 Gypsum Board
1.03 REFERENCES IOW
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
B. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by sow
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. Ass
C. ASTM D 1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
sok
D. ASTM D 1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
E. ASTM D 1623 - Standard Test Method for Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid
Cellular Plastics. sow
F. ASTM D 2856 - Standard Test Method for Open -Cell Content of Rigid Cellular Plastics by the
Air Pycnometer. '"'
G. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. ,
H. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
sok
I. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. sew
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: ,.w
B. Contractor performing work under this section shall be trained by DEMILEC (USA) LLC in the ,
art of applying spray polyurethane foam insulation.
C. Provide current DEMILEC (USA) LLC Authorized Contractor Certification.
D. Provide lnSeal Right Quality Assurance Program Certificate of Compliance sos
E. Mock -Up: Provide a mock -up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application
workmanship.
F. Finish areas designated by Architect. ,o.
G. Do not proceed with remaining work until installation is approved by Architect. ..
H. Rework mock -up area as required to produce acceptable work.
sow
Alb
07200 -1
aft Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
took Smith College, Northampton, MA
dmh 1. TYPAR® Weather- Protection Membrane by FiberwebTM.
oo
2. Contact Information: 800 - 284 -2780
D. Manufacturer's Warranty:
w 1. Lifetime limited product warranty (for single - family residential applications) plus an
incredible 10 -year warranty on labor and materials (restrictions apply, see warranty for
details).
aft
2.02 SEALING TAPE/FASTENERS
A. Approved Tape Manufacturers
1. TYPAR Construction Tape, by FiberwebTM
w. B. Recommended Sealants against TYPAR logo side coating.
1. Elastomeric polymer based, butyl rubber, rubber based, meeting ASTM C920 evaluation.
C. Recommended Fasteners for Wood, Insulated Sheathing Board, Exterior Gypsum
1. Plastic cap nails.
�.w 2. Plastic cap staples.
D. Recommended Fasteners for Steel Frame construction
- 1. Rust - resistant screws with washers.
E. Recommended Fastening to Masonry
1. Sealant: Polyurethane based, meeting ASTM C920 evaluation.
"""' 2. Mechanical: Masonry fastener with washer.
2.03 POLYETHYLENE SHEET BARRIER
A. 6 mil. polyethylene vapor barrier installed under new concrete floor slap and over dirt floor in
*► crawl space.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
— A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instruction over exterior sheathing or open studs. Seal
joints and penetrations through weather resistive barrier with specified tape and fasteners prior
to installation of finish material.
B. Air infiltration barrier shall be air tight and free from holes, tears, and punctures.
C. All window and door penetrations are to be flashed and sealed per ASTM 2112, ANIMA
Aft
guidelines and manufacturer instructions.
D. Cover with exterior cladding within 6 months of installation.
END OF SECTION 07180
s�►
+w►
07180 -2
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 07180 Vapor and Air Barriers
PART 1— GENERAL
th
1.01 SUMMARY Ar
A. Furnish and install weather resistive barriers on exterior side of exterior wall sheathing as •�►
described in Contract Documents.
1. Existing Walls: Building Wrap sealed at all edges to the existing wood trim.
2. New walls at lift: Tape and seal sheathing as air barrier prior to installation of Building 4110k
Wrap. ,.w,
B. Blower Door Testing
IW
C. Vapor Barrier (under slab and at crawl space) '
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E- 1677 -95 "Standard Specification for an Air Retarder (AR) Material or System for
Low -Rise Framed Building Walls ". .�
B. ASTM E -96 -90 "Standard Test Method for Water Transmission of Materials ".
C. AATCC -127 "Hydrostatic Head Test ".
D. ASTM D- 5733 -9 Trapezoidal Test.
E. Air -Ins ASTM E -283 Canadian Air Barrier Materials Standard. ,,—,
F. ASTM D -779 Dry Indicator Method, Water Penetration Resistance.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section
01300.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage plane be continuous and shed water to the exterior at all seams and laps.
B. Blower door and fog testing to be conducted after completion of air barrier, insulation, window ..�
and ERV installation (prior to residing and new ceilings). Goal: 75% reduction from current
test resulting in 3.0 ACH at 50 pa OR 6,502 CFM 50 pa. Architect recommends testing of single
room after windows installed. 44,
C. Note: January 2012 blower door test was 26,000 CFM extrapolated to 50 Pa of pressure using ,,,,
two blower door fans. This calculated to 11.7 ACH per Hour (based on approximate 130,044
Cubic Feet building volume. .�
D. Submit copies of test results showing performance characteristics equaling or exceeding those
specified.
PART 2— PRODUCTS 41101,
2.01 WATER- RESISTANT BARRIER
A. Spunbonded Polypropylene Weather Membrane with a microporous coating, Non - woven,
Nonperforated. "'
B. Performance Characteristics ,,,
1. Gurley Hill [TAPPI T -460] [sec /100cc] >2500.
2. Water Vapor Transmission 9 -15 perms as tested by ASTM E- 96 -90, Method A. ._
3. Water penetration resistance of 865 cm on hydrostatic head in accordance with AATCC- As
127.
Aft
4. Trapezoidal Test of 30/33 in accordance with ASTM D- 5733 -9.
5. Air -Ins < .02L/S-M2 @ 75 PA. .,l►
6. Dry Indicator Method ASTM D -779 = to 24 hour rating.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
07180 -1 �..
..m
1w
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
ook 3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive damp - proofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, and honeycomb in substrate.
3.03 APPLICATION / DAMP - PROOFING
A. Airless spray application as recommended by manufacturer.
ink B. Apply continuous and uniform at a rate of 25 sq. ft/gallon.
C. Apply from 2 inches below finish grade elevation to top of footings.
D. Seal watertight items projecting through damp - proofing surface with mastic.
Oft
END OF SECTION 07100
At
dik
elk
Oft
4"
Alek
Oft
Ili
Oak
41111
07100 -2
lok
ANirk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS .11.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
A
Division 7: Thermal and Moisture Protection
SECTION 07100: Damproofing
Oft
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDES Ask
A. Spray applied bituminous coating on all below grade foundation surfaces down to and over ..1k
footing at all areas, surrounding or beneath habitable spaces.
1.02 RELATED WORK: **
A. Section 02200: Earthwork.
B. Section 03000: Cast -in -place Concrete Work. .imk
C. Section 04100: Masonry. "k
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D449 - Asphalt Used in Damp - proofing and Water - proofmg.
B. ANSI/ASTM D450 - Coal -tar Bitumen Used in Roofing, Damp - proofmg, and Water - proofing. 4114
C. ANSI/ASTM D491 - Asphalt Mastic Used in Water - proofing.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE •
A. Applicator: Applicator must have 3 years minimum experience.
1.05 SUBMITTALS w.►
A. Submit product data and manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section
Aft
01300.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 41111,
A. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before
application, and continuously until damp - proofing has cured. o'
Aft
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cold Asphalt Water - proofing: polymer modified asphalt compound, recommended for dry ..IX
below -grade exterior applications, compounded to penetrate substrate and build to moisture -
resistant, vapor = resistant, firm elastic coating. Provide non - fibrated type liquid, except where ""
otherwise indicated; FS SS -A -694 or FS SS -A -701, depending upon viscosity required.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Watchdog 113 BY Tremco, Application 2 coats, No Insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify surfaces are solid, free of frozen matter, loose particles, cracks, pits, rough projections, 41'
and foreign matter detrimental to adhesion and application of damp- proofing. *�►
B. Do not apply damp - proofing to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty, or deck surfaces unacceptable to 4w
applicator.
C. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive damp - proofing are securely installed.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 4w
Aft
07100 -1 '
ink
dik
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
41111
4111 D. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 3/8 inch matching veneer edging. Use
full length pieces only.
E. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid wood, 3/4 inch thick, paint grade.
416, F. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
aft
G. Base Cabinets: Constructed with a full horizontal frame, including front, back and
side rails , and front and back intermediate rails made of solid hardwood.
Oft H. Mechanically fasten splash backs to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on
center.
416, I. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other
Aft fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal
contact surfaces of cut edges.
4111
J. Accessories: standard trash bins for pull out drawers
auk K. Secure signage provided under Section 10400.
ft L. Finish: All fabricated casework to be pre-finished with one (1) coat primer and two
o ,
(2) finish coats, white.
2.07 FINISHES:
A. All fabricated casework to be pre-finished with one (1) coat primer and two (2)
finish coats, white.
B. Refer to Section 09900 for site finished work
Oft PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
4111114
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
aft
4esk 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure casework in place rigid, plumb, and level.
B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments for wall mounted components.
C. Use threaded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet
units, counter tops, and shelving.
D. Permanently fix cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and
doh anchorages.
E. Carefully scribe casework which abuts other building materials, leaving gaps of
1/32 inch maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
oft F. Counter-sink anchorage devices at exposed locations used to wall mount
components, and conceal with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood.
Finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures and other moving or operating parts to
dmk.
function smoothly and correctly.
ook B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures.
aft
END OF SECTION 06400
doh
Aik
06400-3
411
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS 4111.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
PART 2 PRODUCTS dik
2.01 CUSTOM CASEWORK WOOD MATERIALS
A. Softwood Lumber: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI; veneer core; cabinet
grade.
B. Hardwood Lumber FS MM -L -736; graded in accordance with AWI; maximum
moisture content of 7 percent; white maple or birch, AWI Grade H, free of defects.
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS 41
A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI; veneer core; cabinet
grade.
B. Hardwood Plywood: cross banded, solid core, plain sliced hardwood birch or Ask
maple, grade A -2. 3/4" thickness shall be 7 ply; 1/2" shall be 5 ply; and 1/4 ", 3 ply 41,®
minimum. Fibered core allowed at large doors subject to warping only (7,24"
wide).
C. Tempered hardboard: steam- exposed wood fibers, natural resin binder, 65 lb. /cu.ft.
min. density; 4000 to 4500 lbs. /sq. in. tensile strength.
D. Homasote: Half inch ( %2 ") thick painted. Provide fire rated homasote for hallways. ""
2.03 COUNTER TOPS:
Ara
A. Solid surface (Corian or equal), Cut for recycling options and sink installations.
B. Backsplash at sinks ..k
C. Color selected from standard options.
2.04 ACCESSORIES ..
A. Adhesive: FS MINIM-A-130. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit
application.
B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. ""b
C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application;
natural finish in concealed locations and bronze finish in exposed locations.
2.05 CUSTOM MILLWORK HARDWARE 41w
A. Shelf Standards: equal to Knape & Vogt, #255 AL, recessed.
B. Shelf Supports: equal to Knape & Vogt, #256 or #229.
C. Drawer and Door Pulls: stainless steel wire pulls, ADA compliant. 4141
D. Drawer slides: heavy -duty, 75 ib. capacity, zinc - plated steel, with ball - bearing
nylon wheels and automatic positive stops.
E. Locks: 5 disc tumbler mechanisms. Tumblers and keys shall be brass; plug and
cylinder to be zinc allow with chrome plated face. All locks to be master - keyed; 1111
furnish two (2) keys per lock. Required as noted on drawings.
F. Hinges: 0.083" thick stainless steel with No. 91 satin finish, 5 knuckle, semi-
concealed
type with off -set wings, attached with 6 screws equal to Stanley 1592. ..►
G. Magnetic catches: aluminum or zinc - plated, with 10 lbs. of pull.
H. Friction catches: positive action type with spring cushioned, polyethylene roller
engaging a metal strike plate.
AiNk
2.06 CUSTOM MILLWORK FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings.
B. Cases: plywood (not particle board).
C. Open shelving and cases: pine veneer plywood, edge banded, with 1/4" plywood
backing. •
AMR
06400 -2
Allbe
.11n
iw Kraus Fitch Architects DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 06400: ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
•
PART 1 GENERAL
too 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Specially fabricated casework: Base and Wall cabinets (opened and closed) and
Mail boxes.
B. Countertops.
C. Cabinet hardware.
oak
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry: Grounds and support framing.
,ft B. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry.
C. Section 09900: Painting.
D. Section 10400: Identifying Devices: signage for mail slots and recycling cabinets
E. Section 15000: Mechanical
F. Section 15400: Plumbing.
oft
G. Section 16000: Electrical
1.03 REFERENCES
A. FS MM -L -736 - Lumber, Hardwood.
. B. FS MMM -A -130 - Adhesive, Contact.
C. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
D. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
•► E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
464 F. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
G. PS 58 - Basic Hardboard.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work to custom quality in accordance with custom "Quality Standards" of
"pk the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
B. Fabricators shall have a minimum of five years of experience in the manufacture of
0111 casework.
-s► 1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Section
01300.
B. Shop drawings shall include materials, component profiles, fastening methods,
„ assembly methods, joint details, schedule of fmishes, and hardware.
C. Submit two samples 4 x 12 inches in size illustrating finishes, colors, trim for each
type casework or plastic laminate.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
4116. A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Casework to be installed after heating and ventilating systems are operational,
maintaining building in temperature above 60 degrees F (and below 80), with
relatively constant humidity conditions approximating those to be maintained by
Owner.
_, 06400 -1
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
B. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09900.
3.09 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. .®
B. Adjust operating sash, doors, and hardware to provide smooth operation with tight, —
weatherproof closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
C. Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi - exposed surfaces. #
D. Clean glass of window units promptly after installation. Institute protection ,,.,
required through remainder of construction period, to ensure that window units will
not be damaged or deteriorate, other than normal weathering through Substantial '"
Completion. .w.
E. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.
A.
END OF SECTION 06200 ..
Ale
ealk
.w.
Alb
06200 -6
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
dw PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
oikk
A. Verify that surfaces and openings are ready to receive work and field
"h measurements are as shown on shop drawings.
B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this Section are
"g"' placed and ready to receive this work.
oft D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
osk A. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact
with cementitious materials.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom quality standard.
B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C. Cover exposed edges of plywood shelving site made casework with hardwood
edging. Width of edging to match thickness of shelving.
D. Install hardware supplied by Section 08700 in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.04 FRAMING, FURRING, AND STRIPPING
" A. Erect wood framing, furring, stripping and nailing members true to lines and
levels. Do not deviate from true alignment more than 1/4 inch.
B. Space members at 16 inches on center, or as shown on 111111 C. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.
D. Coordinate installation of other trades.
3.05 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
_w A. Verify dimensions before proceeding and obtain measurements at site for Work
required to be accurately fitted to other construction.
B. Coordinate Work with other trades affected by this installation.
aft C. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions before
®,. installing.
D. Back prime lumber for painted finish exposed on exterior.
ask
aft 3.06 DOOR INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of
manufactured units.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash.
Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
C. See Section 08600, Part 3 for additional installation requirements.
Alb
a. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TOLERANCES.
A. The following standards shall apply:
1.Plumb and level: 1/8 in. in 8 ft.
2.Offset in surface alignment: Max. 1/16 in.
3.Offset in revealed adjoining surfaces: max. 1/8 in.
3.08 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand
work smooth.
Aft
06200 -5
4116 .
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ,,,,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.06 CHASE WALLS
A. Offices and Corridors: MDO panels, taped, and covered with VWC or painted.
,w.
New base board to match.
B. Conference Room — Gyp. Bd., match wainscot and other finishes ..
C. Within Closets — MDO panels - construct for "protection" of ducts, unfinished
2.07 COMPOSITE FENCING —
A. MANUFACTURERS: TimberTech, 894 Prairie Avenue, Wilmington, Ohio
45177, or equal.
B. Wood/Plastic Composite Lumber: Composite fence boards consisting of high "
density polyethylene (HDPE) and wood flour, extruded into sizes and shapes
indicated with the following physical properties:
Aik
C. Steel Reinforced Rail: 1- 9/16 "x3"
D. Fence Board: Square Cut. 1/2" x 5 -1/2 ", Length- 6' ...
E. Post Cover- 4 -1/4" x 4 -1/4" x 7' . Must be used with a solid pressure treated 4" x
4 ", a steel post, or other code approved post option (supplied by others) inserted
into the Post Cover
F. Post Cap
G. Rail Bracket: #8 x 1 -1/4" stainless steel, color matched screws for use with Rail
Bracket dm.
H. Miscellaneous fasteners supplied by others ,,,,
1. Install according to manufacturer's instructions.
2.08 ADHESIVES
A. Contact Adhesives: FS MMM -A -130; water base type.
B. Wall Adhesive: Solvent release, cartridge type, compatible with wall substrate, ..
capable of achieving durable bond. *"
2.09 ACCESSORIES
A. Wood Filler: Oil base, tinted to match surface finish color.
B. Louvers: Supplied under Section 10200. ,,,,,
2.10 WOOD TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Fire Retardant 'FR -S' Type: Chemically treated, capable of providing a Class I
flame /fuel/smoke rating.
B. Wood Preservative ('PT' Type): clear color. Ask
2.11 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS
A. Shop pressure treat or brush apply wood materials requiring UL fire rating. 41"
B. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material. ..
C. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field
cutting.
D. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum percent moisture content. �**
2.12 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate to AWI Custom standards.
B. Shop prepare and identify components for grain matching during site erection. ,ft
Allk
Alk
06200 -4
0
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
C. Exterior trim at Existing walls: Investigate all sills, replace all rotten window sills
or fill with epoxy as per recommendations from General Contractor: match
n existing, cedar. Replace 100% watertables, match existing, cedar. All field cuts to
be primed by carpenter before installation.
D. New lift addition and shed dormer: Cedar, Match profiles of existing fascia, eave
soffit, rake soffit, casings, sills, corner boards, frieze boards, water table, etc.
ok E. Interior trim: clear, plain sawn pine
F. New Baseboards: match adjacent where applicable. second floor back corridor to
Okt
have new lx with lf round at top (height to match existing, approximately 8")
G. Crown moulding: ha match existing where applicable. New areas — not applicable
H. New door casings and trim at new cased openings: 1x5 beaded flat stock with back
band to match existing at back wing doors.
I. New chair rails 3 /4 x 3, painted:
011 J. Handrails: wall mounted, wood handrail (Brosco 6040 or equal), metal wall rail
brackets (finish TBD), firmly secured to existing wood studs.
kok
K. Nails: 8p decking style SS nails or, size and type to suit application.
L. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application;
01, galvanized fmish.
M. Hardwood Lumber FSMM -L -736 graded in accordance with AWI: maximum
moisture content of 7 percent."
ink
2.03 SHEET MATERIALS
ink A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; Standard Sheathing Grade, Group 1, Appearance
Quality.
B. Medium Density Overlay Plywood: Grade I, for paint finish at chase walls
kook C. Bitch Veneer Plywood: P551, Graded in accordance with AWI; veneer core
material. Finish veneer birch, rotary cut..
D. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; pressed wood fiber with resin binder; tempered grade.
2.04 WOOD SHELVING - OFFICES
A. Reinstalled existing adjustable shelving (removed and stored as part of general
' contract): modify as needed to accommodate new mechanical systems and chases.
Relocate some shelving and standards as indicated on the drawings.
B. Repaired built in book shelving (one location): utilize similar materials.
C. New shelving
eIIIA 1. %" Paint grade birch veneer plywood (edge banded) .
ink 2. 6 shelves per section.
3. Shelf Standards and brackets: anodized aluminum, heavy duty, size to match
ink existing installations, as manufactured by Knape & Voigt, or equal; 82 series
(8' lengths, or to match other office installations) with 182 brackets and 2
bookends (per shelf), color: white. IN quantities and locations per maximum
recommended spans of shelving.
w. 4. Refer to Section 09900 for finishing.
2.05 CLOSET SHELF SYSTEMS
ion A. Ventilated, vinyl- coated, steel rod shelving, 12 in., 16 in., or 20 in. deep.
B. Color: White.
ink
C. Provide anchors, end brackets, support brackets, and joiners required to mount
kon shelf.
D. Acceptable Manufacturer: Clairson Industries Model Closet Maid.
06200 -3
ink
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Ask
Smith College, Northampton, MA
E. NFPA - National Design Specification for Wood Construction.
F. ANSUHPHA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
G. AWI - Quality Standards.
H. FS MM -L -736 - Lumber; Hardwood.
I. FS MMM -A -130 - Adhesive, Contact. aft
J. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Carpentry Lumber: Visible grade stamp, of agency certified by National Forest
Products Association (NFPA). 406
B. When applicable, fabricate cabinetwork and site made finish carpentry items in
accordance with recommendations of Quality Standards of Architectural
Woodwork Institute (AWI).
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to Mass. State Building code for fire retardant requirements.
B. Conform to UL requirements to achieve fire resistance assembly rating indicated.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating materials, component profiles, fastening methods, Am,
jointing details, finishes, and accessories.
C. Submit product data on fire retardant treatment materials and application
instructions. orot
D. Submit two samples 12 inches long of wood trim.
E. Submit fabricator's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver shop fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to ..
receive the work. Protect items from weather while in transit. .p►
B. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with a constant, minimum temperature of 60 __
degrees F, maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with established Grading rules; maximum ,.,,
moisture content of 19 percent; of the species and grades specified under Section
06100, Rough Carpentry. ""
B. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity .k
locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to
suit application.
C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Medium carbon steel; galvanized for
exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other �.
interior locations.
D. Fasteners: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield
and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or power -
activated type for anchorage to steel.
2.02 FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS ,—
A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with the requirements of AWI.
B. Hardwood Lumber: FS MM -L -736; graded in accordance with AWI
06200 -2
.lick
4w
w DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
"' PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. All labor to bring project to complete finish or as necessary including exterior trim
ilk
(new and repairs), installation of mechanical vents (in existing and enlarged
masonry openings and existing frame walls), baseboards, casing, sills, aprons,
built -ins, handrails, wall caps, mantels, cabinets, vanities, counters, vanity tops,
interior doors, door hardware, stops, bath accessories, shelving, and wainscot.
otk Include installation of underlayments .
ink B. Follow Lead paint safety practices and disposal requirements.
C. Replace (or cut and repair) rotten window sills (approximately 20).
D. Replace all wood wall caps and replace rotten column bases at ramp entrance with
w composite material
E. 100% replacement of water table
F. Replace trash screen and posts with composite materials.
ma► G. Patch and match existing finishes at door and new partition installations.
H. New enclosures for HVAC work: shafts, soffits, etc.
I. New handrails at third floor stair
oft J. New chair rails 3 /4 x 3, painted:
,_ K. Closet and Office Shelving
L. New Tack boards
M. Vertical ERV and pipe chases:
WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 06400 Architectural Woodwork
B. Section 08200: Wood Doors.
Auk C. Section 12200 Misc. Furnishings — tack boards, blinds
D. Section 10520 Fire Extinguishers
""w E. Section 15000: Mechanical - Louvers and Vents.
ktlik 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 01030: Bid Alternates: replace exterior band trim at all exterior window
casings.
B. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
C. Section 07300: Slate Roofing
D. Section 08600: Wood Windows provided and installed by 08600.
E. Section 08700: Hardware.
F. Section 09200: Blue Board and Plaster Patching
G. Section 09900: Painting.
H. Section 10160: Plastic Partitions at new custodial areas
Alts, I. Section 15500: Heating & Ventilating.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. MIL -L- 1914 -C Lumber and Plywood, Fire Retardant Treated
B. MIL- V- 13518C(1) Wood Preservative: Tetrachlorophenol and Pentachlorophenol,
Surface Sealing Compound
C. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood
4 D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard
w_ 06200 -1
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ,.r.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.06 SIDING ollek
A. Installer shall have five (5) years' experience installing cedar trim on the type and
size of project specified by this section. Installer shall be licensed, registered or
otherwise approved by the local jurisdiction to install Cedar Siding.
B. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been ..,
received.
C. Store materials in safe area, away from construction traffic; store under cover and
off ground, protected from moisture. ..
D. Keep materials clearly separated and identified with grade marks legible. Keep
damaged material identified as damaged and stored separately. Maintain
environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under ,1116
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
E. Coordinate work with related trades; scribe and cope siding boards for accurate fit.
Allow installation of related work to avoid cutting and patching.
F. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that site conditions are acceptable for
installation of siding, including installation of rainscreen, housewrap and rigid ..
insulation (at new lift walls). Do not proceed with installation of siding until
unacceptable conditions are corrected.
G. Select siding boards of longest possible lengths. Discard boards that are warped,
twisted, bowed, crooked or otherwise defective. *"'
H. Follow installation instructions specified in the Western Red Cedar Lumber
Association's Installing Cedar Siding publication and DVD.
I. Installation must comply with local building codes and regulations.
J. Finish materials on all sides and ends. Apply touch up coating on new cuts.
K. As work proceeds, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials, and debris related to this work.
L. Visually inspect siding, caulking, flashing annually for overall condition. Re -apply ..
caulking and coating as necessary. Adjust flashing as required.
Ask
M. The use of pressure washers is not recommended.
Alk
3.07 PLYWOOD SHEATHING AND SUBFLOORING
4144
A. Install plywood in accordance with applicable recommendations in APA
Residential & Commercial Design/Construction Guide, including joint dimensions
at panel ends and edges, and spacing and type of nails or screws.
B. Install panels with the face grain perpendicular to the framing members. Center
joints over supports with end joints staggered to achieve a minimum of joint
continuity. Nail or screw 6" on centers at panels edges and 8" on centers at .�
intermediate supports. Install H -clips between unsupported edges of roof sheathing
panels.
C. Apply exterior and interior plywood sheathing with long dimension horizontal.
Nail in accordance with BOCA.
D. Maintain free of accumulated sawdust, cut ends and debris.
3.08 WOOD FLOORING
A. Inspect and repair existing subfloor as needed
B. Install (nailed application) floor boards according to industry standards
C. Match height of adjacent materials, utilizing a wood transition strip between floor ..
areas as need. ..
D. Finish per Section 09550.
END OF SECTION 06100
06100 -8 400„
4111 Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Alb
41111.
3.05 APPLICATION OF RIGID INSULATION AND FURRING STRIPS— LIFT WALLS
A. Rigid insulations
1. Treated wood insulation stops, the same thickness as the insulation, shall be
414. mechanically fastened at edges of rigid insulation board
2. Apply Rigid Insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Tape all seams.
osk 3. Protection: Installed insulation shall not be left exposed to the weather; it shall
be covered and waterproofed at once.
B. Apply Housewrap in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and Section
07180.
C. Secure 1x3 furring channels
1. Utilize Head Lock Fasten Master Screws calculated to penetrate a minimum of
Aft 2" into the wood framing.
ollok 2. Using a high torque 1 /2" drill, drive the HeadLok through the center of the
furring strip and into the insulation and wall framing.
aft 3. Fastener should be aligned so that the point engages the center of the wall stud
and at a minimum distance of 3" from the end of the stud of furring material.
4. Space fasteners as noted on drawings and install per manufacturer's
aft
instructions and FastenMaster Technical Evaluation Report No. 1009-01,
updated June 15, 2011..
011 5. Fasteners must be installed in a manner to avoid over-driving yet snug enough
4
to remove any gaps between the layers of materials being fastened.
ook 3.06 RAINSCREEN
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that site conditions are acceptable for
Ash installation of rainscreen, including installation of rigid insulation (at new lift
ook walls). Do not proceed with installation of rainscreen until unacceptable conditions
are corrected.
41.0
B. Install sidewall plywood sheathing material over framing.
40.4 C. Apply Housewrap in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and Section
07180.
411■0
D. Install rainscreen by butting against window and door trim.
E. Wherever siding or cladding will be applied, roll out rainscreen with channels
aft running vertically. Cover entire wall surface wherever siding materials will be
installed.
41111 F. Do not stretch rainscreen.
G. Install rainscreen so that it lies flat against the wall.
H. Butt edges of new rolls or new courses together. Do not overlap layers of
auk
rainscreen.
I. Nail or staple rainscreen every 3 square feet.
J. Install siding or cladding system over wall surface in compliance with
manufacturer's installation instructions
AIM K. Install siding even with trim.
L. To prevent insect infiltration along bottom edge of siding, attach a 6 inch (152 mm)
41111
wide piece of screen material (1/8 inch [3.2 mm] maximum hole size) continuously
along the wall, 3 inches (76 mm) above bottom edge of rainscreen. Fold up onto
outer surface of installed rainscreen and fasten with a large head nail to hold in
place prior to applying siding or cladding.
dok
06100-7
416
dik
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS .....
Smith College, Northampton, MA
members to minimize the effects of camber. Place knots on the top of joists, rafters,
and beams. Discard defective pieces. ,
B. Even if installed and fastened, lumber will be rejected for excessive warp, bow,
crook, mildew or other fungus, knots and defects in improper locations, as well as ''"'
for improper cutting, notching, and fitting.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Joints shall be true and properly aligned to produce a flush finish surface. Bearing ..
surfaces shall meet. Joints of multiple pieces in sills and plates shall be staggered.
Do not notch rafters, joists or beams except as shown on the drawings or approved
in writing by the Architect.
B. Provide furring, nailers, and blocking as required to support wall- mounted or , w1e
ceiling- mounted equipment, trim, flashing, etc., even if not specifically shown on
the drawings.
C. Roof blocking and nailers:
1. Comply with applicable recommendations of FM 1-49 for attaching roof
blocking. Secure to structural steel members as specified, and as m.
recommended by 1-49.
2. Blocking used in conjunction with rigid insulation shall equal exact
thickness of the insulation. Blocking may consist of two pieces of wood, '
with the bottom piece bolted or screwed in place and the top piece nailed
to the bottom.
D. Rafters and joints shall be bridged at intervals not to exceed 8 ft. Block between
joints and rafters at all points.
3.04 ANCHORAGE AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Secure rough carpentry elements to masonry, concrete, and other elements with the
nails, bolts, anchor bolts, and other devices as indicated on the drawings and as
appropriate to provide adequate resistance to the forces on them. Countersink
attachments flush with face of nailers where another material is to be applied to that ...
face. ,►
B. Nailing shall comply with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Building Code
nailing schedule and other requirements unless noted otherwise. Minimum
penetration of nails into substrate shall be 1 inch. Replace members split by nailing.
C. Anchor bolts shall be cast into concrete foundations and grouted masonry to 44.
provide anchorage for plates and sills thereon. Anchor bolts shall be located near
the ends of each length, near the edges of each opening in the wall within 4 ft of the '"'
foundation, at ends and corners of each run of wall, and at spacing not to exceed 4
feet in between.
D. Secure nailers, blocking, ledgers, etc. to masonry with built -in bolts. Minimum
embedment of bolts shall be & inches. .�.
E. Machine bolts shall be placed into holes 1/16 inch larger than the bolt diameter. ,mk
Lag screws shall be screwed into predrilled holes full diameter for the unthreaded
shank and 70% of the diameter for the threaded portion. Holes for nails and spikes
may be predrilled at 40% of the shank diameter to prevent splitting. Use washers ,+
under all heads and nuts against wood.
F. Holddowns or framing anchors shall be used between roof rafters and roof trusses
and the supporting walls at each bearing point. Install in accordance with the .04
manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Use joist hangers to support joists and rafters where flush framing is indicated on
the drawings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Use
special manufacturer's nails if required.
06100 -6
Oft
Al
411Mk Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.07 HARDWOOD FLOORING
A. For limited areas only (patches and new mail room)
doh
B. Match existing wood for species, grain and dimension. Kiln Dried
ft 2.09 HARDWARE
o
A. Bolts, screws, nuts, and washers: ANSI B18 and ASTM A307, zinc plated, use
washers under all bolts and nuts bearing against wood.
oift B. Joist hangers, framing anchors, holddowns, post caps and bases and similar items:
type and size for the members connected or as shown on the drawings, hot dipped
galvanized, Acceptable manufacturers:
isk 1. Simpson Co.
2. TECO Inc.,
3. United Steel Products Co.
4111b C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, Galvanized, min. 1/2" diameter, 16" length.
D. Steel connector plates, weldments: ASTM A36 steel, welded in accordance with
American Welding Society (AWS) standards.
E. Nails: AS'TM A510 and F457, zinc coated.
F. Wood and sheet metal screws: ANSI B18 and ASTM A549, zinc coated.
G. Expansion Bolts: Galvanized bolts and expansion type shields, use only in
concrete, grouted, or solid masonry. Acceptable manufacturers: Phillips Red-Head,
doh Wej-it, Heckmann.
H. Powder Driven Fasteners: use only with prior approval, Ramset, Drive-it, Red
Head, or equal.
1. Plywood Clips equal to Simpson PSC Plywood Sheathing Clips, 18 ga. Steel
galvanized, 5/8", install at mid-span between supports
4111114
J. HeadLok FastenMaster Fasteners for furring installation for siding installed over
do, foam sheathing (lift addition only): 5" — Product Number FMHLGM005, spaced
as noted on drawings, and installed per manufacturer's instructions and
FastenMaster Technical Evaluation Report No. 1009-01, updated June 15, 2011..
aft
al6 2.10 ADHESIVE
k A. Adhesive for plywood to framing and plywood to plywood joints: APA Performance
000
Specification AFG-01.
Oft
aft PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 STORAGE AND HANDLING
4111k A. Store lumber, plywood, and other wood products off the ground on substantial
iak blocking sufficient to prevent warping or bowing and to ventilate the pile or
o
individual pieces. Protect from dirt and other foreign substances. Store in a
ink weatherproof location or cover with a secure waterproof covering that will allow
adequate ventilation.
B. Handle bundles and individual pieces using slings or pallets that will not injure the
materials. Handle pre-manufactured trusses only at lift points designated by the
416 manufacturer.
a C. Do not deliver shop fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to
d,
receive the work. Protect items from weather while in transit.
4.6 3.02 SUITABILITY OF MATERIALS
A. Carefully select individual pieces of lumber for the location in which it is to be
used. Plan to be sure that knots and other defects will not interfere with bolting or
aft nailing. Check the natural camber in joists, rafters, and beams and place those
ark
06100-5
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Apik
N. Existing Roof Area Patches: Match existing board thickness in areas of patching of �**
existing sheathing. — Cover with 5/8" CDX" plywood sheathing (purchased and 0"
installed under Section 07300 Slate Roofing,
2.04 SIDING AND RAIN SCREEN
A. Cedar Siding: pre - primed, clear vertical grain, ' /2 "x 6 cedar clapboards, prime all
Aft
edges (factory and field cut).
1. Exposure Match Existing ..&
2. Fasteners stainless steel nails, attached to studs /framing as possible.
B. Rain Screen Home Slicker 10:
1. Description: I Omm vertically- channeled three- dimensional matrix in roll form ..
and meets Canadian rainscreen codes. Mkt
2. Material: Nylon (up to 10% post - industrial recycled content)
3. Width: 39.37 inches (1 m). """"`'
4. Length: 38 1/2 feet (14.2 m). ,.,,
5. Thickness: 0.44 inches (11.2 mm).
6. Weight: 7.2 lbs /roll; 7.0 oz/yd
7. Matrix Design: 8 channels per 4 inches (102 mm). Two channels per inch (25.4 ,—
mm).
2.05 PRESERVATIVE PRESSURE- TREATMENT
A. Roof blocking and curbs, sills, floor sleepers, any lumber in contact with concrete
or masonry in exterior or below grade walls, exterior exposed framing and decking,
and any other wood noted on the drawings to be preservative treated shall be '"P
preservative pressure - treated.
B. Pressure -treat wood with a waterborne salt treatment or chromate copper arsenate,
conforming to American Wood - Preserver's Association (AWPB) Standard LP -2 '"
(above ground use); Hickson Wolmanized Wood, Hoover CCA, or equal by ,..
Osmose.
C. Dry each piece to a maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment; except dry ,•14
items to be field painted to a moisture content of 12% before field treatment. Stamp
each piece with AWPB designation.
oak
D. Exposures /Grades:
1. Exposure to the elements
2. Direct contact/buried in the ground (fencing posts)
2.06 FIRE - RETARDANT TREATMENT WOOD aft
A. Scope of fire- retardant treatment: telephone and electric backer panels and walls ...„
within lift shaft.
B. Pressure -treat rated wood with fire- retardant chemicals to achieve a UL FR -s
rating, designating a surface- burning characteristics rating of 25 or less for flame -
spread, fuel contributed, and smoke developed, per ASTM E84, in compliance with
AWPA C 20 (lumber) and AWPA C 27 (plywood).
C. Acceptable products include Hickson Dricon, Osmose Flame -Proof LHC, and
Hoover Pyro- guard, AWPA Interior, Type A. ,.,.
D. Wood should be marked with the identification of mark of an approved agency
1. Identification of the manufacturer
2. Name of the treatment ...
3. Species of wood
4. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed index
5. Method of drying
06100 -4
40I+
Oft
41111 Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Oft
3. Exterior Wall Frame: Exterior walls of lift to be constructed with 1 -1/2" x 5 -1/2"
LVL studs @ 16" o.c. Two (2) rows of acoustic sealant caulk under plates either
olik
side of anchor bolt and nailing per code P.T. plate when in contact with concrete.
oak Size Spacing
Exterior Walls 2x6 LVL 16" OC
4. Ceiling Framing: Ceiling joists to be #1 and #2 SPF with nailing as per code and
°ft joist hanger where not supported from below. Sizes as indicated in drawings.
dui Provide for Architect and Engineer to observe hidden field conditions at the
beginning of the project.
5. Roof Framing: Rafters to be #1 and 2 SPF with nailing as per code and rafter ties
at all bearing locations. Sizes as indicated in drawings.
6. Reinforcing walers (lift shaft): Fire retardant treated lumber.
7. Blocking
*�* Location Size Block Height to top of block
,mu Bathrooms 2x12 40" O.C.
Cabinetry as required
41164 Drywall Prep 2x All corners, walls and ceiling
Thermostats 2x6 60" O.C.
2.02 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER
A. LVL (Laminated Veneer Lumber) shall be manufactured with the following
minimum design values:
E = 2,000,000 psi
Fb = 2925 psi
2.03 PLYWOOD
dou A. Each panel shall be identified with the appropriate American Plywood Association
41k grade- trademark showing panel type, span rating, thickness, veneer grade, species
group member and exposure grade.
B. Each panel shall meet the requirements of U.S. Product Standard PS 1 /ANSI
A199.1 for Construction and Industrial Grade Plywood. Panels shall be square
edged except where specifically required otherwise.
C. Plywood which is used in exterior locations such as wall and roof sheathing, or
which is noted "exterior" or "X" on the drawings, or where used in other areas
subject to high humidity or potential water leakage shall be APA Exterior or
Exposure I durability grade. Other plywood may be interior grade.
oft D. Plywood with one face exposed to view shall be APA A -D Veneer Grade or better.
Plywood which is not exposed to view shall be APA C -D plugged Grade or better.
E. Plywood Subfloor/Underlayment: Sub floor glued and nailed to joist per code and
Aiou according to schedule and good construction practice, 3 /4" T & G Advantech, PL
,,w 400 or Liquid Nails or Magnum 44. Floor Tile Underlayment, ` /2" UL Plywood,
Exterior Wood Glue.
eau
F. Plywood Wall Sheathing: New wall areas at addition and areas of extensive
sou sheathing replacement:
.�. G. Sheathing installed horizontally with nailing per code.
H. Tape all seams of new lift enclosure for air barrier. Caulk to sill and top plate.
I. Type I — Plywood
J. Type II - 1/2" .040 pressure treated if covering concrete
K. Type III — Fire Retardant treated wood (at lift shaft)
L. Existing Wall Areas: Match existing board thickness in areas of patching of
Asik existing sheathing.
M. New Roof Area Sheathing: Type - 5/8" CDX plywood with H clips
06100 -3
.a.
walk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ,a..
Smith College, Northampton, MA
A. A list of lumber and plywood materials to be used stating their locations in the **
building, species, grade, moisture content, and evidence of compliance with
requirements.
B. Manufacturer's descriptions, installation directions, and load tables for
manufactured joist hangers, framing anchors, etc.
C. Certificate of compliance for all chemical treated materials.
1.04 REFERENCES AM►
Comply with the following codes and standards except where more stringent requirements are
stated in the contract documents:
A. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC) -Timber Construction Manual including ,..
references given therein. aw
B. National Forest Products Association (NFPA) - National Design Specification for Wood
Construction, including the supplement Design Values for Wood Construction ..
C. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - as referenced.
ate
E. Federal Specifications - as referenced.
F. American Wood - Preserver's Association (AWPB) - Standard LP -2 4114
G. U.S. Product Standard PS 1 /ANSI A199.1 - Construction and Industrial Grade Plywood
H. American Plywood Association (APA) - Performance Specification AFG -01.
I. APA - Residential & Commercial Design/Construction Guide
0
1.05 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality control and shall designate a person on 40
the site to make daily inspections of the work and record in a log the results of those Aft
inspections.
B. Materials and installed work may be inspected at any time when directed by the Architect.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Work under this section shall be properly coordinated with the work of other 00
sections to assure the steady progress of all the work of the Contract. Abe
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMBER AND TIMBER ...e
A. Lumber and timber shall conform to the "National Design Specification for Wood
Construction" and its Supplement of NFPA and PS 20, surfaced four sides (54S), kiln -dried
to maximum moisture content of 19 %.
B. Each piece shall be clearly stamped, identifying the grading association, mill number, 0 ",
grade, species, and moisture content rating.
C. Nailers, furring, and blocking that do not carry load may be any commercial softwood .0111i
specie or grade but the grading stamp shall be required.
D. Requirements for all other wood are:
1. Floor Framing (repairs and patching only)
a. Floor framing to be Spruce -Pine -Fir (SPF) #1 and #2 with built -up laminated
veneer lumber (LVL) beams as required. ,,,,,
b. Nailing per code, and joist hangers where not supported from below.
2. Interior Wall Frame: Interior partitions to be #1 and #2 SPF with nailing per
code. .,
Size Spacing
Typical 2 x 4 16" OC
Plumbing Wall 2 x 6 16" OC
06100 -2
Allot
dh
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
411Ik
Smith College, Northampton, MA
aft
411111 Division 6: Wood and Plastics
SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Rough Labor -- All labor to bring project to a weather tight shell with new siding
and replacement windows (installed and sealed under section 08600), but excluding
roofing (sheathed and roofed under Section 07300). Work includes patching
subfloors, ready for underlayment, cutting and ramming to be ready for drywall,
4ft
and all other framing labor required by the intent of the plans and specifications.
B. Siding Labor — All labor to install siding including drip caps, step flashing,
mounting blocks for lights and vents and caulking as required at all penetrations
444*
and butted joints. Replace siding in all areas, except stair tower and front elevation
414, (flat siding).
C. Follow Lead paint safety practices and disposal requirements.
D. New Framing for:
oft 1. New lift enclosure and modification of existing walls to create 1-hour
4ft. separation to lift shaft and sufficient support for new lift.
2. New dormer
amk
3. Reinforcement of existing purlins and trusses and addition of supporting posts
4•40. 4. Reinforce or replace existing framing in rotted wall (verify in field)
5. Reinforce exist framing under 1s floor corridor
ONR
6. Reinforce or replace existing rafters at former skylight locations, chimneys
4" and corner braces
4pok 7. New 2-hour room in basement for electrical
8. New partitions and interior renovations
444, 9. New chases for mechanical runs
E. Framing Lumber
F. Misc. attachments
oft G. Adhesives
amo.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
aft
A. Section 03000 -- Cast-In-Place Concrete Work
B. Section 05100 -- Structural Steel
C. Section 06200 — Finish Carpentry
D. Section 07180 Vapor and Air Barriers
dook E. Section 07200 Insulation
F. Section 07300: Slate Roofing: all roof sheathing purchased and installed by roofing
section
44, G. Division 8: Doors and Windows
411.4 H. Section 09200: Blue Board and Plaster Patching
I. Section 10200: Louvers and Vents
4104
J. Section 14
40k K. Division 15: Mechanical
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submittals under this Section shall include:
do
06100-1
4.14
410
AMR
DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ...
Smith College, Northampton, MA
E. 4 round hand rungs at top to assist movement up and down. Aix
F. 1" diameter handrails, rest 7" from mounting surface for 12" clearance when ...
climbing.
G. Mounting plates are 6" from wall aft*
H. Technologically advanced Grip Strut® tread for slip - resistant footing
2.03 SHOP FABRICATION 0"
A. All required cutting, fitting and welding shall be performed in the manufacturers shop ,..
in accordance with the approved shop drawings and shall be in compliance with the
NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual tolerances and welding standards. "
B. All cutouts to clear obstructions shall have a recommended clearance of 1 inch. *R
When banding and toe plates are required, they shall be welded to the grating in ..o
accordance with NAAMM standards.
C. The finish coating, paint or galvanizing shall be applied after all of the required ink
fabrication is complete.
PART 3 EXCECUTION
3.01 GRATING INSTALLATION ...
A. The grating shall be received at the job site by the contractor, unloaded and protected
from damage prior to the requirement for it to be installed.
B. The installing contractor shall prepare the site for installation, determining that
deviations from the approved drawings are corrected prior to grating placement.
C. Grating shall be installed in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the
installation clearances called for in the NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual, 0"
including the use of the prescribed anchor system. ,�
D. Pipe penetrations of 4" or less shall be cut in the field. When installed, Grating Cross
Bars shall be in alignment. ""`
END OF SECTION 05700 ,,",
Aar
Afk
Aft
Agit
OA
Aft
05700 -2
oft
sikk
wn Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Section 05700: Miscellaneous and Ornamental Iron
PART 1 GENERAL
w. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Iron grate over window wells: The contractor shall provide all labor, materials,
equipment and incidentals as shown and specified and are required to furnish and
411k install grating
oft B. Attic access ladder
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
_* A. Section 02200: Earth Work
B. Section 0300: Concrete
Aft
C. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry.
0 10, D. 09900 Painting
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:
olli NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manuals designated ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 for
Steel, Stainless Steel and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads.
B. The steel used in the Bearing Bars shall be of rectangular section and conform to
+. ASTM A1011 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip. The Cross Bars shall be of
.�. ASTM A510 Carbon Steel Rods and Course Round Wire.
C. No substitution of materials will be accepted unless they are submitted for review and
so the Architect/Engineer approves their use.
oink
1.04 SUBMITTALS
" A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
w. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate quantities, profiles, sizes, connection attachments,
reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories of all items
oak
supplied under this section.
C. Shop Drawings shall indicate field measurements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
oak
2.01 STEEL GRATES AT AREAWAYS
Ink
A. Grating shall be Standard Welded Type "W" 19 -W-4 resistance welded grating
mo► B. Bearing bars: Rectangular steel bars of an appropriate depth and thickness for the
required load, on 1 3/16" centers.
C. Cross Bars: Twisted wire rod, at 4" on center, resistance welded to the bearing bars
Oft
and at right angles to them.
D. Surface: The bearing bars shall have a smooth top surface.
Oft E. Loading: At a uniform load of 100 pounds per square foot, deflection shall not
exceed 1/4 inch over the required span.
.► F. Finish: Manufacturers standard shop coat of black paint.
oft
2.02 ATTIC ACCESS LADDER
06. A. Equal to Factory Supply Inc. Ladders & Platforms 2009. Phone (888) 242 -3045 or
,, (727) 347 -4820, Fax (727) 347 -4830.
B. Fit to existing floor to floor distance.
C. Meet or exceed OSHA & ANSI standards
oak D. Side Step steel dock ladders. All- welded construction . Up to 300 lbs capacity.
05700 -1
dik
DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS •.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
B. Welders shall be certified for the type of work they perform. Aft
C. Welding Processes shall be shielded metal -arc, submerged -arc, gas-metal arc,
and flux core -arc.
3.04 FABRICATION ..s
A. Connections (unless noted otherwise) shall be shop welded and field bolted.
Beams shall have symmetrical framed connections with 3/4" high strength field
bolts in accordance with AISC "Manual of Steel Construction" and the contract
documents.
3.05 ERECTION
A. Prior to the erection of structural steel the work in place shall be surveyed to
Ask
ascertain that supporting and adjacent work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents and will allow the placement of the structural steel in its correct
position within the required tolerances. Special attention shall be paid to anchor
bolts, leveling plates, and bearing plates.
B. Set base plates and bearing plates to correct elevations and support on steel
wedges, shims, or other leveling devices, until the member supported thereon is .A
correctly placed and plumbed. The entire area under the plate shall then be
packed with non - shrink grout. Protruding leveling devices shall be removed or
trimmed neatly to the plate after the grout has attained its seven day strength.
C. Situations that prevent the proper assembly or fitting of parts shall be reported „
immediately to the Architect. Corrective measures shall be proposed by the
Contractor as soon as possible thereafter. Corrective work shall be implemented
as soon as possible after approval of the corrective measures is given by the ,,,,
Architect.
D. Align, level and adjust members accurately prior to final fastening. Fasten ..
compression member splices only after the bearing surfaces have been brought
into full contact.
E. Temporary bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Temporary
bracing shall be designed, installed, and removed in such a manner that the Am.
structure is capable of supporting the construction, equipment, live, dead, wind,
Alk
and other loads to which it may be subjected during erection.
F. Tolerances shall conform to the AISC " Code of Standard Practice for Steel as,
Buildings and Bridges" except that frame tolerances shall be modified as follows: ,.
END OF SECTION 05100 Airk
Ara
Aft
05100 -3 ,�
014
4116,
Oft DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
400, 8. Cleaning and painting.
9. Certificate of mill test reports of structural steel.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 01600, Material and Equipment, for general provisions covering
4,00
material storage, installation and substitutions.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate the quality control inspection and testing of shop
411111i and field work using his independent agency. Quality control inspection shall
consist of the minimum testing described below and complete timely recording
of the results of such tests or inspections. The records of quality control work
0110, shall be copied and submitted to the Architect for his/her records at the
conclusion of the structural work. Work that does not pass the quality control
inspection shall be corrected and retested. The records shall show both the
410 original failure and subsequent retest results. The Owner may engage an
independent testing agency to inspect the structural steel work and the
41116,
effectiveness of the Contractor's quality control procedures.
C. Non-destructive Weld Testing: Visual inspection of fillet welds. Test a minimum
of one test per 50 linear feet of all welds by each welder.
D. Torque Controlled Bolts: Visually check all bolts for lug shear-off.
E. Shape, size, location, and Mark: shall be checked for each piece.
411104,
411*
PART 2 PRODUCTS
4111k 2.01 MA'YERIALS:
A. Structural Steel Shapes, plates, bars, and rods: ASTM A36 "Structural Steel"
4111114
B. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B
111k* C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307
4 D. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325, Torque Controlled.
11/4
E. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Paint-13.
F. Grout: Non-metallic, non-shrink
G. Galvanizing: Hot Dip, ASTM Al23, ASTM A153, ASTM A386. — not required
for this work.
411h,
H. Filler Metal for Welding: E70XX for general use.
PART 3 EXECUTION
doh 3.01 HANDLING AND STORAGE:
A. Handle and store materials to prevent deformation or damage. Store structural
steel stacked carefully on substantial timbers and blocking so all pieces are above
the earth and can drain. Protect materials from spattered dirt, water, and other
40, foreign matter. Protect in a way that the paint will not be damaged.
3.02 HIGH STRENGTH BOLTING:
41114, A. Fit up joints and snug all bolts in each connection before final tightening.
B. Correct misaligned holes by drilling or reaming to the next larger size bolt if
40,
necessary. If this procedure cannot be followed, submit alternative corrective
0000. procedures to the Architect for approval before proceeding with any work
affected.
41111k
3.03 WELDING
41111k A. Welding and welding procedure shall conform to "Welding Procedure and
40, Performance Qualification" by the AWS and as specified herein.
05100-2
4000
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
AIR
Division 5 — Metals '"
SECTION 05100: STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
Ark
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION:
A. New columns supporting existing roof trusses
B. New gusset plates, straps and saddles for reinforcing existing roof trusses and
connecting posts.
C. Provide labor, materials, equipment, transportation, and services to furnish and ..
erect the structural steel work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
D. Furnish and erect base plates, columns, connections, beams, temporary and
permanent bracing, angles, struts, stiffeners, rods, and cap plates.
E. Furnish anchor bolts, setting plates, bearing plates, and other items to be built
into the work by others for the attachment of structural work.
F. Furnish erection drawings, templates, details, and instructions for the installation as*
of all work. "`
G. Furnish and install any item of structural steel work indicated on the drawings,
specified, or required to make the work of this section complete.
H. Quality control.
w►
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 03000: Cast -in -Place Concrete Ank
B. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry ,.�.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) - Specification for Structural ....
Steel Buildings.
B. AISC - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges does not
app AiNk
C. American National Standards Institute / American Welding Society
(ANSI/AWS) D1.1 -84 - Structural Welding Code.
D. Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation -
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
E. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel
Aft
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under the provisions of Section 01300. —
B. Weld Testing: Prior to start of fabrication, submit a program of weld testing for
shop and field quality control. ,,,k
C. Shop Drawings: Shall be prepared according to industry standards and shall
include complete details and schedules for the fabrication and assembly of
structural steel. Design of all connections as included herein. Shop drawings shall
include the following:
1. Grade(s) of steel.
2. Identification mark of members.
3. Dimensions. Aft.
4. Member size and arrangement.
5. Anchor bolt setting plan and details.
6. Bearing plate setting plan and details.
7. Joint fabrication including weld and bolt identification. ,,.,,
05100 -1 ..►
Airc
411
411
DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, color to match existing.
oft B. Mortar aggregate: ASTM C144, light sand, to match texture of existing.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D. Water: clean and potable.
E. Mortar Color: timed to match existing tinted mortar, using "Atlas Custom Color
atik Masonry Cements", as manufactured by Lehigh Portland Cement.
oak 2.04 MORTAR MIX
mok A. Pointing mortar: ASTM C270, Type N, with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate
or calcium stearate per cement weight.
011
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
4111,
A. Verify that surfaces to be cleaned, repainted are ready for work of this Section.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and conditions.
alk
3.02 REPOINTING
Oh A. Cut loose or disintegrated mortar in joints to a 1 /2 inch depth.
auk B. Utilize hand tools. Do not use power tools.
C. Do not damage masonry units.
dok
D. When cutting is complete, remove dust and loose material be brushing or with water
j et.
E. Coordinate with installation of roofing flashings where applicable.
01111
F. Coordinate with installation of hose bibs.
ark G. Pre-moisten joint and apply mortar. Pack tightly in maximum 3/8 inch layers. Leave
aft a smooth, compact raked joint.
H. Moist cure 72 hours.
411
411 3.03 CLEANING
A. As work proceeds and on completion, remove excess mortar, droppings, smears,
011
stains, efflorescence or unsightly excess resulting from the work of this Section.
B. Clean surrounding surfaces.
aft
ast,
4111
4111
4111
411
41111
411/4
04500-2
40b.
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Al
Smith College, Northampton, MA
ANik
Division 4 — Masonry
SECTION 04500 Masonry New and Restoration:
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Masonry cutting at enlarged vent openings and hose bib recesses.
B. Repointing at exposed foundation areas Alk
C. Repointing of all chimneys
D. Masonry repairs at base of basement piers
E. New brick skirt on concrete brick shelf at lift foundation
F. Bricked in openings
1.02 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 07600 Roof flashings and Gutters: installation of flashings and into chimney
reglets, and securing chimney caps.
B. Section 15000: Plumbing — hose bibs and misc. penetrations for electrical and
mechanical.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council(IMIAC)- Recommended ,.
Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
0.
B. ASTM C150- Portland Cement. ..
C. ASTM C207- Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. ••,
D. ASTM C270- Mortar for Unit Masonry.
E. Preservations Briefs #1 & #2: "The Cleaning and Waterproofing Coating of Masonry
Buildings ", and Repointing Mortar Joints in Historic Brick Buildings." Technical ..►
Services Division. HCRS, U.S. Dept. of Interior, Washington, D.C., 1975 and 1980. ,
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit mortar design mix, and required environmental conditions under provisions
of Section 01300.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE •
A. Mason: Company with three years documented experience in masonry work.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS *"k
A. Do no repoint, caulk, wash down or wet surfaces when temperature may drop below
40 degrees F. within twenty -four hours.
B. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC- Recommended Practices . and Guide '"`
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. ,,,,",
C. Do not use process creating dust, dirt, or chemical spry when wind is over 10
miles/hour.
1.07 SEQUENCING / SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate schedule and sequencing with the work of other trades.
..4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MASONRY MATERIALS
A. Brick Masonry Units: facing brick to match size, color and fmish of existing bricks, '—
ASTM C216, Grade SW. .,
04500 -1
APR
DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
mmo
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with the ACI Recommendations for Hot and Cold
Weather Concreting.
B. Place the concrete so that it contacts completely all form surfaces, reinforcement,
alk and embedded items.
C. Use mechanical vibrators to compact the concrete. Hand spade along the forms
af surfaces as the concrete is placed to assure a good surface. Vibrate through lifts to
,_ consolidate sequential lifts together.
D. Notify the testing agency 24 hours before concreting is planned to begin.
E. Perform quality control inspection before commencing concrete placement.
3.04 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Moist cure concrete for a minimum of 7 days at temperatures not less than 50
"" degrees nor more than 90 degrees Fahrenheit immediately after placement. If high
- early strength concrete is used the curing and protection time may be reduced to 3
days provided test cylinders cured with the concrete indicate that 70% of the 28
"""'' day strength is reached.
3.05 FINISHES
4111k A. Remove fins, ties, and other protrusions on all surfaces.
m B. Interior Finish Floors: Steel Trowel. Apply chemical hardener in areas where
concrete finish is noted in finish schedules.
C. Exterior Steps and Platforms: Wood Float. Apply non -slip aggregate finish in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions where noted. Graded to drain. .
aft
D. All finished surfaces shall be true to line and grade within 1/4" as measured by a
10' -0" straightedge.
E. Exposed surfaces shall be free of visible defects and patches.
F. Exposed surfaces of concrete walls and edges of slabs where visible in the finished
"' work shall be given a rubbed and stoned finish.
oft
aft
END OF SECTION -03000
a
oft
oak
aw►
sib
Aft
Oft
03300 -5
AIM
DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
G. Slump of concrete, measured at point of placement:
1. Footings, Foundation Walls 4 inches
2. Slabs on Grade 4 inches
Ara
PART 3 EXECUTION
Alw
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Confirm soil conditions and base layers are suitable for bearing and pours. *"
B. Coordinate with placement of under slab insulation
C. Install under slab polyethylene vapor barrier
Aft
3.02 FORMWORK .,
A. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support all vertical and
lateral loads that might be imposed until such loads can safely be supported by the
permanent structure.
B. Formwork shall be such that the resulting concrete surfaces are true to alignment
and members are the correct size. .ft
C. Formwork shall include provision for openings, keys, recesses, dovetail slots, ...
chamfers, reglets, and items to be embedded.
D. Joints shall be made tight so that cement paste does not leak.
E. Forms shall be such that they can be removed with no damage to the concrete.
F. The contact surfaces of forms shall be cleaned and oiled between uses. No contact
surfaces shall be reused which may cause a surface blemish on an exposed surface.
G. Provide temporary openings for the inspection of forms and reinforcement,
cleaning of forms, and placement of concrete. AORk
H. Form ties for concrete exposed to view shall be cone type with a removable cone
Ask
approximately 1 -1/4 inches in diameter at the surface and 1 -1/2 inches deep from
the face of the form. Al*
L Provide for other trades to place their work in the forms.
J. Provide templates and supports for the placement of reinforcement, dowels, anchor
bolts, and other embedded items. Embedded items shall be securely fastened in '"^`
their permanent locations before concrete is cast around them. Inspect embedded
items before placing concrete.
K. Clean and tighten forms, check and align forms, clean and wet adjacent concrete
surfaces immediately before casting concrete against them. ..
L. Formwork in contact with concrete surfaces shall remain in place until it can be
removed without damage to the concrete but shall not be removed sooner than:
Footings 24 hours ..F
All Other Members 48 hours
3.02 REINFORCEMENT: to
A. Comply with the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's "Recommended Practice
for Placing Reinforcement Bars" for details, methods of placement and support,
and other requirements. '"'
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust, scale, earth, ice, oil, and other materials that
could reduce bond.
C. Using appropriate accessories position and secure reinforcement and embedded
items accurately in place. Set tie ends away from concrete faces.
D. Place reinforcement to obtain the specified cover of concrete between the bars and ,
adjacent surfaces. Do not increase this cover without specific approval from the
Architect. 44.
03300 -4 ,,,,
DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4 2.05 CURING MATERIALS:
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M182, Class 2, 9 ounce burlap cloth.
41114
B. Moisture Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, Waterproof Paper, Polyethylene Film, or
rw. Polyethylene Coated Burlap.
411 C. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I, Class D. Moisture loss
less than 0.55 grams /sq.cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft. /gal. Compatible with other
materials and finishes.
osok
2.06 OTHER MATERIALS:
A. Moisture Barrier: Polyvinyl Sheet, 6 mil. Thick.
oak B. Non- shrink Grout: COE CRD -C621, Factory Pre - mixed.
C. Chemical Hardener: Colorless, Aqueous mixture of magnesium fluosilicate and 4111k fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent. Not less than 2 pounds fluosilicate per
gallon.
4110k D. Non -slip Aggregate: Aluminum Oxide Grit, factory- graded and packaged, rustproof
and non - glazing, unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning agents.
aft E. Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTM C881, to suit use.
F. Joint Filler: Premolded, Compatible with finishes and sealers.
G. Galvanized Anchor bolts: ' /2" diameter anchor bolts at 4' o/c and within 12" of
corners.
auk
2.07 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Design mixes shall be established by either the laboratory trial batch or the field
aft experience method as specified in ACI 301. The proposed mix shall be examined and
approved by the Testing Laboratory before submission for approval.
oft
B. Written mix and material descriptions with supporting data shall be submitted for
** approval at least 15 days prior to the placement of concrete.
C. Separate design mixes shall be submitted for each strength of concrete and for each
oak
combination of aggregate and admixtures at the maximum slump specified for that
strength concrete.
__ D. Concrete may be placed in footings and walls for a period of 2 weeks at the
beginning of a job prior to the acceptance of the Design Mix provided that the
'w" concrete meets the specified strength and the mix conforms to the following Table.
Ow STRENGTH, CEMENT, AND WATER REQUIREMENTS
4/ Design Minimum Laboratory Minimum Cement Maximum*
Compressive Strength @ Factor Water /Cement
Strength 7 Days 28 Days Sacks /Cu.Yd. By Weight
aft 3000 psi 2300 3000 5.25 .58
oft 4000 psi 3500 4000 6.5 .44
4000 psi 3500 4000 6.5 .35
46' (Air Entrained)
* This is total water in mix at the time of placement, including free water of the aggregate and
admixtures.
oak E. Air entrainment shall be used in all concrete exposed to the weather. Total air
entrainment in freshly mixed concrete shall be 5.0% plus or minus 1.0% of the
aph
volume of concrete.
F. Water reducer, accelerator, or retarder may be used at the Contractor's option.
Design mixes must be made for each concrete strength and combination of
admixtures used.
dok
03300 -3
DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ,.�
Smith College, Northampton, MA
E. Tests of materials and qualifying data required to show conformance of materials and ..
work conform to the specifications shall be made at the Owner's expense. Additional
tests may be made by the Owner at his expense at any time. Retesting, when tests .�
results are not acceptable, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. .,.
F. Maintain a log on site giving the location, date, ticket number, and temperature , ,,, ex
record for each load of concrete. The log shall give the identification of the concrete
samples taken from loads. The log shall contain the name, date and report of the '''"`'
quality control person, who shall assure the correctness of all reinforcement and
embedded items before the concrete is cast.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Ank
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for exposed smooth finish concrete shall be faced with Class I, AC or AB ...
High Density Overlaid Plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS -1. The
panel faces and edges . shall be new or in like -new condition. The panel backing,
walers, bracing and support system shall be sufficiently stiff to prevent bowing and
bulging under the pressure of the concrete and construction loads. All joints must be s.�►
watertight. The resulting fmish is to be true to line with sharp edges and without
surface markings.
B. Forms for concrete which is not exposed to view in the fmished structure may be s4
formed with plywood, metal, or lumber. Joints shall be tight and the resulting edges
and surfaces true to line. Surface markings to 1/8 inch in depth are acceptable. ..
C. Form coatings shall be a commercial material intended for use as a concrete form .w*
coating that will not bond with, stain, weaken, or otherwise adversely affect the
concrete. The coating used must not impair the subsequent finishing or bonding of
other materials to the concrete surface. ''"e'
2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS:
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type II.
B. Aggregates: Normal Weight, ASTM C33.,
C. Air - entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.
D. Water- reducing Admixture: Optional, ASTM C494, Type A, containing not more .�.
than 0.1% chloride ions.
E. Water: Drinkable m,
F. Accelerator, Water- reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type E, containing not more
than 0.1% chloride ions.
G. Retarder, Water- reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D, containing not more AIM
than 0.1% chloride ions.
2.03 REINFORCING MATERIALS:
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615 including S 1, Grade 60, Deformed.
2.04 ACCESSORIES: ARO
A. Supports for reinforcement shall be bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices which 410,
will hold the reinforcement in place before and during the placement of concrete.
Supports shall comply with CRSI standards.
B. Ties: Black iron, plastic straps, or stainless steel. ,,,,,
C. Supports and ties shall be non - staining where used within 3 inches of surfaces which
will be exposed in the fmished structure or where weathering during construction a"
may stain exposed surfaces. —
03300 -2
RIM
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
oft
Division 3: Concrete
06, SECTION 03300 Cast -in -place Concrete
tek
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION:
41i A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, transportation, and services to furnish and install
alk the cast -in -place concrete work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein,
including concrete pads required for equipment of other Sections.
s 1. Replace concrete steps (near ramp entry) and reset existing handrail
ag. 2. New area ways at mechanical vents (2 places)
3. New footings for new posts bearing from trusses to foundation.
4. Foundations for New Lift addition:
akk 5. Existing foundation wall reinforcement
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Section 02200: Earthwork
ilk
B. Section 02500: Paving
C. Section 04200: Masonry: masonry shelf in concrete wall
aft D. Section 05100: Structural Steel
__ E. Section 05700: Miscellaneous & Ornamental Iron
F. Section 07100: Damproofmg
.e. G. Section 07180: Vapor and Air Barriers
H. Section 07200: Insulation — under slab insulation
I. Section 15000: Heating and Ventilating — housekeeping pads
J. Section 16000: Electrical
ilk
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for
aft Buildings
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - Manual of Standard Practice
w D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) - Listed Standards
w E. CRSI - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars
ilk
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Issue submittals in accordance with Section 01300, as required by Contract Manager
or Architect.
ilk 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 01600, Materials and Equipment for general provisions covering
materials storage, installation and substitutions.
s B. Designate a person, to be at the site, who shall be responsible for Quality Control and
rw, to maintain the required records.
C. Materials and installed work may be tested at any time when directed by the
Architect. Provide access and assistance when requested to make samples of
materials and to inspect work.
D. Engage a certified Testing Laboratory, acceptable to the Architect to perform
lek
material evalua tests and to design concrete mixes according to the provisions of
ilk
Section 01400.
03300 -1
s
wlifk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ..
Smith College, Northampton, MA
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Cut clean edge to existing walkways to remain.
B. Proof roll the surface of the sub grade with a vibratory roller before construction of the subbase. 4111
3.03 PLACING PAVING SUBBASE
A. Spread all subbase to loose lift thickness not exceeding 9 inches and compact with moisture .1
content within 2% of the optimum to a minimum of 95% of the maximum dray density by
ASTM D1557.
B. Spread stone material over prepared base to a total compacted thickness of 4 inches. at.
C. Place stone in 6 inch layers and compact.
D. Level surfaces to meet existing gravel road.and conc. Apron elevations. ..R
E. Add small quantities of sand mix as appropriate to assist compaction.
F. Add water to assist compaction. With an excess water condition, rework topping and aerate to
reduce moisture content.
G. Perform hand tamping in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment. was
3.04 PLACING ASPAHLT PAVEMENT
A. Compact aggregate base materials as specified in Section 02200, until a uniformly -= smooth ,
hard surface complying with the lines, grades, elevations has been established. _
B. Compact aggregate base may be used as a wearing course during construction operation. If
used, base shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer, and damaged portions removed and
replaced, and the entire surface thoroughly cleaned before application of asphalt concrete. Aok
C. Place binder course within twenty four hours of priming base surfaces. 4,1
D. Place each course to compacted thickness specified.
E. Place topping course within two hours of placing and compacting binder course A11
F. Compact pavement by rolling. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand 4444
compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
G. Develop rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth fmish without roller marks. AN,
H. Create smooth, clean transition between new and existing walkways.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of1/4" measured with 10 foot straight edge. 410
B. Compacted Scheduled Thickness: Within 'A" of design thickness. 401
C. \Variation from True Elevation: Within 1 /2"
Ank
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement under provisions of Section 01500 from
mechanical injury for 24 hours.
Aft
3.07 CLEANING
Alk
A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove
from the site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from paving *+
operations.
B. Sweep pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and foreign material immediately
prior to final acceptance. 400.
END OF SECTION 02500
Alt
4114
02500 -2 A1 `
4112
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 02500 PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Repair of Walkways damaged by fencing, construction and/or excavation
B. Compacted Gravel sub base
+�► 1.02 RELATED WORK:
Aft A. 01300 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
B. 02480 Landscaping
w
1.03 REFERENCEX
A. The Asphalt Institute — Manual MS -4 — The Asphalt Handbook
B. ASTM D946 — Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction
C. Mass, Dept. of Public Works, Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, current
edition.
D. OSHA Safety Regulations, 1926.
ank
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with the City of Northampton DPW standards.
,► B. Obtain materials from same source throughout.
C. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following standards
D. 1. Mass, Dept. of Public Works, Standard Specifications for Highways and Bridges, current
edition: Class I Bituminous Concrete Base Course and Bituminous Concrete Pavement
ink
PART 2 PRODUCTS
w 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Compacted Gravel Sub base: MDPW- ML033.0 Type C.
B. Material shall be clean, well graded mixture of hard, durable stone and coarse sand, practically
""' free from silt, clay organic matter, or other deleterious matter.
dek C. The gravel shall have the following gradations by weight:
Sieve Percent Passing
4" 100
1/4" 30 -75
No. 40 5 -40
No. 200 0 -10
D. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D946.
oft E. Aggregate for Binder Mix: Max. 3/4 inch.
F. Aggregate for Topping Mix: max. '/z inch.
G. Asphalt Paving Mix:
44► H. Use dray materials to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.
I. Binder Course: 4.5 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture; spread to a uniform
thickness of not less than 1 -1/2 inches.
ata J. Topping Course: 5 to 7 percent of asphalt cement by weight in moisture; spread to a uniform
thickness of not less than 1 -1/2 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
406, 3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify compacted sub grade is dry and ready to receive work of this Section.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
a"` 02500 -1
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS A N*
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Aft
3.03 REPAIR LAWN AREAS:
A. Excavation Contractor to repair previously landscaped areas damaged by construction activities
by loosening soil, loaming, seeding and adjusting altered grades.
B. Machine and/or hand rake finish grade surfaces as needed (with positive drainage away from
foundation) and install grass seed appropriate for sun/shade conditions and such starter fertilizer
as is needed. Apply hay and/or alternative mulch materials to retard erosion.
Ask
Pk
Alk
..k
dink
AIA
Ate
Al a
Aft
02480 -2 °`
oft
impo
_ Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 02480 Landscape Repairs
ft PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Allowance for misc. repairs.
aft B. Reseed damaged areas (watering by Owner)
C. Site Repairs including removal, storage and reinstallation of pavers and low decorative fencing
- 1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED
,ft A. Subsurface sprinkler repair by Owner. Coordinate as needed.
B. All watering by Owner
k
1.03 RELATED WORK:
A. Section 01300 construction facilities and temporary controls (fencing)
B. Section 01532: Tree and Plant Protection
PART 2 PRODUCTS
aft
2.01 EXISTING MATERIALS
aft A. Garland fencing in locations as noted on site plan
B. Concrete pavers in locations as noted on site plan. New pavers as required.
aft 2.02 BASE LAYER FOR PAVERS
, A. Weed blocking landscape fabric
B. Gravel 4 -6" thick (existing and/or repaired)
a C. Sand: 1.5 inches thick.
2.03 GRASS SEED
A. Consult with Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Gardens for desired mix.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 REINSTALL PAVERS
ow, A. Document location and condition of existing concrete pavers. Carefully remove and stack
4111k pavers in area away from traffic. Protect from damage
B. Repair base
auk 1. exxcavate out existing gravel as needed (can be reused)
doik 2. install landscape fabric
3. install gravel: 3 -4 inch lifts, tamped
' "' 4. install sand, tamp and level
C. Install pavers
1. install paveres in manner similar to existing insulation, cut as needed to match cure in
sidewalk, etc.
oft 2. fill joints with sand - mortar mixture, swept into place and wet to cure. As the mortar
AIR cures, clean curing mortar from the concrete pavers' surface.
"•' 3.02 REINSTALL GARLAND FENCING
__ A. Document location and condition of existing Garland fencing. Careful' remove and store (off
site) garland fencing.
B. Set posts to height and in location of previous installation.
C. Compact soil to maintain vertical installation
D. Rehang chain
oft
4111 02480 -1
mik
dook
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS As.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.04 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all excess materials
END OF SECTION - 02200
Aim
A..
Altik
ealk
..e
ois
AIR
AIR
AIX
Elk
..R
02200 -5
AIRk
mok
mok
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
w► 5. Before compacting, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide the optimum
moisture content.
6. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum density for the class of fill, as
0011■ specified below.
4111k 7. Place fill evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Differential filling in excess of
two feet (2') shall not be permitted unless otherwise noted.
D. Compacting fill:
oft 1. Compact each layer of fill with suitable equipment to achieve the required percentage of
maximum density at optimum moisture.
2. Test Methods:
a) Standard Proctor Test for Moisture Density Relationship - ASTM D -698
b) In -Place Density Testing:
(1)ASTM D -2922 Nuclear Density Method, or
(2)ASTM D -1556 Sand Cone Method, or
(3)ASTM D -216T Rubber Balloon Method
3. Location:
a) Under structural footings and slabs on grade: 95%
b) Under paved areas: 95%
c) Foundation walls and general Grading: 90% (Do not over compact near existing
Oft
structures. Protect from drainage).
4. Do not compact soil when moisture content varies more than 2 percent from optimum
moisture content. The moisture content shall be as uniform as practicable throughout any one
layer of fill. The upper limit of moisture content in the materials will be that which will
w permit excavating, hauling , placing and will permit proper compaction with the contractor's
. equipment. In no case shall the moisture content during compaction exceed a value of three
percentage points on the wet side of the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM
D1557. The lower limit of moisture content shall be not less than two percentage points
„w below optimum.
5. Material that is too wet shall be spread and permitted to dry. When material is too dry, the
Contractor will be required to sprinkle each layer of the fill.
6. Compaction equipment: As required to obtain required compaction without damage to
adjacent building and structures.
7. Grade surface for positive run -off away from building. Rough grade to be relatively smooth
and hole free, contoured for proper drainage.
E. Backfill material under the building slab and other structural elements shall be placed in
maximum 6" lifts and compacted to 95% of maximum density determined in accordance with
''""' Method D of ASTM D 1557 -70, or ASTM D2409 for soils which do not exhibit a well - defined
moisture- density relationship.
3.03 FINISH GRADING
A. Slope grade from the structure Y2" per foot for 10' minimum. Adjust final grades for drainage
and proper contour, according to site plan, if available or to reasonable trade standard for proper
Alk
drainage and erosion control. Screen and reuse existing loam and topsoil materials, and augment
,fir as needed for sufficient loam material to provide a minimum of 4" coverage on all disturbed
areas as noted on site plan.
B. Tamp backfill. Backfill tamping is not required if proper drainage can be achieved using non -
'"' settling compact soils.
,,, C. Final loam thickness should be relatively consistent, with material substantially free of debris,
and left ready for machine raking and seeding.
D. Spread loam to required thickness, compact, rake and prepare for landscaping.
Amph
Aft
02200 -4
wIlga
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
411111.
E. Pea Gravel: Mineral aggregate: rounded, smooth surface stone versus crushed stone, graded 1/2 Amp
inch to 1 inch; free of soil, subsoil, clay, shale, or foreign matter. The Contractor shall submit a
representative sample of this material to the Landscape Architect for approval before placing any
of it. ANN
F. Crushed Stone: Shall consist of inert angular material derived from a stone quarry that is hard,
durable, washed stone, free of deleterious materials. Gradation shall conform to the following:
Sieve Percent Passing
3/4" 100 41.
1/2" 80 -100
3/8" 10 -50
#4 0 -20 ""^
G. General fill for site grading:
1. It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible materials, of frozen materials, and of
stones larger than six inches (6 ") maximum dimensions. 'nk
2. It shall be of such nature and character that it can be placed to form a stable and firm sub ,..
grade be compacted to the specified densities in a reasonable length of time.
Ask
3. It shall be free from highly plastic clays, from all materials subject to decay, decomposition,
or dissolution and from cinders or other materials which will corrode piping or other metal.
4. It shall have a maximum dry density of not less than 100 lbs. per cubic foot.
5. Material from excavation on the site may be used as ordinary fill, if it meets the above
requirements and is approved by the Landscape Architect. ..,
H. Loam: Screen and reuse existing loam and topsoil materials, and augment as needed. ,
PART 3 EXECUTION A
3.01 PREPARATION _
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B. Notify DIG -SAFE 1- 800 - 322 -4844, 72 hours prior to starting excavation, for location of gas,
telephone, and electric lines. Identify known underground, above ground, and aerial utilities.
Stake and flag locations. Notify all private and public utilities in the work area.
C. Protect above and below ground utilities which are to remain. ..R
D. Reconnect Drainage System (new downspouts to existing underground drainage pipes. ..►
E. Protect existing trees to remain by encircling with a 4' snow fence placed at the drip line as AI*
shown on Drawings.
EXCAVATION
A. Excavate with caution at areas close to existing rubble wall foundation
B. New footing depth to match depth of existing, adjacent footings ,.,'
3.02 BACKFILLING
A. Coordinate placement of insulation and waterproofing or damp proofing on exterior walls with
requirements of Section 07201, Building Insulation, or Section 07100, Damp proofing, before
placement of backfill.
40,
B. Place backfill so as to prevent damage to subsoil drainage systems.
C. Placing Fill: ...
1. Do not place fill on surfaces where free water is standing or which are muddy, frozen or -
which contain frost or ice.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, start placement of fill in deepest areas and progress 40
approximately parallel to finished grade. ..�
3. Place and grade fill so that working surfaces drain in a controlled manner.
4. Place fill in horizontal layers of the loose depth specified for each class of fill, to produce a .�.
uniform thickness of materials. �^
02200 -3
ink
ink
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
for extra compensation or extension of time will be allowed on account of actual conditions
inconsistent with those assumed, except as otherwise provided in the General Conditions.
Oft
1.07 REFERENCES
A. OSHA Regulations, 1986.
B. All applicable codes and ordinances, including DIGSAFE and legal requirements.
C. The Contractor shall procure and pay all permits and licenses required for the complete work
specified herein and shown on the Drawings
1.08 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Utility drawings in construction set is based on information from Campus Facilities and has
NOT been field verified.
Oh
B. Immediately Repair any active existing utility lines (cables, conduit, piping), dama ed during
Y P Y g tY ( � , g g
the course of construction, except where such lines are to be abandoned. Protect and maintain
such active existing utilities in use, until relocation of same has been completed or utilities have
been cut, capped, or prepared for new service connections, as applicable. Perform such repair
and protection work at no additional cost to the Owner.
4114 C. If any existing active utility, not indicated on the Drawings is unintentionally damaged and such
utility is to remain, immediately notify Smith College Physical Plant, repair the damage and
'""* restore the utility to its original integrity. Reimbursement of cost for performing such repair will
be made by an adjustment in the Contract Price at rates based on time and materials basis.
D. Any adjustment as outlined above shall be based on the assumption that the Contractor has
performed in a prudent manner at the time such damage occurred.
oak E. The Owner will cooperate and assist the Contractor in locating and identifying underground
utilities. The Contractor shall cooperate and participate in "Dig Safe" programs, notifying
proper authorities before proceeding. The Contractor shall supply Smith College with Dig -Safe
number and starting date.
F. If it becomes necessary to interrupt power, water line or other utilities, notify Owner at least
three (3) working days in advance.
Aft
PART 2 PRODUCTS
oak
2.01 MATERIALS
is. A. Topsoil: Excavated material from site and brought from off -site as needed, graded free of roots,
inn rocks larger than one inch, subsoil, debris, and large weeds.
B. Subsoil: Excavated material, graded free of lumps larger than 6 inches, rocks larger than 6
inches, and debris.
C. Controlled granular backfill (for miscellaneous sue) and Engineered Fill (for use under footings
ink
and slabs): Well graded inert material that is hard, durable stone, gravel and sand, free from
in loam and clay, surface coatings and deleterious materials and shall conform to the following
gradation:
Granular Backfill Engineering Fill
Sieve Percent Passing by Weight Percent Passing by Weight
dik 2in 90 -100 95 -100
1 in. 55 -85
No. 4 40-75
ion No. 10 30 -90
No 40 10 -70 10 -35
No. 200 0 -15 0 -8
D. Maximum size of stone in gravel shall be two inches (2 ") largest dimension.
ter.
02200 -2
ink
Al Mk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Aft
Smith College, Northampton, MA
ink
SECTION 02200 Earthwork, Site Preparation and Finish Grade
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Safety fencing at excavations
B. Clearing and excavation for lift addition foundation.
C. Removal and disposal of asphalt
D. Reconnection of replaced downspouts to underground drainage pipes in area of new lift .,
E. Backfilling
itat
F. Crushed stone in new window wells
G. Finish Grade ...
AlAk
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400: Quality Control - Inspection of bearing surfaces.
B. Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Security and Protection ,
C. Section 01532: Tree and Plant Protection
D. Section 01561: Temporary Security Fencing ""
E. Section 02480: Landscape Repairs: removal and reinstallation of pavers, and low decorative A i
fencing
F. Section 02500 Asphaltic Concrete.
Alb
1.03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify finish floor elevations
1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ..
A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Accurately record location of new structures, and elevation in immediate area. .400
eek
1.05 PROTECTION AND SAFETY
A. All excavations will be isolated with caution tape or fencing barriers installed and maintained by
excavation contractor while on site. Open trenching will be covered or fenced. .•R
B. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping, as
shown on Drawings and detailed in Section 01532: Tree and Plant Protection
C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. ..kc
D. Repair any damage resulting from construction procedures at no expense to Owner. ..
E. Do not close or obstruct any street or sidewalk without written permission from The College.
Conduct operations so as to interfere as little as possible with the use ordinarily made of roads, '""
driveways, or other facilities near enough to the work to be affected thereby. ,,
1.06 EXAMINATION OF SITE CONDITIONS '
A. All information on the Drawings and in the Specifications relating to subsurface conditions, ink
natural phenomena, existing utilities and structures is from the best sources presently available.
A►.
All such information is furnished only for information and convenience, and is not guaranteed.
Interpretation of this information is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
have examined the plans for itself during the bidding period and formed its own conclusions as
to the full requirements of the work involved.
B. The Contractor shall fully inform itself of existing conditions at the site before submitting its
bid, and shall be responsible for carrying out all site work required to fully and properly execute ,.
the work of the Contract, regardless of the conditions encountered in the actual work. No claim
02200 -1
oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Exact schedule, methods, and safety precautions for demolition to be reviewed and approved by
01 Owner and Architect prior to start of any demolition procedures. Location of dumpster to be
approved by Owner.
oak
1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent landscape and site materials and
minimize damage to existing finishes in building to remain.
B. The extent of demolition work as shown on the Drawings is diagrammatic, and not limited to
specific items. All demolition necessary to provide a complete project according to the intent of
the design drawings.
1.06 SAFETY & PROTECTION
01 A. Conform to all local, state, and federal legal requirements, including ANSI series and OSHA
01
1926, regarding work -place procedures.
w PART 2 PRODUCTS
\\ Not Used.
gito
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect, remove, and cap designated electrical, water, sewer and other utilities.
B. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring.
C. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, structures and finishes which are not to be
omik
demolished.
3.02 EXECUTION
A. Demolish indicated structures and appurtenances in an orderly and careful manner.
B. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site.
C. Remove materials to be re- installed or retained in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect
under provisions of Section 01600.
011 D. All salvage value of materials scheduled for removal is assigned to the General Contractor with
the exception of materials assigned on the drawings.
E. All demolition debris shall be disposed of properly, and any necessary permits for disposal of
such debris shall be obtained.
®► F. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses,
END OF SECTION - 02050
w
Alet
02050 -2
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc., Amherst, MA DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA ,
Division 2: Site Work
SECTION 02050 Demolition: lw
Alb
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDES
A. Removal and proper disposal of the materials as indicated on demolition drawings including but
not limited to the following: m .
1. All attic partitions, exterior wall plaster and ceilings at previous attic dorm area of old
section. Remove flooring as needed to insulate walls and porch ceiling.
2. All 3rd floor ceilings and framing over stair (for new high ceiling area) in newer wing.
3. Section of basement floor, ceilings, and piers as needed for new structural posts and HVAC
installations.
4. Perimeter of basement ceiling for insulating sill
5. Sections of interior and exterior walls for new electrical and telecommunications wiring. ...
6. Bathroom fixtures and kitchenette, excluding relatively new ADA toilet.
7. MEP systems to be replaced (radiators and piping, window AC units, local exhaust systems),
and all related wall and ceiling demolitions for new Mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire
protection work.
8. Demo two small dormers (to be replaced by single shed dormer). "'°
9. Siding: all areas except for stair tower and front elevation (flat boards). Areas within the
Elm Street Historic district shall be "replace or repaired" as required and discussed with
Owner and Architect. "`
10. Areas and doorways for minor renovations, door replacements, and structural repairs. ..f
11. First and Second floor custodial and closet areas scheduled for modification
12. Carpet, suspended ceilings and grids, and other finishes to be replaced (including carpet in
office 107)
B. Hazardous Materials:
1. Asbestos abatement completed by the college
2. Lead -based paint. All trades are to employ lead safe practices. """
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01010: Summary of Work
B. Section 01500: Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls. ...o
C. Section 01532: Tree and Plant Protection
D. Section 02200: Earthwork: Asphalt removal
E. Section 02450: Landscape Repairs: removal of pavers and garland fencing "`
F. Section 07300: Slate Roofing: Roofing demolitions (exclusive of newer porch roof and roof Alto
over fire stair) including skylights to be handles under this section
G. Section 08600: Windows: window removals by window contractor
H. Section 15500: Mechanical ,
I. Section 16000: Electrical
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and operations schedule under provisions of Section ..w
01300.
B. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 01700.
02050 -1
Aft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
omok
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3. Certificates.
doh
4. Photocopies of warranties.
F. Submit one copy of completed manual in final form prior to final inspection. This
copy will be returned, with Architect/Engineer's comments. Revise content of
documents as required prior to final submittal.
aok
G. Submit volumes revised, within ten days after final inspection.
1.09 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
dm"
A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified
aft in individual specification Sections.
B. Deliver to Project site, and place in location as directed prior to final payment.
401, 1.10 WARRANTIES:
am" A. Provide notarized copies.
B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
C. Submit prior to ftnal Application for Payment.
D. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completions, provide updated
submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of
warranty period.
dek
dok PART 2 PRODUCTS
\\ Not Used.
apt, PART 3 EXECUTION
\\ Not Used.
dok END OF SECTION-01700
.tok
4111k
Alb
01700-3
#00*
auk
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS „.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Aft
1.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered
operation.
AINet
1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ,,,,
A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions
to the Work:
1. Contract Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda. A.
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.
C. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual „
Products installed including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 'mt
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made to Addenda and Modifications.
E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual '"
construction including: ..►
1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in
construction, referenced to permanent surface improvements. ...
3. Field changes of dimension and detail.
4. Details not on original Contract Drawings. "'ko,
F. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for
Payment.
1.08 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 4111.4
A. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8 -1/2 x 11 inch text pages, in
binders with durable covers.
B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ..
INSTRUCTIONS ", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple
binders are required.
C. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, -
Subcontractors, an major equipment suppliers. ;,,,,
D. Include operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided
by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone '"`
numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: ..,
1. Significant design criteria.
2. List of equipment.
3. Parts list for each component_ ..t
4. Operating instructions. .sk
5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
6. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning '"`
methods and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
E. Manual shall contain Project documents and certificates including the following:
1. Shop drawings and product data.
2. Air and water balance reports.
01700 -2
oak
411
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 01700: Contract Closeout
O
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Substantial Completion.
B. Final Inspection.
C. Final Cleaning.
D. Adjusting.
E. Project Record Documents.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data.
G. Warranties.
H. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
o 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has
been inspected, and that Work is Substantially Complete in accordance with
obb
Contractor Documents and ready for Architect's inspection.
B. Provide submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
C. Guarantee period will begin on date of Substantial Completion, except for work cited
as not complete on punch list.
D. Should Architect consider that Work is not substantially complete, he /she will
__ immediately notify Contractor, stating reasons and Contractor shall immediately
complete Work and request re- inspection.
1.04 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Before submission of final application for payment, submit final statement of
accounting to Architect.
det B. Upon completion of final punchlist items, Contractor shall submit written
„b. certification to Architects that Work has been completed in accordance with Contract
Documents and is ready for final inspection.
C. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
D. Should Architect be required to perform additional inspections because of failure of
Work to comply with Contractors' original certification, either for Substantial or
"'` Final Completion, Owner will compensate Architect for additional services and
obk deduct amount paid from final payment to Contractor.
oft
1.05 FINAL CLEANING
* A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B. Clear interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary
doh
labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum
carpeted and soft surfaces.
__ C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.
D. Clean or replace filters of operating equipment.
'"` E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems.
w F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the
ors.
ob. 01700 -1
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Ask
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2. it performs at least equally the function imposed in the general design for the
work; ..
3. it conforms substantially, even with deviations, to the detailed requirements for
the items as indicated by the Specifications.
C. Any civil, structural, or mechanical changes made necessary to accommodate .+
substituted equipment under this paragraph shall be at the expense of the Contractor
or subcontractor responsible for the work item. .w
1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES
A. Architect/Engineer will consider requests for Substitutions only within a timely
manner, well ahead of when the product is needed. .. .
B. Substitutions may be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through no ,,,,,
fault of the Contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
Substitution with Contract Documents. ..»
D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder or Contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the
quality level of the specified Product. 40.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work, which may be
required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. "'ik
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension, which may subsequently , — .
become apparent.
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop 00.
drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when ,.
acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.
F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit three copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each
request to one proposed Substitution. CLEARLY INDICA'T'E SUBSTITUTION
REQUEST on all copies.
2. Submit shop drawings, Product data, and certified test results attesting to the ..
proposed Product equivalence.
3. The Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or
reject request.
G. Architect and Awarding Authority retain absolute right of approval of any proposed __
substitution, and may reject same on any grounds including appearance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS ..�
\\ Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
\\ Not Used. ,s.
END OF SECTION - 01600 "°
AIR
Ask
01600 -2
rah
oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 01600: Material and Equipment
,., PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Products.
B. Transportation and handling.
C. Storage and protection.
D. Product options and substitutions.
E. Substitutions procedures.
alk
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300: Submittals.
B. Section 01400: Quality Control.
Ob. 1.03 PRODUCTS
A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and
systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for
preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also
include existing materials or components required for reuse.
qw B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as
specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.
C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar
components.
1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with requirements,
Aft
quantities are correct, and Products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals
and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive Products in weather - tight, climate
controlled enclosures.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
C. Provide off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or
protection.
D. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to avoid condensation.
E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well- drained area. Provide
mixing with foreign matter.
401, F. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
G. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to
assure Products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
1.06 PRODUCT OPTIONS & SUBSTITUTIONS:
Aft A. Where products or materials are prescribed by manufacturer name, trade name, or
catalog reference, the words "or approved equal" shall be understood to follow.
B. An item shall be considered equal to the item so named or described if:
1. it is at least equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design;
01600 -1
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
.R,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LAYOUT
A. Installation of temporary fencing shall not deter or hinder access to existing and new
hose connections and fire hydrants.
B. Avoid setting fence posts in locations of underground utilities and vaults.
C. Access: Provide gates for personnel, delivery of materials, and access by emergency
vehicles.
Aim
D. To the greatest extent possible, work around existing trees and plantings considering
the protections under Section 01532. Field verify location with Smith College. ..
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Chain link posts:
1. Space as 10 maximum.
2. Drive posts, set in holes and backfill, or anchor in precast concrete blocks.
lb
3. For soft and unstable ground conditions, cast concrete plug around post. '"
4. Posts over pavement: Use steel post plates or precast concrete blocks. .•►
5. Gate posts: Use bracing or concrete footings to provide rigidity for
accommodating size of gate.
B. Fabric: Securely attach to posts. *'*e
C. Gates: Install with required hardware.
D. Plastic mesh fencing: Space steel support posts to ensure mesh remains vertical and at
proper height. Securely tie mesh to posts.
3.03 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL
A. Maintain fencing in good condition. If damaged, immediately repair. '"
B. Remove temporary fencing upon completion of Work or when no longer required for ..k
security or control. Backfill holes and compact. Holes in pavement shall be surfaced
to match existing paving. Repair damage caused by installation of temporary ...
fencing.
END OF SECTION 01561
AO.
..n
MEM
01561 -2 Aft
Oak
416
011
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
mmo
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 01561: Temporary Security Fencing
PART 1 GENERAL
Ob. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Section includes: Erection, maintenance, and dismantling of temporary fencing around
construction site and materials storage areas. This section does not apply where
security fencing is required.
B. Refer to Drawings for temporary fence type, layout, and location of gates.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
dok A. Section 01532 Tree and Plant Protection
B. Section 02200 Earthwork — existing underground utilities
0111k
C. Section 02480 Landscape Repairs
ati D. Section 02500 Paving
Oft
103 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures":
1. Shop drawing indicating layout of temporary fencing, location and size of gates,
existing pavement and roads, access to fire hydrants and hose connections, and
elk
other site specific conditions. Prepare drawing after site observation and
amo. verification of existing conditions.
aft PART 2- PRODUCTS
ob. 2.01 TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCING
A. Unless otherwise indicated, type of temporary chain link fencing shall be Contractor's
4116 option. Following types are acceptable:
1. New materials or previously used salvaged chain link fencing in good condition.
2. Posts: Galvanized steel pipe of diameter to provide rigidity. Post shall be
suitable for setting in concrete footings, driving into ground, anchoring with
base plates, or inserting in precast concrete blocks.
3. Fabric: Woven galvanized steel wire mesh. Provide in continuous lengths to be
11111
wire tied to fence posts or prefabricated into modular pipe-framed fence
im4 panels.
goo 4. Height 6'
B. Gates: Provide personnel and vehicle gates of the quantity and size indicated on the
411 Drawings or required for functional access to site.
ok, 1. Fabricate of same material as used for fencing.
2. Vehicle gates:
a. Minimum width: 20 feet to allow access for emergency vehicles.
b. Capable of manual operation by one person.
C. Signage: Signs posted on the fence will say "Construction Area — Keep Out" or
ook.
similar language will be posted at 40 intervals around the perimeter of the site.
dik 2.02 PLASTIC MESH FENCING
A. Where indicated on Drawings or as required to provide visual warning and control,
provide plastic mesh fencing supported by steel posts driven into ground or set in
precast concrete blocks.
B. Height: 36 inches minimum.
410*
C. Color: Safety orange.
4.■
01561-1
4111,
41111,
Al
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
D. Piers, pilings and posts: Use posts to hold retaining walls upright, and construct
walks, porches and buildings on piers where possible to protect root systems. Care
must be taken to minimize root compaction between piers.
E. Dumping and disposal of waste (paint, oil, fuel, etc.) is prohibited around all trees Aft
and shrubs. All construction debris is to be removed from the site and disposed of
properly. No debris is to be buried on site.
F. Run -off from building materials, building cleaning, vehicle cleaning, (including "~`
washing of concrete trucks), sand blasting, petroleum products, lime, mortar, lead,
calcium chloride, etc., are to be eliminated in areas of tree and shrub root systems. .�.
G. No herbicides (soil sterilants, etc.) are to be used on the campus without authorization
by the Director of the Botanic Garden.
1.09 INSPECTIONS
A. Trees and shrubs to remain, protected areas, and future planting areas are to be
inspected weekly by the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her representative. The
Contractor is responsible for immediate correction or any deficiencies and
responsible for all associated costs.
Ask
1.10 PENALTIES
A. The Contractor shall be held liable for all violations of the aforementioned ..e
specifications and standards and shall, when necessary, repair or replace, as
appropriate, all plants to be preserved and to correct all other deficiencies as
determined by the Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden.
oak
...
1.11 REFERENCES
A. Anon. 1986. Manual for Plant Appraisers. Council of Tree and Landscape "01011
Appraisers. Washington, DC.
B. Anon. 1992. Guide for Plant Appraisal. Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers.
Washington, DC.
C. Harris, Richard W. 1983. Arboriculture: Care of Trees, Shrubs, and Vines in the
Landscape. Prentice -Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
D. Pirone,P.P. 1988 Tree Maintenance. 6 ed. Oxford University Press, New York.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
\\ Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
\\ Not Used.
END OF SECTION- 01532
Aft
.wk
.
01532-5
Olit
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
aw specifications -see Harris, 1983) is reached, whichever is less. Tunneling should
continue under the central root system to reach the trench at the other side. Depth of
alk
the tunnel will vary but should be below the major zone of absorbing roots (to be
determined when digging the trench by hand).
D. Excavation should be filled immediately after installation of utility lines, leaving no
air pockets. Exposed roots should be covered and kept moist.
E. After serious root injury, the contractor shall be responsible for a watering schedule
determined in consultation with the Director of the Botanic Garden.
F. Where paving is to extend within the drip lines of high value trees to be preserved, or
the grade over the root systems is to be raised with non load - bearing soil, aeration
Alat systems must be installed following consultation with the Botanic Garden staff.
G. Lowering soil level and excavating for large buildings and basement: in areas where
trees are to be preserved and soil level is to be lowered, retaining wall approved by
aft the Director of the Botanic Garden, must be installed, rather than grading. Excavation
towards the tree must stop when 2" diameter roots are encountered. Walls are to be
no closer than halfway between the drip line and the trunk. Keep soil and roots moist
' and shade soil with mulch. Drainage along foundations should be provided to handle
40.4 — seepage. Prune and tie back branches to height requirements of construction
equipment and emergency vehicles prior to construction. All pruning to be performed
oft by an Arborist according to guidelines in Section 2.5.
_, H. If roots are to be cut for a project they should not be cut during bud break or leafing
out. If at all possible, roots should be cut in early spring or late summer.
I. New drainage patterns created by berms, banks, or grade changes must be approved
w by the Director of the Botanic Garden and the Foreman of Grounds.
J. Topsoil that is to be reinstalled shall be installed to a minimum depth of 6" for lawn
areas and 1'0" for all planting areas.
dik
1.08 SITE STORAGE, TRAFFIC FLOW, AND PARKING
A. Areas requiring authorization by the Director of the Botanic Garden include field
Ask office placement, construction parking, soil stockpiling (in consultation with
,w,, Foreman of Grounds), haul roads, material storage, chemical and fuel storage, and
concrete washout areas. No parking will be permitted on lawns or over tree roots
unless the areas have been specially prepared for parking. Fines for parking
violations are the responsibility of the Contractor and will not be passed on to the
moo College for payment or resolution.
B. In areas of engineered fills, minimum compaction is to be attained if fill is not to
!► support a structure. Storage yard and traffic areas for construction activity is to be
Aft well outside drip lines of trees. Protect soil surface from traffic compaction with 8"
layer of bark mulch or wood chips. In extremely sensitive areas use double,
411, overlapping, one -half inch plywood sheets with minimum 6" bark mulch or wood
w chip covering. Following construction, vertical mulch or radial trench compacted
areas. The Director of the Botanic Garden will define areas requiring mulches,
plywood, radial trenching and vertical mulching and all corrective measures shall be
done with Botanic Garden overseeing the operation. The Contractor will properly
prepare site as directed prior to staging of equipment or materials. The Contractor is
dew
responsible for all expenses associated with compacted soils resulting from
*ok construction operations.
4111k C. Future planting areas outside fence - protected areas that may be subject to
construction traffic, material storage and equipment parking, should be mulched to a
minimum depth of 6 ", with bark mulch or wood chips.
01532 -4
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
requirements. The Contractor shall meet with the Director of the Botanic Garden or ..,
his/her designate before commencing the work of pruning. .4
F. Remove dead branches of all trees to be barricaded within the Contract Limit Line,
and with the approval of the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate. Aft
Desirable branches, which may interfere with construction or be damaged during
construction must be properly tied out of the way where possible, rather than be
removed. Prune and tie back branches to height requirements of construction
equipment and emergency vehicles prior to construction. All pruning to be performed
by an Arborist according to guidelines in Section 2.5.
G. Any existing plant scheduled to be protected and preserved, that is injured or
destroyed shall be replanted at the Contractor" expense as detailed in Section 1.4. •*
Report all damage promptly to the Director of the Botanic Garden so an Arborist can —
treat the damaged plants quickly and appropriately.
1.06.1 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING SOIL
A. Prior to the start of general excavation, strip all topsoil, peat, and organic silt from
within areas to be occupied by structures, paving, and lawns, as well as other areas to .r.
be regraded in this contract, and stockpile. Do no stripping until final approval of 04,
work area limit lines detailed in Section 1.2 has been reconfirmed by the Project
Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate
B. All topsoil, peat and organic silt encountered during the stripping operations, •••
regardless of depth, shall be removed, and stockpiled at a site designated by the
Foreman of Grounds of the Physical Plant department. No topsoil is to be removed
from the campus without the approval of the Foreman of Grounds. Topsoil shall not _ Afik
be piled over root systems of existing trees and shrubs. Areas having greater depths
of topsoil, peat or organic silt than indicated on boring and test pit data sheets or
reasonably anticipated shall be stripped of all such material and fill shall be used to
bring such areas to the rough grade level. Sticks, stones, and roots over 2 inches in
any dimension shall be removed from topsoil before stockpiling. All other stripped
soil which can be classified as fill as defined herein shall be used or stockpiled for re-
use
in rough grading. The Foreman of Grounds shall define the storage area prior to
piling.
C. Piles of topsoil shall be located so that the material can be used readily for the finish
surface grading but not where root systems of trees and shrubs to be preserved can be ..O.
compacted by storage piles or equipment. Topsoil shall be protected and maintained .w.
during the construction period.
D. All unsuitable material as well as logs, stumps, roots, brush, and other refuse from
the clearing and grubbing operations shall be removed from the site and legally -
disposed of by the Contractor as soon as practical following the cutting, clearing, and
grubbing thereof.
1.06.2 GRADE CHANGES AND EXCAVATIONS
A. The Director of the Botanic Garden must approve the location of all excavations prior ..�
to installation.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate utility trench locations with installation contractors.
Consolidate utility trenches whenever possible. Excavate trenches by hand in areas
with roots larger than 1 ". Tunnel under plant roots larger than 2" diameter.
C. A trench can be mechanically dug toward a tree to its drip line or one -third of the ..
tree's height from the trunk, whichever is greater. The trench should be continued by
hand until significantly large roots (determined by Botanic Garden representative) are ...
encountered or a distance indicated by the chart specifications (Toronto
01532 -3
moo,
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4111k4
• Ili Appraisal" and "Manual for Plant Appraisers" (latest editions) as published by the
Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers.
E. Exercise extreme care during grubbing and stripping operations to prevent damage to
surface roots of trees to be preserved. Stripping of topsoil around trees to be saved
will be restricted to areas designated by the Director of the Botanic Garden. Woody
vegetation located near remaining trees is to be cut to ground level and left, or ground
below grade (not pulled out), in order to reduce root injury to remaining trees. When
lowering grade, scarifying and preparing sub grade for fills and structures within drip
lines of trees to be saved, use retaining walls with discontinuous footings to maintain
natural grade as far as possible. Excavate finish grade by hand and prune exposed
elk roots in accordance with Section 2.3 Soil beyond cut face can be removed by
equipment sitting outside the drip line of the tree.
F. Remove stumps and roots to a clear depth of not less than 1'0" below subgrade level
ow. except in areas where the Director of the Botanic Garden has called for woody
growth to be cut to ground level. At lawns only, depth shall be 6" below finish grade.
All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of
stumps or root shall be refilled with suitable material compacted to the density, grade,
and contour of the surrounding earth.
1.05 TREE / SHRUB PROTECTION
A. Plant materials selected to remain shall be protected by sturdy, temporary barriers
erected prior to any construction or excavation work on the site. These barricades
4.14
shall be maintained in good condition during the entire period of construction work
411110 on the site. Unless otherwise specifically approved by the Project Manager and the
Director of the Botanic Garden, a 6' high chain link fence shall be installed as a
tok
temporary barricade around plants designated to remain. Fencing shall be set at the
outer drip line for shrubs, unless otherwise authorized by the Director of the Botanic
41111 Garden, taking special care not to damage large roots. Adequate signs shall be posted
stating "Tree Protection Area" and "Do Not Enter" on the fences. All
dth barricades/fencing shall be removed when no longer needed as determined by the
ook Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden.
B. Trees to remain shall not be used for crane stays, guys, or other fastenings.
Vehicles shall not be parked within the areas inside the drip line of trees or where
damage may result to such trees. Do not stockpile fill, equipment, or building
supplies within the areas inside the drip line of trees or within 5' of shrubs.
41111k
C. Damage no plant by burning, by pumping of water, by cutting of live roots or
branches by operating internal combustion engines beneath branches, or by any other
means. If, in order to perform excavation work, it becomes necessary to cut roots of
plants to be saved, such roots must be neatly cut by Botanic Garden staff or by
professional Arborist who shall be notified in advance of the excavation.
D. The Contractor is responsible for all costs of establishing and carrying out a
maintenance program for plants to be saved throughout the time of construction. The
oft
program shall include regular feeding, watering, spraying, and cabling, and pruning
4111k of all dead or broken branches. Submit a schedule of the maintenance to the Project
Manager at the beginning of the job. Schedule and procedures must be approved by
the Director of the Botanic Garden before any work is done.
E. Pruning shall be done in a manner, which does not change the natural appearance of
auk the plant. Broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed with a clean cut.
Skilled professionals in accordance with specifications shall do all pruning and
dik standards set by the International Society of Arboriculture and the National Arborist
40. Association appropriate to the type of plant and to its special or individual
01532-2
dook.
4116,
aft
.led
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS �*
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 01532: TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION ..
AIR
Follow Standard "Tree and Shrub Preservation Specifications" for Smith College, as included in
its entirety below. Should the tree protection be considered too onerous, the contractor may
present their concerns to the College for review and a possible compromise solution. "`
4
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to protect existing
tree and plants from damage as a result of Contractor's operations.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ..
A. Section 02100: Site Preparation
B. Section 02200: Earthwork
1.03 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND REMOVAL —
C. All trees and shrubs, unless noted to remain, shall be cut and removed in their
entirety. All stumps, brush, vegetation, rubbish and other perishable or objectionable
matter shall be cleared from the site. No on -site burning will be permitted. This
debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor in an approved dumping site in
compliance with local codes and the Wetlands Protection Act.
D. Prior to starting site clearing operations or any other construction work, stake out all oh.
limits of cut and fill, and groups of trees and shrubs to be saved. Promptly upon
completion of layout work and before any clearing or other construction work is
begun on the site, the Contractor shall arrange a conference on the site with the
Project Manager and the Director of the Botanic Garden or his/her designate to ..k,
identify and mark trees and areas of trees and shrubs which are to remain. After the
conference, the Contractor shall erect sturdy, temporary fencing along the work area Ale
limits, separating it from protected areas. Minimum distances from protected trees ,,
shall be to the outer drip lines around each tree or group of trees and shrubs. Sensitive
species may require fencing at even greater distances from the main trunk. Do no
clearing without clear understanding of existing conditions to be preserved. oa.
E. Limits of clearing shall be those areas defined by the limits of cut and fill. Removal
of trees, shrubs, and herbaceous perennials outside those areas shall be done only as"
noted on the drawings and as approved by the Project Manager and the Director of 400.
the Botanic Garden.
F. Fell trees in such a way as to not injure trees to be saved. A representative of the
Botanic Garden shall designate trees that are to be carefully topped or pruned rather ..a
than felled. No trees shall be removed until authorized by the Botanic Garden
representative. Excavation or grading with the branch spread of trees to be saved
shall be performed only under the direction of the Project Manager, with the approval
of the Director of the Botanic Garden unless otherwise directed. Existing trees to be .,
saved, which have, in the opinion of the Project Manager and the Director of the
Botanic Garden, become damaged, shall be replaced with trees of similar size and
species. Replacement trees are to be tagged in the field or sales yard by the Director Alea
of the Botanic Garden or his/her representative. Plant specifications for all
replacement plantings will be provided by the Director of the Botanic Garden. All
expenses incurred shall be paid by the Contractor. If the tree or shrub cannot be .a
replaced because of size or peculiarity of species, the College shall be reimbursed in
accordance with the Tree Evaluation Formula as described in "Guide for Plant
oak
01532 -1 ..�
4010,
ow
„w Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1.17 PROGRESS CLEANING:
dik
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean
and orderly condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other
closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and
continue cleaning to eliminate dust.
D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site at reasonable intervals and
dispose off -site.
1.18 PROJECT SIGNS
mh
A. No project sign is allowed.
ak
1.19 FIELD OFFICE
A. Office: The
dok
- 1.20 REMOVAL OF UTILITES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Removal temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials,
406 prior to Substantial Completion inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation of use of temporary work.
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore
permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
alk PART 2 PRODUCTS
\\ Not Used.
Aix
PART 3 EXECUTION
\\ Not Used.
END OF SECTION -01500
m
411%
4w
dik
01500 -4
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS .,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
in height for all trades for their use during the construction of the building without
charge to the trades for such use. The Contractor shall also furnish, erect and
maintain all staging and scaffolding for his/her own use during the construction of the
building. Staging and scaffolding shall be of approved design, erected and removed
by experienced stage builders and shall have all accident prevention devices required
by State and Local Laws.
B. The General Contractor shall erect such staging and scaffolding in sufficient time and
in proper sequence and commence so as not to delay work. Subcontractors shall .�
schedule and commence their work so that building progress is not delayed of
obstructed once staging and scaffolding become available. 4.0k
C. Each subcontractor entering upon the work shall furnish, erect and maintain all
staging and scaffolding under 8 feet in height required for work under his/her
subcontract, and where so indicated all other staging and scaffolding required for
his/her work. On completion of his /her work, each subcontractor shall dismantle and
remove such staging and scaffolding. It is in his/her interest to erect and dismantle ,
staging and scaffolding in a timely fashion.
D. Due to the occupied nature of the site, it is in the best interest of the contractors to
erect and dismantle all staging and scaffolding in a timely manner, so as to avoid any ,.M,
possible unauthorized use of such equipment.
1.14 TEMPORARY CHUTES AND HOISTING FACILITIES Auk
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, and remove all temporary ramps,
Aft
stairs, ladders, and similar items as required for the use of all trades for the proper
execution of the Work. ,k
B. Permanent stairs shall be utilized, for which the contractor shall provide temporary
protective treads, risers, handrails, and shaft protection.
C. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, and remove covered chutes from
openings in the exterior walls of upper floors. Such shall be in convenient locations „„
and permit disposal of rubbish directly into truck or disposal units.
D. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide, operate, and remove
hoists, cranes, and other hoisting as required for the performance of the Work by all ,..
trades. All such hoisting service shall be without cost to the subcontractors.
Aft
1.15 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual
specification Sections.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity
in immediate work area to minimize damage. ,
C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of
openings.
D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or ,,,„
movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity
is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing ..
material manufacturer.
F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
1.16 SECURITY
A. Provide security to protect work and existing facility from unauthorized entry,
vandalism, or theft. See Section 02100 for fencing requirements. Aft '
B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. elow
01500 -3 ,,,k
IPA
ISA Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1.06 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations.
IRA B. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction, if returned to clean,
new condition at end.
011%, 1.07 TEMPORARY VENTILATION
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors or gasses.
B. Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with
do. temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations.
mph
1.08 TELEPHONE SERVICE
oak A. The Owner shall provide telephone service at the time of project mobilization, for use
by the Contractor's authorized agents, subcontractors and the Project Representative
1.09 WATER SERVICE
A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations
B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water.
mik
1.10 SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Existing facilities may be used during construction operations when operational, or
provide portable toilets, located with Owner approval. Maintain daily in clean and
41111k sanitary condition.
B. At end of construction, return facilities to same of better condition than originally
oh,
found.
0/04
1.11 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work areas from undisturbed
Ask areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into undisturbed areas, and to
prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.
B. Construction: faming and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints
aik
and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces.
1.12 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
, 01111A
A. Comply with applicable safety regulations, including ANSI Series A10, Safety
ofik Requirements for Construction and Demolition, and OSHA Part 1926, Construction
AIR Safety and Health Regulations. Provide barricades, fences, and other protection
measures as required.
-ook B. Provide barriers (with visual screening) to prevent unauthorized entry to construction
4,4 areas to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent
properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.
C. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life.
D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from
damage.
olk
E. Storage of flammable and/or hazardous materials shall not be allowed in existing or
INA new building.
1.13 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING
gik A. Except as otherwise indicated, the General Contractor shall furnish, erect and
411. maintain all their staging and scaffolding (exterior and interior) eight (8) feet or over
01500-2
..s
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS oft
Smith College, Northampton, MA
AIR
SECTION 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
PART 1 GENERAL
Aft
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Contractor's use of premises and conduct of Work. Aft
B. Electricity, lighting, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities
C. Temporary controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing.
D. Safety and protection. .f.
E. Construction facilities: progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary offices.
F. Staging and Scaffolding.
G. Security: Maintenance and connection to Owner's systems. Aft,
Ass
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01700 Contract Closeout: Final Cleaning oft
oft
1.03 CONSTRUCTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
Aft
A. Contractor may use power and water from existing building.
B. Dumpster location to be negotiated with Owner. Aft
C. Project sign: None allowed ,
D. Parking: There is limited, metered parking on Elm Street. Contractors may negotiate
limited on- campus parking adjacent to the building. Contractors shall NOT park in Alltk
side yards nor on unpaved areas within the drip line of existing trees as it will .ft
compact the soil and roots.
E. Provide snow fencing for protection of existing trees. oft
F. Behavioral standards: "Cat calls" and inappropriate language will not be tolerated on oft
the jobsite and by contractors passing through the campus. All contractors shall
inform subcontractors and laborers of this policy. Aft
oft
1.04 CONDUCT OF WORK oft
A. The contract site shall include the entire area bound by the "Contract Limit line" as
shown on the Drawings, as well as areas outside the "Contract Limit line" when ""
required to perform work under this contract. ,,.,,
B. Contractor shall take all steps necessary to protect the existing adjacent buildings and
site facilities. Damage to existing work caused by the Contractor's operations under oft
this Contract shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. oft
C. Any street, paving, curb and/or sidewalk damage as the result of work under this
Contract, whether within or outside this limits of the work, shall be repaired and/or "`
replaced with new matching construction by the Contractor at his/her expense and in .ft
a manner satisfactory to the authorities having jurisdiction. oft
D. Where existing curbs or walks are to remain, they shall be suitably protected in an
approved manner. "'
E. Provide continuous, lawful, safe, adequate and convenient access to buildings ,ft
bordering the Contract site. Do not store materials or debris so as to block access to
ft
or cause hazard to persons requiring access to above mentioned buildings. '
oft
1.05 ELECTRICTY
oft
A. Owner to provide use of permanent electricity. Power consumption shall not disrupt
Owner's need for continuous service. AO
B. Owner shall pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy.
C. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and
distribution boxes as needed. ""
01500 -1 _
Oft
Oft
pos Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and
tests required for Contractor's use.
E. Retesting required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall be
performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect/Engineer.
Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection or
testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
\\ Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
\\ Not Used.
ilk
END OF SECTION -01400
41114
Orit
mss.
ewr
Alk
Allok
01400 -2
411111
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Mak
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 01400: Quality Control
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ,.
A. Quality assurance and control of installation. **
B. References.
Alek
C. Field samples.
D. Inspection and testing laboratory services '"""
..,
1.02. RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 Submittals
B. Section 01600 Material and Equipment w „
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site
conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. ,..
B. Storage of Materials: store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, covered as needed.
C. Comply fully with manufacturer's instructions, including each step in sequence. ,,,_
D. Should manufacture's instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from Architect / Engineers before proceeding.
E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibrations, physical distortion or disfigurement.
1.04 REFERENCES:
A. Conform to reference standards indicated in Contract Documents.
B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request "'"®
clarification from Architect / Engineer before proceeding.
C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from
the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference ''"R
document.
1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for ..R
review.
B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
AIR
1.06 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES ..k
A. Designer will appoint, employ, and be compensated for the services of an
independent firm to perform inspection and testing.
B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in ,,,
individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer, in `"`
duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or 08b.
non - compliance with Contract Documents.
D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix,
equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. ...
1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time „.#
for operations requiring services.
..a
01400 -1
Oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
all
share of overhead and profit. This schedule, including breakdown and values,
requires the approval of the Designer and shall be used only as a basis for the
Contractor's request for payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
\ Not Used.
0104 PART 3 EXECUTION
\\ Not Used.
d END OF SECTION -01300
Olk
4101
Oft
Ink
4111
Offis
dili
01300 -3
Aft
Akt
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ...
Smith College, Northampton, MA
E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate
stages, and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early
and late finish, float dates, and duration.
F. Indicate estimated percentages of completion of each item of Work at each "W.
submission.
G. Indicate submittal dates, required for shop drawings, product date, samples, and
product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner. A*,
ara
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus three copies which
will be retained by Architect/Engineer and Owner, for a minimum of four (4)
reproductions.
Allbk
B. After review and acceptance, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures
above. .e.
1.07 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus three (3) copies '"°`
which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer and Owner. _
B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this
Project. ,.*
C. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide
copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 — Contract Closeout.
1.08 SAMPLES: aft
A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product,
with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for
interfacing work. ,.
B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors,
textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer's selection.
C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information. ,
D. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of
which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer.
E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual ..
specification Sections. ,..
F. Submit product and color samples as required.
1.09 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION: do.
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, adjusting, and finishing, in "` '
quantities specified for Product Data. .*
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents.
1.010 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Prior to the first request for payment, the General Contractor shall submit to the
Designer, a Schedule of Values of the various portions of the work in sufficient detail
to reflect various major components of each trade and specification section, including ..
quantities when requested, aggregation the total contract sum, and divided so as to
facilitate payments for work under each Section in accordance with the contract.
B. The schedule shall be prepared on AIA Form G703, and it shall include data to
substantiate its accuracy. Each item in the Schedule of Values shall include its proper
01300 -2 ,,
Oft
Oh Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 01300: Submittals
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittal procedures
B. Construction progress schedules
C. Proposed Products list
D. Shop Drawings
E. Product Data
or F. Samples
G. Manufacturer's instructions
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 Quality Control\
B. Section 01600 Material and Equipment
irk C. Section 01700 Contract Closeout
1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Provide minimum of four (4) copies. In addition, provide electronic submittal in
PDF format emailed to the Architect.
B. Apply contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying review and verification that
products required, field dimensions, etc. are in accordance with the requirements of
ow the Work and Contract Documents.
C. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project. Coordinate the submission of related
items.
D. Identify variations from Contract Documents.
E. Revise and resubmit submittals as required.
F. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to
promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.
+�n G. Work that requires submittals shall not commence unless submittals with the
architect's stamp and initials or signature indicate review and approval.
1.04 GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Contract Documents.
B. The General Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions is not relieved by
the Designer's review and approval of submittals.
or C. Notify the Designer in writing at time of submission, or deviations in submittals from
requirements of Contract Documents or previous submissions.
ro► D. Work that requires submittals shall not commence unless submittals with the
Designer's stamp and initials or signature indicate review and approval.
E. After Designer's review and approval, distribute copies.
1.05 CONSTURCTION PROGESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within date established in Notice to
Proceed for Architect/Engineer review.
or B. Revise and resubmit as required.
C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes
since previous version.
API* D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of Work or
operation, identifying first work day or each week.
o, 01300 -1
des
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS ,..,
Smith College, Northampton, MA
10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. ,...
11. Other business relating to Work.
1.07 PRE - INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a pre - installation
conference at work site prior to commencing work of the Section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific
Section. 4
C. Arrange meeting date with Architect; notify parties involved.
D. Review conditions of installation , preparation and installation procedures, and ""ak
coordination with related work. .•
PART 2 PRODUCTS
\\ Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
\\ Not Used. "
END OF SECTION -01200
Aft
Aft
Oft
w
01200 -3 ,�
Alp
oh
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
oft
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1.04 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing
oft recognized engineering survey practices
O
1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. After the award of the Contract, but prior to the start of the work, the General
■► Contractor and all major sub - contractors shall attend a pre - construction conference
with representatives of Owner and design team. The Conference will serve to
acquaint the participants with the general plan of contract administration and
requirements under which the construction operation is to proceed, and will inform
the Contractor, in detail, of the obligations imposed on him and his subcontractors.
The date, time and place of the conference will be furnished to the Contractor by the
Owner.
B. Agenda to include:
1. Execution of Owner - Contractor Agreement
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certifications
sok 3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of List of Subcontractors, schedule of values, and progress schedule
otok
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Architect.
Ok 6. Procedure and lines of communication for: field decisions, submittals,
substitutions, applications of payment, proposal requests, change orders and
Ok
contractor closeout.
'' 7. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.
__ 8. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.
9. Security and housekeeping procedures.
10. Schedules.
11. Procedures for testing.
12. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
13. Requirements for start -up of equipment.
14. Inspection and acceptance of equipment
110k 15. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction
period.
1.06 PROGRESS MEETINGS:
A. Schedule meetings throughout progress of Work, typically at weekly intervals.
B. Architect to arrange meetings, prepare agenda preside at meetings, record and
,w distribute minutes.
C. Attendance required: job superintendent, major subcontractors, Project Manager,
Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for particular meeting. Coordinate with
Structure Engineer for field visit prior to commencement of structural repairs. MEP
Engineer shall be in attendance at most meetings.
dok
D. Typical agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review or Work Progress
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.
a 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Maintenance of progress schedule.
7. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
8. Coordination of projected progress.
9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
01200 -2
olito
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Aft
Smith College, Northampton, MA
AI Ilk
SECTION 01200: Meetings and Coordination
Oft
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 010.
A. Coordination
B. Field engineering
C. Alteration project procedures
D. Preconstruction conference
E. Progress Meetings
F. Pre - installation conferences.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ..
A. Section 01045 Cutting and Patching
B. Section 01400 Quality Control
C. Section 01700 Contract Closeout ..N
1.03 COORDINATION
A. GC shall coordinate scheduling, submittals and Work of the various Sections of the
Specification to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of ,Am
interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items
installed later. """
B. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible
with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent
responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work that .P&
are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts,
and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building.
Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for .�
maintenance, and for repairs.
D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring
within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish
elements. Aim
E. Coordinate completion and cleanup of Work of separate sections in preparation for
Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owners occupancy. ,..
F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of ,.
defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize
disruption of Owner's activities.
01200 -1
lk
Oft
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.
B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for
substitution under provisions of Section 01600.
II Ilk
elk PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
mok
A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to
lk damage or movement during cutting and patching.
B. After uncovering existing Work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work.
00.
C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
4101..
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide
sok devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
ok B. Provide protection from elements for areas that may be exposed by uncovering work.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
oft A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete Work
B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work.
04.
C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work.
D. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
E. Provide openings in the Work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.
3.04 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide
appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing
B. Whether or not called for specifically on drawings, patch, touch-up, and clean all
gook existing walls, ceilings, and floors, scheduled to remain, which are damaged by
demolition, cutting, or removal of existing construction such as door and window
units, and masonry, or which are damaged during installation of new material.
dok C. Repair and replace existing sidewalks, curing, etc. damaged by construction using
ft
matching materials. Saw-cut edge of existing pavement in a straight line, at a 45-
O
degre angle to vertical, so that all existing loose or cracked areas of pavement are
removed. Provide a smooth transition between new and old pavement.
41114, D. Dimensions shown at exiting construction represent best information available to
Architects at time of design. Take field dimensions before factory-fabrication that is
required to tie closely into existing construction.
E. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through
surfaces
40111.
F. At penetrations of fire-rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction,
dik completely seal voids with fire resistant materials to full thickness of the penetrated
element.
Oft
G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to
nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
dok
END OF SECTION-01045
411%
Apik,
atok 01045-2
Ai*
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS .01,.
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 01045: Cutting and patching '111r.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 COORDINATION
A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Sections 01010 Summary of Work ..e
B. Section 01300: Submittals ,�►
C. Section 01600: Materials and Equipment ,rw
D. Individual Product Specification Sections
1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section
2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those
Sections.
3. Limitations on cutting structural members
E. Note especially requirements for Mechanical trades
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written requests in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: ..k
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project
2. Integrity of weather - exposed or moisture - resistant element
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements —
5. Work of Owner or separate contractor
B. Include in request:
1. Identification of Project. ..�
2. Location and description of affected work.
3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. '
4. Description of proposed work, and Products to be used. ..�
5. Alternatives to cutting and patching.
6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor.
7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. ,.w
8. Date and time work will be executed. —
Aft
AIM
ASR
01045 -1 �.
w
sok
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY:
Pok A. The Owner will occupy the adjacent buildings and require access in and around the
Dewey House.
B. Cooperate with the Owner to ensure safe use of the Campus walkways by all users.
ook Comply with safety regulations in effect, including O.S.H.A. current standards, and
other applicable Federal, State or local regulations governing work place health and
safety. Precautions shall include temporary barriers, safety fences, and other
necessary temporary construction to maintain a safe, functional environment.
C. Schedule the work to minimize disruption of Campus circulation.
1.05 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Refer to ACT report, June 2011 for more information.
A. Asbestos — basement:
1. Cellar window glazing
e lk 2. 9 x 9 floor tile and Mastic (typing room area)
B. Asbestos — first floor:
1. Entry hall sidelight glazing
2. Hall and closet: linoleum
3. Main Hall bathroom: linoleum
C. Asbestos — second floor:
1. Kitchenette: linoleum and sink undercoating
oak D. Asbestos — third floor:
aw 1. Door window glazing
2. Bathroom linoleum
oh. E. Lead -based paint — any materials listed as containing lead in the above referenced
report, shall be tested prior to disposal to determine if they require standard or
hazardous waste disposal. Carpenters shall follow OSHA practices when working
with lead materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
\\ Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
\\ Not Used.
dok
END OF SECTION -01010
dook
Alb
API
01010 -2
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS Al*
Smith College, Northampton, MA
."R
Division 1: General Requirements
SECTION 01010: Summary of Work Ara
giwp
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. The project title is "Renovations to the Dewey House ". .�
B. The Scope of Work included in the Contract shall be as shown on the Contract 00,
Documents prepared by Kraus -Fitch Architects, including the work listed in these
specifications, any addendum, and the following drawings. "`
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the full scope of work through
site observation and assessment. The Contractor is expected to visit the building and
observe existing conditions. ...
1.02 NARRATIVE SUMMARY
A. Exterior Improvements: New roofing and copper flashings, new windows, siding,
and misc. repairs (columns and railings). Replace west - facing dormers with single
shed dormer. Re -point exposed brick foundation and cap and re -point chimneys.
AIR
Wash, scrape and paint full exterior including: clapboards (limited areas of existing
to remain), trim, cornices, soffits, doors, window casings, etc.
B. Thermal envelope Improvements:
1. Walls: removal of clapboards, drill & fill with pour in place foam insulation
and/or spray foam (depending on wall section).
2. Ceilings/Roofs: spray foam (type dependent on ceiling assembly).
3. Basement: spray foam at brick.
4. Floor areas as indicated on drawings (limited).
C. Access Improvements: New addition for lift servicing first and second floors i*►
(includes recessed slab on grade, foundation walls, framing, insulation, and finishes),
D. Structural Repairs including but not limited to truss reinforcement and new posts
from trusses to new footings.
E. Interior Improvements: New 2 -hour room in basement for electrical, first floor
modifications at lift lobbies, remodel 2nd floor bathrooms, office, and kitchenette,
misc. new enclosures for HVAC work (drywall surrounds and misc. patching) new AN"
and replacement doors, new hardware, new finishes and signage. ,.
F. Mechanical Renovations: New mechanical, piping and electrical systems are to be
cut into existing walls. Vertical runs may be concealed within new chases. Some Aft.
corridor work can be concealed in ACT drop ceilings. Modify existing dry pipe �►
sprinkler system. Replace brass water piping with new copper. Revamp existing
copper to serve the new bathroom configuration(s). Replace sanitary piping
throughout (retain only section in good condition). Upgrade water service entrance
piping, meter, PRV station and replace related brass piping. New heating and
ventilating systems throughout.
1.03 TIME _
A. Substantially Complete must be reached by start up of Fall Term — August 17, 2012.
B. No extra payments will be made to the General Contractor of Subcontractors for
overtime of extra expenses incurred to meet the stated completion deadline. .."
C. Contract shall identify, under the requirements of Section 3.1 of the General
Conditions of the Contract, critical deliveries of materials. Should outside forces
beyond his/her control, delay such deliveries, then allowances will be made by the
Owner. Atof
01010 -1 Alek
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
You may substitute a higher amount of general liability coverage in lieu of a follow form
umbrella, as long as the sum meets or exceeds the amount of general liability coverage as
requested. You must indicate on your certificate the full amount of insurance carried, even if it is
less than the amount requested.
PLEASE NOTE: The following wording must appear on every insurance certificate submitted:
011 The Trustees of Smith College and any present or former trustee, director, officer, administer
employee, student, volunteer worker or Agent, is added as an additional insured to the General
Liability, Auto, Employers, Liability and Excess Policies, as their interests may appear. This
insurance shall not terminate without at least twenty- (20) day's prior written notice to the
college.
ft
Please add the college to all applicable policies as additional insured and instruct your insurance
ssk agent(s) to forward original insurance certificates directly to:
okk Smith College
Purchasing Department
126 West Street
osh Northampton, MA 01063
Aim
And a Copy To:
alb
Lynn Pelland Smith College
oft 126 West Street
Northampton, MA 01063
oink
Fax: (413)585 -2398.
You will be required to maintain adequate insurance coverage throughout the entire period of
your contract or supplier relationship with the college. The insurance agent must provide new
original certificates directly to the college whenever new policies are issued or policies are
changed or updated. Failure to have or maintain coverage or to provide original certificates may
be cause for cancellation or non - renewal or your contract.
oak
*f► NOTICE TO VENDOR/SUPPLIER: You may substitute a higher amount of general liability
coverage in lieu of a follow form umbrella, as long as the sum meets or exceeds the amount of
oft
general liability coverage requested. You must indicate on your certificate the full amount of
'®"'' insurance carried, even if it is less than the amount requested. You must check one of the
following regarding your required certificates of insurance.
"ALL RISK" BUILDER'S RISK PROPERTY INSURANCE: Smith College carries an "All
Risk" Builder's Risk Property Insurance policy with a $10,000 deductible. The Contractor is
responsible for any deductible amount applicable to claims resulting from the Contractor's acts or
smi
omissions.
Supplementary Conditions
okh
Schedule A- Insurance Requirements -2
talk
Alrab
wow
Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SCHEDULE A Ikk
SMITH COLLEGE LIABILITY INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
All contractors who routinely transact business on the Smith College Campus must meet
the following insurance requirements:
General Liability:
2,000,000 General Aggregate
1,000,000 Product/Completed Operations
1,000,000 Personal & Advertising Injury ANA
50,000 Fire Damage Legal Liability
5,000 Medical Expense
Coverage is to include Broad Form Property Damage, XCU hazard (if appropriate), Contractual ..A
Liability and be Occurrence Form unless otherwise agreed.
..a
Auto Liability f.
1,000,000 Combined Single Limit
Coverage is to include All Owned Autos or Scheduled Autos and Hired Autos and Non -Owned
Ask
Autos.
Worker's Compensation ..,
Statutory Worker's Compensation
Worker's Liability
ANA
1,000,000 Disease — Policy Limit
500,000 Disease — Each Employee
500,000 Each Accident
(Not required of proprietorships and partnerships, which have no employees, if any employees .b
are subcontracted, coverage will be required, even if the employees are considered "independent , , P "
contractors ". A statement via letter must be provided with the certificates or policy copies stating
that the firm has no employees other than the proprietor or partners. A certificate showing
coverage of Health Insurance is required of all -sole proprietor or partners. A certificate showing AA
coverage of health insurance is required of all -sole proprietors and partners.)
,.w
Excess Liability ••�
1,000,000 Each Occurrence
1,000,000 Aggregate Afft
Oft
Umbrella Form required unless otherwise agreed.
Supplementary Conditions
Schedule A- Insurance Requirements -1
A
O, Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. DEWEY HOUSE RENOVATIONS
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SUPPLMENTARY CONDITIONS
SMITH COLLEGE
Construction Permit Checklist
No work will be permitted to commence until the contractor has acquired all the appropriate permits and
notifications:
Project Name: Location:
016+ College Project Manager: Phone:
auk
Permits, Policies and Procedures Required
ook
oak
Building Code (780 CMR)
Application for: Fire Prevention Regulations (5 2 7 C M R )
_ Alteration Construction LP Gas Permit for Storage of LP Gas
_ Demolition Oil Burning Equipment
oft of of Use/ Occupancy Installation/Replacement Rubbish / Waste
a► _ Fire Detection/Protection Plans Container Placement ( >6 cu. Yards)
submitted to the Northampton Fire _ Salamander Use
Department Tank(s)/ Container(s) for Storage of
_ Designers Affidavit > 35,000 cu ft. Flammable Liquids, Fuel, Oil etc
Contact Northampton Building Inspector at 587 -1240 Contact Northampton Fire Department at 587 -1032
Aft
Department of Environmental Protection Hot Works Permits
_ Air Quality Permit for Construction or Demolition _ Brazing, Cutting, Heating, Paint Removal,
(AQ -06 - 10 working day notification) Soldering and Welding
Asbestos Removal /Containment Notification Contact Smith College Physical Plant Small
oft
projects Northampton Fire Department for
Department of Labor & Workplace Development large projects
_ Lead Paint Notification (If going for Letter of
compliance) P ) Gas and Plumbing Codes (2 4 8
folk CMR) _ LP Gas Permit for
Department of Public Works the use of Gas Contact
- _ BackFlow Prevention Devices
Plumbing Shop ext.. 2409
__ Contact City of Northampton Department of Public Works
at 587 -1240 Policies & Procedures (29 CFR 1910 and 29 FR
1926) All appropriate contractor's written
_ Dig Safe company policy /plan must be available to Smith
Contact 1 -888 Dig -Safe College personnel upon request.
Electrical Code (NEC /NIPA 7 0) Is a Electrical
' ' Permit needed
40 ' Contact Northampton Electrical Department oft 587 -1240
ate► Inspections (Prior to starting
work) Asbestos
Lead
aft
oft
Supplementary Conditions
oto Construction Permit Checklist
•
Aft
ANN
AAk
AM
SECTION 08200 Interior Doors ...
SECTION 08600 Windows
ASR
SECTION 08700 Door
Division 9 — Finishes As .
SECTION 09250 Gypsum Board, Veneer Plaster, and Ext'g Plaster Patching
SECTION 09500 Acoustical Ceilings
SECTION 09550 Existing Wood Flooring - Field Finish Ala
SECTION 09650 Resilient Vinyl Sheet Flooring
SECTION 09680 Carpet
SECTION 09900 Painting
SECTION 09950 Vinyl Wall covering Ate.
Division 10 — Specialties
SECTION 10160 Plastic Toilet Partitions Arnr
SECTION 10400 Identifying Devices
SECTION 10520 Fire Extinguishers & Cabinets "�"
SECTION 10800 Toilet Accessories: Aw.
Aft
Division 12 - Furnishings:
SECTION 12200 Misc. Furnishings: A.►
A!a
Division 14 - Conveying systems
SECTION 14420: Wheelchair Lift ''"°
lk
Division 15 - Mechanical
SECTION 15300- Fire protection —
SECTION 15400- Plumbing A!
SECTION 15600 -HVAC
Division 16 — Electrical .►
SECTION 16100- Electrical
Am
Ales
alk
.w
A
Aft
Aw
AR .
AA4
■10P
Alk
Aw,
m TABLE OF CONTENTS
Supplementary Condtions
Schedule A: Insurance Requirements
Division 1: General Requirements
SECTION 01010: Summary of Work
SECTION 01045: Cutting and Patching
SECTION 01200: Meetings and Coordination
's" SECTION 01300: Submittals
SECTION 01400: Quality Control
SECTION 01500: Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
o f t SECTION 01532: Tree and Plant Protection
oft SECTION 01561: TemporarySecurity Fencing
SECTION 01600: Material and Equipment
' SECTION 01700: Contract Closeout
Division 2: Site Work
oft
SECTION 02050 Demolition:
SECTION 02200 Earthwork, Site Prep and Finish Grade
SECTION 02480 Landscape Repairs
SECTION 02500 Paving
, Division 3: Concrete
SECTION 03300 Cast -in -place Concrete
aft
aft Division 4 — Masonry
SECTION 04500 Masonry New and Restoration:
galk
Division 5 — Metals
„sta SECTION 05100 — Structural Steel
SECTION 05700 — Miscellaneous + Ornamental Iron
_w Division 6 — Wood and Plastics
SECTION 06100 Rough carpentry
SECTION 06200: Finish Carpentry
SECTION 06400 Architectural Woodwork
Division 7 — Thermal and Moisture Protection
SECTION 07100 Dampproofing
SECTION 07180 Vapor + Air Barriers
oft
SECTION 07200 Building Insulation
auk SECTION 07300 Slate Roofing
oft SECTION 07500 EDPM Fully Adhered Roofing
SECTION 07600 Metal Roofing, Eave Strip + Crickets
SECTION 07620 Flashings and Gutters
ow. SECTION 07900 Sealants:
Division 8 — Doors and Windows
Ask
oak
Renovations to Dewey House
Smit , Colegg ""'
No ampton, MA 4
Awarding Authority:
Trustees of Smith College
Project Manager / Owner's Representative:
Charlie Conant, project manager
Capital Projects, Smith College
126 West Street
Northampton, MA 01063 '"°
413 - 585 - 2429 ..
cconant @smith.edu
Amw
Architect 4"
Laura Fitch, AIA, LEED BD -C ,,,,,
Kraus -Fitch Architects, Inc.
110 Pulpit Hill Rd. Amherst, MA 01002 ""
413 - 549 -5799 .
lfitch @krausfitch.com
Structural Engineer **►
Ryan Hellwig
23 Aldrich St.
Northampton, MA 01060
413 -584 -4594
rshpe @crocker.com
Mechanical Engineer .•
Dino D'Angelo, PE
Lindgren & Sharples, P.C.
435 Cottage Street 4 °
Springfield, MA 01104-4005
,
(413) 732 - 4336 x 19
ddangelo @lindgrensharples.com .4"
Interior Design
oik
Lorin Starr
Lorin Starr Interiors
34 Main Street #7
Amherst MA 01002
(413) 253 -9744 ""
lstarr @lorinstarr.com ,,,,,
AIRk
AMA
ft B -.. 0.... 5 g.....
w
Mk
3 4
Specifications
104 REC"
Illk "' �' � 2012
I L for: No ew«, ,NS
ph, Renovations to Dewey House _ u,PToN �o NS
0. Smith College
li. Northampton, MA
o
O
OR
O.
e lk
O R
OR
OR �� N OF MgS S9��
MR q RYAN S. vI
HELLWIG
oft V STRUCTURAL t "'„
No. 37300
#A A , s y.
) . jedi
4104 44421ZIPA)
Oh
4
Cti p ,
Prepared by: °"
Mk Kraus Fitch Architects, Inc. x ' p.
AIR 110 Pulpit Hill Road e a 3,,
Amherst, MA 01002 & 40 A .
441k ;fitch ,krausfitch. �� °., t o ,
413 -549 -5799 M rs+ ` 1 4 v4 ",
0 4 ' 111 °F 4461
MARK W.
aft FELGATL rri
ELECTMCAL w
No. 47531
" • •' Q ISTa 4 F- 4i' A
•�.,3\SI�NAL E� � ,---,0.ARc,,,,
Aiii AIR April 18, 2012 / / c s J �� 0 ll
..).
No.8835 ,'
Allik
(, . pAAHERS � �� 1
,
4
A